UA5000 Configuration Guide-PVM CLI(V100R017_08)

UA5000 Universal Access UnitV100R017

Configuration Guide-PVM CLI

Issue 08

Date 2011-11-15

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2011. All rights reserved.No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior writtenconsent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders. NoticeThe purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and thecustomer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within thepurchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representationsof any kind, either express or implied.

The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in thepreparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, andrecommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.Address: Huawei Industrial Base

Bantian, LonggangShenzhen 518129People's Republic of China

Website: http://www.huawei.com

Email: [email protected]

Issue 08 (2011-11-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

i

http://www.huawei.com

mailto:[email protected]

About This Document

PurposeThis document describes how to execute commands to configure the services supported bytheUA5000: VoIP service, ISDN service, FoIP service, and MoIP service. It provides thenetworking, service configuration flow, service application example, and related operations ofthe services supported by UA5000.

This document is intended for service configuration. It can also be used as a reference by systemmaintenance engineers to learn and improve technical knowledge.

Related VersionsThe following table lists the product versions related to this document.

Product Name Version

UA5000 V100R017

N2000 BMS V200R011

Intended AudienceThe intended audience of this document are:

l Installation and commissioning engineerl System maintenance engineerl Data configuration engineer

OrganizationThis document describes the configuration of the UA5000. Each chapter provides an overviewof the configuration first, and then describes the configuration flow and provides configurationexamples (only some chapters provide configuration examples), and then describes the basicoperations in detail.

UA5000 Universal Access UnitConfiguration Guide-PVM CLI About This Document


ii

For the readers who are familiar with the product, it is recommended that you read theconfiguration example directly. For the readers who are not familiar with the product, it isrecommended that you read the basic operations first.

The following table describes the contents of this document.

Chapter… Describes…

1 Managing the License The license feature and the procedure for configuring thelicense.

2 Configuring theMaintenance Terminal

The mode and procedure for configuring the maintenanceterminal.

3 CLI Operation Basics The CLI operation features of the UA5000 and the basicoperation that can be performed on theUA5000 through theCLI.

4 Configuring the NMS The mode for connecting the UA5000 to the networkmanagement workstation and the procedure for theconfiguration on the UA5000 side.

5 User Management The classification of users and how to add, modify, delete, ordisconnect a user.

6 Device Management How to manage the shelf and the board of the UA5000.

7 Configuring the SystemDSP Channels

The functions of the DSP channel and the method formaintaining the system DSP resources.

8 Configuring the Clock The method for realizing the clock synchronization and theoperation for configuring the clock of the UA5000.

9 Configuring the MGInterface

How to configure an MG interface.

10 Configuring the VoIPService

How to configure the VoIP service through the PVMB controlboard and the A32 service board.

11 Configuring the VAGService

The example for configuring the VAG service oftheUA5000.

12 Configuring the ISDNService

How to configure the ISDN service through the PVMBcontrol board, DSLD service board, and EDTB interfaceboard.

13 Configuring the FoIPService

How to realize the FoIP function through the fax service.

14 Configuring the MoIPService

How to realize the MoIP function through the modem service.

15 Configuring the R2Access Service

How to configure the R2 access.

16 Configuring the V5Voice Service

How to configure the V5 voice service.



iii

Chapter… Describes…

17 Configuring the SPC How to configure the SPC.

18 Configuring the DDIService

How to configure the DDI service.

19 Configuring the SDLService

How to configure the SDL service.

20 Configuring the MTAService

How to configure the MTA service.

21 Configuring the VFBService

How to configure the VFB service.

22 Configuring the ATIService

How to configure the ATI service.

23 Configuring the CDIService

How to configure the CDI service.

24 Configuring the EPONUpstream Transmission

This topic describes the Ethernet passive optical network(EPON) technology and how to configure the EPONupstream transmission on the UA5000 MiniMSAN.

25 Configuring the GPONUpstream Transmission

This topic describes the gigabit-capable passive opticalnetwork (GPON) technology and describes how to configurethe GPON upstream transmission on the UA5000MiniMSAN.

26 Configuring the RemoteSubtending

How to configure the remote subtending.

27 Configuring the QoS ofthe Voice Service

How to configure the QoS of the voice service.

28 Configuring the Securityof the Voice Service

How to configure the security of the voice service.

29 Configuring theReliability of the VoiceService

Configuring the Reliability of the Voice Service.

30 Configuring the LinkDetection

How to configure the link detection on the UA5000 to ensurethe quick detection and the quick switch of the link.

31 Configuring theEnvironment Monitoring

This topic provides an overview of the environmentmonitoring and describes how to configure the environmentmonitoring on the UA5000.

32 Configuring theIntegrated Data and VoiceNetworking

The related operation for configuring the integrated data andvoice networking of the UA5000.

Acronym and Abbreviation Acronyms and abbreviations used in the document.



iv

Conventions

Symbol Conventions

The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Symbol Description

DANGERIndicates a hazard with a high level of risk, which if notavoided, could result in death or serious injury.

WARNINGIndicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk, whichif not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.

CAUTIONIndicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if notavoided, could cause equipment damage, data loss,performance degradation, or unexpected results.

TIP Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save time.

NOTE Provides additional information to emphasize or supplementimportant points of the main text.

General Conventions

Convention Description

Times New Roman Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman.

Boldface Names of files, directories, folders, and users are in boldface.For example, log in as user root.

Italic Book titles are in italics.

Courier New Terminal display is in Courier New.

Command Conventions


Boldface The keywords of a command line are in boldface.

Italic Command arguments are in italic.

[ ] Items (keywords or arguments) in square brackets [ ] areoptional.

{ x | y | ... } Alternative items are grouped in braces and separated byvertical bars. One item can be selected.



v


[ x | y | ... ] Optional alternative items are grouped in square brackets andseparated by vertical bars. One item or none item can beselected.

{ x | y | ... } * Alternative items are grouped in braces and separated byvertical bars. A minimum of one or a maximum of all items canbe selected.

GUI ConventionsConvention Description

Boldface Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles arein Boldface. For example, click OK.

> Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.

Keyboard OperationFormat Description

Key Press the key. For example, press Enter and press Tab.

Key 1+Key 2 Press the keys concurrently. For example, pressing Ctrl+Alt+A means the three keys should be pressed concurrently.

Key 1, Key 2 Press the keys in turn. For example, pressing Alt, A means thetwo keys should be pressed in turn.

Mouse OperationAction Description

Click Select and release the primary mouse button without movingthe pointer.

Double-click Press the primary mouse button twice continuously and quicklywithout moving the pointer.

Drag Press and hold the primary mouse button and move the pointerto a certain position.



vi

Update HistoryUpdates between document versions are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document versioncontains all updates made to previous versions.

Updates in Issue 08 (2011-11-15)Based on issue 07 (2010-10-30), the document is updated as follows:

The following information is modified:

l 9.1 Introduction to the MG Interfacel 9.3 Configuration Example of the MG Interface (the MGCP Protocol)l 9.4 Adding an MG Interfacel 10.2 Configuration Example of the VoIP Servicel 10.3 Configuration Example of the VoIP Service (in Integrated Upstream Mode)



l 32 Configuring the Integrated Data and Voice Networking


The structure and content of the document are optimized comprehensively so that the documentcan better cater to user preferences and guide users.



l 9 Configuring the MG Interfacel 10 Configuring the VoIP Servicel 11 Configuring the VAG Servicel 12 Configuring the ISDN Servicel 13 Configuring the FoIP Servicel 14 Configuring the MoIP Servicel 15 Configuring the R2 Access Service


The following information is added:

10.3 Configuration Example of the VoIP Service (in Integrated Upstream Mode)



vii


The following information is added:l 24 Configuring the EPON Upstream Transmissionl 25 Configuring the GPON Upstream Transmissionl 31 Configuring the Environment Monitoring


The following information is added:l 9.13 Configuring the Overload Control of the MGCl 9.14 Configuring the Overload Control of the MG

Updates in Issue 01 (2008-03-25)This is the first release.



viii

Contents

About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii

1 Managing the License...................................................................................................................11.1 Introduction to the License.................................................................................................................................21.2 License Principle................................................................................................................................................31.3 Configuration Example of the License Application...........................................................................................31.4 Configuring the ESN..........................................................................................................................................61.5 Configuring the License Server..........................................................................................................................7

2 Configuring the Maintenance Terminal...................................................................................92.1 Introduction to the Maintenance Terminal.......................................................................................................102.2 Configuring the Terminal Through the Local Serial Port................................................................................112.3 Configuring the Terminal Through the Remote Serial Port.............................................................................142.4 Configuring the Outband Management Interface.............................................................................................192.5 Configuring the Inband Management Interface................................................................................................22

3 CLI Operation Basics..................................................................................................................263.1 Introduction to the CLI.....................................................................................................................................273.2 CLI Features.....................................................................................................................................................27

3.2.1 Introduction to the Command Mode.......................................................................................................273.2.2 Intelligent Matching................................................................................................................................283.2.3 Edit Characteristics..................................................................................................................................293.2.4 Interaction Characteristics.......................................................................................................................303.2.5 Parameter Prompt....................................................................................................................................303.2.6 Display Characteristics............................................................................................................................313.2.7 Saving and Querying the History Commands.........................................................................................323.2.8 CLI Error Prompt.....................................................................................................................................33

3.3 Basic Operation Through CLI..........................................................................................................................333.3.1 Obtaining the Online Help Information...................................................................................................333.3.2 Switching the Terminal Language...........................................................................................................353.3.3 Configuring the System Time..................................................................................................................363.3.4 Setting the System Name.........................................................................................................................363.3.5 Setting the Terminal Type.......................................................................................................................373.3.6 Setting the Timeout Exit Time................................................................................................................373.3.7 Locking the Terminal..............................................................................................................................38

UA5000 Universal Access UnitConfiguration Guide-PVM CLI Contents


ix

3.3.8 Clearing the Terminal Screen..................................................................................................................393.3.9 Querying the Version Information..........................................................................................................393.3.10 Querying the CPU Usage of a Board.....................................................................................................403.3.11 Testing the Network Status....................................................................................................................40

4 Configuring the NMS.................................................................................................................424.1 Introduction to the NMS...................................................................................................................................434.2 Configuration Example of an Outband NMS...................................................................................................434.3 Configuration Example of an Inband NMS......................................................................................................454.4 Configuring the SNMP Agent..........................................................................................................................48

4.4.1 Configuring the Community Name and Read-Write Authority..............................................................484.4.2 Enabling Sending the Trap Packet...........................................................................................................494.4.3 Configuring the IP Address of the Target Host for the Trap Packet.......................................................494.4.4 Configuring the Administrator ID of the Device.....................................................................................504.4.5 Configuring the Location of the Device..................................................................................................51

5 User Management........................................................................................................................535.1 Introduction to the Operation User...................................................................................................................545.2 Adding a User...................................................................................................................................................545.3 Modifying the User Attributes..........................................................................................................................56

5.3.1 Changing a User Level............................................................................................................................565.3.2 Changing the User Password...................................................................................................................575.3.3 Changing the Number of Re-logins.........................................................................................................585.3.4 Modifying the Supplementary Information About a User.......................................................................59

5.4 Disconnecting an Online User..........................................................................................................................605.5 Deleting a User.................................................................................................................................................61

6 Device Management...................................................................................................................636.1 Introduction to the Device................................................................................................................................656.2 Adding the Connection Between the Shelves...................................................................................................666.3 Setting the Description of a Shelf.....................................................................................................................676.4 Resetting a Control Board................................................................................................................................686.5 Adding a Service Board....................................................................................................................................696.6 Deleting a Service Board..................................................................................................................................706.7 Resetting a Service Board.................................................................................................................................716.8 Prohibiting a Service Board..............................................................................................................................71

7 Configuring the System DSP Channels..................................................................................747.1 Introduction to the System DSP Channels.......................................................................................................757.2 Configuring the Attributes of the DSP Channel...............................................................................................757.3 Configuring the Number of the Globally Shared DSP Channels.....................................................................777.4 Configuring the Number of DSP Channels in the DSP Resources Reserved for the VAG.............................797.5 Prohibiting the DSP Channel............................................................................................................................80

8 Configuring the Clock................................................................................................................83



x

8.1 Introduction to the Clock..................................................................................................................................848.2 Configuration Example of a Clock Source.......................................................................................................858.3 Configuring the Reference Clock Source.........................................................................................................878.4 Setting the Clock Source Priority.....................................................................................................................88

9 Configuring the MG Interface..................................................................................................909.1 Introduction to the MG Interface......................................................................................................................929.2 Configuration Example of the MG Interface (the H.248 Protocol)..................................................................929.3 Configuration Example of the MG Interface (the MGCP Protocol)................................................................959.4 Adding an MG Interface...................................................................................................................................979.5 Configuring the IP Address Pool....................................................................................................................1029.6 Configuring the Attributes of the MG Interface (the H.248 Protocol)...........................................................1039.7 Configuring the Attributes of the MG Interface (the MGCP Protocol)..........................................................1099.8 Configuring the Software Parameters of an MG Interface (the H.248 Protocol)...........................................1129.9 Configuring the Software Parameters of an MG Interface (the MGCP Protocol).........................................1149.10 Configuring the Ringing Mode of an MG Interface.....................................................................................1159.11 Configuring Digitmaps of the MG Interface (the H.248 Protocol)..............................................................1179.12 Configuring Digitmaps of the MG Interface (the MGCP Protocol).............................................................1199.13 Configuring the Overload Control of the MGC...........................................................................................1219.14 Configuring the Overload Control of the MG..............................................................................................1229.15 Enabling an MG Interface............................................................................................................................124

10 Configuring the VoIP Service...............................................................................................12610.1 Introduction to the VoIP Service..................................................................................................................12810.2 Configuration Example of the VoIP Service................................................................................................12810.3 Configuration Example of the VoIP Service (in Integrated Upstream Mode).............................................13510.4 Configuring the Standalone Service.............................................................................................................14210.5 Configuring the System Parameters.............................................................................................................14410.6 Configuring the POTS Subscriber Data and Port Attributes........................................................................14510.7 Configuring the QoS IP Precedence.............................................................................................................14910.8 Configuring the QoS VLAN Priority...........................................................................................................15210.9 Separating the Signaling IP Address from the Media IP Address................................................................15310.10 Enabling the Voice Quality Enhanced Function........................................................................................154

11 Configuring the VAG Service...............................................................................................15711.1 Introduction to the VAG Service..................................................................................................................15811.2 Configuration Example of the VAG Service................................................................................................15811.3 Configuring the TID Profile of the VAG.....................................................................................................163

12 Configuring the ISDN Service..............................................................................................16712.1 Introduction to the ISDN Service.................................................................................................................16812.2 Configuration Example of the P2P ISDN BRA Service..............................................................................16912.3 Configuration Example of the P2MP ISDN BRA Service...........................................................................17412.4 Configuration Example of the ISDN PRA Service (When the EDTB Service Board Is Used)...................17912.5 Configuring the SIGTRAN Protocol Stack..................................................................................................183



xi

13 Configuring the FoIP Service................................................................................................18713.1 Introduction to the FoIP Service...................................................................................................................18913.2 Configuring the V2 Transparent Transmission Flow...................................................................................19013.3 Configuring the Selfswitch Transparent Transmission Flow.......................................................................19213.4 Configuring the V2 T.38 Flow.....................................................................................................................19413.5 Configuring the Selfswitch T.38 Flow.........................................................................................................19613.6 Configuring the V3 Flow..............................................................................................................................19813.7 Configuring the V5 Flow..............................................................................................................................19913.8 Configuring the High-Speed Fax..................................................................................................................20113.9 Configuring the High-Low Speed Selfswitch Fax.......................................................................................20313.10 Configuring the Fax Transmission Parameters..........................................................................................20513.11 Configuring the Fax Training Parameters..................................................................................................206

14 Configuring the MoIP Service..............................................................................................20814.1 Introduction to the MoIP Service.................................................................................................................20914.2 Configuring the MoIP Service......................................................................................................................20914.3 Configuring the Modem Transmission Parameters......................................................................................210

15 Configuring the R2 Access Service......................................................................................21215.1 Introduction to the R2 Access Service.........................................................................................................21315.2 Configuration Example of the R2 Access Service.......................................................................................21415.3 Adding an R2 Profile....................................................................................................................................21915.4 Configuring the Adaptation Data of the R2 Profile .....................................................................................220

15.4.1 Configuring the R2 Address Receiving Attributes..............................................................................22015.4.2 Configuring the R2 Address Sending Attributes.................................................................................22115.4.3 Configuring the R2 Profile Attributes.................................................................................................22215.4.4 Configuring the R2 Line Signaling Attributes....................................................................................22215.4.5 Configuring the R2 Register Signaling Attributes..............................................................................223

15.5 Loading an R2 Signaling Configuration File...............................................................................................224

16 Configuring the V5 Voice Service........................................................................................22616.1 Introduction to the V5 Voice Service...........................................................................................................22716.2 Configuration Example of the V5 Voice Service.........................................................................................22816.3 Configuring a PSTN Subscriber...................................................................................................................23316.4 Configuring an ISDN Subscriber.................................................................................................................23416.5 Blocking a V5 Service Port..........................................................................................................................23616.6 Configuring the Loopback for a V5 Service Port.........................................................................................236

17 Configuring the SPC...............................................................................................................23817.1 Introduction to the SPC................................................................................................................................23917.2 Configuration Example of the Common SPC..............................................................................................24017.3 Configuration Example of the U Interface Transparent Transmission.........................................................242

18 Configuring the DDI Service................................................................................................24618.1 Introduction to the DDI Service...................................................................................................................247



xii

18.2 Configuration Example of the DDI Service.................................................................................................248

19 Configuring the SDL Service................................................................................................25219.1 Introduction to the SDL Service...................................................................................................................25319.2 Configuration Example of the Normal SDL Service....................................................................................253

20 Configuring the MTA Service...............................................................................................25820.1 Introduction to the MTA Service..................................................................................................................25920.2 Configuration Example of the MTA Service...............................................................................................259

21 Configuring the VFB Service................................................................................................26321.1 Introduction to the VFB Service...................................................................................................................26421.2 Configuration Example of the VFB Service.................................................................................................264

22 Configuring the ATI Service.................................................................................................26822.1 Introduction to the ATI Service....................................................................................................................26922.2 Configuration Example of the 2-Wire/4-Wire VF and E&M Trunk Service Transparent Transmission..............................................................................................................................................................................26922.3 Configuration Example of the Hotline Service on the E&M Trunk Interface.............................................272

23 Configuring the CDI Service.................................................................................................27523.1 Introduction to the CDI Service....................................................................................................................27623.2 Configuration Example of the Z Interface Extension Service......................................................................27623.3 Configuration Example of the PBX-Bothway Service.................................................................................279

24 Configuring the EPON Upstream Transmission..............................................................28224.1 Introduction to the EPON Upstream Transmission......................................................................................28324.2 Configuration Example of the EPON Upstream Transmission....................................................................28324.3 Querying the Attributes of the Ports on the EP1A Board.............................................................................29024.4 Querying the Statistics of the Ports on the EP1A Board..............................................................................291

25 Configuring the GPON Upstream Transmission..............................................................29225.1 Introduction to the GPON Upstream Transmission.....................................................................................29325.2 Configuration Example of the GPON Upstream Transmission...................................................................29325.3 Querying the Attributes of the Ports on the GP1A Board............................................................................30025.4 Querying the Statistics of the Port on the GP1A Board...............................................................................301

26 Configuring the Remote Subtending..................................................................................30426.1 Introduction to the Remote Subtending........................................................................................................30526.2 Configuration Example of the E1 Subtending..............................................................................................305

27 Configuring the QoS of the Voice Service.........................................................................31127.1 Introduction to the Voice Service QoS.........................................................................................................31227.2 Configuration Example of the QoS Test Task..............................................................................................312

28 Configuring the Security of the Voice Service..................................................................31428.1 Introduction to the Voice Service Security...................................................................................................315

28.1.1 Registration Process When the H.248 Protocol Is Used.....................................................................31528.1.2 Registration Process When the MGCP Protocol Is Used....................................................................316



xiii

28.2 Configuring the Device Authentication........................................................................................................31828.2.1 Configuring the Device Authentication (the H.248 Protocol).............................................................31828.2.2 Configuring the Device Authentication (the MGCP Protocol)...........................................................320

29 Configuring the Reliability of the Voice Service..............................................................32329.1 Introduction to the Voice Service Reliability...............................................................................................32429.2 Configuring the Dual Homing......................................................................................................................325

29.2.1 Configuring the Dual Homing (the H.248 Protocol)...........................................................................32529.2.2 Configuring the Dual Homing (the MGCP Protocol).........................................................................326

29.3 Configuring the Standalone Service.............................................................................................................32729.4 Configuring an Emergency Channel............................................................................................................32829.5 Configuring the Separation Between the Signaling Stream and the Media Stream.....................................329

30 Configuring the Link Detection...........................................................................................33130.1 Introduction to the Link Detection...............................................................................................................33230.2 Configuration Example of the ARP Link Detection....................................................................................33230.3 Configuration Example of the BFD Link Detection....................................................................................33530.4 Configuration Example of the ETH_OAM Layer 2 Link Detection............................................................339

31 Configuring the Environment Monitoring.........................................................................34431.1 Introduction to the Environment Monitoring...............................................................................................34631.2 Configuration Example of the ESC..............................................................................................................34731.3 Configuration Example of the Fan Monitoring............................................................................................35131.4 Configuration Example of the Power Monitoring........................................................................................35331.5 Configuration Example of the Universal Power Monitoring.......................................................................35631.6 Adding an EMU............................................................................................................................................35831.7 Setting the ESC Analog Parameters.............................................................................................................35931.8 Setting the ESC Digital Parameters..............................................................................................................36131.9 Configuring the Fan Alarm Reporting..........................................................................................................36231.10 Setting the Fan Speed Adjustment Mode...................................................................................................36331.11 Setting the Fan Speed.................................................................................................................................36431.12 Setting the Power Supply Parameters.........................................................................................................365

32 Configuring the Integrated Data and Voice Networking................................................37132.1 Networking...................................................................................................................................................37332.2 Prerequisites..................................................................................................................................................37332.3 Data Plan (IPM)............................................................................................................................................37432.4 Data Plan (PVM)..........................................................................................................................................37532.5 Configuration Procedure (IPM)....................................................................................................................37632.6 Configuration Procedure (PVM)..................................................................................................................38032.7 Verification...................................................................................................................................................382

A Acronyms and Abbreviations................................................................................................383



xiv

1 Managing the License

About This Chapter

The license function can control the function entries and resource entries of the UA5000. Toensure that the required service on theUA5000 can be activated and accessed, you mustimplement the management of the license functions.

1.1 Introduction to the LicenseThe license function can control the function entries and resource entries of the UA5000. Theprerequisite for using the license function normally is specifying the functions of and relationsbetween the license server, license file, function entries, and resource entries.

1.2 License PrincipleThe UA5000 adopts the network license scheme to manage and control the license.

1.3 Configuration Example of the License ApplicationConfigure the license equipment serial number (ESN) and specify the license server for theUA5000 so that the UA5000 and license server can communicate normally, and theUA5000supports the controlled features normally.

1.4 Configuring the ESNThe ESN uniquely identifies a device on the license server. Only after the UA5000 is configuredwith an ESN, the license server can identify the device.

1.5 Configuring the License ServerEach UA5000 corresponds to a license file. This license file is saved on the license server whichmanages the license functions. Configure the IP address of the license server of the UA5000 andthe TCP port number used for the communication between the UA5000 and the license server.Thus, the UA5000 and the license server can communicate with each other.

UA5000 Universal Access UnitConfiguration Guide-PVM CLI 1 Managing the License


1

1.1 Introduction to the LicenseThe license function can control the function entries and resource entries of the UA5000. Theprerequisite for using the license function normally is specifying the functions of and relationsbetween the license server, license file, function entries, and resource entries.

Service Description

With the license function enabled, the license server performs license control on the functionentries and the resource entries supported by the UA5000 to provide individualized services forusers.

Service Specifications

The controlled features are the features that are controlled through the license. These featuresare unavailable without authorization. Such controlled features include function entries andresource entries.

l A function entry refers to the entry whose license is controlled based on the function.l A resource entry refers to the entry whose license is controlled based on the number.

The controllable function entries and resource entries of the UA5000 include the following:

l Calling feature

– Number of PSTN subscribers

– Number of BRA subscribers

– Number of PRA subscribersl SPC service

– Number of SPCsl Interface feature

– Number of V5 interfaces

– Number of H248 interfaces

– Number of MGCP interfaces

– Number of R2 subscribersl EMM control power

– Number of EMM control power suppliesl MG property

– T38 coding and decoding function

– G723 and G729 coding and decoding function

– 2198 redundancy function

– Dual homing function of the H248 interface

– Standalone function of the H248 interface

– Dual homing function of the MGCP interface

– Dual homing function of L2UA



2

NOTE

l If you need to use the license function supported by the UA5000, consider the installation of the licenseserver in network planning.

l It is recommended that you install the software of the license server on the same computer with thesoftware of the network management system (NMS) server. If the NMS server does not exist, installone license server in the network.

1.2 License PrincipleThe UA5000 adopts the network license scheme to manage and control the license.

License Function Principlel When the license server is deployed in a network, the license server can be installed on the

same computer with the NMS server, but the two servers are different. The license servercan also be installed on a separate server. Each multi-service access node (MSAN) devicefunctions as a license client. The license server manages the licenses of all the clients in acentralized manner.

l In the management range of each license server, each product has one license file.Generally, a management range can be a district or a city. The license file is stored on thelicense server. The license file defines the product resources controlled by the license. Onelicense server can manage multiple products. Hence, multiple license files can be storedon one license server.

License Implementation Principlel In the system initialization process of the UA5000, each service module must register their

controlled resource entries and function entries. After the system runs in the normal state,based on the registration information, the management module of a license client obtainsthe authorization information about the license controlling entries of the device from thelicense server.

l When you configure a service module through the command line or the NMS, the devicechecks whether the resource entries of the service module are overloaded or the functionentries of the service module are authorized.

– For license-controlled resource entries, if the resource entries are overloaded, the systemterminates the service configuration and prompts that the license resources areinsufficient.

– For license-controlled function entries, if the function entries are not authorized, thesystem prompts you that the functions are unauthorized.

– If the resource entries are not overloaded or the function entries are authorized, thesystem allows you to continue the service configuration.

– For a license-controlled resources entry, the license resources applied for the servicemodule are released when the service configuration is deleted.

1.3 Configuration Example of the License ApplicationConfigure the license equipment serial number (ESN) and specify the license server for theUA5000 so that the UA5000 and license server can communicate normally, and theUA5000supports the controlled features normally.



3

Prerequisitel The network devices and the lines must be normal.

l All boards of the UA5000 must be normal.

l The license function must be enabled.

Networking

Figure 1-1 shows the example network for configuring the license application.

The license function is enabled on the UA5000. The license server is installed on the samecomputer as the NMS server (N2000 BMS). The license management tool installed on the N2000client configures and manages the license file. UA5000_A communicates with the license serverthrough port 0/5/0. The TCP port number is 10010.

Figure 1-1 Example network for configuring the license application

Router

UA5000_A UA5000_B UA5000_N

......

N2000 Client

N2000 BMS&License Server

60.60.60.1/24

100.100.100.1/24

60.60.60.2/24

Data Plan

Table 1-1 provides the data plan for configuring the license application.

Table 1-1 Data plan for configuring the license application

Item Data

License server IP address: 100.100.100.1/24



4

Item Data

TCP port number: 10010

UA5000_A IP address of the layer 3 interface: 60.60.60.1/24

Router IP address of the port connected to UA5000_A: 60.60.60.2/24

NOTE

l The configuration at the UA5000 side is the same. This section uses the configuration of UA5000_Aas an example.

l This topic describes only the configuration at the device side. For details on how to configure the licenseserver, see the related configuration manual of the license server.

Configuration FlowchartFigure 1-2 shows the flowchart for configuring the license application.

Figure 1-2 Flowchart for configuring the license application

Start

Configure the ESN

Save the data

End

Specify the license server

Procedure

Step 1 Configure the equipment serial number (ESN).

NOTE

At the license server side, you need to add the ESN of the device to the license server, and add the functionentries and resource entries for the device.

huawei(config)#license esn 60.60.60.1

Step 2 Specify the license server.huawei(config)#license server ipaddress 100.100.100.1 tcpport 10010

Step 3 Save the data.



5

huawei(config)#save

----End

ResultAfter the configuration, run the display license info command to check whether thecommunication between the device and the license server is normal. UA5000_A is initialized,and each service module can register the controlled resource entries or function entries.

NOTE

The license does not take effect immediately after it is configured.

By default, the license takes effect 15-20 minutes after it is configured successfully. After configuring thelicense, if you run the save command to save the configuration, and then run the reset command to resetthe device, the license takes effect immediately after the system resets.

1.4 Configuring the ESNThe ESN uniquely identifies a device on the license server. Only after the UA5000 is configuredwith an ESN, the license server can identify the device.

Contextl The ESN of the UA5000 must be an existing IP address in the IP address pool. You can

run the ip address command to add the IP address to the IP address pool.l After adding the ESN for the UA5000, you need to add the ESN of the device to the license

server, and add the function entries and resource entries for the device.

Procedure

Step 1 Run the license esn command to configure the ESN for the device.

Step 2 Run the display license info command to query the basic information about the license.

----End

ExampleTo configure the ESN, do as follows:

huawei(config)#license esn 60.60.60.1huawei(config)#display license info License switch: enable ESN: 60.60.60.1 IP address of the first server: 100.100.100.1 IP address of the second server: 200.200.200.1 TCP port number: 1024 Communication status: abnormal License status: unregistered



6

NOTE

l When the upper layer device is disconnected, the communication status of the license client is abnormal.The license status of the license client is unregistered. In this case, the controlled resources cannot beconfigured and the controlled function cannot be enabled.

l When the related configuration is complete in the network, the communication status of the license clientis normal. The license status of the license client is registered. In this case, new controlled resources can beconfigured and controlled functions can be enabled within the management range of the license.

Related OperationTable 1-2 lists the related operation for configuring the ESN for the device.

Table 1-2 Related operation for configuring the ESN for the device

To… Run the Command...

Configure the license server license server

1.5 Configuring the License ServerEach UA5000 corresponds to a license file. This license file is saved on the license server whichmanages the license functions. Configure the IP address of the license server of the UA5000 andthe TCP port number used for the communication between the UA5000 and the license server.Thus, the UA5000 and the license server can communicate with each other.

Contextl The IP address of the license server and the TCP port number must be the same as the data

in the actual network plan.l When the IP address of the license server and the TCP port number change, you need to

re-configure the device.l Two IP addresses of the license server can be configured at the device side. The two IP

addresses must be different from each other. Only one TCP port number can be configuredat the device side.

ProcedureStep 1 Run the license server command to configure the license server.

Step 2 Run the display license info command to query the basic information about the license.

----End

ExampleTo configure the IP address of license server 1 as 10.10.10.1, the IP address of license server 2as 20.20.20.1, and TCP port number as 1024, do as follows:

huawei(config)#license server ipaddress 10.10.10.1 20.20.20.1 tcpport 1024huawei(config)#display license info Special license switch: disable Basic license switch: enable



7

ESN: 10.71.55.192 IP address of the first server: 10.10.10.1 IP address of the second server: 20.20.20.1 TCP port number: 1024 Communication status: normal License status: registered

NOTE

l When the upper layer device is not connected, the communication status of the license client is abnormal.The license status of the license client is unregistered. In this case, the controlled resources cannot beconfigured and the controlled function cannot be enabled.

l When the related configuration is complete in the network, the communication status of the license clientis normal. The license status of the license client is registered. In this case, new controlled resources can beconfigured and controlled functions can be enabled within the management range of the license.

Related OperationTable 1-3 lists the related operation for configuring the license server.

Table 1-3 Related operation for configuring the license server

To... Run the Command...

Configure the ESN license esn



8

2 Configuring the Maintenance Terminal

About This Chapter

This topic describes the different maintenance modes of theUA5000 through the maintenanceterminal.

2.1 Introduction to the Maintenance TerminalIntroduction to the maintenance terminal includes the different maintenance modes of theUA5000 through a maintenance terminal and the features of different maintenance modes.

2.2 Configuring the Terminal Through the Local Serial PortConnect the serial port on the PC to the UA5000 directly. Then, log in to the UA5000 CLI systemthrough the HyperTerminal of the Widows OS to maintain and manage the device locally.

2.3 Configuring the Terminal Through the Remote Serial PortConnect the serial port on the PC to the UA5000 remotely. Then, log in to the UA5000 CLIsystem through the HyperTerminal of the Windows OS to maintain the device remotely.

2.4 Configuring the Outband Management InterfaceAfter the outband management interface is configured successfully, you can use the PC to login to the UA5000 through the outband management interface of the UA5000 for maintenanceand management.

2.5 Configuring the Inband Management InterfaceThis topic describes how to log in to the UA5000 through the inband management interface ofthe UA5000 for maintenance and management. This example considers the PVMB control boardas an example. The configuration of the PVMD control board is the same as the configurationof the PVMB control board. Therefore, the configuration of the PVMD control is not describedhere.

UA5000 Universal Access UnitConfiguration Guide-PVM CLI 2 Configuring the Maintenance Terminal


9

2.1 Introduction to the Maintenance TerminalIntroduction to the maintenance terminal includes the different maintenance modes of theUA5000 through a maintenance terminal and the features of different maintenance modes.

You can maintain the UA5000 Universal Access Unit (the UA5000) through the maintenanceterminal in the command line interface (CLI) mode. The configuration of the maintenanceterminal includes the following modes:

l 2.2 Configuring the Terminal Through the Local Serial Portl 2.3 Configuring the Terminal Through the Remote Serial Portl 2.4 Configuring the Outband Management Interfacel 2.5 Configuring the Inband Management Interface

Table 2-1 lists the features of different maintenance modes.

Table 2-1 Features of different maintenance modes

MaintenanceMode

Description Feature

Local serial port Uses the embeddedHyperTerminal of theoperating system (OS) tocomplete the networkingfor managing andmaintaining networkdevices.

The network management software is notrequired for the CLI maintenance. Generally,user interface is provided by the softwareembedded in the OS or by the commercialsoftware.

Remote serialport

Uses the HyperTerminalof the OS to complete thenetworking formanaging andmaintaining networkdevices.

In the case of the maintenance through theremote serial port, you need to connect amodem to the UA5000 and another modem tothe maintenance terminal, and then connect themaintenance terminal to the UA5000 throughthe modem dial-up.

Inbandmanagementinterface

Uses the service channelof the UA5000 tocomplete the networkingfor managing andmaintaining networkingdevices.

l Advantages: It uses flexible networking,and does not require additional networkingdevices, thus saving the networking cost.

l Disadvantages: The maintenance cannot beperformed if the service channel fails.

Outbandmanagementinterface

Uses the maintenancenetwork port (ETH) onthe control board of theUA5000 to complete thenetworking formanaging andmaintaining networkdevices.

l Advantages: It provides reliable devicemanagement channel. The fault can belocated in time even if the managed devicefails.

l Disadvantages: Additional devices arerequired to provide the maintenancechannel that is independent of the servicechannel.



10

2.2 Configuring the Terminal Through the Local Serial PortConnect the serial port on the PC to the UA5000 directly. Then, log in to the UA5000 CLI systemthrough the HyperTerminal of the Widows OS to maintain and manage the device locally.

NetworkingFigure 2-1 shows the example network for configuring the terminal through the local serial port.

Figure 2-1 Example network for configuring the terminal through the local serial port

Local maintenanceserial port cable

COM

ETH1

PVMB

UA5000

ETH0

Configuration FlowchartFigure 2-2 shows the flowchart for configuring the terminal through the local serial port.



11

Figure 2-2 Flowchart for configuring the terminal through the local serial port

Start

Connect the serial port cable

Start the HyperTerminal

Set the parameters of theterminal

Set the terminal emulation type

Log in to the system

End

Set the line delay and thecharacter delay

Procedure

Step 1 Connect the serial port cable.

Use a local maintenance serial port cable to connect the serial port of a PC to the maintenanceserial port (COM) on the control board of the UA5000, as shown in Figure 2-1.

Step 2 Start the HyperTerminal.

1. Set up a connection.

On a PC, choose Start > Programs > Accessories > Communication >HyperTerminal to display the Connection Description dialog box. Enter the connectionname, and click OK.

NOTE

When you use the HyperTerminal for the first time, the system displays the dialog box of the defaulttelnet program.

2. Configure the serial port.

Select the standard character terminal or PC terminal serial port that is actually connectedto the UA5000. Assume that it is COM2. Click OK.

Step 3 Set the parameters of the terminal.

In the dialog box that is displayed, set the parameters as follows:



12

l Baud rate: 9600 bit/sl Data bits: 8l Parity: Nonel Stop bits: 1l Data flow control: None

NOTE

l When setting the baud rate, make sure that the baud rate of the HyperTerminal is the same as the baudrate of the serial port in the system. By default, the baud rate of the serial port is 9600 bit/s.

l The illegible characters may exist in the input information after you log in to the system. This is dueto baud rate inconsistency between the HyperTerminal and the system. In this case, use a different baudrate to log in to the system. The system supports the baud rates of 9600 bit/s, 19200 bit/s, 38400 bit/s,57600 bit/s, and 115200 bit/s.

Click OK to display the interface of the HyperTerminal.

Step 4 Set the terminal emulation type.

Choose File > Properties on the HyperTerminal interface. Click the Settings tab in the dialogbox that is displayed. Select VT100 or Auto Detect as the type of terminal emulation, as shownin Figure 2-3.

Figure 2-3 Type of terminal emulation

Step 5 Set the line delay and the character delay.

Click ASCII Setup. Set the line delay and the character delay for transmitting ASCII to 200 ms.



13

NOTE

When you paste text to the HyperTerminal, the character delay controls the character transmission speed,and the line delay controls the interval of transmitting each line. A very short delay may lead to the loss ofcharacters. If the pasted text is not displayed properly, you can modify the settings.

----End

Result

On the HyperTerminal interface, press Enter. The system displays a message, prompting youto enter the user name. Enter the user name and the password for user registration (By default,the super user name is root and password is admin). When the registration is completedsuccessfully, the prompt of the command line is displayed (such as huawei>), as shown in thefollowing figure.

If the login fails, click the Hang-up icon and then click the Dial icon. If the login fails again,check and ensure that the parameter settings and physical connections are correct, and then login to the system again.

2.3 Configuring the Terminal Through the Remote SerialPort

Connect the serial port on the PC to the UA5000 remotely. Then, log in to the UA5000 CLIsystem through the HyperTerminal of the Windows OS to maintain the device remotely.

Prerequisite

Connect the public switched telephone network (PSTN) modem on the UA5000 side and thePC side, before using the serial port for remote maintenance. In this way, you can set up a remoteconnection between the PC and the UA5000 through modem dial-up.



14

The PSTN modem on the UA5000 side is referred to as the called modem. The modem on thePC side is referred to as the calling modem. The modems must meet the following requirements:

l Both the calling and called modems must comply with the related standards, and supportAT command set.

l The called modem must be an external modem.

l The calling modem can be either a built-in modem or an external modem. For bettercompatibility and to facilitate status monitoring, it is recommended that you use an externalmodem made by the vendor of the called modem.

Precautionsl After the dial-up and before the connection is set up, pressing any key on the keyboard ends

the call.

l Stop the connection after the remote maintenance. Do not close the HyperTerminal.Otherwise, certain types of remote modems are always online and the next dial-up fails.

l The following configuration is based on modems of the same type. In actual applications,you can configure the modems by referring to the related AT command set.

Networking

Figure 2-4 shows the example network for configuring the terminal through the remote serialport.

Figure 2-4 Example network for configuring the terminal through the remote serial port

The calledmodem

The callingmodem PC

UA5000PVM

ETH0

COM

ETH1

Localmaintenance

serial portcable

Localmaintenance

serial portcable

Telephone line

Telephone line

Configuration Flowchart

Figure 2-5 shows the flowchart for configuring the terminal through the remote serial port.



15

Figure 2-5 Flowchart for configuring the terminal through the remote serial port

Start

Set the parameters of the called modem

Set the parameters of the calling modem

Set up the configuration environment

Start the HyperTerminal

Set the parameters of the terminal

End

Dial up on the HyperTerminal

Procedure

Step 1 Set the parameters of the called modem.

Only three signal lines, namely SD, RD and SG, are used for connecting the UA5000 and themodem. Therefore, before connecting the modem to the terminal, shield the handshake signalsand flow control signals of the modem.

The configuration of a modem requires an intelligent terminal. The following modemconfiguration is based on the HyperTerminal on Windows platform.

1. Connect the serial port of the modem to the port of the maintenance terminal by using thededicated cable for the modem, and then power on the system. A driver is not required atthis step.

2. Assume that the modem is connected to the COM2 port. Start the HyperTerminal. SelectDirect to COM2 in the column of Connect using in the dialog box that is displayed. Setthe parameters of the serial port as follows: 9600 bit/s for baud rate, 8 for data bits, 1 forstop bits, none for parity, and none for flow control.



16

NOTE

l After the connection, the terminal may not display anything. This is because the display functionof the modem is disabled during the previous configuration. To enable the terminal to displaythe latest input and output information, run the AT&F command to restore the default settingsand press Enter.

l Due to the rate limitation of the modem, you can set the baud rate of the maintenance port of theUA5000 to 9600 bit/s or 19200 bit/s.

3. Check whether the modem works in the normal state.

In the HyperTerminal, run the AT&F command to restore the default settings of the modem.Check if an OK message is displayed on the screen. If an OK message is displayed, themodem works in the normal state.

4. In the HyperTerminal, run the following commands:ATS0=1 //Enable the auto replay function (ringing sound).

AT&D //Ignore the DTR signals.

AT&K0 //Disable the flow control function.

AT&R1 //Ignore the RTS signals.

AT&S0 //Set DSR as high level.ATEQ1&W //Disable the modem’s response to the command when executing the command and saving the configurations.

NOTE

l After executing the previous command, run the AT command to disable the echo function of theterminal and prohibit it from displaying the execution results.

l You can run the baudrate command to modify the baud rate of the maintenance serial port ofthe UA5000. To prevent an extremely high bit rate on the line between the two modems, you canset AT$MB=9600 (or another value) before running the ATEQ1&W command.

Step 2 Set the parameters of the calling modem.

After power-on, the calling modem can function in the normal state without any configuration.If a non-standard cable is used to connect the maintenance terminal to the modem, shield thehandshake signals and the flow control signals of the modem before the connection. For detailson this operation, see the settings of the parameters on the called modem.

Step 3 Set up the configuration environment.

Figure 2-4 shows the configuration environment.

1. Connect the called modem.

Insert the telephone line into the LINE port of the called modem. Connect the serial portof the called modem to the maintenance port COM of the PVM board by using the dedicatedserial port cable for the UA5000. Power on the modem.

2. Connect the calling modem.

In the case of an external modem, insert the telephone line into the LINE port of the callingmodem. Connect the serial port of the calling modem to the serial port of the maintenanceterminal by using the dedicated cable for the modem. Power on the modem.

In the case of a built-in modem, you only need to plug the telephone line into the LINEport of the calling modem.

Step 4 Start the HyperTerminal.



17

1. Set up a connection.

Choose Start > Programs > Accessories > Communication > HyperTerminal to displaythe Connection Description dialog box. Enter the connection name, and click OK.

2. Configure the serial port.

Select the standard character terminal or PC terminal serial port that is actually connectedto the UA5000. Assume it to be serial COM2. Click OK.

Step 5 Set the parameters of the terminal.

In the dialog box that is displayed, set the parameters as follows:

l Baud rate: 9600 bit/sl Data bits: 8l Parity: Nonel Stop bits: 1l Flow control: None

NOTE

l When setting the baud rate, make sure that the baud rate of the HyperTerminal is the same as the baudrate of the serial port in the system. By default, the baud rate of the serial port is 9600 bit/s.

l There may be illegible characters in the input information after you log in to the system. This is usuallydue to baud rate inconsistency between the HyperTerminal and the system. In this case, use a differentbaud rate to log in to the system. The system supports the baud rates of 9600 bit/s, 19200 bit/s, 38400bit/s, 57600 bit/s, and 115200 bit/s.

Click OK to display the interface of the HyperTerminal.

Step 6 Dial up on the HyperTerminal.l External modem:

To set up a connection with an external modem, select a serial port, and not a modem, fromthe Connect Using drop-down list in the HyperTerminal.On the HyperTerminal interface, run the AT command for dial-up, for example,ATDTXXXXXXXX. Press Enter. XXXXXXXX represents the telephone number of theremote modem connected to the host.For details on the dial-up commands, see the AT command set. For example, ATDT0 W020XXXXXXXX means to dial "0" for connection with the external line. Wait for the dialingtone from the exchange, and then dial the telephone number 020XXXXXXXX.

l Built-in modem:Run the HyperTerminal. Set the called number on the Hyperterminal. Select the modem fromthe Connect Using drop-down list. Click Configure in the properties > connect to dialogbox to display the modem properties setting interface. Select Bring up terminal windowafter dialing on the Options tab of the properties setting interface. Click OK to confirm thesettings. You need not execute any ATDT commands for dialing.

----End

ResultAfter the dial-up, the "OH" and "RI" LEDs on the modem connected to the PC are on. Themodem generates a sound, which indicates the progress of the connection. After the connectionis set up, the "CD" LEDs (for carrier detection) on the two modems are on, and the



18

HyperTerminal interface displays "CONNECT9600 (or 19200)". This indicates that the inter-modem connection is set up successfully.

If "NO CARRIER" is displayed, the connection fails. Check the hardware connections and thetelephone line. Press Enter, and the command line interface for login is displayed.

After the operation on the remote terminal, run the hang-up command of the HyperTerminal todisrupt the connection.

2.4 Configuring the Outband Management InterfaceAfter the outband management interface is configured successfully, you can use the PC to login to the UA5000 through the outband management interface of the UA5000 for maintenanceand management.

Networking — LAN

Figure 2-6 shows the example network for outband management through the local area network(LAN) in the Telnet mode.

Figure 2-6 Example network for the outband management through the LAN in the Telnet mode

PVMB UA5000

ETH1COM

PC PC PC

LAN

ETH0

The UA5000 uses a straight through cable to connect to the LAN. Make sure that the IP addressof the maintenance port on the UA5000 and the IP address of the maintenance terminal are inthe same network segment.

NOTE

You can connect the network port of the maintenance terminal (refers to PC in this example) to themaintenance port on the control board of the UA5000 to perform the outband management of the device.In this case, you need to use a crossover cable.

Data Plan — LAN

Table 2-2 provides the data plan for outband management through the LAN in the Telnet mode.



19

Table 2-2 Data plan for outband management through the LAN in the Telnet mode

Item Data

Maintenance port of the UA5000 IP address: 0.10.20.2/24

Maintenance terminal IP address: 10.10.20.1/24

Networking — WANFigure 2-7 shows the example network for outband management through the wide area network(WAN) in the Telnet mode.

Figure 2-7 Example network for outband management through the WAN in the Telnet mode

PC PC

PCLAN

UA5000

ETH1COM

Router

PVMB

ETH0

Data Plan — WANTable 2-3 provides the data plan for outband management through the WAN in the Telnet mode.

Table 2-3 Data plan for outband management through WAN in the Telnet mode

Item Data

Maintenance port of the UA5000 IP address: 10.10.20.1/24


Configuration FlowchartFigure 2-8 shows the flowchart for configuring the device through the outband managementinterface.



20

Figure 2-8 Flowchart for configuring the device through the outband management interface

Start

End

Set the IP address of themaintenance network port

Set the NMS working mode

Set up the configurationenviroment


Run the Telnet program

Procedure


Set up the configuration environment based on actual conditions, as shown in Figure 2-6 orFigure 2-7.

Step 2 Set the NMS working mode to the outband mode.huawei(config)#sysman mode outband

Step 3 Set the IP address (namely, the outband IP address) of the maintenance network port.NOTE

The system supports only one outband IP address. If the outband IP address is already configured by runningthe display ip address command, you need to delete the original IP address before adding an IP addressor run the ip modify command to change the outband IP address.

huawei(config)#interface outbandhuawei(interface-outband)#ip address 10.10.20.1 255.255.255.0 10.10.20.0huawei(interface-outband)#display ip address OutBand: IPAddress............: 10.10.20.1 SubMask..............: 255.255.255.0 GateWay..............: 10.10.20.0 MacIndex.............: 1 MacAddress...........: 00-E0-FC-EE-DD-05 VlanID...............: --

Step 4 Run the Telnet program.

Choose Start > Run on the maintenance terminal. Enter the command telnet followed by theIP address of the maintenance port on the UA5000 in the Open address bar. Click OK to runTelnet (consider the Windows XP OS as an example), as shown in Figure 2-9.



21

Figure 2-9 Running Telnet

Step 5 Log in to the system.

Users can log in to the system. By default, the super user uses root and admin as the user nameand password respectively. In this case, the system returns the following prompt:

Huawei UA5000 Multi-service Access Module.Copyright(C) 1998-2007 by Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

>>User name:root>>User password:

----End

ResultAfter logging in to the system, you can perform the related operations.

2.5 Configuring the Inband Management InterfaceThis topic describes how to log in to the UA5000 through the inband management interface ofthe UA5000 for maintenance and management. This example considers the PVMB control boardas an example. The configuration of the PVMD control board is the same as the configurationof the PVMB control board. Therefore, the configuration of the PVMD control is not describedhere.

Networking — LANFigure 2-10 shows the example network for inband management through the local area network(LAN) in the Telnet mode.



22

Figure 2-10 Example network for inband management through the LAN in the Telnet mode

PC3

PC1LAN

PC2

UA5000

COM

ETH0

PVMB

ETH1

Data Plan—LAN

Table 2-4 provides the data plan for inband management through the LAN in the Telnet mode.

Table 2-4 Data plan for inband management through the LAN in the Telnet mode

Item Data

Inband management interface of the UA5000 IP address: 10.10.20.1/24


Networking—WAN

Figure 2-11 shows the example network for inband management through the wide area network(WAN) in the Telnet mode.

Figure 2-11 Example network for inband management through the WAN in the Telnet mode

UA5000

COM

ETH0

PVMB

ETH1

Router PC



23

Data Plan—WAN

Table 2-5 provides the data plan for inband management through the WAN in the Telnet mode.

Table 2-5 Data plan for inband management through the WAN in the Telnet mode

Item Data

Inband management interface ofthe UA5000

IP address: 10.10.20.1/24



Figure 2-12 shows the flowchart for configuring the device through the inband interface in theTelnet mode.

Figure 2-12 Flowchart for configuring the device through the inband interface in the Telnetmode

Start

Set up the configurationenvironment

Run the Telnet program


End

Procedure


Set up the configuration environment based on actual conditions, as shown in Figure 2-10 orFigure 2-11.

Step 2 Run the Telnet program.



24

Choose Start > Run on the maintenance terminal. Enter the telnet command followed by theIP address of the maintenance network port on the UA5000 in the Open address bar. ClickOK to run Telnet (consider the Windows XP OS as an example), as shown in Figure 2-13.

Figure 2-13 Running Telnet

Step 3 Log in to the system.

Log in to the system. By default, the super user uses root and admin as the user name andpassword. In this case, the system displays the following prompt:

>>User name:root>>User password:

----End

ResultAfter logging in to the system, you can perform the related operations.



25

3 CLI Operation Basics

About This Chapter

This topic describes the basic operation on the UA5000 through CLI.

3.1 Introduction to the CLITwo maintenance modes of the UA5000 are the NMS and the CLI.

3.2 CLI FeaturesThis topic describes the features of the UA5000 CLI mode.

3.3 Basic Operation Through CLIThis topic describes how to maintain and manage the UA5000 through CLI.

UA5000 Universal Access UnitConfiguration Guide-PVM CLI 3 CLI Operation Basics


26

3.1 Introduction to the CLITwo maintenance modes of the UA5000 are the NMS and the CLI.

Service Description

The differences of the two maintenance modes of the UA5000 are as follows:

l The NMS provides a graphical user interface (GUI), and the command line interface (CLI)provides the maintenance interface for users.

l The networking for maintaining the UA5000 in the CLI mode is simple. You can run theHyperTerminal or the telnet program of the maintenance terminal to log in to theUA5000 to maintain it through the CLI.

3.2 CLI FeaturesThis topic describes the features of the UA5000 CLI mode.

3.2.1 Introduction to the Command ModeThis topic describes the classification and features of the CLI, and the switching relation betweenthe command modes.

Command Mode Classification

The UA5000 supports multiple command modes to implement the hierarchical protection andto prevent attacks from unauthorized users.

The UA5000 supports the following command modes:

l User model Privilege model Global config mode

Command Mode Featuresl Downward compatibility

All the commands that work in the user mode are available in the privilege mode. All thecommands that work in the user mode and the privilege mode are all available in the globalconfig mode.

l Hierarchical protectionThis helps prevent attacks from unauthorized users. The users at different levels can enterdifferent command modes. Even if users at different levels enter the same command mode,the executable commands vary.

Command Mode Switching

Figure 3-1 shows how to switch the command modes.



27

Figure 3-1 Command mode switching

test

quit

narrow resource

quit

quit

quit

esl user

quit

return

quit

quit

narrow user

PVM modehuawei(config-if-pvm-0/5)#

interface pvm frame/slot

Narrow user modehuawei(config-narrow-user)#

H248 modehuawei(config-if-h248-...)#

EMU modehuawei(config-if-h302esc-0)#

interface h248 mgid

interface emu emuid

Global config modehuawei(config)#

quit enable

disable quit

configUser modehuawei>

Narrow resource modehuawei(config-narrow-

resource)#

Privilege modehuawei#

Test modehuawei(config-test)#

ESL user modehuawei(config-esl-user)#

R2 modehuawei(config-r2-0)#

quit

r2 profile profileid

3.2.2 Intelligent MatchingThe intelligent matching means when you enter an incomplete keyword and press the space bar,the matching keyword is displayed.

Function

The UA5000 facilitates the operation by supporting the function, where the matching keywordis displayed when you input an incomplete keyword and press the space bar. For example, forthe enable command, input en or ena (in the common user mode) and press the space bar.

Precaution

If the system does not return the commands after you press the space bar, it indicates thefollowing:

l An incorrect command is entered. In this case, check the command and enter the correctcommand.

For example, when you enter display incorrectly in the privilege mode, you cannot entera space.huawei#dip

l The input keyword conflicts with other keywords.



28

For example, when you enter dis in the privilege mode, the system cannot find a matchingkeyword for it. This is because there are two commands that start with dis: disable anddisplay.huawei#dis

3.2.3 Edit CharacteristicsYou can press the corresponding keys to enter the parameters of command lines and thekeywords.

Function

The CLI provides basic command edit functions. It allows multi-line editing, with a maximumof 255 bytes for each command.

Specifications

Table 3-1 lists the edit functions.

Table 3-1 Edit functions

Key Function

Common key If the edit buffer is not full, press one of these keys to move thecursor to the right from its current position.

BackSpace When you press this key, the character before the cursor isdeleted and the cursor moves to the left. The cursor stops whenit reaches the beginning of the command.

Left arrow key ← or Ctrl+A

When you press the key(s), the cursor moves one character tothe left.

Right arrow key → or Ctrl+D

When you press the key(s), the cursor moves one character tothe right.

Up/Down arrow key ↑↓ When you press one of the keys, the history commands aredisplayed. In the case of certain terminals that do not support theup/down arrow keys, you can press Ctrl+P to select the previoushistory command.

Ctrl+U When you press the keys, the characters before the current cursorare deleted and the cursor moves to the beginning of the line.

Ctrl+K When you press the keys, the characters after the current cursorare deleted and the cursor moves to the end of the line.

Ctrl+F When you press the keys, a string is searched.

Ctrl+B When you press the keys, the cursor moves to the end of the line.

ESC When you press this key twice, the current entered informationis cancelled.



29

NOTE

Common keys refer to letter keys, number keys, and punctuation keys.

3.2.4 Interaction CharacteristicsWhen you enter an incomplete command, namely, when you press Enter after the enteredkeyword or parameter, the CLI system prompts the subsequent keywords that can be enteredand prompts the parameter type of the keyword.

Function

The UA5000 provides the interaction function of the CLI. In the interactive mode, if you enteran incomplete command and press Enter, the system prompts the subsequent keyword that canbe input and the parameter type of the keyword. When you input ?, the system prompts the helpinformation of the command.

Example

To use the CLI interaction mode to run the load program command, do as follows:

huawei#load program{ xmodem<K>|tftp<K>|ftp<K>|sftp<K> }:

To run the load program command after the interaction mode is disabled, do as follows:

huawei#undo smart huawei#load program tftp ^ % Incomplete command, and error detected at '^'

After the interaction mode is disabled, enter the command and press Enter. The system directlyruns the command. If the entered command is incomplete, the system prompts an error.

To display the help information provided by the command, enter the keyword switch andpress ?.

huawei#switch ? --------------------------------------------- Command of user Mode: --------------------------------------------- language-mode Set language parameter

3.2.5 Parameter PromptIn the interactive mode, the system prompts the type of the parameter that is to be configuredon the CLI.

Function

In interactive mode, the CLI characters such as <K> and are used to express the parametertype of a keyword.

Specifications

Table 3-2 lists the meaning of the CLI characters supported by the UA5000.



30

Table 3-2 Meaning of the CLI characters

Character Meaning

<K> Keyword

<E> Enumeration. Items that follow this character are the availableoptions.

 ULONG. Information that follows this character is the range of thevalue to be entered.

<L> LONG. Information that follows this character is the range of thevalue to be entered.

<S> Character string. Information that follows this character is the lengthof the character string to be entered.

 IP address

<M> MASK, such as the mask of an IP address.

 MAC address

<H> Hexadecimal number. The system supports the input of "0x". Bydefault, the system supports decimal numbers.

<D><yyyy-mm-dd> Date

<T><hh:mm:ss> Time

NOTE

The CLI supports the input of hexadecimal numbers; however, if you do not enter "0x" when entering ahexadecimal number, the system considers the entered number as a decimal number.

3.2.6 Display CharacteristicsThe CLI system supports the function of pausing the displayed information when there is a lotof information to be displayed.

FunctionWhen you query information, sometimes the CLI fails to display the information on one screenbecause there is a lot of information to be displayed. In this case, you can use the pause functionto view the information displayed on multiple screens.

NOTE

l One screen here refers to one screen displayed by the HyperTerminal software of a PC. One screen contains24 lines.

l The system supports the function where the screen scrolls upward automatically, that is, the displayedinformation cannot be paused. Run the scroll command to enable the auto-scroll function, and run the undoscroll command to disable the auto-scroll function. By default, the auto-scroll function is disabled.



31

SpecificationsTable 3-3 lists three options for viewing the information when the display is paused.

Table 3-3 Display characteristics

Key Function

Press Q or Ctrl+C when thedisplay is paused.

Suspend the display and execution of the commands.

Press the space bar when thedisplay is paused.

Continue to display the information on the next screen.

Press Enter when the display ispaused.

Continue to display the information on the next line.

3.2.7 Saving and Querying the History CommandsThe CLI system automatically saves history commands that you enter. You can obtain historycommands saved in the CLI at any time and execute them repeatedly.

ContextBy default, a maximum of 10 history commands can be saved for every user in the CLI, and amaximum of 10 history commands can be queried.

The queried history commands are valid only for the current user. After the user re-logs in, thehistory commands are cleared.

Procedure

Step 1 Run the history-command max-size command to set the number of history commands that canbe saved in the command buffer.

Step 2 Run the display history-command command to query history commands.

----End

ExampleTo set the number of history commands that can be saved in the command buffer to 12, do asfollows:

huawei(config)#history-command max-size 12huawei(config)#display history-command

-------------------------------------------------- No. Command -------------------------------------------------- 12 display history-command 11 history-command max-size 20 10 display traffic table from-index 0 9 traffic table atm srvcategory cbr tdtype noClpNoScr clp01Pcr 160 priority 6 priority-policy tag-In-Package 8 modify rate table row 128 160



32

7 display rate table row 6 config 5 quit 4 quit 3 display power environment info 2 emu 1 display power run info --------------------------------------------------

3.2.8 CLI Error PromptWhen you enter an incorrect command, which cannot be executed by the system, the systemprompts an error.

FunctionThe system checks the syntax of each command that is entered, and executes the command if itpasses the check. If the command fails to pass the check, the system prompts an error.

SpecificationsTable 3-4 lists the common CLI error prompts.

Table 3-4 Common CLI error prompts

Error Prompt Cause

Unknown command This command and keyword cannot be found. The parameter typeis incorrect. The parameter value exceeds the threshold.

Incomplete command The entered command is incomplete.

Too many parameters There are too many entered parameters.

Ambiguous command The entered command is ambiguous.

Parameter error The parameter is wrong and the cursor location indicates wherethe error exists.

3.3 Basic Operation Through CLIThis topic describes how to maintain and manage the UA5000 through CLI.

3.3.1 Obtaining the Online Help InformationWhen you need to query the help information about the current command or commands in thecurrent mode, you can enter "?" after the command prompt or command keyword. If the matchinginformation is not found, it indicates that the help list is empty.

ContextThe CLI provides the following methods to obtain online help:

l Full help



33

When you enter ? following the prompt, you can obtain help information about thecurrent commands that are available.When you enter ? following a complete keyword, you can obtain help information aboutall the commands matching the keyword and the parameters used by the commands.

l Partial help

When you enter ? following an incomplete keyword, you can obtain help informationabout the commands matching the incomplete keyword.

ExampleTo display the help information about all the available commands in global config mode, do asfollows:huawei(config)#?--------------------------------------------- Command of config Mode:---------------------------------------------ati Enter into ATI command modeaulaw Set A/u lawboard <Group> board command groupcdi Enter into CDI command modeclock <Group> clock command groupconfig System configdns Configure DNSdsl Enter the dsl modedsp <Group> dsp command groupdtmf DTMF parameter configuree2etrace End to end signalling traceemu Emu command groupesl Enter ESL(Ethernet Subscriber Line) user command modefax FAX parameter configurefe Config FE Parameterframe <Group> frame command groupgtcstatistics <Group>gtcstatistics command grouph248statistics H248 message statistichwcport HWC port groupinfo-center <Group> info-center command group---- More ( Press 'Q' to break ) ----

To display the help information about the commands matching the keyword display, do asfollows:huawei(config)#display ?--------------------------------------------- Command of privilege Mode:---------------------------------------------alarm Display alarm related informationarp-detect ARP link detectauth Authentication parametersbackup-server Display backup server configurationboard Command Keyword:c-channel C-channelclock Display information about clock sourceconfig System configcurrent-configuration Current configurationdata Display data synchronization statusdetect-group Detect link groupdigitmap Digitmap configuredigitmap-timer DMM T timer configuredns Display DNS informationdsp <Group> dsp command groupdtmf DTMF parameter configuree2etrace End to end signalling traceemu Display environment monitor unit(s)esl The online user information



34

ETH0-ETH1 Display ETH0-ETH1 port state---- More ( Press 'Q' to break ) ----

To display the help information about the commands matching the keyword d, do as follows:

huawei(config)#d?--------------------------------------------- Command of config Mode:---------------------------------------------dns Configure DNSdsl Enter the dsl modedsp <Group> dsp command groupdtmf DTMF parameter configure--------------------------------------------- Command of privilege Mode:---------------------------------------------debugging Enable system debugging functionsdiagnose Change into diagnose modedisable Turn off privileged mode commandsdisplay Display informationduplicate <Group> duplicate command group--------------------------------------------- Command of user Mode:---------------------------------------------display Display information

Related OperationTable 3-5 lists the related operation for obtaining online help information.

Table 3-5 Related operation for obtaining online help information


Obtain system help information help

3.3.2 Switching the Terminal LanguageThe UA5000 system supports two languages by default, which are the local language and generallanguage. You can select a preferred language as the terminal display language.

ContextThe UA5000 supports English and Chinese. English is the default language.

Procedure

Step 1 Run the switch language-mode command to switch from one language to another.

----End

ExampleTo run the switch language-mode command to switch from one language to another, do asfollows:

huawei(config)#switch language-mode The current language has been switched to general language



35

Related Operation

Table 3-6 lists the related operation for switching the terminal language.

Table 3-6 Related operation for switching the terminal language

To... Run the Command... Remarks

Display the terminal language display language This command isnot available forcommon users.

3.3.3 Configuring the System TimeThe system time of the device can be configured in the following format: hh:mm:ss yyyy-mm-dd, namely, hour:minute:second year-month-date.

Contextl The system time takes effect immediately after the configuration.l When you configure the system time, the system checks the time for its validity strictly.

Invalid settings are prohibited. Exercise caution when configuring the leap year and leapmonth.

Procedure

Step 1 Run the time command to configure the system time.

Step 2 Run the display time command to query the system time.

----End

Example

To configure the current system time, do as follows:

huawei#time 09:00:00 2007-02-28huawei#display time{ <cr>|dst<K>|time-stamp<K> }: command: display time2007-02-28 09:00:06+08:00

3.3.4 Setting the System NameSet the system name to differentiate various UA5000s.

Contextl By default, the device name is UA5000.l The new system name takes effect immediately after it is set.



36

l After the system name is changed, the command line prompt changes to the new nameaccordingly.

Procedure

Step 1 Run the sysname command to set the system name.

----End

Example

To name the first UA5000 in the New York office in the USA, do as follows:

huawei(config)#sysname NY_UA5000_ANY_UA5000_A(config)#

3.3.5 Setting the Terminal TypeDifferent terminals feature different edit characteristics. The system divides terminals into twotypes, namely, standard terminals (ANSI) and VT series terminals so that it is compatible withmost terminals.

Contextl The default terminal type is ANSI.l Certain terminal tools, such as HyperTerminal, telnet, and neterm, allow you to set the

terminal types. You can use the associated menu to set the terminal emulation type so thatthe type of terminal tool is the same as the type of terminal in the system.

Procedure

Step 1 Run the terminal type command to set the terminal type.

Step 2 Run the display terminal type command to query the terminal type that is set.

----End

Example

To set the terminal type as VT100, do as follows:

huawei#terminal type vt100huawei#display terminal typeThe terminal type: VT100

3.3.6 Setting the Timeout Exit TimeSet the timeout exit time. During this time, if the information is not entered on the terminal, thesystem allows the terminal to exit the system automatically.

Context

By default, the system allows the terminal to exit the system if the information is not entered onthe terminal for 5 minutes.



37

Procedure

Step 1 Run the idle-timeout command to set the timeout exit time.

Step 2 Run the display idle-timeout command to query the preset timeout exit time.

----End

ExampleTo set the timeout exit time to 255 minutes, do as follows:

huawei>idle-timeout 255huawei>display idle-timeout The timeout value is set to 255 minutes currently. If there is no input fromterminal during this time, the user will be disconnected

Related OperationTable 3-7 lists the related operation for setting the timeout exit time.

Table 3-7 Related operation for setting the timeout exit time


Set the timeout exit time to thedefault value, that is, 120 minutes

undo idle-timeout

3.3.7 Locking the TerminalLock the terminal to prevent other users from accessing the terminal by using the name of theonline user.

ContextAfter a terminal is locked, if you press any button on the terminal, the system prompts you toenter the password. After entering the correct password, you can operate the terminal.

Procedure

Step 1 Run the terminal hold command to lock the terminal.

----End

ExampleTo lock the current CLI terminal and then to unlock it, do as follows:

huawei(config)#terminal hold Hold Password(<=15 chars): Confirm Password(<=15 chars): The user terminal has been held Hold Password(<=15 chars)://Press any key and the system prompts you to enter the unlocking password.



38

huawei(config)# //Input the correct password and the system unlocks the terminal.

Related OperationTable 3-8 lists the related operation for locking the terminal.

Table 3-8 Related operation for locking the terminal


Unlock the terminal undo terminal hold

3.3.8 Clearing the Terminal ScreenWhen you need to highlight certain input or output information, you can clear the current displayon the terminal screen. Then, the prompt is displayed on the upper left corner of the screen.

ContextRunning the cls command clears only the information that is displayed on the screen, and doesnot clear the information in the buffer.

Procedure

Step 1 Run the cls command to clear the terminal screen.

----End

ExampleTo clear the screen output, do as follows:

huawei>cls

3.3.9 Querying the Version InformationQuery the information about the software version of the current system or board.

ContextBy running the display version command, you can obtain the version of normal boards only.You cannot obtain the version of a faulty board by running this command.

Procedure

Step 1 Run the display version command to query the version information.

----End

ExampleTo query the system version, do as follows:



39

huawei(config)#display version

UA5000PVMV100R017 RELEASE SOFTWARE Copyright (c) 1998-2007 by Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd Uptime is 0 day(s), 15 hour(s), 30 minute(s), 11 second(s)

3.3.10 Querying the CPU Usage of a BoardQuery the CPU usage of a board to check whether it exceeds the threshold. When the CPU usageof the board exceeds the threshold, the system reports an alarm. Attach importance to the alarm.

Procedure

Step 1 Run the display cpu command to query the CPU usage of a board.

----End

ExampleTo query the CPU usage of the control board, do as follows:

huawei>display cpu 0/5 CPU occupancy: 17%

3.3.11 Testing the Network StatusCheck the network connectivity and whether the host is reachable, how to test all the gatewaysthrough which the data packets sent from a host to the destination pass, and how to locate networkfaults.

ContextThe commands used to test network status include ping and tracert.

l ping is used to check the network connectivity and whether the host is reachable.l tracert is used to test the gateways through which data packets sent from a host to the

destination pass. tracert can also be used to check the connectivity of a network and locatefaults in the network. The process of running the tracert command is as follows:– The host sends a packet with the time to live (TTL) of 1 to the destination.– The gateway returns an Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) packet to indicate

the failure in sending the packet due to TTL timeout.– The host sends a packet with the TTL of 2.– The gateway also returns a packet indicating TTL timeout in the second hop.The process repeats until the packet reaches the destination.In this way, the system records the source address of each ICMP TTL timeout message,and provides a path along which an IP packet passes to the destination.

Procedure

Step 1 Run the ping command to test the network status.

Step 2 Run the tracert command to test the network status.

----End



40

ExampleTo test the network status by running the ping command, do as follows:

huawei(config)#ping 10.11.52.240 PING 10.11.52.240: 56 data bytes, press CTRL_C to break Reply from 10.11.52.240: bytes=56 Sequence=0 ttl=64 time = 10 ms Reply from 10.11.52.240: bytes=56 Sequence=1 ttl=64 time = 10 ms Reply from 10.11.52.240: bytes=56 Sequence=2 ttl=64 time = 13 ms Reply from 10.11.52.240: bytes=56 Sequence=3 ttl=64 time = 10 ms Reply from 10.11.52.240: bytes=56 Sequence=4 ttl=64 time = 10 ms --- 10.11.52.240 Ping statistics --- 5 packets transmitted 5 packets received 0.00% packet loss round-trip min/avg/max = 10/10/13 ms

To test the network status by running the tracert command, do as follows:

huawei#tracert 10.11.106.133traceroute to 10.11.106.133 max hops 30 ,packet 40 bytes press CTRL_C to break 1 253 ms 476 ms 508 ms 10.11.120.62 2 * * * Request timed out. 3 * * * Request timed out. 4 4 ms 4 ms 5 ms 10.11.106.133



41

4 Configuring the NMS

About This Chapter

This topic describes the examples and related operations for configuring the N2000 BMS so thatyou can manage the UA5000 through the N2000 BMS.

4.1 Introduction to the NMSIntroduction to the NMS includes the NMS protocols and NMS maintenance mode supportedby the UA5000.

4.2 Configuration Example of an Outband NMSThe UA5000 is connected to the iManager N2000 NMS workstation through outbandmaintenance network port ETH0 on the PVM board. Thus, you can maintain and manage theUA5000 on the iManager N2000 NMS workstation.

4.3 Configuration Example of an Inband NMSThe UA5000 is connected to the iManager N2000 NMS workstation through inbandmaintenance network port ETH1 on the PVM board. Thus, you can maintain and manage theUA5000 on the iManager N2000 NMS workstation.

4.4 Configuring the SNMP AgentConfiguring the SNMP agent means configuring the community name and read-write authority,enabling sending the trap packet, and configuring the IP address of the target host for the trappacket, administrator ID of the device, and location of device.

UA5000 Universal Access UnitConfiguration Guide-PVM CLI 4 Configuring the NMS


42

4.1 Introduction to the NMSIntroduction to the NMS includes the NMS protocols and NMS maintenance mode supportedby the UA5000.

Service Description

The UA5000 provides the NMS interface, and uses the Simple Network Management Protocol(SNMP) to communicate with the NMS. The UA5000 supports the iManager N2000 BroadbandManagement System (N2000 BMS).

The N2000 BMS manages the UA5000 through the NMS interface of the UA5000. TheUA5000 provides the status information for the N2000 BMS by sending the trap packet, thusreporting certain emergency events.


The UA5000 supports two NMS modes: inband NMS mode and outband NMS mode.

The UA5000 supports the following protocol: SNMPv1, SNMPv2c, SNMPv3.

4.2 Configuration Example of an Outband NMSThe UA5000 is connected to the iManager N2000 NMS workstation through outbandmaintenance network port ETH0 on the PVM board. Thus, you can maintain and manage theUA5000 on the iManager N2000 NMS workstation.

Networking

Figure 4-1 shows the example network for configuring the outband NMS.

Figure 4-1 Example network for configuring the outband NMS

COM

ETH1ETH0

PVMB/PVMD

UA5000

NMS workstationIP address: 10.10.21.1/24

IP address: 10.10.20.1/24

Router

Data Plan

Table 4-1 provides the data plan for configuring the outband NMS.



43

Table 4-1 Data plan for configuring the outband NMS

Item Data

UA5000 maintenance network port (ETH0) IP address: 10.10.20.1/24

NMS (network management system) IP address: 10.10.21.1/24


Figure 4-2 shows the flowchart for configuring the outband NMS.

Figure 4-2 Flowchart for configuring the outband NMS

Start

End

Set the IP address of themaintenance network port


Set the SNMP parameters

Enable trap sending

Set the IP address of the targethost for traps

Set the source address for trapsending

Save the data

Procedure

Step 1 Set the IP address of the maintenance network port.huawei(config)#interface outbandhuawei(config-outband)#ip address 10.10.20.1 255.255.255.0 10.10.20.0{ <cr>|vlan_tag<K> }: Command: ip address 10.10.20.1 255.255.255.0 10.10.20.0 Considering the reliability of network, suggest to config vlan for outband IP . Continue?(y/n)[n]: y



44

huawei(config-outband)#quithuawei(config)#

Step 2 Set the NMS working mode to the outband mode.huawei(config)#sysman mode outband

Step 3 Set the simple network management protocol (SNMP) parameters.l Set the community name.

huawei(config)#snmp-agent community read publichuawei(config)#snmp-agent community write private

l Set the administrator ID and the contact method.huawei(config)#snmp-agent sys-info contact HW-075528780808

l Set the device location.huawei(config)#snmp-agent sys-info location Shenzhen

l Set the SNMP version.huawei(config)#snmp-agent sys-info version v1

Step 4 Enable the transmission of trap packets.huawei(config)#snmp-agent trap enable standard

Step 5 Set the IP address of the target host for trap packets.huawei(config)#snmp-agent target-host trap address 10.10.21.1 securityname private

Step 6 Save the data.huawei(config)#save

NOTE

This topic describes the data plan only on the UA5000. To communicate with the network, configure the relateddata on the router.

----End

ResultAfter the configuration, you should be able to manage the UA5000 through the N2000 BMS.

4.3 Configuration Example of an Inband NMSThe UA5000 is connected to the iManager N2000 NMS workstation through inbandmaintenance network port ETH1 on the PVM board. Thus, you can maintain and manage theUA5000 on the iManager N2000 NMS workstation.

NetworkingFigure 4-3 shows the example network for configuring the inband NMS.

Figure 4-3 Example network for configuring the inband NMSPVMB/PVMD

UA5000NMS workstation

IP address: 10.10.21.1/24

IP address: 10.10.20.1/16

RouterRouter

COM

ETH1

ETH0



45

Data PlanTable 4-2 provides the data plan for configuring the inband NMS.

Table 4-2 Data plan for configuring the inband NMS

Item Data

UA5000 maintenance port (ETH1) IP address: 10.10.20.1/16 (directly use theprimary service IP address)Default gateway: 10.10.1.1

NMS IP address: 10.10.21.1/24

Default gateway: 10.10.1.10

Configuration FlowchartFigure 4-4 shows the flowchart for configuring the inband NMS.

Figure 4-4 Flowchart for configuring the inband NMS

Start


Query the IP addressof the NMS port

Set the community nameand the access authority

Enable the transmissionof Trap packets

Save the data

End

Set the IP address of thetarget host for Trap packets



46

Procedure

Step 1 Set the NMS working mode as inband.huawei(config)#sysman mode inband

Step 2 Query the IP address of the NMS port.huawei(config)#display ip address OutBand: IPAddress............: 10.144.78.92 SubMask..............: 255.255.254.0 GateWay..............: 10.144.78.1 MacIndex.............: 1 MacAddress...........: 00-E0-FC-8B-77-78 VlanID...............: --

Eth: IPAddress............: 10.10.20.1//The first service IP address that is displayed is the primary service IP address. SubMask..............: 255.255.0.0 GateWay..............: 10.10.1.1 MacIndex.............: 0 MacAddress...........: 00-E0-FC-8B-77-77 VlanID...............: --

IPAddress............: 10.10.10.2 SubMask..............: 255.255.255.0 GateWay..............: 10.10.10.1 MacIndex.............: 0 MacAddress...........: 00-E0-FC-8B-77-77 VlanID...............: --

NOTE

In inband NMS mode, the primary service IP address is used as the management IP address.

Step 3 Set the community name and the access authority.huawei(config)#snmp-agent community read publichuawei(config)#snmp-agent community write private

Step 4 Enable the transmission of trap packets.huawei(config)#snmp-agent trap enable standard

Step 5 Set the IP address of the target host for trap packets.huawei(config)#snmp-agent target-host trap address 10.10.21.1 securityname private


NOTE

This topic describes the data plan only on the UA5000. To communicate with the network, configure the relateddata on the router.

----End

ResultAfter the configuration, you should be able to manage the UA5000 through the N2000 BMS.



47

4.4 Configuring the SNMP AgentConfiguring the SNMP agent means configuring the community name and read-write authority,enabling sending the trap packet, and configuring the IP address of the target host for the trappacket, administrator ID of the device, and location of device.

4.4.1 Configuring the Community Name and Read-Write AuthorityThe SNMP community is a collection of one SNMP agent and a group of SNMP managerswhose identities and access control are defined. Each community is identified by a communityname consisting of a character string of eight characters, namely, the password. An SNMP agentgenerally provides two communities. One community is read-only, and is called the readcommunity. The other community is readable and writable. This community can be created anddeleted, which is called the write community.

Contextl In the N2000 BMS, the default name of the read-only community is public, and the default

name of the write community is private.l The UA5000 supports a maximum of 10 community names.l The name of the write community in the host should be the same as the name of the write

community in the BMS workstation.

Procedure

Step 1 Run the snmp-agent community command to configure the community name and read-writeauthority.

Step 2 Run the display snmp-agent community command to query the information about thecommunity name.

----End

ExampleTo add a community with the name of public, which is read-only, do as follows:

huawei(config)#snmp-agent community read publichuawei(config)#display snmp-agent community read Community name:public Storage type: nonVolatile View name:ViewDefault

Total number is 1

Related OperationTable 4-3 lists the related operation for configuring the community name and read-writeauthority.



48

Table 4-3 Related operation for configuring the community name and read-write authority


Delete the existing community name undo snmp-agent community

4.4.2 Enabling Sending the Trap PacketEnable sending the trap packet. When the device is faulty, or the important data of the device ismodified by the user or other managers, the SNMP agent sends the trap packet to inform theSNMP manager.

Context

By default, sending the trap packet from the device to the BMS is disabled.

Procedure

Step 1 Run the snmp-agent trap enable standard command to enable sending the trap packet.

Step 2 Run the display snmp-agent trap enable command to query whether sending the trap packetfrom the device is enabled.

----End

Example

To enable sending the trap packet from the device to the BMS, do as follows:

huawei(config)#snmp-agent trap enable standardhuawei(config)#display snmp-agent trap enable Trap is enabled

Related Operation

Table 4-4 lists the related operation for enabling sending the trap packet.

Table 4-4 Related operation for enabling sending the trap packet


Disable sending the trap packetfrom the device

undo snmp-agent trap enable standard

4.4.3 Configuring the IP Address of the Target Host for the TrapPacket

After enabling sending the trap packet, you must configure the IP address of the target host forthe trap packet correctly. Thus, the BMS can receive the trap packet.



49

ContextYou can configure a maximum of 20 target hosts for the system.

ProcedureStep 1 Run the snmp-agent target-host trap command to configure the IP address of the target host

for the trap packet.

Step 2 Run the display snmp-agent target-host command to query the target host of the trap packet.

----End

ExampleTo configure the IP address of the target host for the trap packet to 10.71.53.108, by usingcommunity name private, do as follows:

huawei(config)#snmp-agent target-host trap address 10.71.53.108 securityname private v3 authenticationhuawei(config)#display snmp-agent target-host Traphost list: Traphost address: 10.71.53.108 Traphost portnumber: 162 Traphost securityname: private Traphost trapversion: v3 Traphost securityLevel: authentication

Total number is 1

Related OperationTable 4-5 lists the related operation for configuring the IP address of the target host for the trappacket.

Table 4-5 Related operation for configuring the IP address of the target host for the trap packet


Delete the IP address of the target hostfor the trap packet

undo snmp-agent target-host

4.4.4 Configuring the Administrator ID of the DeviceThis topic describes how to re-configure the administrator ID of the device according to thecontact method of the actual device administrator.

ContextBy default, the administrator ID is "R&D Shenzhen, Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.".

ProcedureStep 1 Run the snmp-agent sys-info contact command to configure the administrator ID of the device.

Step 2 Run the display snmp-agent sys-info contact command to query the administrator ID of thedevice.

----End



50

Example

To configure the administrator ID of the device to HW-075528780808, do as follows:

huawei(config)#snmp-agent sys-info contact HW-075528780808huawei(config)#display snmp-agent sys-info contact The contact person for this managed node: HW-075528780808

Related Operation

Table 4-6 lists the related operation for configuring the administrator ID of the device.

Table 4-6 Related operation for configuring the administrator ID of the device


Restore the default configuration of theadministrator ID of the device

undo snmp-agent sys-info contact

4.4.5 Configuring the Location of the DeviceRe-configure the location of the device according to the city and region of the actual device.Thus, you can distinguish the devices of different locations in the BMS.

Context

By default, the location of the device is "Shenzhen China".

Procedure

Step 1 Run the snmp-agent sys-info location command to configure the location of the device.

Step 2 Run the display snmp-agent sys-info location command to query the location of the device.

----End

Example

To configure the location of the device to Shanghai China, do as follows:

huawei(config)#snmp-agent sys-info location Shanghai Chinahuawei(config)#display snmp-agent sys-info location The physical location of this node: Shanghai China

Related Operation

Table 4-7 lists the related operation for configuring the location of the device.



51

Table 4-7 Related operation for configuring the location of the device


Restore the default configurationof the location of the device

undo snmp-agent sys-info location



52

5 User Management

About This Chapter

Managing the user includes the classification of users supported by the UA5000 and how to add,modify, disconnect, or delete a user.

5.1 Introduction to the Operation UserThe operation user is the user who can perform the configuration and maintenance operationson the device through the CLI terminal. The operation users at different levels obtain differentauthorities.

5.2 Adding a UserAfter a user is added, the user can access the device and perform the configuration andmanagement operations on the device.

5.3 Modifying the User AttributesYou can modify the attributes of existing users, such as authority, password, times of re-logins,and appended information.

5.4 Disconnecting an Online UserDisconnect an online user forcibly to prevent the user from logging in to the device.

5.5 Deleting a UserOnly the user at the super user level can delete users at lower levels. The deleted user is notpermitted to log in to the device and implement configuration and management operations onthe device.

UA5000 Universal Access UnitConfiguration Guide-PVM CLI 5 User Management


53

5.1 Introduction to the Operation UserThe operation user is the user who can perform the configuration and maintenance operationson the device through the CLI terminal. The operation users at different levels obtain differentauthorities.

Service SpecificationsIn terms of authority, UA5000 users are divided into four levels: common user, operator,administrator and super user. Users at all levels can add a user only at a level that is lower thantheirs. Table 5-1 lists the authority for users at all levels.

Table 5-1 Authority for users at all levels

Level Authority

Common user Common users can perform basic system operations and simple queryoperations.

Operator Operators can configure the device and services.

Administrator l Administrators can perform all operations.l Administrator can maintain the device, user accounts and user

authority.l Multiple administrators can exist in the system.

Super user l The super user can perform all operations.l The super user can maintain the device, user accounts and user

authority.l The super user is of the highest level in the system. Only one super

user exists in the system.

5.2 Adding a UserAfter a user is added, the user can access the device and perform the configuration andmanagement operations on the device.

Contextl The super user and administrators can add a user at a level that is lower than their level.

That is:– The super user can add the administrators, operators, and common users.– The administrators can add only the operators and common users.

l A user name must be unique. It cannot be all or online.l Multiple users can be successively added. In one system, a maximum of 127 operating

users can be added. That is, including user root, a total of 128 users can be added to onesystem.



54

When adding a user, you need to configure the user attributes, including the user account,password, authority, number of re-logins and supplementary information. Table 5-2 lists theuser attributes.

Table 5-2 User attributes

User Attributes Description

Account It is also called user name. It consists of 1–15 printable characters. Itmust not be less than six characters in length. The account must beunique. No space is allowed in the user name. The user name is not casesensitive.

Password It consists of 0–15 characters. It must not be less than eight charactersin length. It must contain at least one letter and a number. The passwordis case sensitive.

Authority In terms of authority, users can be classified into common users,operators, and administrators.

Times of re-logins Whether a user can log in to the device from multiple terminals dependson the number of re-logins of the user. The range of the number of re-logins is 0–4. In normal case, it is set to 1.

Supplementaryinformation

It is a kind of optional and supplementary information. It is a string ofcharacters. It can be null. It can contain a maximum of 30 characters. Itcan be the telephone number or address of the user.

Procedure

Step 1 Run the terminal user name command to add a user.

Step 2 Run the display terminal user command to query user information.

----End

ExampleAssume the following:

l The user name is huawei.l The password is huawei123.l The level is common user.l The number of re-logins is 3.l The supplementary information is "user".

To add the user, do as follows:

huawei(config)#terminal user name User profile name(<=15 chars)[root]: User Name(<=15 chars):huawei User Password(<=15 chars):huawei123//This is not displayed. Confirm Password(<=15 chars):huawei123//This is not displayed. User profile name(<=15 chars)[root]: User's Level:



55

1. Common User 2. Operator 3. Administrator:3 Permitted Reenter Number(0--4):3 User's Appended Info(<=30 chars):user Adding user succeeds Repeat this operation? (y/n)[n]:nhuawei(config)#display terminal user all ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- Name Level Status Reenter Profile Append Num Info ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- huawei1 Admin Online 4 root ----- huawei User Offline 3 root user ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- Total record(s) number: 2

Related OperationTable 5-3 lists the related operation for adding a user.

Table 5-3 Related operation for adding a user


Delete a user undo terminal user name l Only the super user andadministrators can delete theusers who have lower authority.

l Users cannot deletethemselves.

l User root cannot be deleted.l An online user cannot be

deleted. To delete the onlineuser, you need to disconnect theuser first.

l Multiple users can be deleted ata time.

5.3 Modifying the User AttributesYou can modify the attributes of existing users, such as authority, password, times of re-logins,and appended information.

5.3.1 Changing a User LevelOnly the super user and the administrator have the right to change the level of a user at a lowerlevel. In addition, the super user and the administrator can only change the user level to a levellower than their own levels.

Contextl The super user can change the level of a user to the level of a common user, an operator,

or an administrator.l Administrators can change the level of a user to the level of a common user or an operator.



56

Procedure

Step 1 Run the terminal user level command to change a user level.

Step 2 Run the display terminal user command to query a user level.

----End

Example

To change a common user huawei to an operator, do as follows:

huawei(config)#terminal user level User Name(<=15 chars):huawei 1. Common User 2. Operator 3.Administrator:2 User's Level:2 Confirm Level: 2 Information will take effect when this user logs on next time Repeat this operation? (y/n)[n]:nhuawei(config)#display terminal user all --------------------------------------------------------------------------- Name Level Status ReenterNum AppendInfo --------------------------------------------------------------------------- root Super Online 1 none huawei Operator Offline 3 user --------------------------------------------------------------------------- Total record(s) number: 2

Related Operation

Table 5-4 lists the related operations for changing a user level.

Table 5-4 Related operations for changing a user level


Change the userpassword

terminal user password

Modify the number ofre-logins

terminal user reenter

Modify appendedinformation

terminal user apdinfo

5.3.2 Changing the User PasswordChange the user password regularly to ensure the device security. Only user root has the rightto change the passwords of other users.

Contextl The super user and administrators can change the passwords of users at lower levels

(including themselves). When changing the passwords of users at lower levels, the superuser and administrators need not enter the old passwords.



57

l The common users and operators can change only their own passwords, and need to enterthe old passwords.

Procedure

Step 1 Run the terminal user password command to change a user password.

Step 2 Log in to the device with the old user name and new password.

----End

ExampleTo change the password of common user huawei, do as follows:

huawei(config)#terminal user password User name (<=15 chars):huawei New password(<=15 chars):huawei123 //This is not displayed. Confirm Password(<=15 chars):huawei123 //This is not displayed. Information takes effect Repeat this operation? (y/n)[n]:n

Related OperationTable 5-5 lists the related operations for changing a user password.

Table 5-5 Related operations for changing a user password


Modify a user level terminal user level

Modify the number of re-logins terminal user reenter

Modify appended information terminal user apdinfo

5.3.3 Changing the Number of Re-loginsChange the number of re-logins from multiple terminals of a user to ensure the user authorityof re-logging in to the device.

Contextl The super user and administrators can modify the permitted number of re-logins of users

at lower levels.l It is not allowed to modify the permitted number of re-logins of the super user.

Procedure

Step 1 Run the terminal user reenter command to modify the permitted number of re-logins of a user.

Step 2 Run the display terminal user command to query the permitted number of re-logins of a user.

----End



58

ExampleTo change the permitted number of re-logins of common user huawei to 4, do as follows:

huawei(config)#terminal user reenter User Name(<=15 chars):huawei Permitted Reenter Number(0--4):4 Confirm Reenter Number(0--4):4 Information will take effect when this user logs on next time Repeat this operation? (y/n)[n]:nhuawei(config)#display terminal user all ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- Name Level Status Reenter Profile Append Num Info ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- root Super Online 1 root ----- huawei Operator Online 4 root user ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- Total record(s) number: 2

Related OperationTable 5-6 lists the related operations for modifying the permitted number of re-logins of a user.

Table 5-6 Related operations for modifying the permitted number of re-logins of a user



Modify a user password terminal user password

Modify appended information terminal user apdinfo

5.3.4 Modifying the Supplementary Information About a UserModify the supplementary information about a user regularly to update the user information intime.

Contextl The super user and administrators can modify their own supplementary information and

the supplementary information of users at lower levels.l Common users and operators can modify their own supplementary information.

ProcedureStep 1 Run the terminal user apdinfo command to modify the supplementary information about a

user.

Step 2 Run the display terminal user command to query the supplementary information about a user.

----End

ExampleTo modify the supplementary information of common user huawei, do as follows:



59

huawei(config)#terminal user apdinfo User name (<=15 chars):huawei User's Appended Info(<=30 chars):[email protected] Information takes effect Repeat this operation? (y/n)[n]:nhuawei(config)#display terminal user all ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- Name Level Status Reenter Profile Append Num Info ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- root Super Online 1 root ----- huawei Operator Online 4 root [email protected] ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- Total record(s) number: 2

Related OperationTable 5-7 lists the related operations for modifying the supplementary information about a user.

Table 5-7 Related operations for modifying the supplementary information about a user



Modify a user password terminal user password

Modify the number of re-logins terminal user reenter

5.4 Disconnecting an Online UserDisconnect an online user forcibly to prevent the user from logging in to the device.

ContextOnly the super user and administrators can disconnect an online user at lower levels.

Procedure

Step 1 Run the client kickoff command to disconnect a user.NOTE

Run the display client command to query the clientid.

Step 2 Run the display terminal user command to query the current users who have logged in.

----End

ExampleTo disconnect user 3, and confirm that the user is not in the list of the online users, do as follows:

huawei(config)#display terminal user online --------------------------------------------------------------------------- Name Level Status Reenter Profile Append Num Info --------------------------------------------------------------------------- huawei Admin Online 4 root -----



60

ww User Online 4 root user ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- Total record(s) number: 2huawei(config)#display client ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- ID Client name Domain name IP Address Login Time ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2 huawei -- 10.144.68.158 2007-10-22 11:17:5 3 ww -- 10.144.68.158 2007-10-22 11:18:1 -----------------------------------------------------------------------------huawei(config)#client kickoff 3 Are you sure to kick the user off?(y/n)[n]:y The user has been kicked off successfullyhuawei(config)#display terminal user online --------------------------------------------------------------------------- Name Level Status Reenter Profile Append Num Info --------------------------------------------------------------------------- huawei Admin Online 4 root ----- ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- Total record(s) number: 1

Related Operation

Table 5-8 lists the related operation for disconnecting an online user.

Table 5-8 Related operation for disconnecting an online user

To… Run the Command...

Delete a user undo terminal user name

5.5 Deleting a UserOnly the user at the super user level can delete users at lower levels. The deleted user is notpermitted to log in to the device and implement configuration and management operations onthe device.

Contextl Users cannot delete themselves.

l User root cannot be deleted.

l An online user cannot be deleted. To delete an online user, you need to disconnect the userfirst.

l Multiple users can be deleted at a time.

Procedure

Step 1 Run the undo terminal user name command to delete a user.

Step 2 Run the display terminal user command to verify that a user is deleted successfully.

----End



61

ExampleTo delete user huawei, do as follows:

huawei(config)#undo terminal user name User Name(<=15 chars):huawei Are you sure to delete the user?(y/n)[n]:y Deleting user succeeds Repeat this operation? (y/n)[n]:nhuawei(config)#display terminal user all ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- Name Level Status Reenter Profile Append Num Info ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- root Super Online 1 root ----- ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- Total record(s) number: 1

Related OperationTable 5-9 lists the related operations for deleting a user.

Table 5-9 Related operations for deleting a user


Disconnect an online user client kickoff

Add a user terminal user name



62

6 Device Management

About This Chapter

This topic describes how to manage the UA5000. Device management includes shelfmanagement and board management.

6.1 Introduction to the DeviceIntroduction to the device includes the management of the device and the types and status of thecontrol board and service board supported by UA5000.

6.2 Adding the Connection Between the ShelvesThe connection between shelves need not be added when only the master shelf exists. When themaster shelf and slave shelf are required, you must add a slave shelf and a connection betweenthe master shelf and slave shelf.

6.3 Setting the Description of a ShelfSet and change regularly the number of a test group or the description of a shelf to update theshelf information in time.

6.4 Resetting a Control BoardReset a control board to run the newly loaded program and database. If there is no standby controlboard, the resetting operation causes the resetting of all the service boards. Exercise cautionwhen performing this operation.

6.5 Adding a Service BoardAdding a service board is to provide you the data configuration when the service board is offline,namely, an operation when the actual service board is not inserted. The system checks theconfigured data in details. After the service board is added successfully and the service board isinserted, it runs according to the configuration.

6.6 Deleting a Service BoardWhen the service board in a certain slot is faulty or not required because of the system capacityreduction, you can delete the service board. When the service board is deleted successfully, youcan add a new service board in the idle slot.

6.7 Resetting a Service BoardYou can reset a service board when the service board does not work properly. The systemgenerates a fault alarm after the reset operation. The system generates a recovery alarm after theboard recovers.

UA5000 Universal Access UnitConfiguration Guide-PVM CLI 6 Device Management


63

6.8 Prohibiting a Service BoardWhen a service board does not work normally, or a certain port on a service board is faulty, youmust prohibit the service board first. When you prohibit a service board, you prohibit not onlythe normal services on the board but also any other operation till the service board is unprohibited(enabled).



64

6.1 Introduction to the DeviceIntroduction to the device includes the management of the device and the types and status of thecontrol board and service board supported by UA5000.

Service Descriptionl Shelf management includes the following: adding a shelf, adding a link between two

shelves, deleting a shelf, deleting a link between two shelves, configuring the attributes ofa shelf, querying shelf information, and querying a link between two shelves.

l Control board management includes the following: resetting a control board and queryingcontrol board information.

l Service board management includes the following: adding a service board offline,confirming a service board, deleting a service board, resetting a service board, prohibitinga service board, unprohibiting a service board, and querying the service board information.

You can use the HABD or HABL shelf as the master shelf and use the HABF as the slave shelffor the UA5000. Thus, the connection between shelves is supported.

When you use the HABM shelf as the master shelf for the UA5000 MiniMSAN, the connectionbetween shelves is not supported.

Introduction to Board Types

Table 6-1 lists the boards supported by the UA5000.

Table 6-1 Boards supported by the UA5000

Board Type Board Name

Control board PVMB, PVMD, and PVME

Service board A32, CSR, CSM, CDI, DSL, DSLE, DSLD, EDTB, SDL, SDLE, ATI,RSP, RSU, and HSL

Interface board EP1A, GP1A

Monitoring board ESC, FCBB/FCBA, PWMA, and FCBD

Secondary powersupply board

PWX

Rear access transferboard

E1TB, EFTB, HWCB, HWTB, RATB, and SAPB

Front accesstransfer board

E1TF, EFTF, HLAF, HLEF, HWCF, HWTF, PSTF, RATF, SLTF,SAPF, and WATF

Introduction to Board Status

Table 6-2 lists the service board status.



65

Table 6-2 Service board status

Status Remarks

Normal It indicates that the board is running in the normal state.

Failed It indicates that the board is faulty.

Config It indicates that the board is being configured.

Auto_find It indicates that the board is inserted, but not confirmed.

Prohibited It indicates that the board is prohibited.

6.2 Adding the Connection Between the ShelvesThe connection between shelves need not be added when only the master shelf exists. When themaster shelf and slave shelf are required, you must add a slave shelf and a connection betweenthe master shelf and slave shelf.

Contextl The master shelf and the PVM control board are in the normal state after the master shelf

is added.l The slave shelf is in the faulty state after it is added. The slave shelf is normal after the

connection is added between shelves.

ProcedureStep 1 Run the frame add command to add a shelf.

Step 2 Run the frame connect command to add a connection between shelves.

Step 3 Run the display frame info command to query the connection between shelves.

----End

ExampleTo add a connection between the master and slave shelves, do as follows:

huawei(config)#frame add 0 FrameType: 0 : MAIN_HABM_30(HABA) 1 : MAIN_HAFM_30(HABD) 2 : MAIN_HAFM_6(HABL) 3 : MAIN_H602HABD(HABD) 4 : MAIN_H601HABC(HABC) 5 : MAIN_H601HABO(HABO) 6 : MAIN_H601HABM(HABM) 7 : SLAVE_HAFS_32(HABE) 8 : SLAVE_HABS_32(HABB) 9 : SLAVE_HABS_30(HABA) 10 : SLAVE_HAFS_30(HABD) 11 : SLAVE_H602HABD(HABD) 12 : SLAVE_H602HABE(HABE) 13 : RSU_HAFS_30(HABD) 14 : RSU_HABS_30(HABA) 15 : RSU_HAFS_12(HABC) 16 : RSU_HAFS_6(HABL) 17 : RSUG_ONU60A(HUBO) 18 : RSUG_ONU04A 19 : RSUG_ONU08A 20 : RSP_19(HCB) 21 : RSP_15(HDB) 22 : RSP_14(HIB) 23 : RSP_12(HFB) 24 : RSP_10(HGB) 25 : RSP_6A(HMB) 26 : RSP_6B(HLB) 27 : UAM_R (HUBM) 28 : UAS_R (HUBS) 29 : UAFM_R(HUBE)



66

30 : UAFS_R(HUBF) 31 : UAMB_R(HUBB) 32 : ONU60A_R(HUBO) 33 : ONUF01D100_R(HUBL) 34 : VRSP_12(HABA) 35 : VRSP_18(HABA) 36 : HWTA(HIB_1) 37 : HWTA(HIB_2) 38 : HWTA(HIB_3) Please select frame type (0 ~ 38):1Frame add successfullyhuawei(config)#frame connect{ upframeid<0,97> }:0{ downframeid<0,97> }:1 Command: frame connect 0 1 Add the frame connection successfullyhuawei(config)#display frame connect --------------------------------------------- Record Upper-frame Lower-frame --------------------------------------------- 0 0 1 ---------------------------------------------

Related OperationTable 6-3 lists the related operation for configuring the connection between shelves.

Table 6-3 Related operation for configuring the connection between shelves


Delete the connection between shelves undo frame connect

6.3 Setting the Description of a ShelfSet and change regularly the number of a test group or the description of a shelf to update theshelf information in time.

Precautionl Set the information of the test group of a shelf before setting the number of the test group.l The number of the test group and the description of the shelf cannot be modified at the

same time.

Procedure

Step 1 Run the frame set command to set the description of a shelf.

Step 2 Run the display frame info command to query the description of a shelf.

----End

ExampleTo set the description of shelf 0 to huawei, do as follows:

huawei(config)#frame set 0 desc huaweihuawei(config)#display frame info 0 ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- Type : MAIN_F(H612HABD)



67

State: Normal Desc : huawei TestGroup: 0 EMU 0 ID: 5 Subnode:12 State:Communications failed EMU 1 ID: 4 Subnode:15 State:Communications failed EMU 2 ID: 2 Subnode:1 State:Communications normal EMU 3 ID: 1 Subnode:2 State:Communications failed ----------------------------------------------------------------------------

6.4 Resetting a Control BoardReset a control board to run the newly loaded program and database. If there is no standby controlboard, the resetting operation causes the resetting of all the service boards. Exercise cautionwhen performing this operation.

ContextThe control boards include active control board and standby control board.

Resetting an active control board results in the following:

l In the case of an active/standby configuration, the resetting operation does not affect theongoing services.

l If there is no standby control board, the resetting operation causes the resetting of all theservice boards. In other words, this operation causes the resetting of the system.

Precautionl The resetting of a control board may discard unsaved data. Therefore, before the operation,

run the save command to save the system data.l The board reset command cannot be used to reset a control board.

NOTE

Reset the system only when required. Otherwise, the services may be affected. In general, the systemis reset after a new application or database is loaded.

ProcedureStep 1 Run the reboot command to reset the control board.

----End

ExampleTo reset the active control board, do as follows:

huawei#reboot active Please check whether data has saved, the unsaved data may lose if reboot active board, are you sure to reboot active board? (y/n)[n]:y Reboot active will cause system forced switchover, are you sure to rebootactive board? (y/n)[n]:y

To reset the standby control board, do as follows:

huawei#reboot standby Please check whether data has saved, are you sure to reboot standby board? (y/n)[n]:y



68

6.5 Adding a Service BoardAdding a service board is to provide you the data configuration when the service board is offline,namely, an operation when the actual service board is not inserted. The system checks theconfigured data in details. After the service board is added successfully and the service board isinserted, it runs according to the configuration.

Precautionl After a service board is added offline, the status of the service board is faulty. The status

changes to normal only when the slot is inserted with a service board of the same type. Ifa service board of different type is inserted, the service board cannot be started because theslot and the service board do not match.

l You can add a service board only in an idle slot.

Procedure

Step 1 Run the board add command to add a service board offline.

Step 2 Insert the service board of the same type manually into the service shelf

Step 3 Run the board confirm command to confirm a service board.

Step 4 Run the display board command to query the status of a service board.

----End

ExampleTo insert an A32 board in slot 0/10, do as follows:

huawei(config)#board add 0/10 a32huawei(config)#board confirm 0/10huawei(config)#display board 0/10 -------------------------------------------------------- Board Name : A32 Board state : Normal Online state : - Board has ports : 32 0 port type : PSTN_PORT Licensed 1 port type : PSTN_PORT Licensed 2 port type : PSTN_PORT Licensed 3 port type : PSTN_PORT Licensed 4 port type : PSTN_PORT Licensed 5 port type : PSTN_PORT Licensed 6 port type : PSTN_PORT Licensed 7 port type : PSTN_PORT Licensed 8 port type : PSTN_PORT Licensed 9 port type : PSTN_PORT Licensed 10 port type : PSTN_PORT Licensed 11 port type : PSTN_PORT Licensed 12 port type : PSTN_PORT Licensed 13 port type : PSTN_PORT Licensed 14 port type : PSTN_PORT Licensed 15 port type : PSTN_PORT Licensed 16 port type : PSTN_PORT Licensed 17 port type : PSTN_PORT Licensed 18 port type : PSTN_PORT Licensed 19 port type : PSTN_PORT Licensed 20 port type : PSTN_PORT Licensed



69

21 port type : PSTN_PORT Licensed 22 port type : PSTN_PORT Licensed 23 port type : PSTN_PORT Licensed 24 port type : PSTN_PORT Licensed 25 port type : PSTN_PORT Licensed 26 port type : PSTN_PORT Licensed 27 port type : PSTN_PORT Licensed 28 port type : PSTN_PORT Licensed 29 port type : PSTN_PORT Licensed 30 port type : PSTN_PORT Licensed 31 port type : PSTN_PORT Licensed A/u Law : A law Port Impedance : Bureau machine in China(200+680|| 100nf) Port Current : 25mA steady current Work Environment : - Work Mode : - Ring Voltage : - --------------------------------------------------------

Related OperationTable 6-4 lists the related operation for adding a service board.

Table 6-4 Related operation for adding a service board


Delete aserviceboard

board delete Before deleting a service board,delete the data on it first. Otherwise,deleting the service board fails.

6.6 Deleting a Service BoardWhen the service board in a certain slot is faulty or not required because of the system capacityreduction, you can delete the service board. When the service board is deleted successfully, youcan add a new service board in the idle slot.

Precautionl Before deleting a service board, delete the data on it first. Otherwise, deleting the service

board fails.l A control board in the auto-find state cannot be deleted; however, the faulty standby PVM

board can be deleted.

Procedure

Step 1 Run the board delete command to delete a service board.

Step 2 Run the display board command to query the status of a board.

----End

ExampleTo delete the faulty service board in slot 0/12, do as follows:



70

huawei(config)#board delete 0/12Are you sure to delete this board? (y/n)[n]: y 0 frame 12 slot board delete successfullyhuawei(config)#display board 0/12 Failure: Board does not exist

Related OperationTable 6-5 lists the related operation for deleting a service board.

Table 6-5 Related operation for deleting a service board


Add a service board board add

6.7 Resetting a Service BoardYou can reset a service board when the service board does not work properly. The systemgenerates a fault alarm after the reset operation. The system generates a recovery alarm after theboard recovers.

Precautionl When the service board starts successfully after resetting, it reports the registration

information to the control board. The control board configures the data of the service boardto restore the services.

l Do not reset the power board.

ProcedureStep 1 Run the board reset command to reset a service board.

----End

ExampleTo reset the service board in slot 0/12, do as follows:huawei(config)#board reset 0/12 Are you sure to reset board? (y/n)[n]:y 0 frame 2 slot reset board message sent successfully...

6.8 Prohibiting a Service BoardWhen a service board does not work normally, or a certain port on a service board is faulty, youmust prohibit the service board first. When you prohibit a service board, you prohibit not onlythe normal services on the board but also any other operation till the service board is unprohibited(enabled).

ContextYou need to prohibit service boards in the following cases:



71

l The services of a board are suspended but not deleted.l The dynamic resources are released.

Precautionl The control board cannot be prohibited.l The service board that is in the auto-find state and is unconfirmed cannot be prohibited.l Prohibiting a service board interrupts the services of the board.l It is not allowed to prohibit the power board.

Procedure

Step 1 Run the board prohibit command to prohibit a service board.

Step 2 Run the display board command to query the status of a service board.

----End

ExampleTo prohibit the service board in slot 0/12, do as follows:

huawei(config)#board prohibit 0/12 Prohibiting board will interrupt all services on this board, are you sure to prohibit board? (y/n)[n]:y Prohibit board successfullyhuawei(config)#display board 0/12 -------------------------------------------------------- Board Name : A32 Board state : Prohibited Online state : Unmanageable Board has ports : 32 0 port type : PSTN_PORT Licensed 1 port type : PSTN_PORT Licensed 2 port type : PSTN_PORT Licensed 3 port type : PSTN_PORT Licensed 4 port type : PSTN_PORT Licensed 5 port type : PSTN_PORT Licensed 6 port type : PSTN_PORT Licensed 7 port type : PSTN_PORT Licensed 8 port type : PSTN_PORT Licensed 9 port type : PSTN_PORT Licensed 10 port type : PSTN_PORT Licensed 11 port type : PSTN_PORT Licensed 12 port type : PSTN_PORT Licensed 13 port type : PSTN_PORT Licensed 14 port type : PSTN_PORT Licensed 15 port type : PSTN_PORT Licensed 16 port type : PSTN_PORT Licensed 17 port type : PSTN_PORT Licensed 18 port type : PSTN_PORT Licensed 19 port type : PSTN_PORT Licensed 20 port type : PSTN_PORT Licensed 21 port type : PSTN_PORT Licensed 22 port type : PSTN_PORT Licensed 23 port type : PSTN_PORT Licensed 24 port type : PSTN_PORT Licensed 25 port type : PSTN_PORT Licensed 26 port type : PSTN_PORT Licensed 27 port type : PSTN_PORT Licensed 28 port type : PSTN_PORT Licensed 29 port type : PSTN_PORT Licensed 30 port type : PSTN_PORT Licensed



72

31 port type : PSTN_PORT Licensed A/u Law : A law Port Impedance : Bureau machine in China(200+680|| 100nf) Port Current : 25mA steady current Work Environment : EMSAN Work Mode : COMBO Ring Voltage : - --------------------------------------------------------



73

7 Configuring the System DSP Channels

About This Chapter

The number of digital signal processor (DSP) channels specifies the processing capability of aDSP chip. Configuring the system DSP channels includes configuring the attributes of the DSPchannels and configuring the number of DSP channels for subscribers with different priorities.

7.1 Introduction to the System DSP ChannelsThrough the DSP channels, the analog signals accessed by the UA5000 can be digitized. Thus,the voice service can be transmitted over the IP network.

7.2 Configuring the Attributes of the DSP ChannelThe attributes of the DSP channel include the parameters such as the maximum rate of the faxtraining, fax training mode, input gain of the DSP chip, output gain of the DSP chip, and defaultinterval for the DSP to packetize RTP packets. By configuring the parameters of the attributesof the DSP channel, you can ensure the voice quality during the analog-digit and digit-analogconversion.

7.3 Configuring the Number of the Globally Shared DSP ChannelsThe number of the globally shared DSP channels refer to the number of the system DSP channelsminus the number of the channels reserved for the VAG. By configuring the number of theglobally shared DSP channels, you can allocate different numbers of the DSP channels forsubscribers with different priorities.

7.4 Configuring the Number of DSP Channels in the DSP Resources Reserved for the VAGThe number of DSP channels reserved for the VAG refers to the number of private DSP channelsreserved for the specified VAG. Subscribers in the VAG can use only the reserved DSP channels.Through the reservation of DSP channels for the VAG, subscribers of different priorities in theVAG can be allocated with different numbers of DSP channels.

7.5 Prohibiting the DSP ChannelWhen one or more DSP channels on a subboard are faulty, you can prohibit the faulty DSPchannel so that the service is not affected.

UA5000 Universal Access UnitConfiguration Guide-PVM CLI 7 Configuring the System DSP Channels


74

7.1 Introduction to the System DSP ChannelsThrough the DSP channels, the analog signals accessed by the UA5000 can be digitized. Thus,the voice service can be transmitted over the IP network.

Service DescriptionDSP is a type of chip used to process the digital signals. The PVM board uses DSP to packetizethe PCM signals to the voice packets, and then sends the voice packets into the IP network. Inthis way, the VoIP function is realized.

DSP channel: The processing capability of the DSP chip is further quantified and can be reflectedby the number of channels.

Service SpecificationsEach DSP channel processes the information in one 64 K PCM voice channel.

Only after you insert a DSP subboard in the PVM control board, the PVM control board supportsthe DSP channels. The number of total DSP channels varies according to different subboard.

7.2 Configuring the Attributes of the DSP ChannelThe attributes of the DSP channel include the parameters such as the maximum rate of the faxtraining, fax training mode, input gain of the DSP chip, output gain of the DSP chip, and defaultinterval for the DSP to packetize RTP packets. By configuring the parameters of the attributesof the DSP channel, you can ensure the voice quality during the analog-digit and digit-analogconversion.

Contextl The UA5000 supports two fax training modes: end-to-end training and local training.l The network transmission delay, the device processing delay, and the serial link delay exist

in the VoIP service. The occurrence of the delay causes the voice jitter and decreases thecall quality. JitterBuffer is used to eliminate the delay, and improve the voice quality withthe lost-packet compensation function.

l For details of the attributes of the DSP channel, see the parameter description of the dspattribute command.

Procedure

Step 1 Run the dsp attribute command to configure the attributes of the DSP channel.

Step 2 Run the display dsp attribute command to query the DSP parameters.

----End




75

l The maximum rate of the fax training is V29.l The fax training mode is local training.l The initial adaptive JitterBuffer of the DSP channel is 50.l The maximum adaptive JitterBuffer of the DSP channel is 100.l The maximum fixed JitterBuffer of the DSP channel is 90.l The minimum adaptive JitterBuffer of the DSP channel is 20.l The minimum fixed JitterBuffer of the DSP channel is 40.l The initial fixed JitterBuffer of the DSP channel is 60.l The input gain of the DSP chip is 2 dB.l The output gain of the DSP chip is 2 dB.l The default coding mode of the DSP channel is G.729.l The interval of transmitting the RTCP packet of the DSP channel is 500 ms.l The default value of severe packet loss second threshold is 500.l The VQM function is enabled.l The default RTP packetization interval of the DSP channel is 30 ms.l The default echo suppression function of the DSP channel is enabled.l The default silence compression function of the DSP channel is enabled.l The PLC algorithm function of the DSP channel is enabled.l The value of the clearmode payload of the DSP channel is 100.

To configure the DSP attributes, do as follows:

huawei(config)#dsp attribute train-rate 1 train-mode 1 init-adapt-jb 50 max-adapt-jb 100 max-fixed-jb 90 min-adapt-jb 20 min-fixed-jb 40 nominal-fixed-jb 60 input-gain 2 output-gain 2 code 3 rtcp-interval 500 sev-degradethreshold 500 bvqm 1 rtp-interval 30 echoflag 1huawei(config)#dsp attribute clearmode-payload 100 silenceflag 1 statisticsflag 1 plc 1huawei(config)#display dsp attribute ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- Fax Max Train Rate :V29 Fax Train Mode :Local Train DSP chip maximum adaptive JitterBuffer(ms) :100 DSP chip minimum adaptive JitterBuffer(ms) :20 DSP chip initial adaptive JitterBuffer(ms) :50 DSP chip maximum fixed JitterBuffer(ms) :90 DSP chip minimum fixed JitterBuffer(ms) :40 DSP chip nominal fixed JitterBuffer(ms) :60 DSP input gain(PCM->IP)(db) :-8 DSP output gain(IP->PCM)(db) :-8 DSP code type :G.729 RTCP package send interval time(ms) :500 Severe Degrade Threshold(periods) :500 Support VQM :Enable DSP Rtp Packet Interval(ms) :30 DSP echo check :Open DSP silence reduce :Open DSP need statistics or not :Yes DSP Packet Lose Compensate :Open DSP clearmode payload value :100 Support RTCP XR :Disable T30 redundancy parameter value of T38 Fax :3 T4 redundancy parameter value of T38 Fax :3 Fax V8 Negotiate :Enable DSP VBD payload value :102 DSP G.726-16k payload value :103



76

DSP G.726-24k payload value :104 DSP G.726-32k payload value :101 DSP G.726-40k payload value :105 DSP 2198 payload value :96 DSP 2833 payload value :97 -----------------------------------------------------------------------------

Related Operation

Table 7-1 lists the related operations for configuring the attributes of the DSP channel.

Table 7-1 Related operation for configuring the attributes of the DSP channel


Prohibit the DSP channel dsp prohibit Prohibit the DSP channel thatcannot be used any more.

Unprohibit the DSP channel undo dsp prohibit When the DSP channelrecovers, unprohibit the DSPchannel to reuse it.

Query the status of the DSPchannel

display dsp state -

Query the DSP status of theVAG

display dsp statistic Query the configuration and theusage of the DSP resources ona specified VAG.

7.3 Configuring the Number of the Globally Shared DSPChannels

The number of the globally shared DSP channels refer to the number of the system DSP channelsminus the number of the channels reserved for the VAG. By configuring the number of theglobally shared DSP channels, you can allocate different numbers of the DSP channels forsubscribers with different priorities.

Contextl The subscribers are classified into the following three categories:

– Cat1: category 1 government subscribers


– Cat3: common subscribers.

The priorities of three-category subscribers are as follows: cat1 > cat2 > cat3.

l The DSP resources are configured for subscribers according to the following principles:

– For category 1 government subscribers, the resources reserved for them are configuredfirst. When the resources are insufficient, the resources reserved for category 2government subscribers are configured. When the resources are insufficient again, theresources reserved for common subscribers are configured.



77

– For category 2 government subscribers, the resources reserved for them are configuredfirst. When the resources are insufficient, the resource reserved for common subscribersare configured.

– For common subscribers, the remaining globally shared DSP resources are configured.

Precaution

The reserved DSP channels must be configured for subscribers according to the number ofsubscribers with the priorities of cat1 and cat2.

Procedure

Step 1 Run the dsp reserve share command to configure the number of DSP channels in globallyshared DSP resources.

Step 2 Run the display dsp statistic share command to query the allocation and the usage of globallyshared DSP resources.

----End

Example

To reserve 150 DSP channels for category 1 government subscribers and 200 DSP channels forcategory 2 government subscribers in globally shared DSP resources, do as follows:

huawei(config)#dsp reserve share cat1 150 cat2 200huawei(config)#display dsp statistic share ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- Config Used Cat1 DSP Channels: 150 0 Cat2 DSP Channels: 200 0 Common DSP Channels: 226 0 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- Global Share DSP Channels Total: 576 DSP Channels Used: 0 Cat1 User Used: 0 Cat2 User Used: 0 Common User Used: 0 -----------------------------------------------------------------------------

Related Operation

Table 7-2 lists the related operations for configuring the number of DSP channels in globallyshared DSP resources.

Table 7-2 Related operations for configuring the number of DSP channels in globally sharedDSP resources

To... Run the command... Remarks

Configure the attributes of theDSP channel

dsp attribute -

Configure the number of DSPchannels in the DSP resourcesreserved for the VAG

dsp reserve -



78


Query the attributes of the DSPchannel

display dsp attribute -

Query the DSP channel statusof the VAG

display dsp statistic Query the DSP resourceconfiguration and the usage of aspecified VAG.

7.4 Configuring the Number of DSP Channels in the DSPResources Reserved for the VAG

The number of DSP channels reserved for the VAG refers to the number of private DSP channelsreserved for the specified VAG. Subscribers in the VAG can use only the reserved DSP channels.Through the reservation of DSP channels for the VAG, subscribers of different priorities in theVAG can be allocated with different numbers of DSP channels.

Contextl Subscribers in the VAG can only use DSP channels in the reserved DSP resources.

l Subscribers are classified into the following three categories:



– Cat3: common subscribers.

The priorities of three category subscribers are as follows: cat1 > cat2 > cat3.

l The DSP resources are configured for subscribers according to the following principles:

– For category 1 government subscribers, the resources reserved for them are configuredfirst. When the resources are insufficient, the resources reserved for category 2government subscribers are configured. When the resources are insufficient again, theresources reserved for common subscribers are configured.

– For category 2 government subscribers, the resources reserved for them are configuredfirst. When the resources are insufficient, the resource reserved for common subscribersare configured.

– For common subscribers, the remaining DSP resources are configured.

l For the related information about the VAG, see "11 Configuring the VAG Service."

Precaution

The reserved DSP channels must be configured for subscribers according to the number ofsubscribers with the priorities of cat1 and cat2.

Procedure

Step 1 Run the interface h248 or interface mgcp command to enter the MG interface mode to beconfigured.



79

Step 2 Run the dsp reserve command to configure the number of DSP channels in the DSP resourcesreserved for the VAG.

Step 3 Run the display dsp statistic command to query the allocation and the usage of DSP resourcesin a specified VAG.

----End

ExampleTo configure 100 DSP channels for VAG 0, 25 DSP channels for category 1 governmentsubscribers, and 25 DSP channels for category 2 government subscribers, do as follows:

huawei(config)#interface h248 0huawei(config-if-h248-0)#dsp reserve total 100 cat1 25 cat2 25huawei(config-if-h248-0)#display dsp statistic ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- Config Used DSP Channels Total: 100 0 Cat1 DSP Channels: 25 0 Cat2 DSP Channels: 25 0 Common DSP Channels: 50 0 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- Cat1 User Used: 0 Cat2 User Used: 0 Common User Used: 0 -----------------------------------------------------------------------------

Related OperationTable 7-3 lists the related operations for configuring the number of DSP channels in the reservedDSP resources for the VAG.

Table 7-3 Related operations for configuring the number of DSP channels in the reserved DSPresources for the VAG



dsp attribute -

Configuring the number ofDSP channels in globallyshared DSP resources

dsp reserve share -



Query the status of globallyshared DSP channels

display dsp statisticshare

Query the configuration and theusage of the globally sharedDSP resources.

7.5 Prohibiting the DSP ChannelWhen one or more DSP channels on a subboard are faulty, you can prohibit the faulty DSPchannel so that the service is not affected.



80

Precaution

A DSP channel that is processing the voice service cannot be prohibited.

Procedure

Step 1 Run the dsp prohibit command to prohibit the DSP channel.

Step 2 Run the display dsp state command to query the status of the DSP channel.

----End

Example

To prohibit two consecutive DSP channels on subboard 0/5/0, with the start DSP channel number3, do as follows:

huawei(config-narrow-resource)#display dsp state 0/5/0 3 2 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ Channel NO. DSP Channel State 0-idle $-G.711 busy A-All busy W-Wastage X-fault @-IP loopback *-PCM loopback #-prohibited ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 0000-0049 ---00 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ Total: 2 DSP channel 2 idle, 0 G.711 Busy, 0 All Busy, 0 Wastage, 0 Fault, 0 IP loopback, 0 PCMloopback, 0 prohibited ------------------------------------------------------------------------------huawei(config-narrow-resource)#dsp prohibit 0/5/0 3 2huawei(config-narrow-resource)#display dsp state 0/5/0 3 2 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ Channel NO. DSP Channel State 0-idle $-G.711 busy A-All busy W-Wastage X-fault @-IP loopback *-PCM loopback #-prohibited ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 0000-0049 ---## ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ Total: 2 DSP channel 0 idle, 0 G.711 Busy, 0 All Busy, 0 Wastage, 0 Fault, 0 IP loopback, 0 PCMloopback, 2 prohibited ------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Related Operation

Table 7-4 lists the related operations for prohibiting the DSP channel.

Table 7-4 Related operations for prohibiting the DSP channel



dsp attribute -



Unprohibit the DSP channel undo dsp prohibit When the DSP channelrecovers, unprohibit the DSPchannel to use it again.



81


Query the DSP channel statusof the VAG

display dsp statistic Query the configuration and theusage of the DSP resources ona specified VAG.



82

8 Configuring the Clock

About This Chapter

In the digital network consisting of the UA5000 and other devices, the primary problem to besolved is clock synchronization. The UA5000 adopts the master-slave mode to synchronize theclock with the clocks of the devices in the network.

8.1 Introduction to the ClockThe purpose of clock synchronization is to restrict the clock frequency and the phase of eachnode in a network within the predefined tolerance scope. This prevents the transmissionperformance degradation due to poor timings at the transmit (Tx) and receive (Rx) ends.

8.2 Configuration Example of a Clock SourceThis topic describes how to implement the clock synchronization of the UA5000 by extractingthe clock signals from ports 0/4/0 and 0/5/0 on the UA5000.

8.3 Configuring the Reference Clock SourceConfigure the reference clock source for the port on the PVM board to synchronize the clock ofthe UA5000 with the clock of the upper-layer device.

8.4 Setting the Clock Source PrioritySet the clock source priority for each clock source on the PVM board. The UA5000 uses theclock source with the highest priority for the clock synchronization. When the link of the clocksource with the highest priority is faulty, the UA5000 uses the clock source with the secondhighest priority for the clock synchronization. This rule applies to the rest clock sources.

UA5000 Universal Access UnitConfiguration Guide-PVM CLI 8 Configuring the Clock


83

8.1 Introduction to the ClockThe purpose of clock synchronization is to restrict the clock frequency and the phase of eachnode in a network within the predefined tolerance scope. This prevents the transmissionperformance degradation due to poor timings at the transmit (Tx) and receive (Rx) ends.

Service DescriptionThere are two methods of achieving clock synchronization in a digital network: pseudosynchronization and master-slave synchronization. Table 8-1 shows the details of the two clocksynchronization modes.

Table 8-1 Clock synchronization description

SynchronizationMode

Description

Pseudosynchronization

In a digital network using pseudo synchronization, all digitalexchanges are independent in terms of the clock. The clock of eachdigital exchange is of high precision and stability. Usually, the cesiumclock is used. Because these clocks are independent from each other,their frequencies and phases are not totally synchronized, but thedifference can be ignored because these clocks are precise. Hence,this clock synchronization is called pseudo synchronization.It is applied in international digital networks.

Master-slavesynchronization

In a network that uses the master-slave synchronization, there is amaster exchange with a high-precision clock. The other exchanges inthe network are controlled by the master exchange, that is, the clocksof other exchanges in the network are synchronized with the clock ofthis master exchange. The clock of the lower layer exchange issynchronized with the clock of the upper layer exchange until theclock of the end exchange is synchronized.

Service SpecificationsThe reference clock source of the system includes Bits clock, E1 line clock, and GPON lineclock. A maximum of 10 clock sources can be configured when you run the clock sourcecommand to add the reference clock.

Service ImplementationThe UA5000 often uses the master-slave synchronization mode. The working procedure is asfollows:

1. The UA5000 extracts the clock signals sent from the upper-layer device at the line side asthe clock source of the system. The clock source, with the highest priority and in the normalstate, is used as the system clock.

2. The UA5000 sends the clock signals to all the service boards through the backplane.



84

3. The service boards send the clock signals to a lower-layer network element.

NOTE

The control boards can also send the clock signals to a lower-layer network element.

8.2 Configuration Example of a Clock SourceThis topic describes how to implement the clock synchronization of the UA5000 by extractingthe clock signals from ports 0/4/0 and 0/5/0 on the UA5000.

Prerequisite

The UA5000 must be connected properly according to the networking.

Precautionl You can configure a maximum of 10 clock sources.l The added clock module must be set with a priority before use.l After the priority of the clock module is set, it takes effect immediately. This operation may

result in clock switch.l When running the undo clock source command to delete the clock source that is being

used by the system, it can result in clock switch.

Networking

Figure 8-1 shows the networking of the clock configuration.

Figure 8-1 Networking of the clock configuration

PVM

A32

PVM

UA5000

E1/V5

E1/V5SDH

A32

Data Planl By running the clock source command, you can configure a maximum of 10 clock sources.

The following section uses the configuration of two clock sources as an example.



85

l By running the clock priority command, you can configure a maximum of 10 prioritylevels. The following section uses the configuration of the priority level of the two clocksources as an example.

Table 8-2 provides the data plan for configuring the UA5000 clock.

Table 8-2 Data plan for configuring the clock

Item Data

srcindex System reference clock source 0: 0System reference clock source 1: 1

Port number System reference clock source 0: 0/4/0System reference clock source 1: 0/4/1

priority System reference clock source 0: HighSystem reference clock source 1: Low


Figure 8-2 shows the flowchart for configuring the clock.

Figure 8-2 Flowchart for configuring the clock

Start

Configure the systemreference clock source

Set the priority of thesystem clock source

Query the clock sourcestatus

End

Procedure

Step 1 Configure the reference clock source.l Clock source 0 extracts clock signals from port 0/4/0.l Clock source 1 extracts clock signals from port 0/4/1.huawei(config)#clock source 0 E1 0/4/0huawei(config)#clock source 1 E1 0/4/1



86

Step 2 Set the priority of the clock source.l Set the clock source 0 with the highest priority.l Set the clock source 1 with the second highest priority.huawei(config)#clock priority 0/1

Step 3 Query the status of the clock source.huawei(config)#display clock source -------------------------------------------------------- Index Config Source Priority State Output -------------------------------------------------------- 0 E1 0/4/0 0 OK Yes 1 E1 0/4/1 1 OK No --------------------------------------------------------

----End

ResultThe UA5000 selects clock source 0 as the system clock and delivers the clock signals to eachservice board.

8.3 Configuring the Reference Clock SourceConfigure the reference clock source for the port on the PVM board to synchronize the clock ofthe UA5000 with the clock of the upper-layer device.

ContextThe system supports a maximum of 10 reference clock sources.

Procedure

Step 1 Run the clock source command to add the reference clock source.

Step 2 Run the display clock source command to query the reference clock source.

----End

ExampleTo add an E1 clock source with index 0 to port 0/4/0, do as follows:

huawei(config)#clock source 0 e1 0/4/0 Clock source set succeeded

huawei(config)#display clock source -------------------------------------------------------- Index Config Source Priority State Output -------------------------------------------------------- 0 E1 0/4/0 0 OK Yes --------------------------------------------------------

To delete the clock source with index 0, do as follows:

huawei(config)#undo clock source 0 Clock source deletion succeeded

huawei(config)#display clock source



87

The current system clock source is localFailure: User not config any clock source

Related OperationTable 8-3 lists the related operation for configuring the reference clock source of the system.

Table 8-3 Related operation for configuring the reference clock source of the system


Set the clock priority clock priority After the priority of the clockmodule is set, it takes effectimmediately. This operationmay result in clock switch.

8.4 Setting the Clock Source PrioritySet the clock source priority for each clock source on the PVM board. The UA5000 uses theclock source with the highest priority for the clock synchronization. When the link of the clocksource with the highest priority is faulty, the UA5000 uses the clock source with the secondhighest priority for the clock synchronization. This rule applies to the rest clock sources.

PrecautionAfter the priority is set, the priority of the clock module takes effect immediately. This operationmay result in clock switch.

Procedure

Step 1 Run the clock priority command to set the clock priority of the reference clock source.

Step 2 Run the display clock source command to query the reference clock source.

----End

ExampleTo set the priority level of the clock source with index 1 as high, and the priority level of clocksource with index 0 as low, do as follows:

huawei(config)#clock { priority<K>|source<K> }:priority{ p0/p1/p2/p3/p4/p5/p6/p7/p8/p9<S><1,19> }:1/0 Command: clock priority 1/0 Clock source priority set succeeded

huawei(config)#display clock source -------------------------------------------------------- Index Config Source Priority State Output -------------------------------------------------------- 0 E1 0/4/0 1 OK Yes 1 E1 0/5/0 0 OK No --------------------------------------------------------



88

Related OperationTable 8-4 lists the related operations for setting the clock source priority.

Table 8-4 Related operations for setting the clock source priority


Set the reference clock source clock source The added clock source mustbe set with a priority beforebeing used.

Query the reference clock source display clock source -



89

9 Configuring the MG Interface

About This Chapter

When configuring the IP services such as voice over IP (VoIP) and integrated services digitalnetwork (ISDN), configure the media gateway (MG) first. One MG corresponds to a unique MGIP address and MG port number, which are the only ways for the UA5000 to communicate withthe MGC.

9.1 Introduction to the MG InterfaceIn the application of the next generation network (NGN), the UA5000 communicates with theupper-layer MGC through the MG interface (the MG IP address and MG port number of theMG interface). Each MG interface corresponds to one virtual access gateway (VAG).

9.2 Configuration Example of the MG Interface (the H.248 Protocol)Configuring the MG interface means configuring the attributes of the MG interface, softwareparameters, ringing mode, and digitmap. After configuring the MG interface, you can configurethe IP services such as VoIP and ISDN through the MG interface.

9.3 Configuration Example of the MG Interface (the MGCP Protocol)Configuring the MG interface means configuring the attributes of the MG interface, softwareparameters, ringing mode, and digitmap. After configuring the MG interface, you can configurethe IP services such as VoIP and ISDN through the MG interface.

9.4 Adding an MG InterfaceAdd an MG interface to the UA5000 so that the UA5000 and the MGC can communicate witheach other through the MG interface.

9.5 Configuring the IP Address PoolThe IP address can be used for configuring the service only after the IP address is added to theIP address pool successfully. By configuring the IP address pool, you can add the planned IPaddress to the IP address pool.

9.6 Configuring the Attributes of the MG Interface (the H.248 Protocol)The attributes of the MG interface include the IP address, domain name, and port numberrequired for setting up the communication between the MG interface and the MGC, and alsoinclude the 2833 encryption and heartbeat duration. The MG interface and the MGC cancommunicate with each other normally only when the parameters of the MG interface attributesare the same as the parameters of the MG interface attributes configured on the MGC.

UA5000 Universal Access UnitConfiguration Guide-PVM CLI 9 Configuring the MG Interface


90

9.7 Configuring the Attributes of the MG Interface (the MGCP Protocol)The attributes of the MG interface include the IP address, domain name, and port numberrequired for setting up the communication between the MG interface and the MGC, and alsoinclude the 2833 encryption and heartbeat duration. The MG interface and the MGC cancommunicate with each other normally only when the parameters of the MG interface attributesare the same as the parameters of the MG interface attributes configured on the MGC.

9.8 Configuring the Software Parameters of an MG Interface (the H.248 Protocol)The software parameters of an MG interface include parameters such as whether the MGinterface supports authentication during registration and whether the MG interface supportsstandalone. After the configuration, the software parameters of the MG interface take effect onthe subscriber service processes on the MG interface.

9.9 Configuring the Software Parameters of an MG Interface (the MGCP Protocol)The software parameters of an MG interface include parameters such as whether to maintain theongoing call if the MG interface and the MGC are disconnected and whether the MG interfacesupports the dual-homing function. After the configuration, the software parameters of the MGinterface take effect on the subscriber service processes on the MG interface.

9.10 Configuring the Ringing Mode of an MG InterfaceConfiguring the ringing mode includes configuring the cadence ringing type and initial ringingtype. Configure the ringing mode of the MG interface to meet different requirements for theringing of different subscribers.

9.11 Configuring Digitmaps of the MG Interface (the H.248 Protocol)The format of a digitmap is strictly defined by the H.248 protocol. A digitmap consists of stringsof characters with certain meanings. Configuring the digitmaps of the MG interface includesconfiguring the inner telephone digitmap, emergency channel digitmap, automatic re-dialdigitmap, and overload emergency call digitmap of the MG interface.

9.12 Configuring Digitmaps of the MG Interface (the MGCP Protocol)The format of a digitmap is strictly defined by MGCP. A digitmap consists of strings ofcharacters with certain meanings. Configuring the digitmaps of the MG interface includesconfiguring the automatic re-dial digitmap and overload emergency call digitmap of the MGinterface.

9.13 Configuring the Overload Control of the MGCThe MGC processes the calls reported by multiple AGs that the MGC controls. If the trafficvolumes of multiple AGs increase, the MGC may be overloaded. When the MGC is overloaded,the UA5000 can control the calls to ensure that the calls of subscribers with priority or emergencyare processed. Thus, the stability and the availability of the system are improved.

9.14 Configuring the Overload Control of the MGIf the traffic volume of the MG increases suddenly, the MG may be overloaded. When the MGis overloaded, the UA5000 can control the calls to ensure that the calls of subscribers with priorityor emergency are processed. Thus, the stability and the availability of the system are improved.

9.15 Enabling an MG InterfaceEnable an MG interface so that the MG interface negotiates with the MGC through the specifiedmedia gateway control protocol and implements the registration on the MGC. Resetting theinterface enables the MG interface to register again on the MGC.



91

9.1 Introduction to the MG InterfaceIn the application of the next generation network (NGN), the UA5000 communicates with theupper-layer MGC through the MG interface (the MG IP address and MG port number of theMG interface). Each MG interface corresponds to one virtual access gateway (VAG).

Service DescriptionIn the next generation network (NGN), the MG and media gateway controller (MGC) arecompletely separated from each other. The MG converts the media format provided in one typeof network to the media format required in another type of network. The MGC controls the statusof a call related to the connection control for media channels in an MG.

In the NGN solutions of Huawei, the UA5000 functions as an MG and the softswitch functionsas an MGC. The MG interface data describes the interface and connection information betweenthe UA5000 and the MGC.

Service Specificationsl You can configure a maximum of eight MG interfaces, namely, eight virtual access

gateways (VAGs), on one UA5000.l The UA5000 supports the H.248 protocol and the media gateway control protocol (MGCP).

One UA5000 can use only one of the two protocols at the same time.

9.2 Configuration Example of the MG Interface (the H.248Protocol)

Configuring the MG interface means configuring the attributes of the MG interface, softwareparameters, ringing mode, and digitmap. After configuring the MG interface, you can configurethe IP services such as VoIP and ISDN through the MG interface.

Prerequisitel The UA5000 must use the H.248 protocol.l The IP address to be used in the example must already be configured in the IP address pool

through the ip address command.l The data on the MGC side (corresponding to the data on the MG side) must be configured

correctly.

Precautionl You can add a maximum of eight MG interfaces for one UA5000. If the UA5000 has eight

MG interfaces, adding the MG interface fails, and an error prompt is displayed.l The UA5000 supports either the H.248 protocol or the MGCP protocol. If one UA5000

uses one protocol, all the MG interfaces on the UA5000 must also use this protocol. Thedefault protocol is H.248.

Data PlanTable 9-1 provides the data plan for configuring the MG interface.



92

Table 9-1 Data plan for configuring the MG interface

Data Type Item Data

MG interfacedata

mgid 0

code text

transfer udp

protocol H.248

port MG: 2944MGC: 2944

domainname UA5000.com

Standalone digitmap 1234xxxx

Emergency channel digitmap 110|119|999

IP addresses Media IP address of MG interface 0 on the UA5000 10.10.10.2/24

Signaling IP address of MG interface 0 on theUA5000

10.10.10.4/24

The IP address of the MGC 10.10.20.1/24

Configuration FlowchartFigure 9-1 shows the flowchart for configuring the MG interface.

Figure 9-1 Flowchart for configuring the MG interface

Start

Add an MG interface

Enable the MG interface

End

Configurethe MG

interfaceattributes

(Optiona)Configure

the ringmode of theMG interface

(Optiona)Configure

digitmaps ofthe MG

interface



93

Procedure

Step 1 Add an MG interface.huawei(config)#interface h248 0Are you sure to add MG interface? (y/n)[n]:y

Step 2 Configure the MG interface attributes.huawei(config-if-h248-0)#if-h248 attribute mgip 10.10.10.2 mgport 2944 code text transfer udp domainName UA5000.com mgcip_1 10.10.20.1 mgcport_1 2944 mg-media-ip 10.10.10.4huawei(config-if-h248-0)#display if-h248 attribute --------------------------------------------------------------------- MGID 0 MG Description - MG DomainName UA5000.com Protocol H248 H248version Negotiated Originally 1 Profile Negotiation Para disable Profile 0:NoProfile("")

2833Encrypt - Codetype Text Transmode UDP HeartBeatTimer(s) 60 HeartBeatRetransTimes 3 HeartBeatRetransTimer(s) 60 MG signalling IP 10.10.10.2 MG signalling Port 2944 MG media IP 10.10.10.4 MIDType IP4_ADDR DeviceName -

Active MGC MGC Port :2944 MGC IP:10.10.20.1 Active MGC MGC Domain Name:- Standby MGC MGC Port :- MGC IP:- Standby MGC MGC Domain Name:- ---------------------------------------------------------------------

Step 3 Configure the MG interface digitmap.huawei(config-if-h248-0)#digitmap set inner 1234xxxx emergency 110|119|999

Step 4 Reset MG interface.huawei(config-if-h248-0)#reset coldstart Are you sure to reset MG interface?(y/n)[n]:y huawei(config-if-h248-0)# Reset MG interface 0 success!

Step 5 Query the status of MG interface.huawei(config-if-h248-0)#quithuawei(config)#display if-h248 all ------------------------------------------------------------------------- MGID TransMode State MgPort MGIP/DomainName MgcPort MGCIP/DomainName ------------------------------------------------------------------------- 0 UDP Normal 2944 10.10.10. 2 2944 10.10.20.1 -------------------------------------------------------------------------

----End



94

ResultAfter the MG interface is configured successfully, it should be able to communicate with MGCin the normal state.

9.3 Configuration Example of the MG Interface (the MGCPProtocol)

Configuring the MG interface means configuring the attributes of the MG interface, softwareparameters, ringing mode, and digitmap. After configuring the MG interface, you can configurethe IP services such as VoIP and ISDN through the MG interface.

Prerequisitel The UA5000 must use the MGCP protocol.l The IP addresses must be configured in the IP address pool.l The data on the MGC side must be configured correctly.

Data PlanTable 9-2 provides the data plan for configuring the MG interface.

Table 9-2 Data plan for configuring the MG interface

Data Type Item Data

MG interface data mgid 0

protocol MGCP



IP addresses The IP address of MGinterface 0 on the UA5000

10.10.10.2/24


ContextThe different between the H.248-based MG interface and the MGCP-based MG interface is thatthe MGCP-based MG interface does not support the isolation of the media stream and signalingstream. Hence, the IP address of the media stream must be the same as the IP address of thesignaling stream (the same as the IP address of the MG interface), and the IP address of thesignaling stream must be added to the IP address pool in the system.

Configuration FlowchartFigure 9-2 shows the flowchart for configuring the MG interface.



95

Figure 9-2 Flowchart for configuring the MG interface

Start

Add an MG interface


End

Configurethe MG

interfaceattributes

(Optiona)Configure

the ringmode of theMG interface

(Optiona)Configure

digitmaps ofthe MG

interface

Procedure

Step 1 Add an MG interface.huawei(config)#interface mgcp 0 Are you sure to add MG interface? (y/n)[n]:y

Step 2 Configure the attributes of the MG interface.huawei(config-if-mgcp-0)#if-mgcp attribute mgip 10.10.10.2 mgport 2427 domainNameUA5000.com mgcip_1 10.10.20.1 mgcport_1 2727

Step 3 Query the attributes of the MG interface.huawei(config-if-mgcp-0)#display if-mgcp attribute --------------------------------------------------------------------- MGID 0 MG DomainName UA5000.com Protocol MGCP 2833Encrypt - Codetype Text Transmode UDP IP 10.10.10.2 Port 2427 HeartBeat Timer(s) 60 MGC[1] MGC PORT :2727 MGC IP:10.10.20. 1 MGC[1] MGC Domain Name: MGC[2] MGC PORT :- MGC IP:- MGC[2] MGC Domain Name:- MGC[3] MGC PORT :- MGC IP:- MGC[3] MGC Domain Name:- ---------------------------------------------------------------------

Step 4 Reset the MG interface.



96

huawei(config-if-mgcp-0)#reset Are you sure to reset MG interface?(y/n)[n]:y

Step 5 Query the status of the MG interface.huawei(config)#display if-mgcp all -------------------------------------------------------------------------- MGID State MGPort MGIP MGCPort MGCIP/DomainName -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 0 Normal 2427 10.10.10.2 2727 10.10.20.1 --------------------------------------------------------------------------

----End

Result

After the MG interface is configured successfully, it should be able to communicate with theMGC in the normal state.

9.4 Adding an MG InterfaceAdd an MG interface to the UA5000 so that the UA5000 and the MGC can communicate witheach other through the MG interface.

Precautionl You can add a maximum of eight MG interfaces for one UA5000. If the UA5000 has eight

MG interfaces, adding the MG interface fails, and an error prompt is displayed.

l The UA5000 supports either the H.248 protocol or the MGCP protocol. If one UA5000uses one protocol, all the MG interfaces on the UA5000 must also use this protocol. Thedefault protocol is H.248.

l If the MG interface that supports the current system protocol exists, you cannot modify theprotocol. You can modify the protocol only after deleting the MG interface.

Procedure

Step 1 Run the display protocol support command to query the protocol used by the system.

Step 2 Configure the system protocol.

l If the protocol is different from the planned protocol, do as follows:

1. Run the undo interface h248 or undo interface mgcp command to delete the originalMG interface.

2. Run the protocol support command to set the protocol for the system.

l If the protocol is the same as the planned protocol, go to step 4.

Step 3 Run the reboot command to reboot the system and validate the protocol settings.

Step 4 Add an MG interface.

l When the H.248 protocol is used, run the interface h248 command to add an MG interface.

l When the MGCP protocol is used, run the interface mgcp command to add an MG interface.

----End



97

ExampleTo add an MG interface with MG ID 0 when the H.248 protocol is used, do as follows:

huawei(config)#display protocol supportSystem support H248 protocol huawei(config)#interface h248 0 Are you sure to add MG interface? (y/n)[n]:yhuawei(config-if-h248-0)#

To add an MG interface with MG ID 0 when the MGCP protocol is used, do as follows:

huawei(config)#display protocol support System support H248 protocol huawei(config)#undo interface h248 0huawei(config)#protocol support mgcp Configure Protocol need save the data, then reboot the system. Are you sure to change the protocol? (y/n)[n]:y huawei(config)#savehuawei(config)#reboot system Data is not saved, the unsaved data will lose if reboot system, are you sure to reboot system? (y/n)[n]:y huawei(config)#interface mgcp 0 Are you sure to add MG interface? (y/n)[n]:yhuawei(config-if-mgcp-0)#

Related OperationTable 9-3 lists the related operations for adding an MG interface.

Table 9-3 Related operations for adding an MG interface


Shut down an MG interface shutdown The shutdown type can begraceful or force.l graceful: If the active

calls exist on the MGinterface, the calls areheld. When the activecalls end or occur after theset time, the MGC and theMG are disconnected.

l The option forceindicates that all the callsare released after theMGC and the MG aredisconnected.

Restart an MG interface shutdown Run this command to restartan MG interface that is shutdown.



98


Start an MG interface reset When an MG interface isnormal, run this command toreset it. After modifying theMG interface parameters,reset the MG interface so thatit registers again with theMGC.

Delete an MG interface undo interface h248undo interface mgcp

You cannot delete an MGinterface that is configuredwith the subscriber data, oran MG interface thatfunctions normally. That is,you can delete only an MGinterface that is in the closestate or in the not start state.

Query the information aboutall the MG interfaces

display if-h248 alldisplay if-mgcp all

Run this command to querythe configurations and thecurrent states of all the MGinterfaces in the globalconfig mode.

Query the MG interfaceattributes

display if-h248 attributedisplay if-mgcp attribute

Run this command to querythe configuration of an MGinterface in the MG interfacemode.

Query the status of an MGinterface

display if-h248 statedisplay if-mgcp state

Run this command to querythe current status of an MGinterface in the MG interfacemode.



99


Add a ring mapping entry mg-ringmode add When the MGC interactswith the UA5000, the ringmode is negotiated. The ringmapping involves mappingthe ring mode parametersprovided by the MGC and thering tones provided by theUA5000.The data packet sent to theUA5000 by the MGCcontains the parameters ofthe ring mode, which has thesame value as the value ofmgcpara.The UA5000 searches thering mapping table for thematching mgcpara to obtainthe cadence and initial ringtones.

Modify a ring mapping entry mg-ringmode modify -

Delete a ring mapping entry mg-ringmode delete As the system supports only16 ring mapping entries, youcan delete unnecessaryentries if required.

Query a ring mapping entry display mg-ringmodeattribute

-



100


Configure digitmap timers digitmap-timer The H.248 protocol definesthree digitmap timers: longtimer (L), short timer (S), andinitial timer (T). Run thedigitmap-timer command toset the timers to comply withthe standards in your countryor area.l Long timer (L): If the MG

confirms that at least onemore digit needs to bereceived to match adialing scheme in thedigitmap, the timerbetween the digits is set asthe long timer.

l Short timer (S): If thenumber string matcheswith one dialing schemein the digitmap, but morenumbers may be receivedand they match with otherdialing schemes, thematching status shouldnot be reportedimmediately. The MGmust use the short timer towait for receiving morenumbers.

l Initial timer (T): It is usedbefore any dialednumber. It is the durationbefore the first digit isreceived after offhook. Ifthe initial timer is set to 0(namely, T = 0), the timerfails. In this case, the MGwaits for other digits.

Switch the MGC forcibly mgc switch Use this command to forciblyregister the MG interfacewith the new MGC.Before the switchover, makesure that the IP address andport number of the secondaryMGC are configured in theMG interface data.



101

9.5 Configuring the IP Address PoolThe IP address can be used for configuring the service only after the IP address is added to theIP address pool successfully. By configuring the IP address pool, you can add the planned IPaddress to the IP address pool.

ContextIt is recommended that you plan the NMS configuration mode of the device before configuringthe IP address pool. Otherwise, changing the NMS configuration mode of the devicesubsequently may interrupt the service.

Procedure

Step 1 Run the ip address command to add the IP address to the IP address pool.

Step 2 Run the display ip address command to query the information about the IP address pool in thesystem.

----End

ExampleTo add the IP address 10.144.68.158 with the subnet mask of 255.255.255.0 and the gateway IPaddress of 10.144.68.1 to the IP address pool, do as follows:

huawei(interface-eth)#ip address 10.144.68.158 255.255.255.0 10.144.68.1huawei(interface-eth)#display ip address Eth: IPAddress............: 10.11.11.20 SubMask..............: 255.255.0.0 GateWay..............: 10.11.1.1 MacIndex.............: 0 MacAddress...........: 00-E0-FC-8B-77-77 VlanID...............: --



Related OperationTable 9-4 lists the related operation for configuring the IP address pool.



102

Table 9-4 Related operation for configuring the IP address pool


Delete the IP address undo ip address -

9.6 Configuring the Attributes of the MG Interface (the H.248 Protocol)

The attributes of the MG interface include the IP address, domain name, and port numberrequired for setting up the communication between the MG interface and the MGC, and alsoinclude the 2833 encryption and heartbeat duration. The MG interface and the MGC cancommunicate with each other normally only when the parameters of the MG interface attributesare the same as the parameters of the MG interface attributes configured on the MGC.

Prerequisitel The UA5000 must use the H.248 protocol.l An MG interface must be added successfully. For details on how to configure an MG

interface, see "9.4 Adding an MG Interface."l The required IP addresses must be configured in the IP address pool. For details on how to

configure an IP address, see "9.5 Configuring the IP Address Pool."

Contextl One UA5000 can be configured with a maximum of eight MG interfaces.l The MG interface attributes configured on the UA5000 must be the same as the MG

interface attributes configured on the MGC.l You can configure the following MG interface attributes as required:

– 2833 encryption key– Coding mode– MG interface description– MG device name– MG domain name– Heartbeat duration– Heartbeat retransmission interval– Heartbeat retransmission times– Media IP address– Active and standby MGC domain name– Active and standby MGC IP address– Active and standby MGC port number– Signaling IP address– Signaling port number– H.248 profile



103

– Profile negotiation identifier– Transmission type– Negotiation function of H.248 profile

Procedure

Step 1 In the global config mode, run the interface h248 command to enter the MG interface mode.

Step 2 Run the if-h248 attribute command to configure the MG interface attributes.

Step 3 Run the display if-h248 attribute command to query the MG interface attributes.

NOTE

The MG interface parameters are valid only for a specified MG interface.

----End

ExampleThe following example shows how to configure an MG interface. Table 9-5 provides the dataplan for configuring the MG interface attributes.

Table 9-5 Data plan for configuring the MG interface attributes

Parameter Value Parameter Value

mgid 0 mgip 10.10.10.2

mgport 2944 code text

transfer UDP domainName UA5000.com

mgcip_1 10.10.20.1 mgcport_1 2944

mgcip_2 10.11.10.1 mgcport_2 2944

mg-media-ip 10.10.10.4 protocol H.248

H248 profile Name: voiceIndex: 1

Profile negotiationparameters

disable

huawei(config)#load profile tftp 10.11.117.55 voice.fes Whether to start loading? (y/n)[n]:y Load(backup,duplicate,...) begins, please wait and notice the rate of progress Any operation such as reboot or switchover will cause failure and unpredictable result! EVENT MAJOR 2007-11-25 12:33:18 ALARM NAME :Load start PARAMETERS :FrameID: 0, SlotID: 5, Load type: Profile file

huawei(config)#! EVENT MAJOR 2007-11-25 12:33:24 ALARM NAME :Load complete PARAMETERS :FrameID: 0, SlotID: 5, Load type: Profile filehuawei(config)#interface h248 0huawei(config-if-h248-0)#if-h248 attribute mgip 10.10.10.2 mgport 2944 code text transfer udp domainName UA5000.com mgcip_1 10.10.20.1 mgcport_1 2944 mgcip_2 10.11.10.1 mgcport_2 2944 mg-media-ip 10.10.10.4 profile-index 1 profile-negotiation disable



104

huawei(config-if-h248-0)#display if-h248 attribute --------------------------------------------------------------------- MGID 0 MG Description - MG DomainName UA5000.com Protocol H248 H248version Negotiated Originally 1 Profile Negotiation Para disable Profile 1:Resv1("")


Active MGC MGC Port :2944 MGC IP:10.10.20.1 Active MGC MGC Domain Name:- Standby MGC MGC Port :2944 MGC IP:10.11.10.1 Standby MGC MGC Domain Name:- ---------------------------------------------------------------------

NOTE

l The coding mode can be text or binary. H.248 supports only the text coding mode.

l The transmission mode supports only the user datagram protocol (UDP). The transmission control protocol(TCP) is not supported.

l The MGC information includes the MGC IP address, port number at the transport layer on the MGC side,and MGC domain name. In the case of the MGC IP address and the MGC domain name, you must specifyone of them. To implement the MGC domain name resolution, you must run the dns command in the globalconfig mode to start a domain name system (DNS) client on the UA5000.

Related OperationTable 9-6 lists the related operations for configuring the MG interface attributes.



105

Table 9-6 Related operations for configuring MG interface attributes


Shut down an MG interface shutdown The shutdown type can begraceful or force.l The option graceful

indicates that the activecalls are held after theMGC and the MG aredisconnected. After theset time, the MG and theMGC are disconnected.


Enable an MG interface reset When an MG interface isnormal, run this command toreset it. After modifying theMG interface parameters,reset the MG interface so thatit registers again with theMGC.

Delete an MG interface undo interface h248 You cannot delete an MGinterface that is configuredwith subscriber data or anMG interface that is in use.


display if-h248 all Run this command to querythe configurations and thecurrent states of all the MGinterfaces in the globalconfig mode.

Query the attributes of anMG interface

display if-h248 attribute Run this command to querythe configuration of an MGinterface in the MG interfacemode.


display if-h248 state Run this command to querythe current status of an MGinterface in the MG interfacemode.



106


Add a ring mapping entry mg-ringmode add When the MGC interactswith the UA5000, the ringmode is negotiated. The ringmapping involves mappingthe ring mode parametersprovided by the MGC and thering tones provided by theUA5000.The data packet sent to theUA5000 by the MGCcontains a ring mode, whichhas the same value as thevalue of mgcpara.The UA5000 searches thering mapping table for thematching mgcpara to obtainthe cadence and initial ringtones.




-



107


Configure digitmap timers digitmap-timer The H.248 protocol definesthree digitmap timers: longtimer (L), short timer (S) andinitial timer (T). Run thedigitmap-timer command toset the timers to comply withthe standards in your countryor area.l Long timer (L): If the MG

confirms that at least onedigit is to be received tomatch a dialing scheme inthe digitmap, the MGwaits for the digits withthe long timer.


l Initial timer (T): It is usedbefore any dialednumber. It is the durationbefore the first digit isreceived after offhook. Ifthe initial timer is set as 0(namely, T = 0), the timerfails. In this case, the MGwaits for other digitsindefinitely.

Switch the MGC forcibly mgc switch Run this command to forcethe MG interface to registerwith the new MGC.Before the switchover, makesure that the IP address andport number of the secondaryMGC are configured in theMG interface data.



108

9.7 Configuring the Attributes of the MG Interface (theMGCP Protocol)

The attributes of the MG interface include the IP address, domain name, and port numberrequired for setting up the communication between the MG interface and the MGC, and alsoinclude the 2833 encryption and heartbeat duration. The MG interface and the MGC cancommunicate with each other normally only when the parameters of the MG interface attributesare the same as the parameters of the MG interface attributes configured on the MGC.

Prerequisitel The system must use the MGCP protocol.

l An MG interface must be added successfully. For details on how to configure an MGinterface, see "9.4 Adding an MG Interface."

l The IP addresses must be configured in the IP address pool. For details on how to configurean IP address, see "9.5 Configuring the IP Address Pool."

Contextl One UA5000 can be configured with a maximum of eight MG interfaces.

l The MG interface attributes configured on the UA5000 must be the same as the MGinterface attributes configured on the MGC.

l You can configure the following MG interface attributes as required:

– 2833 encryption key

– MG domain name

– Heartbeat interval

– MG interface name

– MGC IP address

– MGC domain name

– MGC port number

– IP address of the MG interface

– Port number of the MG interface

Procedure

Step 1 In the global config mode, run the interface mgcp command to enter the MG interface mode.

Step 2 Run the if-mgcp attribute command to configure the MG interface attributes.

Step 3 Run the display if-mgcp attribute command to query the MG interface attributes.

NOTE

The MG interface parameters are valid only for the current MG interface.

----End



109

ExampleThe following example shows how to configure an MG interface. Table 9-7 provides the dataplan for configuring an MG interface.

Table 9-7 Data plan for configuring an MG interface


mgid 0 mgip 10.10.10.2

mgport 2944 domainName UA5000.com

mgcip_1 10.10.20.1 mgcport_1 2727

mgcip_2 10.11.10.1 mgcport_2 2727

protocol MGCP description aaln

huawei(config)#interface mgcp 0huawei(config-if-mgcp-0)#if-mgcp attribute mgip 10.10.10.2 mgport 2427 domainName UA5000.com desc aaln mgcip_110.10.20.1 mgcport_1 2727 mgcip_2 10.11.10.1 mgcport_2 2727huawei(config-if-mgcp-0)#display if-mgcp attribute ------------------------------------------------------------ MGID 0 MG description aaln MG DomainName UA5000.com Protocol MGCP 2833Encrypt - Codetype Text Transmode UDP IP 10.10.10.2 Port 2427 HeartBeat Timer(s) 60 MGC[1] MGC PORT :2727 MGC IP:10.10.20.1 MGC[1] MGC Domain Name:- MGC[2] MGC PORT :2727 MGC IP:10.11.10.1 MGC[2] MGC Domain Name:- MGC[3] MGC PORT :- MGC IP:- MGC[3] MGC Domain Name:- ------------------------------------------------------------

Related OperationTable 9-8 lists the related operations for configuring the MG interface attributes.



110

Table 9-8 Related operations for configuring MG interface attributes


Shut down an MG interface shutdown The shutdown type can begraceful or force.l The option graceful

indicates that the activecalls are held after theMGC and the MG aredisconnected. After theset time, the MG and theMGC are disconnected.


Enable an MG interface reset When an MG interface isnormal, run this command toreset it. After modifying theMG interface parameters,reset the MG interface so thatit registers again with theMGC.

Delete an MG interface undo interface mgcp You cannot delete an MGinterface that is configuredwith the subscriber data or anMG interface that is in use.


display if-mgcp all Run this command to querythe configurations and thecurrent states of all the MGinterfaces in the globalconfig mode.

Query the MG interfaceattributes

display if-mgcp attribute Run this command to querythe configuration of an MGinterface in the MG interfacemode.


display if-mgcp state Run this command to querythe current status of an MGinterface in MG interfacemode.



111


Add a ring mapping entry mg-ringmode add When the MGC interactswith the UA5000, the ringmode is negotiated. The ringmapping involves mappingthe ring mode parametersprovided by the MGC and thering tones provided by theUA5000.The data packet sent to theUA5000 by the MGCcontains a ring mode, whichhas the same value as thevalue of mgcpara.The UA5000 searches thering mapping table for thematching mgcpara to obtainthe cadence and initial ringtones.




-

Configure digitmap timers digitmap-timer The T timer is used to matcha timer expiry.

Switch the MGC forcibly mgc switch Run this command to forcethe MG interface to registerwith the new MGC.Before the switchover, makesure that the IP address andport number of the secondaryMGC are configured in theMG interface data.

9.8 Configuring the Software Parameters of an MG Interface(the H.248 Protocol)

The software parameters of an MG interface include parameters such as whether the MGinterface supports authentication during registration and whether the MG interface supportsstandalone. After the configuration, the software parameters of the MG interface take effect onthe subscriber service processes on the MG interface.



112

Prerequisitel The system must use the H.248 protocol.l The MG interface must be added successfully.

Context

With different software parameters of the MG interface, you can select whether to perform thefollowing operations:

l Configure the MG interface to support the dual homing.l Configure the MG interface to register with the MGC with a wildcard.l Configure the MG interface to support authentication.l Configure the MG interface to support the authentication header.l Configure the MG interface to support the standalone service.l Configure the filter switch of the media stream source port.l Configure the filter timer length of the media stream source port.l Configure the parameter for reporting the P2P fault.l Configure the parameter for reporting the P2MP fault.l Configure the type of the prompt tone after the MG and the MGC are disconnected.

Procedure


Step 2 Run the mg-software parameter command to configure the software parameters of the MGinterface.

Step 3 Run the display mg-software parameter command to query the software parameters of theMG interface.

NOTE

The software parameters are valid only for the current MG interface.

----End

Example

To configure the software parameters of the MG interface so that the MG interface supports thedual homing and does not support the standalone service, do as follows:

huawei(config)#interface h248 0huawei(config-if-h248-0)#mg-software parameter 2 1huawei(config-if-h248-0)#display mg-software parameter 2 --------------------------------------------------------------------- Interface Id:1 para index:2 value:1 --------------------------------------------------------------------- APPENDIX: --------------------------------------------------------------------- Interface software parameter name: 2: The selections of the MG interface dual-homing 0: Do not support the dual-homing 1: Support the dual-homing, but do not support the auto switchover 2: Support the dual-homing and auto switchover



113

9.9 Configuring the Software Parameters of an MG Interface(the MGCP Protocol)

The software parameters of an MG interface include parameters such as whether to maintain theongoing call if the MG interface and the MGC are disconnected and whether the MG interfacesupports the dual-homing function. After the configuration, the software parameters of the MGinterface take effect on the subscriber service processes on the MG interface.

Prerequisitel The system must use the MGCP protocol.l The MG interface must be added successfully.

ContextWith different software parameters of the MG interface, you can select whether to perform thefollowing operations:

l Configure the MG to hold the active calls when the MG is disconnected from the MGC.l Configure the MG interface to support the dual homing.l Configure the MG interface to shut down the heartbeat.l Configure the MG interface to register with the MGC with a wildcard.l Configure the MGC type for the MG interface.l Configure the heartbeat-no-reply threshold.l Configure the MG interface to report heartbeat notification with the MG as the endpoint

name.l Configure the parameter for reporting the P2P faultl Configure the parameter for reporting the P2MP fault

ProcedureStep 1 In the global config mode, run the interface mgcp command to enter the MG interface mode.

Step 2 Run the mg-software parameter command to configure the software parameters of the MGinterface.

Step 3 Run the display mg-software parameter command to query the software parameters of theMG interface.

NOTE

The software parameters are valid only for the current MG interface.

----End

ExampleTo configure the software parameters of an MG interface so that the active calls are held afterthe MGC and MG are disconnected, do as follows:huawei(config)#interface mgcp 0huawei(config-if-mgcp-0)#mg-software parameter 1 1



114

huawei(config-if-mgcp-0)#display mg-software parameter 1 ------------------------------------------------- Interface Id:0 para index:1 value:1 ------------------------------------------------- APPENDIX: ------------------------------------------------- Interface soft parameter name: 1: Whether MG hold the existent call when connection between MGC and MG is broken 0 : Hold the existent call 1 : Disconnect all call and release resource

9.10 Configuring the Ringing Mode of an MG InterfaceConfiguring the ringing mode includes configuring the cadence ringing type and initial ringingtype. Configure the ringing mode of the MG interface to meet different requirements for theringing of different subscribers.

PrerequisiteThe MG interface must be added successfully.

Contextl If the system defined ring modes can meet the subscriber requirements, you can select the

required ring modes and configure the ring mapping.

l If the system defined ring modes cannot meet the subscriber requirements, you cancustomize ring modes and configure the ring mapping.

Precaution

The mgcpara parameter on the MG must be the same as the mgcpara parameter configured onthe MGC.

Procedure

Step 1 Run the system parameters command to configure the stop initial ringing flag.

NOTE

l If the initial ringing and the cadence ringing are in different cadence ratios, perform step 1. If they arein the same cadence ratio, skip step 1.

l To use user defined ring modes, perform steps 2-3. To use system defined ring modes, perform step 4.

Step 2 Run the user defined-ring modify command to configure a user defined ring.

Step 3 Run the display user defined-ring command to display the user defined ring modes.

Step 4 Enter the MG interface mode.

1. When the H.248 protocol is used, run the interface h248 command to enter the MGinterface mode.

2. When the MGCP protocol is used, run the interface mgcp command to enter the MGinterface mode.

Step 5 Run the mg-ringmode add command to add a ring mapping entry.



115

Step 6 Run the display mg-ringmode attribute command to query a ring mapping entry.

----End

ExampleTo configure the ring for an MG interface, do as follows:

Assume the following:

l MG ID: 0l MGC peer parameter ID: 0l Cadence ring: 1:4l Initial ring: 1:2huawei(config)#system parameters 3 1 huawei(config)#interface h248 0huawei(config-if-h248-0)#mg-ringmode add 0 0 17 huawei(config-if-h248-0)#display mg-ringmode attribute-------------------------------------------------------MGID PeerParameter CadenceRinging InitialRinging-------------------------------------------------------0 0 0 17-------------------------------------------------------

To configure a ring mode for an MG interface, do as follows:


l MG ID: 0l Peer parameter ID: 0l User-defined ring 0: 0.4s On, 0.2s Off, 0.4s On, 2.0s Offl Initial ring: user-defined ring 0l Cadence ring: user-defined ring 0huawei(config)#system parameters 3 1huawei(config)#user defined-ring modify 0 para1 400 para2 200 para3 400 para4 2000huawei(config)#display user defined-ring -------------------------------------------------- RingType Para1 Para2 Para3 Para4 Para5 Para6 -------------------------------------------------- 0 400 200 400 2000 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 6 0 0 0 0 0 0 7 0 0 0 0 0 0 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 9 0 0 0 0 0 0 10 0 0 0 0 0 0 11 0 0 0 0 0 0 12 0 0 0 0 0 0 13 0 0 0 0 0 0 14 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 0 0 0 0 0 0 --------------------------------------------------huawei(config)#interface h248 0huawei(config-if-h248-0)#mg-ringmode add 1 128 144huawei(config-if-h248-0)#display mg-ringmode attribute-------------------------------------------------------MGID PeerParameter CadenceRinging InitialRinging



116

-------------------------------------------------------0 1 128 144-------------------------------------------------------

NOTE

The user defined ring mode 0–15 corresponds with cadence ring modes 128–143 and initial ring modes144–159. For example, to use the user defined ring mode 0 as the cadence ring mode, select 128. To usethe user defined ring mode 0 as the initial ring mode, select 144.

9.11 Configuring Digitmaps of the MG Interface (the H.248Protocol)

The format of a digitmap is strictly defined by the H.248 protocol. A digitmap consists of stringsof characters with certain meanings. Configuring the digitmaps of the MG interface includesconfiguring the inner telephone digitmap, emergency channel digitmap, automatic re-dialdigitmap, and overload emergency call digitmap of the MG interface.


Specifications

Table 9-9 shows the valid characters in the strings and their meanings in the H.248 protocol.

Table 9-9 Description of the characters in H.248 digitmap

Character Meaning

0-9 -

A-D -

E It stands for * in the DTMF mode.

F It stands for # in the DTMF mode.

X It stands for a wildcard, indicating any digit from 0 to 9.

T It stands for a start timer used before any dialed number.

S Short timer. If the dialed number string matches with one dialing scheme inthe digitmap, but more numbers may be received and they match with otherdialing schemes, the matching status should not be reported immediately. TheMG must use the short timer to wait for receiving more numbers.

L Long timer. If the MG ensures that at least one more number is required tomatch with any dialing scheme in the digitmap, the timer value between thenumerals should be set as long timer.

Z Duration modifier. It indicates a dialing event of a long duration. It precedesthe event character with a fixed location. When the event duration exceedsthe threshold, the dialing event fills the location.

. It indicates that there can be zero or many characters before it.



117

Character Meaning

| It is used to divide a string into several strings, and each string is a dialingscheme.

[] It indicates that one digit or string can be selected among the options.

NOTE

l When you configure the re-dial digitmap for the card service when the MG interface uses the H.248protocol, E stands for * and F stands for #. For example, to set the re-dial digitmap for the card serviceto ##, you need to set the dualdialdigitmap to FF.

l The time length of the start timer on the UA5000 must be consistent with the configuration on theSoftSwitch.

Procedure


Step 2 Run the digitmap set command to configure digitmaps for the services.

Step 3 Run the display digitmap command to query the settings of the digitmaps.

----End

ExampleTo configure the digitmap for internal calls as 1234xxxx, and the digitmap for emergencychannel as 110|119|999, do as follows:

huawei(config)#interface h248 0huawei(config-if-h248-0)#digitmap set inner 1234xxxx emergency 110|119|999 huawei(config-if-h248-0)#display digitmap ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- Inner digitmap : 1234xxxx Emergency digitmap : 110|119|999 Urgent digitmap (for overload or bandwidth restrict) : - Dualdial digitmap for card service : - -----------------------------------------------------------------------------

Related OperationTable 9-10 lists the related operations for configuring the digitmaps.

Table 9-10 Related operations for configuring the digitmaps (based on H.248)


Clear a digitmap digitmap clear -



118


Configure digitmap timers digitmap-timer The H.248 protocol definesthree digitmap timers: longtimer (L), short timer (S) andinitial timer (T). Run thedigitmap-timer command toset the timers to comply withthe standards in your countryor area.l Long timer (L): If the MG

confirms that at least onedigit is to be received tomatch with a dialingscheme in the digitmap,the MG waits for the digitswith the long timer.


l Initial timer (T): It is usedbefore any dialed number.It is the duration beforethe first digit is receivedafter offhook. If the initialtimer is set as 0 (T = 0), thetimer fails. In this case, theMG waits for other digitsindefinitely.

9.12 Configuring Digitmaps of the MG Interface (the MGCPProtocol)

The format of a digitmap is strictly defined by MGCP. A digitmap consists of strings ofcharacters with certain meanings. Configuring the digitmaps of the MG interface includesconfiguring the automatic re-dial digitmap and overload emergency call digitmap of the MGinterface.



119

PrerequisiteAn MG interface must be added successfully.

SpecificationsTable 9-11 shows the valid characters in the strings and their meanings in the MGCP protocol.

Table 9-11 Description of the characters in MGCP digitmaps

Character Meaning

0-9 -

A-D -

X It stands for a wildcard, indicating any digit from 0 to 9.

T It indicates that the timer timeout is detected. That is, if there is still a numberafter the dialing scheme is matched with, the system reports the number digitby digit.

* It stands for * in DTMF mode.

# It stands for # in DTMF mode.

. It indicates that there can be zero or many characters before it.

| It is used to divide a string into several strings, and each string is a dialingscheme.

[] It indicates that one digit or string can be selected among the options.

NOTE

The time length of the start timer on the UA5000 must be consistent with the configuration on theSoftSwitch.

Procedure


Step 2 Run the digitmap set command to configure digitmaps for services.

Step 3 Run the display digitmap command to query the settings of the digitmap.

----End

ExampleTo configure the automatic re-dial digitmap for the card service to ##, do as follows:

huawei(config)#interface mgcp 0huawei(config-if-mgcp-0)#digitmap set dualdial ##huawei(config-if-mgcp-0)#display digitmap ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- Dualdial digitmap for card service : ##



120

System urgent digitmap (for overload or bandwidth restrict) : - -----------------------------------------------------------------------------

Related Operation

Table 9-12 lists the related operations for configuring the digitmap.

Table 9-12 Related operations for configuring the digitmap (based on MGCP)


Clear a digitmap digitmap clear -

Configure digitmap timers digitmap-timer The T timer is used to matchwith a timer expiry.

9.13 Configuring the Overload Control of the MGCThe MGC processes the calls reported by multiple AGs that the MGC controls. If the trafficvolumes of multiple AGs increase, the MGC may be overloaded. When the MGC is overloaded,the UA5000 can control the calls to ensure that the calls of subscribers with priority or emergencyare processed. Thus, the stability and the availability of the system are improved.

Prerequisitel The data on the MGC side must be configured successfully.l An MG interface must be added successfully.

Context

The MGC overload means that when the MGC has a large number of tasks to process, the CPUusage of the MGC increases, and the MGC cannot ensure normal calls. In this case, to solve thisproblem, the UA5000 limits the calls through different levels of priorities.

In a network, the MGC or the MG may be overloaded. That is, either the MGC or the MG isoverloaded, or both are overloaded. When either device is overloaded, the remote device shouldsupport and work with the other device.

The user levels corresponding to the parameters for controlling the MGC overload are as follows:

l t3: The customized user at the highest level, that is, the user of urgent callsl t2: The customized user at the second highest level, that is, the user of cat1 and cat2 callsl t1: The customized user at the common level, that is, the user of cat3 calls

NOTE

Cat1, cat2, and cat3 are the priority levels of the user terminal. Cat1 has the highest priority, and cat3 hasthe lowest priority.

Precaution

The MGC overload control cannot be disabled.



121

Procedure

Step 1 Run the mgc-overload-control parameters set command to configure the maximum callthroughput of the calls at different levels for the MG interface.

Step 2 Run the display mgc-overload-control parameters command to query the maximum callthroughput of the calls at different levels for the MG interface.

----End

ExampleTo configure the parameters for the MGC overload control to meet the following requirements,

l The user-defined call throughput threshold at the highest level is 20 offhook/s.l The user-defined call throughput threshold at the second highest level is 15 offhook/s.l The user-defined call throughput threshold at the common level is 10 offhook/s.l The leaky bucket throughput is 25 offhook/s.l The network busy tone after the call is intercepted by the bucket is an announcement.

do as follows:

huawei(config)#interface h248 0huawei(config-if-h248-0)#mgc-overload-control parameters set t3 20 t2 15 t1 10 maxAdmitRate 25 throttlingCallTreat 2huawei(config-if-h248-0)#display mgc-overload-control parameters ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- Threshold for the calling channel at the highest level :20 Threshold for the calling channel at the less-higher level:15 Threshold for the calling channel at the ordinary level :10 The maximum pass rate of the leaky bucket :25.00 When the calling is rejected by the leaky bucket, the system prompts busy tone of the user network: 2 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- APPENDIX: ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- When the calling is rejected by the leaky bucket, the system prompts busy tone of the user network: 1:EET 2:Announcement -----------------------------------------------------------------------------

9.14 Configuring the Overload Control of the MGIf the traffic volume of the MG increases suddenly, the MG may be overloaded. When the MGis overloaded, the UA5000 can control the calls to ensure that the calls of subscribers with priorityor emergency are processed. Thus, the stability and the availability of the system are improved.

PrerequisiteAn MG interface must be added successfully.

ContextThe MG overload means that when the MG has a large number of tasks to process, the CPUusage of the MG increases, and the MG cannot ensure normal calls. In this case, to solve thisproblem, the UA5000 limits calls to control the traffic when the CPU of the MG is overloaded.



122

In a network, the MGC or the MG may be overloaded. When either is overloaded, or both areoverloaded, the cooperation and the support of the remote device are required.

Precautionl The MG overload control takes effect only for PSTN subscribers and ISDN subscribers

(including ISDN PRA subscribers, ISDN BRA subscribers, DPNSS subscribers, andDASS2 subscribers).

l The UA5000 does not implement the overload processing for the onhook of ISDNsubscribers.

Procedure

Step 1 Configure the MG overload control parameters.

l Run the mg-overload-control originating-call command to set the offhook overload controlparameters for the system.

l Run the mg-overload-control call-clear command to set the onhook overload controlparameters for the system.

l Run the mg-overload-control terminating-call command to set the callee overload controlparameters for the system.

NOTE

In general, use the system defaults to set the MG overload control parameters.

Step 2 Run the display mg-overload-control command to query the MG overload control parameters.

Step 3 Run the mg-overload-control set command to enable the function of offhook overload controland callee overload control, and configure the corresponding minimum CPU usage for therestriction level overload.

NOTE

Use the default value 70 to set the corresponding minimum CPU usage for the restriction level overload.

Run the power-dialer-control set command to set the detection, detection cycle, number of detectionevents in each cycle and the recovery time for malicious subscribers.

----End

Example

Table 9-13 provides the data plan for configuring the MG overload control parameters. Thevalues of other parameters are the system default values.

Table 9-13 Data plan for configuring the MG overload control parameters

Type Pararemeter Value

originating-call threshold1 25

threshold2 30

initleakrate 6

call-clear threshold 30



123

Type Pararemeter Value

initleakrate 10

terminating-call threshold 30

initleakrate 10

huawei(config)#mg-overload-control originating-call threshold125 threshold2 30 initleakrate 6 huawei(config)#mg-overload-control call-clear threshold 30 initleakrate10huawei(config)#mg-overload-control terminating-call threshold 30initleakrate 10huawei(config)#display mg-overload-control all------------------------------------------------------------ Originating Call threshold1 25 Originating Call threshold2 30 Originating Call initleakrate 6 Originating Call adjustfactor 20 Originating Call resume time length 30(s)------------------------------------------------------------ Terminating Call threshold 30 Terminating Call initleakrate 10 Terminating Call adjustfactor 20 Terminating Call resume time length 30(s)------------------------------------------------------------ Mass Call Clear threshold 30 Mass Call Clear initleakrate 10 Mass Call Clear adjustfactor 20 Mass Call Clear resume time length 30(s)------------------------------------------------------------huawei(config)#mg-overload-control set originating-call-switch enablecall-clear-switch enable

9.15 Enabling an MG InterfaceEnable an MG interface so that the MG interface negotiates with the MGC through the specifiedmedia gateway control protocol and implements the registration on the MGC. Resetting theinterface enables the MG interface to register again on the MGC.

Prerequisitel An MG interface must be added successfully.l The data on the MG and the data on the MGC must be configured properly.

Precautionl After adding an MG interface or modifying the MG interface parameters, you need to reset

the MG interface to validate the parameter configuration.l Enabling an MG interface interrupts the ongoing services on the interface. Therefore,

exercise caution when enabling an MG interface.

Procedure

Step 1 Enter the MG interface mode



124

1. When the H.248 protocol is used, run the interface h248 command to enter the MGinterface mode.

2. When the MGCP protocol is used, run the interface mgcp command to enter the MGinterface mode.

Step 2 Run the reset command to reset the MG interface to enable it.

----End

ExampleTo reset the MG interface with MG ID 0 when the UA5000 uses the H.248 protocol, do asfollows:

huawei(config)#interface h248 0huawei(config-if-h248-0)#reset coldstart Are you sure to reset MG interface?(y/n)[n]:yhuawei(config-if-h248-0)# Reset MG interface 0 success!



125

10 Configuring the VoIP Service

About This Chapter

Configuring the VoIP service includes the application of the VoIP technology and the relatedprocess for configuring the VoIP service of the UA5000.

10.1 Introduction to the VoIP ServiceThe voice over IP (VoIP) service uses the voice compression technology and transmits the voiceservice over the IP network.

10.2 Configuration Example of the VoIP ServiceThis topic describes how to configure the VoIP service by accessing the voice service throughthe A32 service board and accessing the IP network through the PVMB control board.

10.3 Configuration Example of the VoIP Service (in Integrated Upstream Mode)This topic describes how to configure the VoIP service by accessing the voice service throughthe A32 service board and accessing the IP network through the IPM control board.

10.4 Configuring the Standalone ServiceConfigure the standalone service of the UA5000. Thus, when the UA5000 is disconnected fromthe MGC, the subscribers connected to a same VAG can still communicate with each other.

10.5 Configuring the System ParametersConfigure the parameters such as the sending howler tone flag, overseas flag, and consistencytest flag of the UA5000 by configuring the global system parameters. Thus, the use of thesubscriber terminal complies with the local standard.

10.6 Configuring the POTS Subscriber Data and Port AttributesAfter configuring the MG interface successful, you can add POTS subscribers on the MGinterface by configuring the POTS subscriber data and port attributes. Thus, the function of thecommunication between POTS subscribers can be implemented.

10.7 Configuring the QoS IP PrecedenceConfiguring the QoS IP precedence means configuring the different QoS IP precedences for thesignaling, media, and maintenance packets to meet different requirements for the delay and jitterof different services.

10.8 Configuring the QoS VLAN Priority

UA5000 Universal Access UnitConfiguration Guide-PVM CLI 10 Configuring the VoIP Service


126

Configuring the QoS VLAN priorities means configuring the different QoS VLAN priorities forthe signaling, media, and maintenance packets. Thus, the QoS priorities of the service trafficstreams can be controlled according to the VLAN priorities.

10.9 Separating the Signaling IP Address from the Media IP AddressSeparating the signaling IP address from the media IP address means configuring two differentIP addresses as the media IP address and signaling IP address. Thus, the media stream andsignaling stream are transmitted through different paths in the network.

10.10 Enabling the Voice Quality Enhanced FunctionEnabling the voice quality enhanced function includes enabling the automatic gain adjustmentand background noise suppression functions so that the voice service is of better quality whenthere is noise.



127

10.1 Introduction to the VoIP ServiceThe voice over IP (VoIP) service uses the voice compression technology and transmits the voiceservice over the IP network.

Service DescriptionThe VoIP service uses the IP packet switched network for transmission after the analog voicesignals are specially processed, such as compressed and packetized. In this manner, the voicesignals can be transmitted through the connectionless User Datagram Protocol (UDP).

Currently, the VoIP has the following three types:

l PC to PC: The subscribers are mainly teenagers.l PC to phone: The subscribers are mainly young people (such as oversea students). These

subscribers are sensitive to the communication price.l Phone to phone: The subscribers use the traditional telephones. The carrier provides the

voice service over the NGN softswitch network.

Service SpecificationsThe UA5000 provides the voice service through the voice service boards. Table 10-1 shows thenumber of ports provided by each type of service boards.

Table 10-1 Number of ports provided by each type of service boards

Board Type Number of Ports Remarks

ASL 16 16-port POTS service board

A32 32 32-port POTS service board

10.2 Configuration Example of the VoIP ServiceThis topic describes how to configure the VoIP service by accessing the voice service throughthe A32 service board and accessing the IP network through the PVMB control board.

Prerequisitel The master shelf must be added successfully. In this example, the H601HABD functions

as the master shelf.l The network management port must be configured properly, and you can telnet to the

PVMB control board. For the procedure for configuring the network management port, see"4 Configuring the NMS."

l The IP addresses used in this example must be configured in the IP address pool. The mediaIP address and the signaling IP address are different.

l The data on the MGC (namely, the data corresponding to the data configured on the MG)must be configured properly.



128

l The data on the MG interface must be configured properly. For detailed operations, see"9 Configuring the MG Interface."

Networking

Figure 10-1 shows the example network of the VoIP service.

NOTE

This example considers the PVMB control board as an example. The configuration of the PVMD control boardis the same as the configuration of the PVMB control board. Therefore, the configuration of the PVMD controlis not described here.

Figure 10-1 Example network of the VoIP service

UA5000

MGC10.10.20.1/24

Router10.10.10.1/24

H.248

10.10.10.2/24

PVMB

A32

Phone32Phone1

0/11

PVMB

Data Plan

Table 10-2 provides the data plan for configuring the VoIP service on the PVMB control board.

Table 10-2 Data plan for configuring the VoIP service on the PVMB control board

Data Type Item Data


code text

protocol H.248



129

Data Type Item Data

tranfer UDP



start-negotiate-version 2NOTE

The parameter value must be thesame as the H.248 version on theMGC.

IP addresses Signaling IP address of MGinterface 0 on the UA5000

10.10.10.2/24

Media IP address of MGinterface 0 on the UA5000

10.10.10.4/24

Default gateway of MGinterface 0 on the UA5000

10.10.10.1/24

IP address of the MGC 10.10.20.1/24

Telephone numbers Phone 1-phone 32 Shelf ID/Slot ID: 0/11Telephone numbers:12340001-12340032

terminal id 0-31, where terminals 0-31correspond to telephone numbers12340001-12340032.

ToS (type of service)strategy

IP priority and ToS priority System default value

Voice enhancing function The automatic gain control(AGC) function of the PSTNport

Supported

The AGC level of the PSTNport

15 (-24 dBm0)

The spectral noisesuppression (SNS) functionof the PSTN port

Supported

The SNS level of the PSTNport

20 (20 dB)

Contextl The MG interface parameters must be the same as the parameters configured on the MGC.l Use the cadence ring tone and initial ring tone defined in the local standard.



130

Configuration FlowchartFigure 10-2 shows the flowchart for configuring the VoIP service.

Figure 10-2 Flowchart for configuring the VoIP service

Configureprotocol data

Start

Add shelves

Add boards

Confirm boards

Configure IP addresses

Add MG interfaces

Configure an MG interface


(Optional)Configure

MGCPprotocol

parameters

(Optional)Configure

H.248protocol

parameters

(Optional)Configure

SPCs

ConfigurePOTS

subscriberdata

(Optional)Configurecommonattributes

of the PORTsubscribers

(Optional)Configuresoftware

parameters ofthe MG

interface

(Optional)Configure

systemparameters

End

Configurehardware data

Configure IPaddresses

Configure POTS subsciber data

Configure MG interfacedata

Configure softwareparameters

Procedurel Procedure (for IPMB)

NOTE

In this example, the system uses the independent upstream mode. The A32 service board providesthe interface for accessing the voice service. The voice signals are transmitted directly to the upper-layer network after being processed by the PVMB control board. Therefore, you need not configurethe IPMB board.

l Procedure (for PVMB)1. Configure the IP address of the service network port.

huawei(config)#interface ethhuawei(interface-eth)#ip modify 10.10.10.10 ip_address 10.10.10.2 gateway10.10.10.1 submask 255.255.255.0 vlan_tag 1001/When the device is configured with the IP address of the service network port, whereas the IP address, subnet mask, gateway, or vlantag of the current service network port on the device is inconsistent with the requirement of the actual data plan, run this command to modify the parameters.//If no IP address is added to the current IP address pool of the device, run the ip address command to add the media IP address and signaling IP address to the IP address pool./huawei(interface-eth)#ip address 10.10.10.2 255.255.255.0 10.10.10.1



131

vlan_tag 1001 huawei(interface-eth)#ip address 10.10.10.4 255.255.255.0 10.10.10.1 huawei(interface-eth)#display ip address Eth: IPAddress ..........: 10.10.10.2 SubMask.............: 255.255.255.0 GateWay.............: 10.10.10.1 MacIndex............: 0 MacAddress..........: 00-E0-FC-44-16-57 VlanID .............: 1001

IPAddress ..........: 10.10.10.4 SubMask.............: 255.255.255.0 GateWay.............: 10.10.10.1 MacIndex............: 0 MacAddress..........: 00-E0-FC-44-16-57 VlanID .............: --

2. Configure the QoS (quality of service) IP strategy.huawei(interface-eth)#quithuawei(config)#qos ip 10.10.10.2 strategy none

3. Configure the working mode of the PVMB board as alone.

In this networking mode, the PVM control board provides services independently, andthe voice service is transmitted upstream through the ETH port on the PVM board.

huawei(config)#working mode alone4. Add A32 service board to the shelf and confirm the board.

huawei(config)#board add 0/11 a32huawei(config)#board confirm 0/11huawei(config)#display board 0 ------------------------------------------------------------------------- SlotID BoardName Status Sub0 Sub1 Online/Offline ------------------------------------------------------------------------- 0 PWX2 Normal 1 PWX2 Normal 2 3 4 H601PVMB Standby_normal H602ETCA 5 H601PVMB Active_normal H602ETCA H602ETCM ...... 11 A32 Normal ...... 35 -------------------------------------------------------------------------

5. Configure the MG interface attributes.huawei(config)#interface h248 0 Are you sure to add MG interface? (y/n)[n]:y huawei(config-if-h248-0)#if-h248 attribute mgip 10.10.10.2 mgport 2944code text transfer udp domainName UA5000.com mgcip_1 10.10.20.1 mgcport_1 2944 mg-media-ip 10.10.10.4 start-negotiate-version 2huawei(config-if-h248-0)#display if-h248 attribute --------------------------------------------------------------------- MGID 0 MG Description - MG DomainName UA5000.com Protocol H248 H248version Negotiated Originally 2 Profile Negotiation Para enable Profile 1:Resv1("")

2833Encrypt - Codetype Text Transmode UDP



132

HeartBeatTimer(s) 60 HeartBeatRetransTimes 3 HeartBeatRetransTimer(s) 60 MG signalling IP 10.10.10.2 MG signalling Port 2944 MG media IP 10.10.10.4 MIDType IP4_ADDR DeviceName -


6. Configure H.248 protocol parameters (enable the three-way handshake signal switchof the H.248 protocol stack.)huawei(config-if-h248-0)#h248stack tr responseackctrl truehuawei(config-if-h248-0)#display h248stack tr --------------------------------------------------------------------- three way handshake : true longtimer(units: ms) : 30000 provtimer(units: ms) : 8000 retransfailoption : max retransfer times maxretranstimes : 7 retransmode : auto maxretranstimerval(units: ms) : 4000 minretranstimerval(units: ms) : 1000 ---------------------------------------------------------------------

7. Enable the MG interface again.huawei(config-if-h248-0)#reset coldstart Are you sure to reset MG interface?(y/n)[n]:yhuawei(config-if-h248-0)# Reset MG interface 0 success!

8. Query whether the state of the MG interface is normal.huawei(config-if-h248-0)#quithuawei(config)#display if-h248 all -------------------------------------------------------------------------MGID TransMode State MgPort MGIP/DomainName MgcPort MGCIP/DomainName-------------------------------------------------------------------------0 UDP Normal 2944 10.10.10.2 2944 10.10.20.1-------------------------------------------------------------------------

9. Configure the telephone numbers of the subscribers.huawei(config)#esl userhuawei(config-esl-user)#mgpstnuser batadd 0/11/0 0/11/31 0 terminalid 0telno 12340001huawei(config-esl-user)#display mgpstnuser 0/11 -------------------------------------------------------- Frame/Slot/Port MGID TelNo Priority TID -------------------------------------------------------- 0 / 11 / 0 0 12340001 Cat3 A0 0 / 11 / 1 0 12340002 Cat3 A1 0 / 11 / 2 0 12340003 Cat3 A2 0 / 11 / 3 0 12340004 Cat3 A3 0 / 11 / 4 0 12340005 Cat3 A4 0 / 11 / 5 0 12340006 Cat3 A5 0 / 11 / 6 0 12340007 Cat3 A6 0 / 11 / 7 0 12340008 Cat3 A7 0 / 11 / 8 0 12340009 Cat3 A8 0 / 11 / 9 0 12340010 Cat3 A9 0 / 11 / 10 0 12340011 Cat3 A10 0 / 11 / 11 0 12340012 Cat3 A11 0 / 11 / 12 0 12340013 Cat3 A12 0 / 11 / 13 0 12340014 Cat3 A13 0 / 11 / 14 0 12340015 Cat3 A14 0 / 11 / 15 0 12340016 Cat3 A15



133

0 / 11 / 16 0 12340017 Cat3 A16 0 / 11 / 17 0 12340018 Cat3 A17 0 / 11 / 18 0 12340019 Cat3 A18 0 / 11 / 19 0 12340020 Cat3 A19 0 / 11 / 20 0 12340021 Cat3 A20 0 / 11 / 21 0 12340022 Cat3 A21 0 / 11 / 22 0 12340023 Cat3 A22 0 / 11 / 23 0 12340024 Cat3 A23 0 / 11 / 24 0 12340025 Cat3 A24 0 / 11 / 25 0 12340026 Cat3 A25 0 / 11 / 26 0 12340027 Cat3 A26 0 / 11 / 27 0 12340028 Cat3 A27 0 / 11 / 28 0 12340029 Cat3 A28 0 / 11 / 29 0 12340030 Cat3 A29 0 / 11 / 30 0 12340031 Cat3 A30 0 / 11 / 31 0 12340032 Cat3 A31 -------------------------------------------------------- Command processing completed. 32 port(s) are configured MG PSTN user data

10. Enable the voice enhancing function.huawei(config-esl-user)#pstnport vqe batset 0/11/0 0/11/31 agc enable agc-Level 15 sns enable sns-Level 20 Command processing completed. 32 user data modified successfullyhuawei(config-esl-user)#display pstnport vqe 0/11 ------------------------------------------------------------------------- Frame/Slot/Port AGC enable AGC value (dbm0) SNS enable SNS value(db) ------------------------------------------------------------------------- 0 / 11 / 0 enable -24 enable 20 0 / 11 / 1 enable -24 enable 20 0 / 11 / 2 enable -24 enable 20 0 / 11 / 3 enable -24 enable 20 0 / 11 / 4 enable -24 enable 20 0 / 11 / 5 enable -24 enable 20 0 / 11 / 6 enable -24 enable 20 0 / 11 / 7 enable -24 enable 20 0 / 11 / 8 enable -24 enable 20 0 / 11 / 9 enable -24 enable 20 0 / 11 / 10 enable -24 enable 20 0 / 11 / 11 enable -24 enable 20 0 / 11 / 12 enable -24 enable 20 0 / 11 / 13 enable -24 enable 20 0 / 11 / 14 enable -24 enable 20 0 / 11 / 15 enable -24 enable 20 0 / 11 / 16 enable -24 enable 20 0 / 11 / 17 enable -24 enable 20 0 / 11 / 18 enable -24 enable 20 0 / 11 / 19 enable -24 enable 20---- More ( Press 'Q' to break ) ----

11. Save the data.huawei(config-esl-user)#quithuawei(config)#save

----End

ResultAfter the configuration is complete, phone 1 to phone 32 can communicate with each other.



134

10.3 Configuration Example of the VoIP Service (inIntegrated Upstream Mode)

This topic describes how to configure the VoIP service by accessing the voice service throughthe A32 service board and accessing the IP network through the IPM control board.

Prerequisitel The master shelf must be added successfully. In this example, the H601HABD functions

as the master shelf.

l The network management port must be configured properly, and you can telnet to thePVMB control board. For the procedure for configuring the network management port, see"4 Configuring the NMS."

l The IP addresses used in this example must be configured in the IP address pool. The mediaIP address and the signaling IP address are different.

l The data on the MGC (namely, the data corresponding to the data configured on the MG)must be configured properly.

l The data on the MG interface must be configured properly. For detailed operations, see"9 Configuring the MG Interface."

Networking

Figure 10-3 shows the example network for configuring the VoIP service.

Figure 10-3 Example network for configuring the VoIP service

UA5000

MGC10.10.20.1/24

Router10.10.10.1/24

H.248

10.10.10.2/24

PVMB

PVMB

IPMB

IPMB

A

3

2

Phone32Phone1

0/11



135

Data Planl Table 10-3 provides the data plan for configuring the VoIP service on the IPMB control

board.l The PVMB control board uses its FE ports Inner_FE0 and Inner_FE1 to communicate with

FE ports 6 and 7 on the IPMB control board. In this case, the PVMB control board uses theIPMB control board for upstream.

l Table 10-4 provides the data plan for configuring the VoIP service on the PVMB controlboard.

Table 10-3 Data plan for configuring the VoIP service (on the IPMB control board)

Shelf ID/Slot ID/Port ID CorrespondingVLAN

Remarks

0/2/0 1001 The PVMB control board usesport 0 on the IPMB control boardfor uplink. The PVMB controlboard uses its FE ports Inner_FE0and Inner_FE1 to communicatewith FE ports 6 and 7 on the IPMBcontrol board. Group FE ports 0,6, and 7 on the IPMB controlboard into a VLAN.

0/2/6

0/2/7

Table 10-4 Data plan for configuring the VoIP service (on the PVMB control board)

Type Item Data


code text

protocol H.248

tranfer UDP




The parameter must be consistentwith the H.248 version of the MGC.

IP address Signaling IP address of MGinterface 0 on the UA5000

10.10.10.2/24



136

Type Item Data


10.10.10.4/24


10.10.10.1/24


Telephone numberallocation

phone 1-phone 32 Shelf ID/slot ID: 0/11Telephone number:12340001-12340032

terminal id 0-31. Terminals 0-31 correspondto numbers 12340001-12340032.

TOS strategy IP priority and TOS priority System default value

Voice enhanced function Automatic gain control(AGC) of the PSTN port

Support

Parameter value of the AGCof the PSTN port

15 (-24 dBm0)

Spectral noise suppression(SNS) of the PSTN port

Support

Parameter value of the SNSof the PSTN port

20 (20 dB)

Contextl The parameters configured on the MG interface and on the MGC interface must be

consistent.l The cadence ringing tone and initial ringing tone must use the local standards.

Configuration FlowchartFigure 10-4 shows the flowchart for configuring the VoIP service.



137

Figure 10-4 Flowchart for configuring the VoIP service

Configureprotocol data

Start

Add shelves

Add boards

Confirm boards

Configure IP addresses

Add MG interfaces

Configure an MG interface


(Optional)Configure

MGCPprotocol

parameters

(Optional)Configure

H.248protocol

parameters

(Optional)Configure

SPCs

ConfigurePOTS

subscriberdata

(Optional)Configurecommonattributes

of the PORTsubscribers

(Optional)Configuresoftware

parameters ofthe MG

interface

(Optional)Configure

systemparameters

End

Configurehardware data

Configure IPaddresses

Configure POTS subsciber data

Configure MG interfacedata

Configure softwareparameters

Procedurel Configuration steps (for the IPMB control board)

1. Add a common VLAN and group FE ports 6 and 7 and IP uplink port 0 into thecommon VLAN.huawei(config)#vlan 1001 standardhuawei(config)#port vlan 1001 0/2 0huawei(config)#port vlan 1001 0/2 6huawei(config)#port vlan 1001 0/2 7

2. Specify the IP address for the VLAN interface.huawei(config)#interface vlanif 1001huawei(config-if-vlanif1001)#ip address 10.10.10.1 255.255.255.0

3. Add a common VLAN and group FE ports 6 and 7 and IP uplink port 0 into thecommon VLAN as the uplink channel of the NMS packets.huawei(config)#vlan 1002 standardhuawei(config)#port vlan 1002 0/2 0huawei(config)#port vlan 1002 0/2 6huawei(config)#port vlan 1002 0/2 7

4. Specify the IP address for the VLAN interfacehuawei(config)#interface vlanif 1002huawei(config-if-vlanif1002)#ip address 10.10.20.1 255.255.255.0

5. Save the data.huawei(config)#save

l Configuration steps (for the PVMB control board)



138

1. Configure the IP address of the service network port.huawei(config)#interface ethhuawei(interface-eth)#ip modify 10.10.10.10 ip_address 10.10.10.2 gateway10.10.10.1 submask 255.255.255.0 vlan_tag 1002/When the device is configured with the IP address of the service network port, run this command to change the configuration if the IP address, subnet mask, gateway, or the vlantag does not meet the data plan requirements.//If no IP address is added to the current IP address pool, run the ip address command to add the media IP address and signaling IP address to the IP address pool.//huawei(interface-eth)#ip address 10.10.10.2 255.255.255.0 10.10.10.1 vlan_tag 1001 huawei(interface-eth)#ip address 10.10.10.4 255.255.255.0 10.10.10.1 huawei(interface-eth)#display ip address Eth: IPAddress ..........: 10.10.10.2 SubMask.............: 255.255.255.0 GateWay.............: 10.10.10.1 MacIndex............: 0 MacAddress..........: 00-E0-FC-44-16-57 VlanID .............: 1001


2. Configure the QoS IP strategy.huawei(interface-eth)#quithuawei(config)#qos ip 10.10.10.2 strategy nonehuawei(config)#qos ip 10.10.10.2 strategy tos

3. Configure the working mode of the PVMB control board to the independentnetworking mode.

In this networking mode, the voice service is transmitted upstream through the ETHport on the IPM board.

huawei(config)#working mode integrated If switch working mode from alone to integrated,ETH0 will be service port andETH1 will be outband port,Are you sure?(y/n)[n]:y

4. Add the A32 service board and confirm the board.huawei(config)#board add 0/11 a32huawei(config)#board confirm 0/11huawei(config)#display board 0 ------------------------------------------------------------------------- SlotID BoardName Status Sub0 Sub1 Online/Offline ------------------------------------------------------------------------- 0 PWX2 Normal 1 PWX2 Normal 2 3 4 H601PVMB Standby_normal H602ETCA 5 H601PVMB Active_normal H602ETCA H602ETCM ...... 11 A32 Normal ...... 35 -------------------------------------------------------------------------

5. Configure the attributes of the MG interface.



139

huawei(config)#interface h248 0 Are you sure to add MG interface? (y/n)[n]:y huawei(config-if-h248-0)#if-h248 attribute mgip 10.10.10.2 mgport 2944code text transfer udp domainName UA5000.com mgcip_1 10.10.20.1 mgcport_1 2944 mg-media-ip 10.10.10.4 start-negotiate-version 2huawei(config-if-h248-0)#display if-h248 attribute --------------------------------------------------------------------- MGID 0 MG Description frf_add MG DomainName UA5000.com Protocol H248 H248version Negotiated Originally 2 Profile Negotiation Para disable Profile 0:NoProfile("")



6. Configure the parameters of the H.248 protocol (enable the three-way handshakesignal function of the H.248 protocol stack).huawei(config-if-h248-0)#h248stack tr responseackctrl truehuawei(config-if-h248-0)#display h248stack tr --------------------------------------------------------------------- three way handshake : true longtimer(units: ms) : 30000 provtimer(units: ms) : 8000 retransfailoption : max retransfer times maxretranstimes : 7 retransmode : auto maxretranstimerval(units: ms) : 4000 minretranstimerval(units: ms) : 1000 ---------------------------------------------------------------------

7. Restart the MG interface.huawei(config-if-h248-0)#reset coldstart Are you sure to reset MG interface?(y/n)[n]:yhuawei(config-if-h248-0)# Reset MG interface 0 success!

8. Query whether the MG interface is in the normal state.huawei(config-if-h248-0)#quithuawei(config)#display if-h248 all -------------------------------------------------------------------------MGID TransMode State MgPort MGIP/DomainName MgcPort MGCIP/DomainName-------------------------------------------------------------------------0 UDP Normal 2944 10.10.10. 2 2944 10.10.20.1-------------------------------------------------------------------------

9. Configure the user telephone number.huawei(config)#esl userhuawei(config-esl-user)#mgpstnuser batadd 0/11/0 0/11/31 0 terminalid 0telno 12340001huawei(config-esl-user)#display mgpstnuser 0/11 --------------------------------------------------------



140

Frame/Slot/Port MGID TelNo Priority TID -------------------------------------------------------- 0 / 11 / 0 0 12340001 Cat3 A0 0 / 11 / 1 0 12340002 Cat3 A1 0 / 11 / 2 0 12340003 Cat3 A2 0 / 11 / 3 0 12340004 Cat3 A3 0 / 11 / 4 0 12340005 Cat3 A4 0 / 11 / 5 0 12340006 Cat3 A5 0 / 11 / 6 0 12340007 Cat3 A6 0 / 11 / 7 0 12340008 Cat3 A7 0 / 11 / 8 0 12340009 Cat3 A8 0 / 11 / 9 0 12340010 Cat3 A9 0 / 11 / 10 0 12340011 Cat3 A10 0 / 11 / 11 0 12340012 Cat3 A11 0 / 11 / 12 0 12340013 Cat3 A12 0 / 11 / 13 0 12340014 Cat3 A13 0 / 11 / 14 0 12340015 Cat3 A14 0 / 11 / 15 0 12340016 Cat3 A15 0 / 11 / 16 0 12340017 Cat3 A16 0 / 11 / 17 0 12340018 Cat3 A17 0 / 11 / 18 0 12340019 Cat3 A18 0 / 11 / 19 0 12340020 Cat3 A19 0 / 11 / 20 0 12340021 Cat3 A20 0 / 11 / 21 0 12340022 Cat3 A21 0 / 11 / 22 0 12340023 Cat3 A22 0 / 11 / 23 0 12340024 Cat3 A23 0 / 11 / 24 0 12340025 Cat3 A24 0 / 11 / 25 0 12340026 Cat3 A25 0 / 11 / 26 0 12340027 Cat3 A26 0 / 11 / 27 0 12340028 Cat3 A27 0 / 11 / 28 0 12340029 Cat3 A28 0 / 11 / 29 0 12340030 Cat3 A29 0 / 11 / 30 0 12340031 Cat3 A30 0 / 11 / 31 0 12340032 Cat3 A31 -------------------------------------------------------- Command processing completed. 32 port(s) are configured MG PSTN user data

10. Enable the voice enhanced function.huawei(config-esl-user)#pstnport vqe batset 0/11/0 0/11/31 agc enable agc-Level 15 sns enable sns-Level 20 Command processing completed. 32 user data modified successfullyhuawei(config-esl-user)#display pstnport vqe 0/11 ------------------------------------------------------------------------- Frame/Slot/Port AGC enable AGC value (dbm0) SNS enable SNS value(db) ------------------------------------------------------------------------- 0 / 11 / 0 enable 15 enable 20 0 / 11 / 1 enable 15 enable 20 0 / 11 / 2 enable 15 enable 20 0 / 11 / 3 enable 15 enable 20 0 / 11 / 4 enable 15 enable 20 0 / 11 / 5 enable 15 enable 20 0 / 11 / 6 enable 15 enable 20 0 / 11 / 7 enable 15 enable 20 0 / 11 / 8 enable 15 enable 20 0 / 11 / 9 enable 15 enable 20 0 / 11 / 10 enable 15 enable 20 0 / 11 / 11 enable 15 enable 20 0 / 11 / 12 enable 15 enable 20 0 / 11 / 13 enable 15 enable 20 0 / 11 / 14 enable 15 enable 20 0 / 11 / 15 enable 15 enable 20 0 / 11 / 16 enable 15 enable 20 0 / 11 / 17 enable 15 enable 20 0 / 11 / 18 enable 15 enable 20 0 / 11 / 19 enable 15 enable 20---- More ( Press 'Q' to break ) ----

11. Save the data.



141

huawei(config-esl-user)#quithuawei(config)#save

----End

ResultAfter the configuration is complete, phone 1 to phone 32 can communicate with each other.

10.4 Configuring the Standalone ServiceConfigure the standalone service of the UA5000. Thus, when the UA5000 is disconnected fromthe MGC, the subscribers connected to a same VAG can still communicate with each other.

Prerequisitel The UA5000 must use the H.248 protocol.l The subscribers of the voice services must be configured on the MG interface.l The subscribers must be able to call each other.For the procedure for configuring the subscribers, see "10.2 Configuration Example of theVoIP Service."

Contextl Internal call standalone: When the UA5000 is disconnected from the MGC, the subscribers

on the same MG interface can call each other. The MG interface is supported by theUA5000 instead of the MGC.

l Emergency channel: When the UA5000 is disconnected from the MGC, the subscribers ofthe UA5000 can dial the external phone numbers that are in the digitmap for emergencycalls. For example, when the UA5000 is disconnected from the MGC, in the case of a fire,you can dial the fire emergency call.

PrecautionThe UA5000 cannot detect repeated telephone numbers. When configuring telephone numbersfor the standalone service, ensure that the telephone numbers are unique. Otherwise, thestandalone service fails.

Procedure

Step 1 Run the mg-software parameter command to configure the service type of the VAG standaloneservice.

Step 2 Run the display mg-software parameter command to query the service type of the VAGstandalone service.

Step 3 Run the standalone parameters command to configure the parameters of the VAG standalonetimers.

Step 4 Run the display standalone parameters command to query the parameters of the VAGstandalone timers.

Step 5 Run the digitmap set command to configure the digitmap for internal calls.



142

Step 6 Run the display digitmap command to query the digitmap for internal calls.

----End

Example

The following example shows how to configure the 32 POTS subscribers on the board in slot12 of shelf 0, and configure the VAG to support the standalone service. Table 10-5 provides thedata plan for configuring the standalone service.

Table 10-5 Data plan for configuring the standalone service

Data Type Item Data

MG interface mgid 1

Standaloneparameters

para index 11: The device supports internal calls between thesubscribers connected to the device and theemergency channels.

dialtoneval 15

ringval 60

busytoneval 50

Phone digitmap 1234xxxx

Emergency calldigitmap

110|119|999

huawei(config)#interface h248 1huawei(config-if-h248-1)#mg-software parameter 11 3huawei(config-if-h248-1)#display mg-software parameter 11 ------------------------------------------------- Interface Id:1 para index:11 value:3 ------------------------------------------------- APPENDIX: ------------------------------------------------- Interface soft parameter name: 11: Stand alone support 0 : None 1 : Inner 2 : Emergency 3 : Bothhuawei(config-if-h248-1)#standalone parameters dialtone 15 ring 60 busytone 50 huawei(config-if-h248-1)#display standalone parameters -------------------------------------------------------------------------- System stand alone para of timer for dial tone :15 (s) System stand alone para of timer for busy tone :50 (s) System stand alone para of timer for ring :60 (s) --------------------------------------------------------------------------huawei(config-if-h248-1)#digitmap set inner 1234xxxx emergency 110|119|999huawei(config-if-h248-1)#display digitmap --------------------------------------------------------------------------- Inner digitmap : 1234xxxx Emergency digitmap : 110|119|999 Urgent digitmap (for overload or bandwidth restrict) : - Dualdial digitmap for card service : - ---------------------------------------------------------------------------



143

10.5 Configuring the System ParametersConfigure the parameters such as the sending howler tone flag, overseas flag, and consistencytest flag of the UA5000 by configuring the global system parameters. Thus, the use of thesubscriber terminal complies with the local standard.

Prerequisitel The UA5000 must work in the normal state.l The user must log in to the UA5000 through the maintenance terminal and must maintain

the UA5000 in the normal state.

ContextThe system parameters can be used to configure the following:

l Sending howler tone flagl Overseas version flagl Consistency test flagl Stop initial ringing flagl System self check flagl CPU over load call restriction flagl Call-waiting tone flagl Voicemail model RTP 2833 Payload Typel Inconsistency of the numbers of the peer UDP transmit and receive portsl Transfer mode of media stream in a devicel Howler tone sourcel TEI check cyclel POTS GTC performance statistics function

Procedure

Step 1 Run the system parameters command to configure the system parameters.

Step 2 Run the display system parameters command to query the system parameters.

----End

ExampleTo set the overseas version flag as ETSI, do as follows:

huawei(config)#system parameters 1 8huawei(config)#display system parameters 1 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- Parameter name index: 1 Parameter value: 8 Mean: Overseas version flag, 0:China, 1:HongKong, 2:Brazil, 3:Egypt,4:Singapore, 5:Thailand, 6:France, 7:Britain MSFUK, 8:Britain ETSI, 9:Bulgaria,



144

10:Aleutian -----------------------------------------------------------------------------

10.6 Configuring the POTS Subscriber Data and PortAttributes

After configuring the MG interface successful, you can add POTS subscribers on the MGinterface by configuring the POTS subscriber data and port attributes. Thus, the function of thecommunication between POTS subscribers can be implemented.

Prerequisitel The UA5000 must communicate properly with the MGC.l The subscriber data on the MGC must be configured properly.

Contextl Perform this operation to configure POTS subscriber data, such as the following:

– Terminal priority– Telephone number– Terminal ID

l Perform this operation to configure the attributes of a POTS port, such as the following:– Subscriber attributes– Attributes of the calling number format– Impedance and attributes of the current– 16KC/12KC attributes– Polarity reversed pulse attributes– Power-off duration attributes

Procedure

Step 1 In the global config mode, run the esl user command to enter the ESL mode.

Step 2 Run the mgpstnuser add or mgpstnuser batadd command to add POTS subscribers.

Step 3 Run the display mgpstnuser command to query the information about the POTS subscribers.

Step 4 Run the pstnport attribute set or pstnport attribute batset command to set the attributes ofthe PSTN port.

Step 5 Run the display pstnport attribute command to query the attributes of the PSTN port.

----End

ExampleThe following example shows how to add 32 POTS subscribers to shelf 0/slot 11. In this example,the mgid is 0, and all the subscribers support polarity reversed charging.

huawei(config)#esl userhuawei(config-esl-user)#mgpstnuser batadd 0/11/0 0/11/31 0 step 1 terminalid 100



145

This operation will take several minutes, please wait...huawei(config-esl-user)# Command processing completed. 32 user data added successfullyhuawei(config-esl-user)#display mgpstnuser 0/11/0 0/11/31 -------------------------------------------------------- Frame/Slot/Port MGID TelNo Priority TID -------------------------------------------------------- 0 / 11 / 0 0 - Cat3 A100 0 / 11 / 1 0 - Cat3 A101 0 / 11 / 2 0 - Cat3 A102 0 / 11 / 3 0 - Cat3 A103 0 / 11 / 4 0 - Cat3 A104 0 / 11 / 5 0 - Cat3 A105 0 / 11 / 6 0 - Cat3 A106 0 / 11 / 7 0 - Cat3 A107 0 / 11 / 8 0 - Cat3 A108 0 / 11 / 9 0 - Cat3 A109 0 / 11 / 10 0 - Cat3 A110 0 / 11 / 11 0 - Cat3 A111 0 / 11 / 12 0 - Cat3 A112 0 / 11 / 13 0 - Cat3 A113 0 / 11 / 14 0 - Cat3 A114 0 / 11 / 15 0 - Cat3 A115 0 / 11 / 16 0 - Cat3 A116 0 / 11 / 17 0 - Cat3 A117 0 / 11 / 18 0 - Cat3 A118 0 / 11 / 19 0 - Cat3 A119 0 / 11 / 20 0 - Cat3 A120 0 / 11 / 21 0 - Cat3 A121 0 / 11 / 22 0 - Cat3 A122 0 / 11 / 23 0 - Cat3 A123 0 / 11 / 24 0 - Cat3 A124 0 / 11 / 25 0 - Cat3 A125 0 / 11 / 26 0 - Cat3 A126 0 / 11 / 27 0 - Cat3 A127 0 / 11 / 28 0 - Cat3 A128 0 / 11 / 29 0 - Cat3 A129 0 / 11 / 30 0 - Cat3 A130 0 / 11 / 31 0 - Cat3 A131 -------------------------------------------------------- Command processing completed. 32 port(s) are configured MG PSTN user datahuawei(config-esl-user)#pstnport attribute batset 0/11/0 0/11/31 polarity-reverse supporthuawei(config-esl-user)#display pstnport attribute 0/11 ------------------------------------------------------------------------- Frame/Slot/Port Gain(db) Dial-Mode Polarity-Reverse User-Type ------------------------------------------------------------------------- 0 / 11 / 0 High gain DTMF-Pulse-Both Supported DEL 0 / 11 / 1 High gain DTMF-Pulse-Both Supported DEL 0 / 11 / 2 High gain DTMF-Pulse-Both Supported DEL 0 / 11 / 3 High gain DTMF-Pulse-Both Supported DEL 0 / 11 / 4 High gain DTMF-Pulse-Both Supported DEL 0 / 11 / 5 High gain DTMF-Pulse-Both Supported DEL 0 / 11 / 6 High gain DTMF-Pulse-Both Supported DEL 0 / 11 / 7 High gain DTMF-Pulse-Both Supported DEL 0 / 11 / 8 High gain DTMF-Pulse-Both Supported DEL 0 / 11 / 9 High gain DTMF-Pulse-Both Supported DEL 0 / 11 / 10 High gain DTMF-Pulse-Both Supported DEL 0 / 11 / 11 High gain DTMF-Pulse-Both Supported DEL 0 / 11 / 12 High gain DTMF-Pulse-Both Supported DEL 0 / 11 / 13 High gain DTMF-Pulse-Both Supported DEL 0 / 11 / 14 High gain DTMF-Pulse-Both Supported DEL 0 / 11 / 15 High gain DTMF-Pulse-Both Supported DEL 0 / 11 / 16 High gain DTMF-Pulse-Both Supported DEL 0 / 11 / 17 High gain DTMF-Pulse-Both Supported DEL 0 / 11 / 18 High gain DTMF-Pulse-Both Supported DEL 0 / 11 / 19 High gain DTMF-Pulse-Both Supported DEL 0 / 11 / 20 High gain DTMF-Pulse-Both Supported DEL 0 / 11 / 21 High gain DTMF-Pulse-Both Supported DEL



146

0 / 11 / 22 High gain DTMF-Pulse-Both Supported DEL 0 / 11 / 23 High gain DTMF-Pulse-Both Supported DEL 0 / 11 / 24 High gain DTMF-Pulse-Both Supported DEL 0 / 11 / 25 High gain DTMF-Pulse-Both Supported DEL 0 / 11 / 26 High gain DTMF-Pulse-Both Supported DEL 0 / 11 / 27 High gain DTMF-Pulse-Both Supported DEL 0 / 11 / 28 High gain DTMF-Pulse-Both Supported DEL 0 / 11 / 29 High gain DTMF-Pulse-Both Supported DEL 0 / 11 / 30 High gain DTMF-Pulse-Both Supported DEL 0 / 11 / 31 High gain DTMF-Pulse-Both Supported DEL -------------------------------------------------------------------------huawei(config-esl-user)#quithuawei(config)#board reset 0/11Are you sure to reset board? (y/n)[n]:y

NOTE

At the start and end of a call, the UA5000 shows the start time and the end time based on the polarityreversal of the subscriber line. The billing terminal that has the polarity reversal charging function, suchas a charging telephone set, implements the polarity reversal charging function according to the start timeand the end time of the call.

Related Operation

Table 10-6 lists the related operations for configuring the POTS subscriber data.

Table 10-6 Related operations for configuring the POTS subscriber data


Delete a POTS subscriber ordelete POTS subscribers inbatches

mgpstnuser del/mgpstnuserbatdel

-

Modify POTS subscriberdata

mgpstnuser modify -

Query the information abouta POTS port to which thesubscriber is connected

display mgpstnuser Query information, such asport ID, MG ID, terminalID, and telephone numbercorresponding to thesubscriber.

Query the type and status of aPOTS port and the servicetypes on it

display port state Query information, such asthe type, status, and servicetype of the port.

Terminate/Reset the POTSport service

endservice/undo endservice Terminating/Resetting thePOTS port service affectsthe ongoing call. Run thiscommand with caution.Terminating the POTS portservice may fail when thesystem is busy.

Configure the attributes of aPOTS port or configure theattributes of POTS serviceports in batches

pstnport attribute set/pstnport attribute batset

-



147


Query the attributes of aPOTS port

display pstnport attribute -

Configure the caller numberformat on a POTS serviceport or configure the callernumber format on the POTSservice ports in batches

pstnport clip set/pstnportclip batset

-

Display the caller numberformat on a POTS serviceport

display pstnport clip -

Configure the impedance andthe attributes of the current ona POTS service port orconfigure the impedance andthe attributes of the current onPOTS service ports in batches

pstnport electric set/pstnport electric batset

-

Query the impedance and theattributes of the current on aPOTS service port

display pstnport electric -

Configure the KC attributesof a POTS port or configurethe KC attributes of POTSports in batches

pstnport kc set/pstnport kcbatset

After configuring the KCattributes, reset the board tovalidate the settings.

Query the KC attributes of aPOTS service port

display pstnport kc -

Configure the polarityreversal attributes for a POTSport or configure the polarityreversal attributes for POTSports in batches

pstnport reversepole_pulseset/pstnportreversepole_pulse batset

After configuring thepolarity reversal attributes,reset the board to validatethe settings.

Query the polarity reversalattributes of POTS ports

display pstnportreversepole_pulse

-

Configure the power-offduration of a POTSsubscriber or configure thepower-off duration of POTSsubscribers in batches

pstnport timer set/pstnporttimer batset

-

Query the power-off durationof a POTS subscriber

display pstnport timer -



148

10.7 Configuring the QoS IP PrecedenceConfiguring the QoS IP precedence means configuring the different QoS IP precedences for thesignaling, media, and maintenance packets to meet different requirements for the delay and jitterof different services.

Prerequisitel The ToS/DSCP strategy on the UA5000 must be the same as the ToS/DSCP strategy

configured on the router at the upper layer.

l The IP addresses must be configured in the IP address pool.

Related Conceptl Precedence tagging: It is a strategy to re-tag the precedence of a packet that matches the

access control list. The tagged precedence is located in the related precedence fields.

l ToS (type of service) precedence: It is the ToS sub-field (bits 4 to 7 of the ToS field) carriedby the ToS field in the IP header.

Figure 10-5 shows the ToS field in the IP header. The fields are described as follows:

1. Precedence: 3 bits. It indicates the IP precedence.2. Delay (D): 1 bit. It indicates the minimum delay. When the ToS value is set to 8 (in decimal

notation) or 1000 (in binary notation), the delay is the minimum.3. Throughput (T): 1 bit. It indicates the maximum throughput. When the ToS value is set to

4 (in decimal notation) or 0100 (in binary notation), the throughput is the maximum.4. Reliability (R): 1 bit. It indicates the maximum reliability. When the ToS value is set to 2

(in decimal notation) or 0010 (in binary notation), the reliability is the maximum.5. Cost (C): 1 bit. It indicates the minimum cost, that is, the router of the lower cost should

be selected. When the ToS value is set to 1 (in decimal notation) or 0001 (in binary notation),the cost is the minimum.

Figure 10-5 ToS field of the IP header

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Version IHL ToS Total length

bit 0 4 8 16 31

Precedence D T R C Not used

NOTE

If the ToS value of an IP packet is set to 0 (in decimal notation) or 0000 (in binary notation), the packet isfor common service.

l Differentiated services code point (DSCP) precedence: It is defined by the differentiatedservices (DS) field of the IP header. The DS field uses the ToS octet in the IP header. Six



149

bits of the ToS octet is used and the other two bits are reserved and must be set as 0. Figure10-6 shows the DS field of the IP header.

Figure 10-6 DS field of the IP header

Version IHL DS Total length

bit 0 4 8 16 31

DSCP0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Not used

Contextl The traditional IP network uses the best effort (BE) mode in the transmission of the packets

carrying various services. The BE mode can meet the requirements of the non-realtimeservices such as file transfer, web page browsing and e-mail transfer. The realtime services,however, demand low delay and jitter. The BE mode cannot meet the increasing demandof the subscribers. To solve the problem, you must distinguish the priorities for signaling,media, and maintenance packets, and set different QoS IP priorities for the signaling, media,and maintenance packets.

l Before changing the QoS IP strategy, run the qos ip command to set the ToS or DSCP valueas none. Otherwise, changing the QoS IP strategy is not allowed, and the system displaysan error prompt.

l To modify a QoS IP strategy, the interface corresponding to the IP address must be in theclosed or not-started state.

l After configuring the IP addresses, you can configure the ToS/DSCP tag. If the MGinterface is configured, you must disable the MG interface to configure the ToS/DSCP tag.Otherwise, configuring the ToS/DSCP tag is not allowed, and the system displays an errorprompt.

Procedurel Procedure (TOS)

1. Run the qos ip ip_address strategy tos command to set the QoS IP strategy to TOS.

2. Run the qos ip ip_address tos command to configure the ToS precedence for differentservice types.

3. Run the display qos ip command to query the QoS IP strategy.

l Procedure (DSCP)

1. Run the qos ip ip_address strategy dscp command to set the QoS IP strategy toDSCP.

2. Run the qos ip ip_address dscp command to configure the DSCP precedence fordifferent service types.

3. Run the display qos ip command to query the QoS IP strategy.

----End



150

ExampleThe following example shows how to configure the QoS IP strategy as tos for the UA5000.Table 10-7 provides the data plan for configuring the QoS IP strategy.

Table 10-7 Data plan for configuring the QoS IP strategy-1


ip_address 10.10.10.2 strategy tos

media_precedence 2 media_tos 3

signalling_precedence 3 signalling_tos 5

maintain_precedence 2 maintain_tos 5

huawei(config)#display qos ip{ <cr>|ip_address<X.X.X.X> }: Command: display qos ip Eth: IPAddress............: 10.10.10.2 QOSIP Strategy.......: NONE huawei(config)#qos ip 10.10.10.2 strategy tos huawei(config)#display qos ip{ <cr>|ip_address<X.X.X.X> }: Command: display qos ip Eth: IPAddress............: 10.10.10.2 QOSIP Strategy.......: ToS Media Precedence.....: 6 Media ToS............: 8 Signaling Precedence.: 7 Signaling ToS........: 2 Maintain Precedence..: 7 Maintain ToS.........: 2 huawei(config)#qos ip 10.10.10.2 tos media 2 3 signaling 3 5 maintain 2 5 huawei(config)#display qos ip { <cr>|ip_address<X.X.X.X> }: Command: display qos ip Eth: IPAddress............: 10.10.10.2 QOSIP Strategy.......: ToS Media Precedence.....: 2 Media ToS............: 3 Signaling Precedence.: 3 Signaling ToS........: 5 Maintain Precedence..: 2 Maintain ToS.........: 5

The following example shows how to configure the QoS IP strategy as dscp for the UA5000.Table 10-8 provides the data plan for configuring the QoS IP strategy.



151

Table 10-8 Data plan for configuring the QoS IP strategy-2


ip_address 10.10.10.2 strategy dscp

media_dscp 34 signalling_dscp 56

maintain_dscp 56 - -

huawei(config)#display qos ip{ <cr>|ip_address<X.X.X.X> }: Command: display qos ip Eth: IPAddress............: 10.10.10.2 QOSIP Strategy.......: ToS Media Precedence.....: 2 Media ToS............: 3 Signaling Precedence.: 3 Signaling ToS........: 5 Maintain Precedence..: 2 Maintain ToS.........: 5 huawei(config)#qos ip 10.10.10.2 strategy nonehuawei(config)#qos ip 10.10.10.2 strategy dscp huawei(config)#display qos ip { <cr>|ip_address<X.X.X.X> }: Command: display qos ip IPAddress............: 10.10.10.2 QOSIP Strategy.......: DSCP Media DSCP...........: 46 Signaling DSCP.......: 26 Maintain DSCP........: 26 huawei(config)#qos ip 10.10.10.2 dscp media 34 signaling 56 maintain 56huawei(config)#display qos ip{ <cr>|ip_address<X.X.X.X> }: Command: display qos ip IPAddress............: 10.10.10.2 QOSIP Strategy.......: DSCP Media DSCP...........: 34 Signaling DSCP.......: 56 Maintain DSCP........: 56

10.8 Configuring the QoS VLAN PriorityConfiguring the QoS VLAN priorities means configuring the different QoS VLAN priorities forthe signaling, media, and maintenance packets. Thus, the QoS priorities of the service trafficstreams can be controlled according to the VLAN priorities.

PrerequisiteThe IP addresses must be configured in the IP address pool.



152

Context

You can configure different VLAN priorities for signaling, media, and maintenance packetswhen configuring an IP address.

NOTE

An IP address is bound only with the VLAN ID instead of the VLAN priority. That is, different types ofpackets from one IP address can have different VLAN priorities.

Procedure

Step 1 Run the qos vlan ip_address priority command to set VLAN priorities for different servicetypes.

Step 2 Run the display qos vlan command to query the QOS VLAN settings.

----End

Example

To set the QoS VLAN priority of the IP address 10.10.10.4 to the default value, do as follows:

huawei(config)#qos vlan 10.10.10.4 priority defaulthuawei(config)#display qos vlan 10.10.10.4 IPAddress............: 10.10.10.4 VlanID...............: 1001 Media Priority.......: 6 Signaling Priority...: 3 Maintain Priority....: 5

10.9 Separating the Signaling IP Address from the Media IPAddress

Separating the signaling IP address from the media IP address means configuring two differentIP addresses as the media IP address and signaling IP address. Thus, the media stream andsignaling stream are transmitted through different paths in the network.

Prerequisite

The IP addresses must be configured in the IP address pool.

Context

You need to configure different IP addresses for signaling stream and media stream to distinguishthe paths for signaling stream and media stream. This helps to use different QoS strategy.

Precautionl The signaling IP address and media IP address can be separated only when the UA5000

uses the H.248 protocol.

l After modifying the configuration of MG interface, reset the MG interface to validate themodification.



153

Procedure


Step 2 Run the if-h248 attribute mg-media-ip command to add a media IP address for the MGinterface.

Step 3 Run the display if-h248 attribute command to query the attributes of the MG interface. Then,check whether the media IP address is correct.

----End

Example

To set the media IP address of MG interface 0 as 10.10.10.4, do as follows:

huawei(config)#interface h248 0huawei(config-if-h248-0)#if-h248 attribute mg-media-ip 10.10.10.4 huawei(config-if-h248-0)#display if-h248 attribute --------------------------------------------------------------------- MGID 0 MG Description - MG DomainName - Protocol H248 H248version Negotiated Originally 1 Profile Negotiation Para enable Profile 1:Resv1("")



10.10 Enabling the Voice Quality Enhanced FunctionEnabling the voice quality enhanced function includes enabling the automatic gain adjustmentand background noise suppression functions so that the voice service is of better quality whenthere is noise.

Prerequisitel The UA5000 must work in the normal state.

l The maintenance terminal must be logged in to the UA5000 successfully and theUA5000 must be maintained normally.



154

ContextThe voice quality enhancements (VQE) include two functions: automatic gain adjustment andbackground noise suppression.

l Automatic gain adjustment: During the VoIP call, this function helps to prevent the callquality from be affected by the sudden change of the noise energy. When the noise energychanges suddenly, the gain is adjusted automatically so that noise energy is adjustedsmoothly. This prevents the discomfort of the listener caused by the sudden change of thenoise energy.

l Background noise suppression: During the VoIP call, the noise energy can be reduced toimprove the comfort and the clarity of the call.

Procedure

Step 1 Run the pstnport vqe set command or the pstnport vqe batset command to configure the VQEattributes of the PSTN port.

NOTE

l pstnport vqe set is to configure the VQE of a single PSTN port.

l pstnport vqe batsetis to configure the VQE of PSTN ports in batch.

Step 2 Run the display pstnport vqe command to query the VQE attributes of the PSTN port.

----End

ExampleTo enable the automatic gain adjustment, set the automatic gain adjustment parameter as 15 (thatis -24dBm0), enable the background noise suppression, and set the background noise suppressionparameter as 20 dB for PSTN port 0/6/0, do as follows:

huawei(config)#esl userhuawei(config-esl-user)#pstnport vqe set 0/6/0 agc enable agc-Level 15 sns enable sns-level 20 PSTN port set completedhuawei(config-esl-user)#display pstnport vqe 0/6/0 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ Frame/Slot/Port AGC enable AGC value (dbm0) SNS enable SNS value (db) ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 0 / 6 / 0 enable -24 enable 20 -----------------------------------------------------------------------------


l The automatic gain adjustment is enabled.l The automatic gain adjustment parameter is set as 15 (that is -24dBm0).l The background noise suppression is enabled.l The background noise suppression parameter is set as 20 dB.

To configure the VQE attributes for PSTN ports 0/6/0 to 0/6/4 in batches, do as follows:

huawei(config)#esl userhuawei(config-esl-user)#pstnport vqe batset 0/6/0 0/6/4 agc enable agc-Level 15 sns enable sns-Level 20 Command processing completed. 5 user data modified successfullyhuawei(config-esl-user)#display pstnport vqe 0/6 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ Frame/Slot/Port AGC enable AGC value (dbm0) SNS enable SNS value (db)



155

------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 0 / 6 / 0 enable -24 enable 20 0 / 6 / 1 enable -24 enable 20 0 / 6 / 2 enable -24 enable 20 0 / 6 / 3 enable -24 enable 20 0 / 6 / 4 enable -24 enable 20 0 / 6 / 5 enable NULL enable NULL 0 / 6 / 6 enable NULL enable NULL 0 / 6 / 7 enable NULL enable NULL 0 / 6 / 8 enable NULL enable NULL 0 / 6 / 9 enable NULL enable NULL 0 / 6 / 10 enable NULL enable NULL 0 / 6 / 11 enable NULL enable NULL 0 / 6 / 12 enable NULL enable NULL 0 / 6 / 13 enable NULL enable NULL 0 / 6 / 14 enable NULL enable NULL 0 / 6 / 15 enable NULL enable NULL 0 / 6 / 16 enable NULL enable NULL 0 / 6 / 17 enable NULL enable NULL 0 / 6 / 18 enable NULL enable NULL 0 / 6 / 19 enable NULL enable NULL 0 / 6 / 20 enable NULL enable NULL 0 / 6 / 21 enable NULL enable NULL 0 / 6 / 22 enable NULL enable NULL 0 / 6 / 23 enable NULL enable NULL 0 / 6 / 24 enable NULL enable NULL 0 / 6 / 25 enable NULL enable NULL 0 / 6 / 26 enable NULL enable NULL 0 / 6 / 27 enable NULL enable NULL 0 / 6 / 28 enable NULL enable NULL 0 / 6 / 29 enable NULL enable NULL 0 / 6 / 30 enable NULL enable NULL 0 / 6 / 31 enable NULL enable NULL -----------------------------------------------------------------------------



156

11 Configuring the VAG Service

About This Chapter

Configuring the VAG service includes the application of the VAG service and the process forconfiguring the VAG on the UA5000.

11.1 Introduction to the VAG ServiceVirtual access gateway (VAG) means that a physical AG is simulated as multiple virtual AGs.

11.2 Configuration Example of the VAG ServiceThis topic describes how to configure and verify the VAG service by creating two MG interfaceson the UA5000 and then configuring PSTN subscribers on the two MG interfaces.

11.3 Configuring the TID Profile of the VAGThis topic describes how to configure the mode of generating terminal IDs (TIDs) of users ofall the types of the VAG, including the terminal prefix and TID profile. The TID profile definesthe mode of generating the ID of the terminal except the terminal prefix. The ID of a user terminalis a combination of the terminal prefix and the character string generated by the TID profile.

UA5000 Universal Access UnitConfiguration Guide-PVM CLI 11 Configuring the VAG Service


157

11.1 Introduction to the VAG ServiceVirtual access gateway (VAG) means that a physical AG is simulated as multiple virtual AGs.

Service DescriptionAn AG supports different IP interfaces and each interface is used independently to realize theVAG feature.

In the VAG service, an AG can be used by several carriers to improve the device utilization, tofacilitate the management and charging, and thus to meet the requirements of the carrier.

For more information about the features of VAG, see "VAG" in the Feature Description.

Service SpecificationsAn AG supports a maximum of 8 VAGs.

11.2 Configuration Example of the VAG ServiceThis topic describes how to configure and verify the VAG service by creating two MG interfaceson the UA5000 and then configuring PSTN subscribers on the two MG interfaces.

Prerequisitel The IP address of the service network port and the subscribers must be configured

successfully. The subscribers must be able to call each other. For the procedure forconfiguring the subscribers, see "10.2 Configuration Example of the VoIP Service."

l System parameters must be configured according to "10.2 Configuration Example of theVoIP Service."

NetworkingFigure 11-1 shows the example network of the VAG service.

NOTE




158

Figure 11-1 Example network of the VAG service

MGC10.10.20.1/24Router

10.10.10.1/24

H.248

UA500010.10.10.2/24

PVMB

PVMB

A32

A32

Phone 64Phone 33Phone 32Phone 1

VAG1 VAG2

0/11 0/12

Data Planl Table 11-1 provides the data plan for configuring the VAG 2 on the PVMB control board.

For the data plan for configuring VAG 1, see "10.2 Configuration Example of the VoIPService."

l In the preceding figure, MG 1 stands for VAG 1, and MG 2 stands for VAG 2.

Table 11-1 Data plan for configuring the VAG on PVMB

Data Type Item Data


code text

protocol H.248

transfer UDP





159

Data Type Item Data

Whether the MG holdsongoing calls when theconnection between MGC andMG is broken

Yes


The parameter value must be thesame as the H.248 version onthe MGC.

IP addresses Signaling IP address of MGinterface 1 on the UA5000

10.10.10.3/24


10.10.10.5/24


10.10.10.1/24

MGC 10.10.20.1/24

Telephone numbers Phone 33-phone 64 MG interface: 1Shelf ID/slot ID: 0/12Telephone numbers:12340033-12340064

ContextVirtual Access Gateway (VAG) is a feature that enables a physical AG to support multipleVAGs. The physical AG supports multiple IP interfaces, and assigns the IP interfaces fordedicated use to realize the VAG feature.

Precautionl The MG interface parameters configured on the UA5000 must be the same as the parameters

configured on the MGC.l The cadence ring tone and initial ring tone must meet the local standard.

Procedurel For the procedure for configuring the data of VAG 1, see "10.2 Configuration Example

of the VoIP Service."l To configure the data of VAG 2, do as follows.

1. Add a service board.huawei(config)#board add 0/12 a32huawei(config)#board confirm 0/12huawei(config)#display board 0 ------------------------------------------------------------------------- SlotID BoardName Status Sub0 Sub1 Online/Offline



160

------------------------------------------------------------------------- 0 PWX2 Normal 1 PWX2 Normal 2 3 4 H601PVMB Standby_normal H602ETCA 5 H601PVMB Active_normal H602ETCA H602ETCM ...... 12 A32 Normal ...... 35 -------------------------------------------------------------------------

2. Configure the attributes for the MG interface of VAG 2.huawei(config)#interface h248 1 Are you sure to add MG interface?(y/n)[n]:yhuawei(config-if-h248-1)#if-h248 attribute mgip 10.10.10.3 mgport2944 code text transfer udp domainName UA50001.com mgcip_1 10.10.20.1 mgcport_1 2944 mg-media-ip 10.10.10.5 start-negotiate-version 2

huawei(config-if-h248-1)#display if-h248 attribute --------------------------------------------------------------------- MGID 1 MG Description - MG DomainName UA50001.com Protocol H248 H248version Negotiated Originally 2 Profile Negotiation Para disable Profile 0:NoProfile("")



3. Configure the digitmap for internal calls on the MG interface.huawei(config-if-h248-1)#digitmap set inner 1234xxxx

4. Enable the MG interface.huawei(config-if-h248-1)#reset coldstart Are you sure to reset MG interface?(y/n)[n]:yhuawei(config-if-h248-1)# Reset MG interface 1 success!

5. Query whether the MG interface is in the normal state.huawei(config-if-h248-1)#quithuawei(config)#display if-h248 all -------------------------------------------------------------------------MGID TransMode State MgPort MGIP/DomainName MgcPort MGCIP/DomainName-------------------------------------------------------------------------1 UDP Normal 2944 10.10.10.3 2944 10.10.20.1-------------------------------------------------------------------------

6. Configure the telephone numbers of the subscribers.



161

huawei(config)#esl userhuawei(config-esl-user)#mgpstnuser batadd 0/12/0 0/12/31 1 terminalid 32 telno 12340033huawei(config-esl-user)#display mgpstnuser 0/12 -------------------------------------------------------- Frame/Slot/Port MGID TelNo Priority TID -------------------------------------------------------- 0 / 12 / 0 0 - Cat3 A32 0 / 12 / 1 0 - Cat3 A33 0 / 12 / 2 0 - Cat3 A34 0 / 12 / 3 0 - Cat3 A35 0 / 12 / 4 0 - Cat3 A36 0 / 12 / 5 0 - Cat3 A37 0 / 12 / 6 0 - Cat3 A38 0 / 12 / 7 0 - Cat3 A39 0 / 12 / 8 0 - Cat3 A40 0 / 12 / 9 0 - Cat3 A41 0 / 12 / 10 0 - Cat3 A42 0 / 12 / 11 0 - Cat3 A43 0 / 12 / 12 0 - Cat3 A44 0 / 12 / 13 0 - Cat3 A45 0 / 12 / 14 0 - Cat3 A46 0 / 12 / 15 0 - Cat3 A47 0 / 12 / 16 0 - Cat3 A48 0 / 12 / 17 0 - Cat3 A49 0 / 12 / 18 0 - Cat3 A50 0 / 12 / 19 0 - Cat3 A51 0 / 12 / 20 0 - Cat3 A52 0 / 12 / 21 0 - Cat3 A53 0 / 12 / 22 0 - Cat3 A54 0 / 12 / 23 0 - Cat3 A55 0 / 12 / 24 0 - Cat3 A56 0 / 12 / 25 0 - Cat3 A57 0 / 12 / 26 0 - Cat3 A58 0 / 12 / 27 0 - Cat3 A59 0 / 12 / 28 0 - Cat3 A60 0 / 12 / 29 0 - Cat3 A61 0 / 12 / 30 0 - Cat3 A62 0 / 12 / 31 0 - Cat3 A63 -------------------------------------------------------- Command processing completed. 32 port(s) are configured MG PSTN user data

7. Save the data.huawei(config-esl-user)#quithuawei(config)#save

----End

Result1. When MG interface 1 communicates properly with the MGC, subscribers of phone 1-phone

32 should be able to call each other.2. When MG interface 2 communicates properly with the MGC, subscribers of phone 33-

phone 64 should be able to call each other.3. When MG interfaces 1 and 2 communicate properly with the MGC, subscribers of phone

1-phone 64 should be able to call each other.4. After disabling MG interface 1 by running the shutdown graceful command, the results

should be as follows:l Subscribers of phone 1-phone 32 should not be able to call each other.l Subscribers of phone 33-phone 64 should be able to call each other.l Subscribers of phone 1-phone 32 and phone 33-phone 64 should not be able to call each

other.



162

This indicates that the configuration of each VAG is independent, and the configuration isvalid only to the subscribers of the VAG.

11.3 Configuring the TID Profile of the VAGThis topic describes how to configure the mode of generating terminal IDs (TIDs) of users ofall the types of the VAG, including the terminal prefix and TID profile. The TID profile definesthe mode of generating the ID of the terminal except the terminal prefix. The ID of a user terminalis a combination of the terminal prefix and the character string generated by the TID profile.

Prerequisite

The MG interface must be added successfully.

Contextl The system has 18 common TID profiles with the TID indexes of 0-17. When the default

TID profiles in the system cannot meet the current requirement, you can add the user-defined TID profile manually as required.

l The TID profile format string should consist of at least one fixed format "%u" or one unfixedformat "%0nu". "n" represents the numeral that ranges from 0 to 10. "%u" means that thelength of the parameter to be printed is unlimited, and "%0nu" means that the length of theparameter to be printed is n. The format allows the security character string at the beginningand the end.

l The parameter list consists of at least one keyword. The keywords are separated by "," andsupport the addition algorithm. The deviation of addition ranges from 0 to 0x40000000.The keywords include the following:– F: Indicates the shelf ID.– S: Indicates the slot ID.– P: Indicates the port ID.– B: Indicates the B channel.– G: Indicates the general permanent TID.– R: Indicates the RTP virtual TID.

l When a PSTN subscriber, an ISDN PRA subscriber or an ISDN BRA subscriber is added,the TID matching each type of the subscriber is output based on the format and the terminalprefix of the matching TID profile.For example, if the matching TID profile format of the PSTN subscriber is %02u/%02u/%02u, the terminal prefix of the TID profile is aln, and the location of the PSTN subscriberis 0/11/0, the TID of the PSTN subscriber is aln00/11/00.

l You can run the display tid-format command to query the TID profile bound to users ofall the types on the current MG interface, and then run the display tid-template commandto query the format of the TID profile.

Precautionl The format of the TID profile of the VAG and the format of the TID profile of the SoftSwitch

must be consistent.



163

l The index and name of the added profile must be different from the index and name of theexisting profiles in the system.

l If terminals of a type exist on an interface and the interface is not disabled, the prefix ofterminals of this type cannot be modified.

l If terminals of a type exist on an interface, the index of the TID profile corresponding tothe terminals of this type cannot be modified.

l The system supports 64 TID profiles. The TID profiles with indexes from 0 to 31 arereserved for the system, and the TID profiles with indexes from 32 to 63 can be customized.

Procedure

Step 1 Run the display tid-template command to query the TID profile of the system.

Step 2 When the default TID profile in the system cannot meet the requirements, run the tid-templateadd command to add the required TID profile. When the default TID profile in the system canmeet the requirements, go to Step 3.

Step 3 Enter MG interface mode.l If the system protocol is H.248, run the interface h248 command to enter H248 mode.l If the system protocol is MGCP, run the interface mgcp command to enter MGCP mode.

Step 4 Configure the TID profiles and terminal prefixes of subscribers of all the types of the currentVAG.l In H248 mode, run the tid-format pstn command to configure the TID profile and terminal

prefix of the PSTN subscriber.l In H248 mode, run the tid-format bra command to configure the TID profile and terminal

prefix of the ISDN BRA subscriber.l In H248 mode, run the tid-format pracommand to configure the TID profile and terminal

prefix of the ISDN PRA subscriber.l In H248 mode, run the tid-format rtp command to configure the TID profile and terminal

prefix of the RTP terminal.l In H248 mode, run the tid-format r2 command to configure the TID profile and terminal

prefix of the R2 subscriber.l In MGCP mode, run the tid-format pstn command to configure the TID profile and terminal

prefix of the ISDN subscriber.l In MGCP mode, run the tid-format pra command to configure the TID profile and terminal

prefix of the ISDN PRA subscriber.l In MGCP mode, run the tid-format bra command to configure the TID profile and terminal

prefix of the ISDN BRA subscriber.

----End


l The index of the TID profile is 36.l The length of the printing parameter is not limited.l The parameter list is shelf ID + 1, slot ID +1, and port ID + 1.



164

l The name of the TID profile is CustomTemplate.

l The terminal prefix is A.

To configure the TID profile in H248 mode for PSTN subscriber on port 0/15/0, do as follows:

huawei(config)#display tid-template all --------------------------------------------------------- Index Name --------------------------------------------------------- 0 Rtp_Delamination 1 Rtp_No_Delamination 2 General_No_Delamination 3 Aln_Not_Fixed_1 4 Aln_Fixed_1 5 Aln_Not_Fixed_0 6 Aln_Fixed_0 7 Aln_BT 8 Bra_Not_Fixed_1 9 Bra_Fixed_1 10 Bra_Not_Fixed_0 11 Bra_Fixed_0 12 Bra_BT 13 Trunk_Not_Fixed_1 14 Trunk_Fixed_1 15 Trunk_Not_Fixed_0 16 Trunk_Fixed_0 17 Trunk_BT 18 Rtp_Fixed_5u ------------------------------------------------- huawei(config)#tid-template add 36 format %u/%u/%u parameterlistf+1,s+1,p+1 name CustomTemplatehuawei(config)#interface h248 0huawei(config-if-h248-0)#tid-format pstn template 36 prefix A huawei(config-if-h248-0)#display tid-format -------------------------------- user-type template-index prefix -------------------------------- rtp 1 A pstn 36 A bra 2 A pra 2 A r2 2 A --------------------------------huawei(config-if-h248-0)#quithuawei(config)#esl userhuawei(config-esl-user)#mgpstnuser add 0/10/0 0huawei(config-esl-user)#display mgpstnuser 0/10/0 -------------------------------------------------------- Frame/Slot/Port MGID TelNo Priority TID -------------------------------------------------------- 0 / 10 / 0 0 - Cat3 A1/11/1 -------------------------------------------------------- Command processing completed. 1 port(s) are configured MG PSTN user data

Related Operation

Table 11-2 lists the related operations for configuring the TID profile of the VAG interface.

Table 11-2 Related operations for configuring the TID profile of the VAG interface


Delete the user-defined TIDprofile

tid-template delete -



165


Modify the user-defined TIDprofile

tid-template_modify -

Modify the prefix of the userterminal

H248:tid-formatMGCP:tid-format

Run this command to modifythe terminal prefix of the userterminal. If terminals of acertain type exist on aninterface and the interface isnot disabled, the prefix ofterminals of this type cannotbe modified.



166

12 Configuring the ISDN Service

About This Chapter

Configuring the ISDN service includes the application of the ISDN technology and the relatedprocess for configuring the ISDN service of the UA5000.

12.1 Introduction to the ISDN ServiceThe integrated services digital network (ISDN) is a digital communication network developedby integrating the digital network and the data communication network. The ISDN is thedigitized stage of the telephone network, which permits voice, data, text, graphics, music, andvideo to be transmitted over existing telephone wires.

12.2 Configuration Example of the P2P ISDN BRA ServiceThis topic describes how to configure the point-to-point (P2P) ISDN BRA service through theDSL service board. Thus, after the configuration, ISDN BRA subscribers can call each other,and ISDN BRA subscribers and POTS subscribers can call each other.

12.3 Configuration Example of the P2MP ISDN BRA ServiceThis topic describes how to configure the point-to-multipoint (P2MP) ISDN BRA servicethrough the DSL service board. After the configuration, ISDN BRA subscribers can call eachother, and ISDN BRA subscribers and POTS subscribers can call each other.

12.4 Configuration Example of the ISDN PRA Service (When the EDTB Service Board Is Used)This topic describes how to configure the ISDN PRA service through the EDTB service board.After the configuration, ISDN PRA subscribers can call each other, and ISDN PRA subscribersand POTS subscribers can call each other.

12.5 Configuring the SIGTRAN Protocol StackThe signaling transport (SIGTRAN) protocol supports the transmission of traditional switchedcircuit network (SCN) signaling over the IP network through protocol adaptation andtransmission.

UA5000 Universal Access UnitConfiguration Guide-PVM CLI 12 Configuring the ISDN Service


167

12.1 Introduction to the ISDN ServiceThe integrated services digital network (ISDN) is a digital communication network developedby integrating the digital network and the data communication network. The ISDN is thedigitized stage of the telephone network, which permits voice, data, text, graphics, music, andvideo to be transmitted over existing telephone wires.

Service DescriptionDefinition of ISDN by the International Telegraph and Telephone Consultative Committee(CCITT): Integrated services digital network (ISDN) is a communication network evolved fromintegrated digital network (IDN) and provides the E2E digital connection to support multipletelecommunication services involving the voice and non-voice services. Subscribers can accessthe network through a group of network interfaces.

ISDN provides the following two types of services:

l Basic rate interface (BRI): It provides a rate of 144 kbit/s, and provides two B channelsand one D channel.

l Primary rate interface (PRI): In North America, it provides a rate of 1.544 Mbit/s, andprovides 23 B channels and one D channel. In other areas, it provides a rate of 2 Mbit/s,and provides 30 B channels and one D channel.

The B channels are used for bearing the service and the D channel is used for transmitting thecall control signaling and the operation, administration and maintenance (OAM) signaling.

Service SpecificationsThe UA5000 provides the ISDN BRA service to the subscribers through the DSL, DSLE/DSLD board, and provides the ISDN PRA service to the subscribers through the PVMB, PVMD,SDLE, or EDTB board.

Table 12-1 shows the number of ISDN BRA ports provided by each board.

Table 12-1 Number of ISDN BRA ports provided by each board

Board Ports

DSL 8 ISDN BRA ports

DSLD 16 ISDN BRA ports

Table 12-2 shows the number of ISDN PRA ports provided by each board.

Table 12-2 Number of ISDN PRA ports provided by each board

Board Ports

PVMB 4 E1 ports, namely, 4 ISDN PRA ports

PVMD 4 E1 ports, namely, 4 ISDN PRA ports



168

Board Ports

EDTB 16 E1 ports, namely, 16 ISDN PRA ports

SDLE 8 E1 ports, namely, 8 ISDN PRA ports

12.2 Configuration Example of the P2P ISDN BRA ServiceThis topic describes how to configure the point-to-point (P2P) ISDN BRA service through theDSL service board. Thus, after the configuration, ISDN BRA subscribers can call each other,and ISDN BRA subscribers and POTS subscribers can call each other.

Prerequisitel The local IP address must be configured in the IP address pool.l The system parameters and the MG interface attributes must be configured successfully.

The PSTN subscriber data on the MG interface must be configured successfully and thePSTN subscribers must be able to call each other. For the operation procedure, see "10Configuring the VoIP Service."

l The data on the MGC must be configured properly.

NetworkingFigure 12-1 shows the example network of the P2P ISDN BRA service.

NOTE




169

Figure 12-1 Example network of the P2P ISDN BRA service

UA5000

MGC10.10.20.1/24Router

10.10.10.1/24

H.248

10.10.10.2/24

PVMB

PVMB

IPMB

IPMB

0/11

DSL

0/8

DSL

PBX PBX

ISDN phone A ISDN phone B

A32

Phone A

Data Plan

Table 12-3 provides the data plan for configuring the P2P ISDN BRA service.

Table 12-3 Data plan for configuring the P2P ISDN BRA service

Data Type Item Data


code text

protocol H.248



Whether the termination IDon the MG interface supportsthe layer configuration

Not supported

terminalID 0, 2



170

Data Type Item Data

IP addresses The IP address of MG 0 onthe UA5000

10.10.10.2/24

Default gateway of MG 0 onthe UA5000

10.10.10.1/24


IUA link parameters IUA link number 15

IUA link set number 1

Local port number 1401

Peer port number 1400

IUA interface ID 8

DSL boards Shelf ID/slot ID 0/8, 0/11

ISDN BRA ports Shelf ID/slot ID/port ID 0/8/0, 0/11/0

Working mode P2P

Contextl One port can be connected to only one terminal.l The terminal equipment identifiers (TEIs) of the ISDN digital phones must be 0.l If the ISDN digital telephone is not provided with local power, the braport attribute batset

frameid/slotid/portid endframeid/slotid/portid rpower yes and braport attribute setframeid/slotid/portid rpower yes commands must be executed on the UA5000 to enablethe remote power.

l The MG interface parameters configured on the UA5000 must be the same as the MGinterface parameters configured on the MGC.

Configuration FlowchartFigure 12-2 shows the flowchart for configuring the ISDN service.



171

Figure 12-2 Flowchart for configuring the ISDN service

Start

Add service boards

Configure the workingmode of ISDN BRA port

Configure an IUA linkset and an IUA link

(Optional) ConfigureSCTP parameters

Configure ISDNsubscriber data

End

Configure theSIGTRAN protocol

Save the configurationdata

ProcedureStep 1 Add a DSL board.

huawei(config)#board add 0/8 dsl huawei(config)#board add 0/11 dsl huawei(config)#board confirm 0/8 0 frame 8 slot board has been confirmedhuawei(config)#board confirm 0/11 0 frame 11 slot board has been confirmed

Step 2 (Optional) Query the attributes of the ISDN BRA ports.huawei(config)#esl userhuawei(config-esl-user)#display braport attribute 0/8------------------------------------------------------------------------------ F /S /P Remote-power Work-mode BAD BADDelay(s) Keep_L1_Active------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 0/8/0 No p2mp disable 30 enable 0/8/1 No p2mp disable 30 enable 0/8/2 No p2mp disable 30 enable 0/8/3 No p2mp disable 30 enable 0/8/4 No p2mp disable 30 enable 0/8/5 No p2mp disable 30 enable 0/8/6 No p2mp disable 30 enable 0/8/7 No p2mp disable 30 enable -----------------------------------------------------------------------------huawei(config-esl-user)#display braport attribute 0/11 -----------------------------------------------------------------------------



172

F /S /P Remote-power Work-mode Bad BADDelay(s) Keep_L1_Active ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 0/11/0 No p2mp disable 30 enable 0/11/1 No p2mp disable 30 enable 0/11/2 No p2mp disable 30 enable 0/11/3 No p2mp disable 30 enable 0/11/4 No p2mp disable 30 enable 0/11/5 No p2mp disable 30 enable 0/11/6 No p2mp disable 30 enable 0/11/7 No p2mp disable 30 enable--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Step 3 Configure the working modes of the ports.huawei(config-esl-user)#braport attribute set 0/8/0 work-mode p2pThe board(s) may be reset before the configuration works , are you sure to reset the board(s) when executing this command?(y/n)[n]:y huawei(config-esl-user)#braport attribute set 0/11/0 work-mode p2p The board(s) may be reset before the configuration works , are you sure to reset the board(s) when executing this command?(y/n)[n]:y

Step 4 Add a link set and a link, query the configuration information of the link set and the link.huawei(config-esl-user)#quithuawei(config)#sigtranhuawei(config-sigtran)#iua-linkset add 1huawei(config-sigtran)#iua-link add 15 1 1401 10.10.10.2 1400 10.10.20.1huawei(config-sigtran)#display iua-link attribute ---------------------------------------------------------------------- LinkNo : 15 LinksetNo : 1 Local prot : 1401 Local IP address : 10.10.10.2 Remote port : 1400 Remote IP address 1 : 10.10.20.1 Remote IP address 2 : - InStreamNum : 33 OutStreamNum : 33 ---------------------------------------------------------------------- huawei(config-sigtran)#display iua-link state-------------------------------------------------------------------------LinkNo LinkState LockFlag CongestFlag ListenId SctpAssocId ------------------------------------------------------------------------- 15 active unlock uncongest 1 3-------------------------------------------------------------------------

Step 5 Add an ISDN BRA subscriber and configure the data.huawei(config-sigtran)#quithuawei(config)#esl userhuawei(config-esl-user)#mgbrauser add 0/8/0 0 1 8 terminalid 0huawei(config-esl-user)#mgbrauser add 0/11/0 0 1 10 terminalid 2huawei(config-esl-user)#display mgbrauser 0/8/0 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ F /S /P MGID LinkSetNo UserIFID R.POWER TelNo Priority TID ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 0/ 8/ 0 0 1 8 No - Cat3 A0 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------huawei(config-esl-user)#display mgbrauser 0/11/0 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ F /S /P MGID LinkSetNo UserIFID R.POWER TelNo Priority TID ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 0/ 11/ 0 0 1 8 No - Cat3 A2 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Step 6 Save the data.huawei(config-esl-user)#quithuawei(config)#save

----End



173

Result1. The ISDN BRA ports should be in the active state.

huawei(config-esl-user)#display port state 0/8/0 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ F/ S/ P Type SubType PortState SvcState SvcType UserType MgID ProtocolID ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 0/ 8/0 BRA 2B+D Active AutoBlk InstSvc MG 0 A0 -----------------------------------------------------------------------------huawei(config-esl-user)#display port state 0/11/0 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ F/ S/ P Type SubType PortState SvcState SvcType UserType MgID ProtocolID ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 0/ 11/0 BRA 2B+D Active AutoBlk InstSvc MG 0 A2 -----------------------------------------------------------------------------

2. The working mode of the ISDN BRA ports should be P2P.huawei(config-esl-user)#display braport attribute 0/8/0 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- F /S /P Remote-power Work-mode Bad BADDelay(s) Keep_L1_Active ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 0/ 8/0 No p2p disable 30 enable -----------------------------------------------------------------------------huawei(config-esl-user)#display braport attribute 0/11/0 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- F /S /P Remote-power Work-mode Bad BADDelay(s) Keep_L1_Active ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 0/11/0 No p2p disable 30 enable -----------------------------------------------------------------------------

3. P2P ISDN BRA subscribers ISDN phone A and ISDN phone B should be able to call eachother. P2P ISDN BRA subscribers and POTS subscriber Phone A should be able to calleach other. The status of the ports with the P2P ISDN BRA service should always be in theactive state.

12.3 Configuration Example of the P2MP ISDN BRA ServiceThis topic describes how to configure the point-to-multipoint (P2MP) ISDN BRA servicethrough the DSL service board. After the configuration, ISDN BRA subscribers can call eachother, and ISDN BRA subscribers and POTS subscribers can call each other.

Prerequisitel The local IP address must be configured in the IP address pool.l The system parameters and the MG interface attributes must be configured successfully.

The PSTN subscriber data on the MG interface must be configured successfully and thePSTN subscribers must be able to call each other. For the operation procedure, see "10Configuring the VoIP Service."

l One NT1 with power supply and two ISDN digital phones must be available. In addition,the ISDN digital phones must be connected properly.



174

l The data on the MGC must be configured properly.

Networking

Figure 12-3 shows the example network of the P2MP ISDN BRA service.

NOTE


Figure 12-3 Example network of the P2MP ISDN BRA service

UA5000

MGC10.10.20.1/24

Router10.10.10.1/24

H.248

10.10.10.2/24

PVMB

PVMB

IPMB

IPMB

0/15

DSL

ISDN phone ISDN phone

NT1

A32

Phone A

Data Plan

Table 12-4 provides the data plan for configuring the P2MP ISDN BRA service.

Table 12-4 Data plan for configuring the P2MP ISDN BRA service

Data Type Item Data


code text

protocol H.248



175

Data Type Item Data



terminalID 0, 1

IP addresses MG interface 0 on theUA5000

10.10.10.2/24


10.10.10.1/24


IUA link parameters IUA link set number 1

IUA link number 15



ISDN BRA Port port ID 0/15/0, 0/15/1

interfaceid 8

ContextThe MG interface parameters configured on the UA5000 must be the same as the MG interfaceparameters configured on the MGC.

Configuration FlowchartFigure 12-4 shows the flowchart for configuring the ISDN service.



176

Figure 12-4 Flowchart for configuring the ISDN service

Start

Add a DSL board

configure the workingmode of ISDN BRA port

Configure an IUA linkset and an IUA link


Add an ISDN BRAsubscriber and

configure the data

End



Procedure

Step 1 Add a DSL board.huawei(config)#board add 0/15 dsl huawei(config)#board confirm 0/15 0 frame 15 slot board confirms successfully huawei(config)#display board 0 -------------------------------------------------------- SlotID BoardName Status Sub0 Sub1 Online/Offline -------------------------------------------------------- 0 H602PWX0 Normal 1 H602PWX0 Normal 2 3 4 H601PVMB Active_normal H601ETCB H601ETCB 5 H601PVMB Standby_normal H601ETCB H601ETCB...... 15 DSL Normal...... 35 --------------------------------------------------------

Step 2 Add an IUA link set and an IUA link.huawei(config)#sigtranhuawei(config-sigtran)#iua-linkset add 1huawei(config-sigtran)#iua-link add 15 1 9900 10.10.10.2 1400 10.10.20.1huawei(config-sigtran)#display iua-link attribute



177

---------------------------------------------------------------------- LinkNo : 15 LinksetNo : 1 Local prot : 9900 Local IP address : 10.10.10.2 Remote port : 1400 Remote IP address 1 : 10.10.20.1 Remote IP address 2 : - InStreamNum : 33 OutStreamNum : 33 ---------------------------------------------------------------------- huawei(config-sigtran)#display iua-link state--------------------------------------------------------------LinkNo LinkState LockFlag CongestFlag ListenId SctpAssocId -------------------------------------------------------------- 15 active unlock uncongest 1 3--------------------------------------------------------------

Step 3 Add an ISDN BRA subscriber and configure the data.huawei(config-sigtran)#quithuawei(config)#esl userhuawei(config-esl-user)#mgbrauser batadd 0/15/0 0/15/1 0 1 8 terminalid 0huawei(config-esl-user)#display port state 0/15 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ F/ S/ P Type SubType PortState SvcState SvcType UserType MgID ProtocolID ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 0/15/0 BRA 2B+D Deactive StartSvc InstSvc MG 0 A0 0/15/1 BRA 2B+D Deactive StartSvc InstSvc MG 0 A2huawei(config-esl-user)#display mgbrauser 0/15 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- F /S /P MGID LinkSetNo UserIFID R.POWER TelNo Priority TID ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 0/15/ 0 0 1 8 No - Cat3 A0 0/15/ 1 0 1 9 No - Cat3 A2 -----------------------------------------------------------------------------huawei(config-esl-user)#display braport attribute 0/15 Command: display braport attribute 0/15 -------------------------------------------------------------------------- F /S /P Remote-power Work-mode BAD BADDelay(s) Keep-L1-active -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 0/15/0 No p2mp disable 30 enable 0/15/1 No p2mp disable 30 enable 0/15/2 No p2mp disable 30 enable 0/15/3 No p2mp disable 30 enable 0/15/4 No p2mp disable 30 enable 0/15/5 No p2mp disable 30 enable 0/15/6 No p2mp disable 30 enable 0/15/7 No p2mp disable 30 enable ----------------------------------------------------------------------------


----End

ResultISDN BRA subscribers should be able to call each other, and ISDN BRA subscribers and POTSsubscriber Phone A should be able to call each other.



178

12.4 Configuration Example of the ISDN PRA Service(When the EDTB Service Board Is Used)

This topic describes how to configure the ISDN PRA service through the EDTB service board.After the configuration, ISDN PRA subscribers can call each other, and ISDN PRA subscribersand POTS subscribers can call each other.

Prerequisitel The system parameters, the MG interface attributes, and the PSTN subscribers must be

configured successfully. For the operation procedure, see "10 Configuring the VoIPService."

l The data on the MGC must be configured properly.l Several PBX subscribers must be configured.

ContextThe MG interface parameters configured on the UA5000 must be the same as the parametersconfigured on the MGC.

NetworkingFigure 12-5 shows the example network of the ISDN PRA service.

NOTE




179

Figure 12-5 Example network of the ISDN PRA service

PBX

Router10.10.10.1/24

FE/GE

UA500010.10.10.2/24

MGC10.10.20.1/24

PVMB

PVMB

IPMB

IPMB

EDTB

UA5000

Phone A

Router

Phone N Phone N+1

0/13

Data Plan

Table 12-5 provides the data plan for configuring the ISDN PRA service.

Table 12-5 Data plan for configuring the ISDN PRA service

Data Type Item Data


code text

protocol H.248



terminalid 0, 1

IP addresses MG interface 0 on theUA5000

10.10.10.2/24



180

Data Type Item Data

Default gateway of the MGinterface 0 on the UA5000

10.10.10.1/24


IUA link parameters IUA link set number 2

IUA link number 1



Configuration FlowchartFigure 12-6 shows the flowchart for configuring the ISDN PRA service.

Figure 12-6 Flowchart for configuring the ISDN PRA service

Start

Add an EDTBboard

Set the working modeof the EDTB board

Add a link set and alink


Add an ISDN PRAsubscriber and

configure the data

End





181

Procedure

Step 1 Add an EDTB board.huawei(config)#board add 0/13 h601edtb 0 frame 13 slot board add successfully huawei(config)#board confirm 0/13 0 frame 13 slot board confirms successfully huawei(config)#display board 0 ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- SlotID BoardName Status Sub0 Sub1 Online/Offline ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 0 H602PWX0 Normal 1 H602PWX0 Normal 2 3 4 H601PVMB Active_normal H601ETCB H601ETCB 5 H601PVMB Standby_normal H601ETCB H601ETCB...... 13 H601EDTB Normal...... 35 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Step 2 Set the working mode of the EDTB board.huawei(config)#interface edt 0/13 huawei(config-if-edt-0/13)#runmode indephuawei(config-if-edt-0/13)#quit

Step 3 Add a link set and a link.huawei(config)#sigtranhuawei(config-sigtran)#iua-linkset add 2huawei(config-sigtran)#iua-link add 1 2 1402 10.10.10.2 1404 10.10.20.1huawei(config-sigtran)#display iua-link attribute ------------------------------------------------------------------ LinkNo : 1 LinksetNo : 2 Local port : 1402 Local IP address : 10.10.10.2 Remote port : 1404 Remote IP address 1 : 10.10.20.1 Remote IP address 2 : - InStreamNum : 33 OutStreamNum : 33 ------------------------------------------------------------------huawei(config-sigtran)#display iua-link state ----------------------------------------------------------------- LinkNo LinkState LockFlag CongestFlag ListenId SctpAssocId ----------------------------------------------------------------- 1 active unlock uncongest 3 9 -----------------------------------------------------------------

Step 4 Add an ISDN PRA subscriber and configure the data.huawei(config-sigtran)#quithuawei(config)#esl userhuawei(config-esl-user)#mgprauser add 0/13/0 0 2 10 terminalid 0huawei(config-esl-user)#display port state 0/13/0 -------------------------------------------------------------------------- Frame/Slot/Port PortType PortState ServiceType SvcState -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 0 / 13 / 0 E1 Failed VOIP_PRA - --------------------------------------------------------------------------huawei(config-esl-user)#display mgprauser 0/13 ---------------------------------------------------------- MGID 0 F/S/P 0/13/0 TerminalID A0 LinkSetNo 2



182

InterfaceID 10 Uni-report 1(0-enable 1-disable) Auto-return-to-service-limit 20 Active-mask 255:255:255:255 User Priority is cat3 ---------------------------------------------------------- Command processing completed. 1 port(s) are configured MG PRA user data


----End

ResultISDN PRA subscribers should be able to call subscribers who do not belong to the same PBX,and subscribers who belong to one PBX should be able to call each other.

12.5 Configuring the SIGTRAN Protocol StackThe signaling transport (SIGTRAN) protocol supports the transmission of traditional switchedcircuit network (SCN) signaling over the IP network through protocol adaptation andtransmission.l The SIGTRAN protocol, which is applied to the ISDN services of the UA5000, contains

the MAC, IP, SCTP and IUA protocols.l Generally, you need not configure the SCTP protocol parameters.l Parameters localipaddr, remoteipaddr, localport, and remoteport are used to set up an

IUA link between the UA5000 and the MGC. localport on the UA5000 must be the sameas remoteport on the MGC. remoteport on the UA5000 must be the same as localporton the MGC.

Related Conceptl SIGTRAN protocol stack: The SIGTRAN protocol stack includes two layers of protocols:

transmission and adaptation. The transmission protocol is SCTP/IP and the adaptationprotocol can be M2UA (for MTP2 subscribers) or IUA (for Q. 921 subscribers). Figure12-7 shows the model of the SIGTRAN protocol.



183

Figure 12-7 Model of the SIGTRAN protocol

M3UAadaptation

layer

M2UAadaptation

layer

IUAadaptation

layer

SUAadaptation

layer

M2PAadaptation

layer

V5UAadaptation

layer

......

IP

SCTP

MAC

M3UA: MTP3 User Adaptation LayerIUA: ISDN Q. 921 User Adaptation Layer

V5UA: V5 User Adaptation Layer

SCTP: Stream Control Transmission ProtocolMAC: Media Access ControlM2UA: MTP2 User Adaptation Layer

M2PA: MTP2 Peer Adaptation LayerSUA: SCCP User Adaptation Layer

IP: Internet Protocol

l SCTP: The SCTP protocol is a connection-oriented protocol. The basic function of SCTP

is to provide reliable transmission for the messages between the UA5000 and the MGC.SCTP functions based on the association between the two terminals of SCTP. SCTP canbe regarded as a transmission layer whose upper layer is the SCTP subscriber and the lowerlayer is the IP network.

Configuration FlowchartFigure 12-8 shows the flowchart for configuring the SIGTRAN protocol stack.

Figure 12-8 Flowchart for configuring the SIGTRAN protocol stack

Start

End

Configure an IUA link set

Configure an IUA link

(Optional) Configure SCTPparameters



184

Procedure

Step 1 In global config mode, run the sigtran command to enter the sigtran mode.

Step 2 Run the iua-linkset add command to add an IUA link set.

Step 3 Run the display iua-linkset state command to query the state of the IUA link set. Run thedisplay iua-linkset attribute command to query the attributes of the IUA link set.

Step 4 Run the iua-link add command to add an IUA link to the IUA link set.

Step 5 Run the display iua-link state command to query the state of the IUA link. Run the displayiua-link attribute command to query the attributes of the IUA link.

Step 6 (Optional) Run the sctp protocol command to configure the parameters of the SCTP protocol.

Step 7 (Optional) Run the display sctp protocol command to query the parameters of the SCTPprotocol.

----End

Example

To configure the SIGTRAN protocol stack, do as follows:

huawei(config)#sigtranhuawei(config-sigtran)#iua-linkset add 8 mgid 0huawei(config-sigtran)#display iua-linkset state ----------------------------------------- LinksetNo LinkNum LinksetState ----------------------------------------- 8 0 down ----------------------------------------- huawei(config-sigtran)#display iua-linkset attribute

---------------------------------------------------------------------------- LinksetNo MgId Pendingtime TrafficMode Client/Server UseTxtIf ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8 0 4 override server integer ----------------------------------------------------------------------------

huawei(config-sigtran)#iua-link add 1 8 1401 10.10.1.1 1400 10.10.2.1

NOTE

l In the SIGTRAN protocol, localipaddr, localport, remoteipaddr, and remoteport can uniquely identifyan SCTP association.

l A UA5000 can be configured with a maximum of eight links and eight link sets.huawei(config-sigtran)#display iua-link state--------------------------------------------------------LinkNo LinkState LockFlag CongestFlag ListenId SctpAssocId--------------------------------------------------------1 active unlock uncongest 4 6--------------------------------------------------------huawei(config-sigtran)#display iua-link attribute 1 ---------------------------------------------------------------------- LinkNo : 1 LinksetNo : 8 Local port : 1401 Local IP address : 10.10.1.1 Remote port : 1400 Remote IP address 1 : 10.10.2.1 Remote IP address 2 : - InStreamNum : 33



185

OutStreamNum : 33 ----------------------------------------------------------------------



186

13 Configuring the FoIP Service

About This Chapter

Configuring the FoIP service includes the application of the FoIP technology and the relatedprocess for configuring the FoIP service of the UA5000.

13.1 Introduction to the FoIP ServiceFax over Internet Protocol (FoIP) is a method of providing the fax service over the IP networkor between the IP network and the traditional PSTN network.

13.2 Configuring the V2 Transparent Transmission FlowIn the V2 transparent transmission flow, the voice port functions as the fax port, and the faxsignals are encoded in the G.711 encoding mode, in which the voice signals are encoded.

13.3 Configuring the Selfswitch Transparent Transmission FlowIn the selfswitch transparent transmission flow, the UA5000 determines whether to add 2 to thevoice port number to set the fax port.

13.4 Configuring the V2 T.38 FlowWhen the V2 T.38 flow is used, the UA5000 must determine whether to add 2 to the voice portID to set the fax port based on the requirement of the MGC. The fax settings for the receivershould be the same as the fax settings for the sender.

13.5 Configuring the Selfswitch T.38 FlowWhen the selfswitch T.38 flow is used, the UA5000 need not be controlled by the MGC for thefax service.

13.6 Configuring the V3 FlowIn the V3 flow, you can use either the transparent transmission mode or the T.38 mode on theUA5000, which is determined by the mode configured on the MGC. If the MGC uses the T.38mode, the fax port ID can be negotiated.

13.7 Configuring the V5 FlowThe V5 flow is compatible with the V2 flow and the V3 flow. When the peer fax machine usesthe V2 or V3 flow, the local fax machine that uses the V5 flow can communicate with the peerfax machine properly.

13.8 Configuring the High-Speed Fax

UA5000 Universal Access UnitConfiguration Guide-PVM CLI 13 Configuring the FoIP Service


187

If the network communication is of a high quality and the fax machines support the high-speedfax service, you can configure a high-speed fax mode to transmit the signals. In the high-speedmode, the signals are transmitted in the modem mode.

13.9 Configuring the High-Low Speed Selfswitch FaxIf the network communication is of a high quality and the fax machines support the high-speedfax service, the data can be transmitted in the high-speed fax mode. In the high-speed fax mode,the signals are transmitted in the modem mode. When the quality of the network communicationdeteriorates, and the high-speed negotiation fails, the UA5000 automatically switches to the lowspeed fax mode. In the low-speed fax mode, the signals are transmitted in the fax mode.

13.10 Configuring the Fax Transmission ParametersThe fax transmission parameters for the MG include the transmission mode, 10 ms packetizationfunction, and RFC 2198 intelligent start function. You can configure the fax transmissionparameters according to the actual application environment to ensure the quality of the faxservice.

13.11 Configuring the Fax Training ParametersConfiguring the fax training parameters includes configuring the fax training mode and themaximum rate of fax training. The fax training mode takes effect only in the T.38 flow. Themaximum rate of fax training takes effect only in the T.38 local training flow.



188

13.1 Introduction to the FoIP ServiceFax over Internet Protocol (FoIP) is a method of providing the fax service over the IP networkor between the IP network and the traditional PSTN network.

Service DescriptionThe fax service is widely used in the PSTN. The fax machine in the POTS service is supportedin the NGN network, that is the FoIP. The FoIP is a type of service that provides the transmissionof FoIP over the IP network or between the IP network and the PSTN network.

Service Specificationsl The UA5000 provides the fax service and the voice service through the voice service

boards. Table 13-1 shows the number of ports provided by each type of service boards.

Table 13-1 Number of ports provided by each voice service boards

Board Type Number of Ports Description



CSRB 32 32-port POTS and ADSL/ADSL2+ combo service board

l Table 13-2 shows the fax flows supported by the UA5000.

Table 13-2 Fax flow list

Fax Flow Remarks

Transparenttransmission faxflow

V2 transparent transmissionflow

The transparent transmissionflow supports high-low speedselfswitch fax.

Selfswitch transparenttransmission flow

V3 flow

V5 flow

T.38 fax flow V2 T.38 flow The T.38 flow does not supporthigh-speed fax or high-lowspeed selfswitch fax.Selfswitch T.38 flow

V3 flow

V5 flow

l The following part describes each fax flow mode and the principles of using each fax flow

mode:



189

– According to whether the MGC is involved, the fax mode can be V2 fax or selfswitchfax. According to the coding mode, the fax mode can be transparent transmission fax(G.711 coding) or T.38 fax (T.38 coding).

– If the SoftSwitch does not support the fax service and the UA5000 functions as thetransmit and receive gateway, either the selfswitch transparent transmission mode orthe selfswitch T.38 mode can be used.

– To enhance the intelligence of the fax service (the support from the SoftSwitch and thepeer gateway is required), use the V3 flow.

– If the SoftSwitch supports the V5 flow, but the peer gateway supports only the V2 flow,V3 flow, or V5 flow, use the V5 flow.

– In the V3 T.38 or V5 T.38 flow, the fax mode is controlled by the MGC. For example,if the flow on the UA5000 is V3, and the flow on the MGC is V3 T.38, the UA5000uses the V3 T.38 flow.

– The transparent transmission flow and the T.38 flow support low-speed fax. In the low-speed fax, data is transmitted in the fax mode. The transparent transmission flowsupports high-speed fax and high-low speed selfswitch fax. In the high-speed fax, datais transmitted in the modem mode.

13.2 Configuring the V2 Transparent Transmission FlowIn the V2 transparent transmission flow, the voice port functions as the fax port, and the faxsignals are encoded in the G.711 encoding mode, in which the voice signals are encoded.

Prerequisitel The data on the MGC must be accurate.l The FoIP service is implemented based on the voice service. Before you configure the FoIP

service, the voice service data must be configured properly and the subscribers must beable to call each other successfully. For the configuration of the voice service, see "10Configuring the VoIP Service."

ContextThe fax mode for the UA5000 and the MGC must be the transparent transmission mode.

Configuration FlowchartFigure 13-1 shows the flowchart for configuring the V2 transparent transmission flow.



190

Figure 13-1 Flowchart for configuring the V2 transparent transmission flow

Start

Set the faxtransmission mode

Query the faxtransmission mode

(Optional) Set the faxtraining mode

(Optional) Query the faxtraining mode

End

Procedure

Step 1 Run the fax parameters tranmode command to set the fax transmission mode as the transparenttransmission mode.

NOTE

You can select not to set the fax training mode in the V2 transparent transmission flow. If you need to setthe fax training mode, set the same mode on the MG and on the MGC.

Step 2 Run the display fax parameters command to query the fax parameters.

Step 3 (Optional) Run the dsp attribute train-mode command to set the fax training mode.

Step 4 (Optional) Run the display dsp attribute command to query the dsp channel mode.

----End

ExampleTo configure the V2 transparent transmission flow on the UA5000, do as follows:

huawei(config)#fax parameters tranmode 0huawei(config)#display fax parameters ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- Fax transfers mode :V2 thoroughly T38 Fax Port :RTP port Fix the package interval as 10ms :disable RFC2198 intelligent startup :enable -----------------------------------------------------------------------------huawei(config)#dsp attribute train-mode 0



191

huawei(config)#display dsp attribute ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- Fax Max Train Rate :V17 Fax Train Mode :Remote Train DSP chip maximum adaptive JitterBuffer(ms) :135 DSP chip minimum adaptive JitterBuffer(ms) :2 DSP chip initial adaptive JitterBuffer(ms) :2 DSP chip maximum fixed JitterBuffer(ms) :135 DSP chip minimum fixed JitterBuffer(ms) :2 DSP chip nominal fixed JitterBuffer(ms) :60 DSP input gain(PCM->IP)(db) :0 DSP output gain(IP->PCM)(db) :0 DSP code type :G711A RTCP package send interval time(ms) :5000 Severe Degrade Threshold(periods) :400 Support VQM :Disable DSP Rtp Packet Interval(ms) :20 DSP echo check :Open DSP silence reduce :Close DSP need statistics or not :No DSP Packet Lose Compensate :Close DSP clearmode payload value :100 Support RTCP XR :Disable -----------------------------------------------------------------------------

13.3 Configuring the Selfswitch Transparent TransmissionFlow

In the selfswitch transparent transmission flow, the UA5000 determines whether to add 2 to thevoice port number to set the fax port.

Prerequisitel The data on the MGC must be accurate.l The FoIP service is implemented based on the voice service. Hence, before the FoIP service

is configured, the voice service data must be configured properly and the subscribers mustbe able to call each other successfully. For the configuration of the voice service, see "10Configuring the VoIP Service."

Contextl The fax transmission mode must be configured only on the UA5000.l To ensure that the fax service is implemented, the fax training modes on the two

UA5000s must be the same, that is, the mode must be either the end-to-end training modeor the local training mode. The end-to-end training mode is recommended.

Configuration FlowchartFigure 13-2 shows the flowchart for configuring the selfswitch transparent transmission.



192

Figure 13-2 Flowchart for configuring the selfswitch transparent transmission

Start





End

ProcedureStep 1 Run the fax parameters tranmode command to set the fax transmission mode as the transparent

transmission mode.



Step 4 (Optional) Run the display dsp attribute command to query the DSP channel mode.

----End

ExampleTo configure the V2 transparent transmission flow on the UA5000, do as follows:

huawei(config)#fax parameters tranmode 3huawei(config)#display fax parameters ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- Fax transfers mode :Self switch thoroughly T38 Fax Port :RTP port Fix the package interval as 10ms :disable RFC2198 intelligent startup :disable -----------------------------------------------------------------------------huawei(config)#dsp attribute train-mode 0huawei(config)#display dsp attribute ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- Fax Max Train Rate :V17 Fax Train Mode :Remote Train DSP chip maximum adaptive JitterBuffer(ms) :135



193

DSP chip minimum adaptive JitterBuffer(ms) :2 DSP chip initial adaptive JitterBuffer(ms) :2 DSP chip maximum fixed JitterBuffer(ms) :135 DSP chip minimum fixed JitterBuffer(ms) :2 DSP chip nominal fixed JitterBuffer(ms) :60 DSP input gain(PCM->IP)(db) :0 DSP output gain(IP->PCM)(db) :0 DSP code type :G711A RTCP package send interval time(ms) :5000 Severe Degrade Threshold(periods) :400 Support VQM :Disable DSP Rtp Packet Interval(ms) :20 DSP echo check :Open DSP silence reduce :Close DSP need statistics or not :No DSP Packet Lose Compensate :Close DSP clearmode payload value :100 Support RTCP XR :Disable -----------------------------------------------------------------------------

13.4 Configuring the V2 T.38 FlowWhen the V2 T.38 flow is used, the UA5000 must determine whether to add 2 to the voice portID to set the fax port based on the requirement of the MGC. The fax settings for the receivershould be the same as the fax settings for the sender.



Contextl If the fax machines are connected to the same MG, the T.38 fax port ID can be configured

at random. If they are connected to different MGs, the configurations of adding 2 to the faxport ID must be the same. That is, 2 is added to both or none of the fax port IDs.

l To ensure that the fax service is implemented successfully, the fax training modes at bothends of the MG must be the same, that is, the mode must be either the end-to-end trainingmode or the local training mode. The end-to-end training mode is recommended.

Configuration FlowchartFigure 13-3 shows the flowchart for configuring the V2 T.38 fax service.



194

Figure 13-3 Flowchart for configuring the V2 T.38 fax service

Start

Set the fax transmissionmode

Set the T.38 fax port

Query the fax transmission mode

(Optional) Query theattributes of the DSP channel

End

(Optional) Set the fax training mode

Procedure

Step 1 Run the fax parameters tranmode command to set the V2 T.38 mode as the fax transmissionmode.

Step 2 Run the fax parameters is-port+2 command to set the T.38 fax port.



Step 5 (Optional) Run the display dsp attribute command to query the attributes of the DSP channel.

----End

ExampleTo configure the V2 T.38 flow, do as follows:

huawei(config)#fax parameters tranmode 1huawei(config)#fax parameters is-port+2 0huawei(config)#display fax parameters ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- Fax transfers mode :V2 T38 T38 Fax Port :RTP port Fix the package interval as 10ms :disable RFC2198 intelligent startup :disable ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- huawei(config)#dsp attribute train-mode 0



195

huawei(config)#display dsp attribute ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- Fax Max Train Rate :V17 Fax Train Mode :Remote Train DSP chip maximum adaptive JitterBuffer(ms) :135 DSP chip minimum adaptive JitterBuffer(ms) :2 DSP chip initial adaptive JitterBuffer(ms) :2 DSP chip maximum fixed JitterBuffer(ms) :135 DSP chip minimum fixed JitterBuffer(ms) :2 DSP chip nominal fixed JitterBuffer(ms) :60 DSP input gain(PCM->IP)(db) :0 DSP output gain(IP->PCM)(db) :0 DSP code type :G711A RTCP package send interval time(ms) :5000 Severe Degrade Threshold(periods) :400 Support VQM :Disable DSP Rtp Packet Interval(ms) :20 DSP echo check :Open DSP silence reduce :Close DSP need statistics or not :No DSP Packet Lose Compensate :Close DSP clearmode payload value :100 Support RTCP XR :Disable -----------------------------------------------------------------------------

13.5 Configuring the Selfswitch T.38 FlowWhen the selfswitch T.38 flow is used, the UA5000 need not be controlled by the MGC for thefax service.



Configuration FlowchartFigure 13-4 shows the flowchart for configuring the selfswitch T.38.



196

Figure 13-4 Flowchart for configuring the selfswitch T.38

Start





End

ProcedureStep 1 Run the fax parameters tranmode command to set the selfswitch T.38 mode as the fax

transmission mode.



Step 4 (Optional) Run the display dsp attribute command to query the attributes of the DSP.

----End

ExampleTo set the selfswitch T.38 mode on the UA5000, do as follows:

huawei(config)#fax parameters tranmode 5huawei(config)#display fax parameters ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- Fax transfers mode :Self switch T38 T38 Fax Port :RTP port Fix the package interval as 10ms :disable RFC2198 intelligent startup :disable ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- huawei(config)#dsp attribute train-mode 0huawei(config)#display dsp attribute ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- Fax Max Train Rate :V17 Fax Train Mode :Remote Train DSP chip maximum adaptive JitterBuffer(ms) :135



197

DSP chip minimum adaptive JitterBuffer(ms) :2 DSP chip initial adaptive JitterBuffer(ms) :2 DSP chip maximum fixed JitterBuffer(ms) :135 DSP chip minimum fixed JitterBuffer(ms) :2 DSP chip nominal fixed JitterBuffer(ms) :60 DSP input gain(PCM->IP)(db) :0 DSP output gain(IP->PCM)(db) :0 DSP code type :G711A RTCP package send interval time(ms) :5000 Severe Degrade Threshold(periods) :400 Support VQM :Disable DSP Rtp Packet Interval(ms) :20 DSP echo check :Open DSP silence reduce :Close DSP need statistics or not :No DSP Packet Lose Compensate :Close DSP clearmode payload value :100 Support RTCP XR :Disable -----------------------------------------------------------------------------

13.6 Configuring the V3 FlowIn the V3 flow, you can use either the transparent transmission mode or the T.38 mode on theUA5000, which is determined by the mode configured on the MGC. If the MGC uses the T.38mode, the fax port ID can be negotiated.



ContextIn the T.38 mode, the fax port ID is negotiated. In the V3 flow, you can set one fax port ID asthe voice port ID and the other fax port ID as the voice port ID plus 2. The settings result in thefax service failure in the V2 flow. The fax process in the V3 flow on the UA5000 is controlledby the MGC. For example, the training mode, coding mode, and port ID are issued by the MGC.

Configuration FlowchartFigure 13-5 shows the flowchart for configuring the V3 flow service.



198

Figure 13-5 Flowchart for configuring the V3 flow service

Start


Query the fax transmission mode

End

Procedure

Step 1 Run the fax parameters tranmode command to set the fax transmission mode as the V3 mode.

NOTE

In the V3 flow, the MGC issues the fax training mode. Hence, you need not configure the fax training modeon the UA5000.


----End

Example

To configure the V3 flow, do as follows:

huawei(config)#fax parameters tranmode 2huawei(config)#display fax parameters ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- Fax transfers mode :V3 flow T38 Fax Port :RTP port Fix the package interval as 10ms :disable RFC2198 intelligent startup :disable -----------------------------------------------------------------------------

13.7 Configuring the V5 FlowThe V5 flow is compatible with the V2 flow and the V3 flow. When the peer fax machine usesthe V2 or V3 flow, the local fax machine that uses the V5 flow can communicate with the peerfax machine properly.


service, the voice service data must be configured properly and the subscribers must be



199

able to call each other successfully. For the configuration of the voice service, see "10Configuring the VoIP Service."

ContextIn the V5 flow, you can use either the transparent transmission mode or the T.38 mode, whichis determined by the mode configured on the MGC.

Configuration FlowchartFigure 13-6 shows the flowchart for configuring the V5 flow.

Figure 13-6 Flowchart for configuring the V5 flow

Start





End

ProcedureStep 1 Run the fax parameters tranmode command to set the V5 mode as the fax transmission mode.



Step 4 (Optional) Run the display dsp attribute command to query the attributes of the DSP channel.

----End

ExampleTo configure the V5 flow on the UA5000, do as follows:



200

huawei(config)#fax parameters tranmode 4huawei(config)#display fax parameters ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- Fax transfers mode :V5 flow T38 Fax Port :RTP port Fix the package interval as 10ms :disable RFC2198 intelligent startup :disable ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- huawei(config)#dsp attribute train-mode 0huawei(config)#display dsp attribute ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- Fax Max Train Rate :V17 Fax Train Mode :Remote Train DSP chip maximum adaptive JitterBuffer(ms) :135 DSP chip minimum adaptive JitterBuffer(ms) :2 DSP chip initial adaptive JitterBuffer(ms) :2 DSP chip maximum fixed JitterBuffer(ms) :135 DSP chip minimum fixed JitterBuffer(ms) :2 DSP chip nominal fixed JitterBuffer(ms) :60 DSP input gain(PCM->IP)(db) :0 DSP output gain(IP->PCM)(db) :0 DSP code type :G711A RTCP package send interval time(ms) :5000 Severe Degrade Threshold(periods) :400 Support VQM :Disable DSP Rtp Packet Interval(ms) :20 DSP echo check :Open DSP silence reduce :Close DSP need statistics or not :No DSP Packet Lose Compensate :Close DSP clearmode payload value :100 Support RTCP XR :Disable -----------------------------------------------------------------------------

13.8 Configuring the High-Speed FaxIf the network communication is of a high quality and the fax machines support the high-speedfax service, you can configure a high-speed fax mode to transmit the signals. In the high-speedmode, the signals are transmitted in the modem mode.



ContextTo implement the high-speed fax service, the following requirements must be met:

l Both the UA5000 and the MGC must support the high-speed fax service, and the faxtransmission mode must not be the selfswitch T.38 mode or the selfswitch transparenttransmission mode.

l The fax machines must support the high-speed fax service.

Configuration FlowchartFigure 13-7 shows the flowchart for configuring the high-speed fax.



201

Figure 13-7 Flowchart for configuring the high-speed fax

Start

End


Query the fax transmissionmode

Query the modemtransmission mode

No

Yes

Selfswitch thoroughlyor Selfswitch T38

mode?

Procedure

Step 1 Run the display fax parameters command to query the fax transmission mode.

Step 2 If the fax transmission mode is the selfswitch T.38 mode or the selfswitch transparenttransmission mode, run the fax parameters tranmode command to change the fax transmissionmode to the fax transmission mode that can be configured. If the fax transmission mode is notthe selfswitch T.38 mode or the selfswitch transparent transmission mode, skip this step.

Step 3 Run the display modem parameters command to query modem parameters.

Step 4 If the modem transmission mode is the transparent transmission mode, the configuration is notrequired.

----End

ExampleTo configure the UA5000 with the transparent transmission flow so that the UA5000 supportsthe high-speed fax, do as follows:

huawei(config)#display fax parameters ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- Fax transfers mode :Self switch T38 T38 Fax Port :RTP port Fix the package interval as 10ms :disable RFC2198 intelligent startup :disable



202

----------------------------------------------------------------------------- huawei(config)#fax parameters tranmode 4huawei(config)#display fax parameters ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- Fax transfers mode :V5 flow T38 Fax Port :RTP port Fix the package interval as 10ms :disable RFC2198 intelligent startup :disable ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- huawei(config)#display modem parameters ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- Modem transfers mode :Thoroughly Modem event mode :Direct Fix the package interval as 10ms :disable RFC2198 intelligent startup :disable -----------------------------------------------------------------------------

13.9 Configuring the High-Low Speed Selfswitch FaxIf the network communication is of a high quality and the fax machines support the high-speedfax service, the data can be transmitted in the high-speed fax mode. In the high-speed fax mode,the signals are transmitted in the modem mode. When the quality of the network communicationdeteriorates, and the high-speed negotiation fails, the UA5000 automatically switches to the lowspeed fax mode. In the low-speed fax mode, the signals are transmitted in the fax mode.



Contextl To implement the high-low speed selfswitch fax service, both the UA5000 and the MGC

must support the high-speed fax service, and the UA5000 must use the direct report modeas the modem event report mode.

l To implement the high-speed fax service, the fax machines must support the high-speedfax service.

l To configure the high-low speed selfswitch fax service, the fax mode cannot be theselfswitch mode.

Configuration FlowchartFigure 13-8 shows the flowchart for configuring the high-low speed selfswitch fax.



203

Figure 13-8 Flowchart for configuring the high-low speed selfswitch fax

Start

Set the modem event report mode

Set the modem transmission mode

Query the modem parameters

Set the Fax transmission mode

Query the Fax parameters

End

Procedure

Step 1 Run the modem parameters eventmode command to set the direct report mode as the modemevent report mode.

Step 2 Run the modem parameters tranmode command to set the transparent transmission mode asthe modem transmission mode.

Step 3 Run the display modem parameters command to query the modem parameters.

----End

ExampleTo configure the UA5000 with the transparent transmission flow so that the UA5000 supportsthe high-low speed selfswitch fax, do as follows:

huawei(config)#modem parameters eventmode 1huawei(config)#modem parameters tranmode 0huawei(config)#display modem parameters ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- Modem transfers mode :Thoroughly Modem event mode :Direct Fix the package interval as 10ms :disable RFC2198 intelligent startup :disable ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- huawei(config)#fax parameters tranmode 0



204

//The mode cannot be set to the selfswitch mode (namely, 3: Selfswitch thoroughly or 5: Selfswitch T38).huawei(config)#display fax parameters ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- Fax transfers mode :V2 thoroughly T38 Fax Port :RTP port Fix the package interval as 10ms :disable RFC2198 intelligent startup :disable -----------------------------------------------------------------------------

13.10 Configuring the Fax Transmission ParametersThe fax transmission parameters for the MG include the transmission mode, 10 ms packetizationfunction, and RFC 2198 intelligent start function. You can configure the fax transmissionparameters according to the actual application environment to ensure the quality of the faxservice.

ContextThe fax transmission parameters of the UA5000 include the following:

l Transmission mode: the transmission mode supported by the fax service. The UA5000supports the selection of different transmission modes according to the actual codingscheme and the participating degree of the MGC. The transmission mode can be thefollowing:– Transparent transmission mode– Auto-negotiation T.38 mode– V3 flow– Selfswitch transparent transmission mode– V5 flow– Selfswitch T.38 mode

l 10 ms packetization function: Based on the 20 ms G711 transparent transmission, the 10ms G711 transmission function is supported. This reduces the delay in the transmission andimproves the performance of the transparent transmission.

l RFC 2198 intelligent start function: RFC 2198 uses the redundancy transmission mode toimprove the reliability of the data transmission, and to ensure the service quality when thenetwork quality is poor.

NOTE

When the protocol supported by the system is MGCP, parameter tranmode cannot be set to 4.

Procedure

Step 1 Run the fax parameters command to set the fax transmission parameters.

Step 2 Run the display fax parameters command to query the fax transmission parameters.

----End




205

l The fax transmission mode is auto-negotiation T.38.l The T.38 port ID is equal to the voice port ID.l The 10 ms packetization function is enabled for the enhanced function of the transparent

transmission.l The RFC 2198 intelligent startup function is enabled.

To configure the fax parameters, do as follows:

huawei(config)#fax parameters tranmode 1 is-port+2 0 packet-interval-10ms 1 rfc2198 1 Parameter 10ms packing and modification for rfc2198 intelligent startup iseffecitive to both fax and modem

13.11 Configuring the Fax Training ParametersConfiguring the fax training parameters includes configuring the fax training mode and themaximum rate of fax training. The fax training mode takes effect only in the T.38 flow. Themaximum rate of fax training takes effect only in the T.38 local training flow.

ContextIn the T.38 flow, the fax training mode on both UA5000s must be the same. That is, the modemust be either the end-to-end training mode or the local training mode. The end-to-end trainingmode is recommended.

When the quality of the network communication deteriorates, decrease the rate of the fax trainingaccordingly, if the rate of the fax machine can be decreased.

Procedure

Step 1 Run the dsp attribute train-mode command to set the fax training parameters.

Step 2 Run the dsp attribute train-rate command to set the maximum training rate.

Step 3 Run the display dsp attribute command to query the attributes of the DSP .

----End

ExampleTo set the fax training mode of the UA5000 as the end-to-end training mode and the maximumtraining rate as V29, do as follows:

huawei(config)#dsp attribute train-mode 0 train-rate 1huawei(config)#display dsp attribute ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- Fax Max Train Rate :V29 Fax Train Mode :Remote Train DSP chip maximum adaptive JitterBuffer(ms) :120 DSP chip minimum adaptive JitterBuffer(ms) :20 DSP chip initial adaptive JitterBuffer(ms) :60 DSP chip maximum fixed JitterBuffer(ms) :135 DSP chip minimum fixed JitterBuffer(ms) :2 DSP chip nominal fixed JitterBuffer(ms) :60 DSP input gain(PCM->IP)(db) :-8 DSP output gain(IP->PCM)(db) :2 DSP code type :G729 RTCP package send interval time(ms) :6000



206

Severe Degrade Threshold(periods) :1 Support VQM :Disable DSP Rtp Packet Interval(ms) :20 DSP echo check :Open DSP silence reduce :Open DSP Packet Lose Compensate :Open DSP clearmode payload value :100 Support RTCP XR :Disable -----------------------------------------------------------------------------



207

14 Configuring the MoIP Service

About This Chapter

Configuring the MoIP service includes the application of the MoIP technology and the relatedprocess for configuring the MoIP service of the UA5000.

14.1 Introduction to the MoIP ServiceModem over IP (MoIP) provides the modem service over the IP network or between the IPnetwork and the PSTN network.

14.2 Configuring the MoIP ServiceConfigure the MoIP service so that the traditional modem data service can be transmitted overthe IP network.

14.3 Configuring the Modem Transmission ParametersConfigure the modem transmission parameters for the MG. The modem transmission parametersfor the MG includes the transmission mode, 10 ms package function, RFC 2198 intelligent startfunction, and modem event reporting mode.

UA5000 Universal Access UnitConfiguration Guide-PVM CLI 14 Configuring the MoIP Service


208

14.1 Introduction to the MoIP ServiceModem over IP (MoIP) provides the modem service over the IP network or between the IPnetwork and the PSTN network.

Service Description

The MoIP means the service of connecting modems to the terminals of the traditional POTSsubscribers to implement the MoIP functions. The modem service is widely used in the PSTNnetwork. The NGN networking supports the modem device of the traditional PSTN service,namely, the MoIP.


In the modem service and the voice service, the subscriber access ports are provided by the voiceservice boards. Table 14-1 lists the number of ports provided by each type of service boards.

Table 14-1 Number of ports provided by each type of service boards

Board Type Number of Ports Description



CSRB 32 32-port POTS and ADSL/ADSL2+combo service board

14.2 Configuring the MoIP ServiceConfigure the MoIP service so that the traditional modem data service can be transmitted overthe IP network.

Prerequisitel The data on the MGC must be accurate.

l The MoIP service is implemented based on the voice service. Before you configure theMoIP service, the voice service data must be configured properly and the subscribers mustbe able to call each other successfully. For the configuration of the voice service, see "10Configuring the VoIP Service."

Context

The UA5000 supports only the modem service that is in the transparent transmission mode. Thatis, the UA5000 processes the modem signals as the common RTP data by using the G.711 codec.The transparent transmission mode is used depending on the bearer network. Therefore, whenthe connection breaks, or a low access rate or an instability occurs, you can check the packetloss rate and the delay jitter index of the bearer network.



209

Procedure

Step 1 Run the modem parameters tranmode command to set the modem transmission mode.


----End

ExampleTo set the modem transmission mode as the transparent transmission mode, do as follows:

huawei(config)#modem parameters tranmode 0huawei(config)#display modem parameters ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- Modem transfers mode :Thoroughly Modem event mode :Direct Fix the package interval as 10ms :disable RFC2198 intelligent startup :enable -----------------------------------------------------------------------------

NOTE

Only the modem service in transparent transmission mode is supported, and the modem service in relaymode is not supported.

14.3 Configuring the Modem Transmission ParametersConfigure the modem transmission parameters for the MG. The modem transmission parametersfor the MG includes the transmission mode, 10 ms package function, RFC 2198 intelligent startfunction, and modem event reporting mode.

Prerequisitel The data on the MGC side must be configured correctly.l The MoIP service is provided on the basis of the voice service. Before you configure the

MoIP service, the voice service must be configured correctly and the call betweensubscribers must be normal. For the configuration of the voice service, see "10 Configuringthe VoIP Service."

ContextThe transmission parameters of the UA5000 include:

l Transmission mode: The UA5000 supports only the modem service in transparenttransmission mode. The modem signal is processed as the common RTP data by using theG.711 codec. The transparent transmission mode is used depending on the bearer network.Therefore, when the connection breaks, or a low access rate or an instability occurs, youcan check the packet loss rate and delay jitter index of the bearer network.

l 10 ms packetization function: Based on the 20 ms G711 transparent transmission, theUA5000 supports the 10 ms G711 transmission function. This reduces the delay, improvesthe performance of the transparent transmission, and reduces the impact of the networkpacket loss on the modem transmission.

l RFC 2198 intelligent start function: The RFC 2198 uses the redundancy transmission modeto improve the reliability of the data transmission, and to ensure the service quality whenthe packet loss occurs in the network.



210

l Modem event reporting mode:– In direct reporting mode, after the UA5000 receives a modem event, it reports the event

to the softswitch.– In delay reporting mode, after the UA5000 receives a modem event, it does not report

the event immediately, but waits until the event times out. Then, if no V21 flag (the faxeven) is reported, the host reports the modem event. In this way, when the high-speedfax machine fails in the high-speed transmission (by modem) negotiation, it can transmitdata in low-speed transmission (by fax) mode.

Procedure

Step 1 Run the modem parameters tranmode command to configure the modem transmissionparameters.


----End

ExampleTo configure the modem transmission mode of the UA5000 as the transparent transmissionmode, to configure the modem event reporting mode as the delay reporting mode, and to enablethe RFC 2198 intelligent start function and the 10 ms package function, do as follows:

huawei(config)#modem parameters tranmode 0huawei(config)#modem parameters eventmode 1 packet-interval-10ms 1 rfc2198 1{ <cr>|tranmode<K> }: Command: modem parameters eventmode 1 packet-interval-10ms 1 rfc2198 1 Parameter 10ms packing and modification for rfc2198 intelligent startup is effecitive to both fax and modem

NOTE

Only the modem service in transparent transmission mode is supported, and the modem service in relaymode is not supported.



211

15 Configuring the R2 Access Service

About This Chapter

Configuring the R2 access service includes the application of the R2 technology and the processfor configuring the R2 access service on the UA5000.

15.1 Introduction to the R2 Access ServiceA signaling system (SS) is an important part of the communication network. It is a tool for thenodes in the communication network to exchange information. The inter-office signalingincludes the channel associated signaling (CAS) and common channel signaling (CCS). The R2signaling is a common CAS.

15.2 Configuration Example of the R2 Access ServiceThis topic describes how to configure the R2 access service on the UA5000-1 through thesignaling mode and the basic parameters of R2 profile of the E1 port on the EDTB board of theUA5000-1.

15.3 Adding an R2 ProfileYou can define an R2 signaling with certain characteristics as an R2 profile. The R2 profileindex can be referenced by the MG R2 subscribers. That is, the R2 profile is valid for the MGR2 subscribers who reference this profile.

15.4 Configuring the Adaptation Data of the R2 ProfileConfigure the R2 profile data, including the R2 address receiving attributes, R2 address sendingattributes, R2 profile attributes, R2 line signaling attributes, and register signaling attributes.

15.5 Loading an R2 Signaling Configuration FileYou can integrate the R2 signaling conversion tables into a script file. Then, configure the R2signaling conversion table of the UA5000 by loading the script file.

UA5000 Universal Access UnitConfiguration Guide-PVM CLI 15 Configuring the R2 Access Service


212

15.1 Introduction to the R2 Access ServiceA signaling system (SS) is an important part of the communication network. It is a tool for thenodes in the communication network to exchange information. The inter-office signalingincludes the channel associated signaling (CAS) and common channel signaling (CCS). The R2signaling is a common CAS.

Service Description

To unify the inter-office signaling, the ITU-T makes recommendations for signaling and finallyforms the signaling systems 1 to 7, R1 signaling, and R2 signaling in succession. Among them,SS1 to SS5, R1, and R2 are CAS. R2 is a common CAS. Generally, different countries definetheir own national standard for CAS according to the ITU-T recommendations. For example,China defines Signaling No. 1, which is different from the standard R2 to a certain extent.

The description of each signaling is as follows:

l CAS

The signaling information is transmitted within the voice channel. The inter-officesignaling of the CAS signaling consists of line signaling (supervisory signals) and registersignaling (with control function).

l R2 signaling

It is a type of CAS. The R2 signaling can be used in international and national networks.Signaling No. 1, used in China, is a subset of the R2 signaling. The R2 signaling consistsof line signaling and register signaling.

l Line signaling

It controls the transmission path between switches or the transmission path inside a switch.During a call, the line signaling is used to set up, maintain, release, and monitor the selectedroute. The line signaling can be forward or backward and is categorized into analog linesignaling and digital line signaling. Currently, only the digital R2 line signaling is providedfor the switching and wireless overseas products. The digital line signaling is fixedlytransmitted through timeslot 16 of each 30/32-channel pulse code modulation (PCM).

l Register signaling

It provides the address and other information required for call routing and related callprocessing. The register signaling is used to send and request for the caller and callednumbers, as well as sending caller subscriber type, called subscriber state, and call servicetype. The register signaling complies with the multiple frequency control (MFC) principle.It is transmitted in the voice channel and it occupies the voice channel resources. It istransmitted before the call is set up, but it cannot be transmitted during a call session.

l Forward signaling and backward signaling

– Forward signaling is sent from the calling office to the called office.

– Backward signaling is sent from the called office to the calling office.


The UA5000 provides the R2 access service through the EDTB board. Table 15-1 lists thenumber of ports provided by the EDTB board.



213

Table 15-1 Number of ports provided by the EDTB board

Board Type Number of Ports Remarks

EDTB 16 16-port E1 service board

15.2 Configuration Example of the R2 Access ServiceThis topic describes how to configure the R2 access service on the UA5000-1 through thesignaling mode and the basic parameters of R2 profile of the E1 port on the EDTB board of theUA5000-1.

Prerequisitel The UA5000-1 must support the R2 CAS and the PBX user must be configured on

UA5000-1.l The data of phone D must be configured properly on the UA5000-2.l The PBX must support the R2 CAS. The PBX must be configured properly. Phones A, B

and C must communicate with each other properly.l The physical connection between the PBX and the UA5000-1 must be correct.

ContextIn the R2 CAS configuration, a large amount of data is configured through the script file providedby Huawei according to the signaling standard of a specific country (such as CAS conversiontable). Therefore, you need not configure this part of the data. This section provides a simplifiedconfiguration example to make you familiar with the flowchart for configuring the R2 accessservice.

NetworkingFigure 15-1 shows the example network of the R2 access service.



214

Figure 15-1 Example network of the R2 access service

MGC

UA5000-1 UA5000-2

PBX

R2 E1

H.248 H.248

Phone A Phone DPhone CPhone B

NOTE

The UA5000 converts the R2 CAS into the H.248 messages, and then reports the messages to the MGC.At the same time, the UA5000 receives the H.248 messages and converts them into the R2 CAS. In thisway, the MGC that uses H.248 and the PBXs or the switches that use the R2 CAS can communicate witheach other.

Data PlanTable 15-2 provides the data plan for configuring the R2 access service.

Table 15-2 Data plan for configuring the R2 access service

Item Data Item Data

R2 profile index 0 R2 profile name Argentina

R2 signaling type Argentina R2signaling

Shelf ID/slot ID/portID of the MG R2subscribers

0/7/2

mgid 0 start-terminalid 0

Configuration FlowchartFigure 15-2 shows the flowchart for configuring the R2 access service.



215

Figure 15-2 Flowchart for configuring the R2 access service

Configure theR2 line

signalingattributes

Add an R2 profile

Start

Configure theR2 addressreceivingattributes

Configure theR2 address

sendingattributes

Configure theR2 profileattributes

Configure theR2 interregister

signalingattributes

End

Add an EDTB board

Set the working modeof the EDTB board

Set the signalingmode of the E1 port

Configure the R2profile data

Add an R2 subscriber

Procedure

Step 1 Add and confirm an EDTB board.huawei(config)#board add 0/7 h601edtbhuawei(config)#board confirm 0/7

Step 2 Set the working mode of the EDTB board.huawei(config)#interface edt 0/7huawei(config-if-edt-0/7)#runmode indep

Step 3 Set the signaling mode of the E1 port.huawei(config-if-edt-0/7)#e1port signal 2 cas huawei(config-if-edt-0/7)#display port mode ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ Port Signalling CRC4 Impedance Service flag-interval-index ----------------------------------------------------------------------------



216

0 CCS Disable 75 - - 1 CCS Disable 75 - - 2 CAS Disable 75 - - 3 CCS Disable 75 - - 4 CCS Disable 75 - - 5 CCS Disable 75 - - 6 CCS Disable 75 - - 7 CCS Disable 75 - - 8 CCS Disable 75 - - 9 CCS Disable 75 - - 10 CCS Disable 75 - - 11 CCS Disable 75 - - 12 CCS Disable 75 - - 13 CCS Disable 75 - - 14 CCS Disable 75 - - 15 CCS Disable 75 - - -----------------------------------------------------------------------------

Step 4 Query the version and type of the R2 signaling.huawei(config-if-edt-0/7)#quithuawei(config)#display r2 signaling-type --------------------------------------------------------- R2 signaling-type --------------------------------------------------------- file version: 100 signaling-type: 0 - Standard_R2 1 - Brazil_R2 2 - Argentina_R2 3-15: Extend_R2 ---------------------------------------------------------

Step 5 Add an R2 profile.huawei(config)#r2 profile 0 Are you sure to add r2 profile?(y/n)[n]:yhuawei(config-r2-0)#

Step 6 Configure the R2 profile.huawei(config-r2-0)#profile attribute name brazil signaling-type 2

Step 7 Query the details of the R2 profile.huawei(config-r2-0)#display profile detail --------------------------------------------------------- R2 signaling profile --------------------------------------------------------- index: 0 name: brazil signaling-type: 2 --------------------------------------------------------- R2 line-signaling attribute --------------------------------------------------------- type(0:L1B,1:L2B,2:L3B,3:PULSE): 1 wait-seize-ack-time(ms): 5000 wait-answer-time(s): 300 wait-clear-forward-time(ms): 200 wait-protect-time(ms): 200 --------------------------------------------------------- R2 register-signaling attribute --------------------------------------------------------- type(0:MFC,1:PULSE,2:DTMF,3:MFP,4:DPMFP):0 signal-send-voltage(dBm): 13 back-pulse-time(ms): 150 dtmf-send-time(ms): 68 dtmf-send-interval(ms): 68 no-cid-permit(yes/no): yes number-max-interval(s): 50 signal-keep-max-time(s): 15 receive-number-max-interval(s): 50 signal-stop-permit-time(s): 15



217

wait-caller-category-time(s): 50 wait-Bsignal-time(s): 50 number-send-mode(0:immediate,1:delay): 1 calling-number-max-length: 12 compelling-sequence-keepalive-time(ms): 40000 send-pulse-signal(yes/no): no --------------------------------------------------------- R2 address-receive attribute --------------------------------------------------------- DI: yes SI: yes SC: yes ES: no CC: no DISC: no NAC: no SP: no RCPS: 1 RCCP: 1 --------------------------------------------------------- R2 address-send attribute --------------------------------------------------------- DI: yes SI: yes SC: yes ES: no CC: no DISC: no NAC: no SP: no ---------------------------------------------------------

Step 8 Add a media gateway (MG) R2 subscriber.huawei(config-r2-0)#quithuawei(config)#esl userhuawei(config-esl-user)#mgr2user add 0/7/2 0 0 start-terminalid 0huawei(config-esl-user)#display mgr2user state 0/7/2 ---------------------------------------------- F / S/ P/ TS ServiceState TerminalID ---------------------------------------------- 0/ 7/ 2/ 0 Fault 0 0/ 7/ 2/ 1 Fault 1 0/ 7/ 2/ 2 Fault 2 0/ 7/ 2/ 3 Fault 3 0/ 7/ 2/ 4 Fault 4 0/ 7/ 2/ 5 Fault 5 0/ 7/ 2/ 6 Fault 6 0/ 7/ 2/ 7 Fault 7 0/ 7/ 2/ 8 Fault 8 0/ 7/ 2/ 9 Fault 9 0/ 7/ 2/ 10 Fault 10 0/ 7/ 2/ 11 Fault 11 0/ 7/ 2/ 12 Fault 12 0/ 7/ 2/ 13 Fault 13 0/ 7/ 2/ 14 Fault 14 0/ 7/ 2/ 15 Fault 15 0/ 7/ 2/ 16 Fault 16 0/ 7/ 2/ 17 Fault 17 0/ 7/ 2/ 18 Fault 18 0/ 7/ 2/ 19 Fault 19 0/ 7/ 2/ 20 Fault 20 0/ 7/ 2/ 21 Fault 21 0/ 7/ 2/ 22 Fault 22 0/ 7/ 2/ 23 Fault 23 0/ 7/ 2/ 24 Fault 24 0/ 7/ 2/ 25 Fault 25 0/ 7/ 2/ 26 Fault 26 0/ 7/ 2/ 27 Fault 27 0/ 7/ 2/ 28 Fault 28



218

0/ 7/ 2/ 29 Fault 29 0/ 7/ 2/ 30 Fault 30 0/ 7/ 2/ 31 Fault 31 ---------------------------------------------- huawei(config-esl-user)#display port state 0/7/2 -------------------------------------------------------- Frame/Slot/Port PortType PortState ServiceType -------------------------------------------------------- 0 / 7 / 2 E1 Normal MGR2 ---------------------------------------------------------

----End

ResultAny one phone among phones A, B, and C should be able to communicate with phone D.

15.3 Adding an R2 ProfileYou can define an R2 signaling with certain characteristics as an R2 profile. The R2 profileindex can be referenced by the MG R2 subscribers. That is, the R2 profile is valid for the MGR2 subscribers who reference this profile.

ContextYou can add a maximum of 16 R2 profiles with the signaling type that ranges from 0 to 15. Thesignaling types are defined as follows:

l 0: Standard_R2l 1: Brazil_R2l 2: Argentina_R2l 3–15: Subscriber self-defined R2

NOTE

By default, in the case of the R2 profiles that range from 0 to 15, the values of the following four tablesare default values. The four tables are register signaling attribute table, line signaling attribute table, addresssending attribute table, and address receiving attribute table.

Procedure

Step 1 Run the r2 profile command to add an R2 profile.

Step 2 Run the display r2 profile command to query the attributes of the R2 profile.

----End

ExampleTo add an R2 profile with index 2, do as follows:

huawei(config)#r2 profile 2Are you sure to add r2 profile?(y/n)[n]: yhuawei(config-r2-2)#display r2 profile --------------------------------------------------------- R2 signalling profile --------------------------------------------------------- index: 2 name: standard r2



219

signalling-type: 0 ---------------------------------------------------------

Related OperationTable 15-3 lists the related operations for adding an R2 profile.

Table 15-3 Related operations for adding an R2 profile

To... Run the Command... In...

Delete an R2 profile undo r2 profile Global config mode

Modify the attributes of anR2 profile

profile attribute R2 mode

Query the basic informationabout all R2 profiles thathave been configured

display r2 profile all Global config mode

Query the general attributesof an R2 profile

display profile detail R2 mode

15.4 Configuring the Adaptation Data of the R2 ProfileConfigure the R2 profile data, including the R2 address receiving attributes, R2 address sendingattributes, R2 profile attributes, R2 line signaling attributes, and register signaling attributes.

NOTE

When you configure the adaptation data of the R2 profile, if a parameter in the signaling standard of acountry is the same as the default parameter defined by the UA5000, the parameter need not be changed.If a parameter in the signaling standard of a country is different from the default parameter defined by theUA5000, the parameter need be changed accordingly.

15.4.1 Configuring the R2 Address Receiving AttributesConfiguring the R2 address receiving attributes means configuring the address receivingattributes in the adaptation data of the specified R2 profile.

ContextThe UA5000 provides default values for the R2 address receiving attributes. Perform thefollowing operation to configure the attributes if the default values do not meet the requirement.

Procedure

Step 1 In global config mode, run the r2 profile command to enter the R2 mode.

Step 2 Run the address-receive attribute command to configure the R2 address receiving attributes.

Step 3 Run the display address-receive command to query the R2 address receiving attributes.

----End



220

ExampleTo set ES to yes in the address receiving table of the R2 profile with index 2, do as follows:

huawei(config)#r2 profile 2huawei(config-r2-2)#address-receive attribute ES yeshuawei(config-r2-2)#display address-receive--------------------------------------------------------------------------- R2 address-receive attribute--------------------------------------------------------------------------- index: 2 DI: yes SI: yes SC: yes ES: yes CC: no DISC: no NAC: no SP: no RCPS: 1 RCCP: 1 ---------------------------------------------------------

15.4.2 Configuring the R2 Address Sending AttributesConfiguring the R2 address sending attributes means configuring the address sending attributesin the adaptation data of the specified R2 profile.

ContextThe UA5000 provides default values for the attributes. Perform the following operation toconfigure the attributes if the default values do not meet the requirement.

Procedure


Step 2 Run the address-send attribute command to configure the R2 address sending table.

Step 3 Run the display address-send command to query the R2 address sending attributes.

----End

ExampleTo set SI as no in the address sending table of the R2 profile with index 2, do as follows:

huawei(config)#r2 profile 2huawei(config-r2-2)#address-send attribute si nohuawei(config-r2-2)#display address-send--------------------------------------------------------------------------- R2 address-send attribute--------------------------------------------------------------------------- index: 2 DI: yes SI: no SC: yes ES: no CC: no DISC: no NAC: no SP: no ---------------------------------------------------------------------------



221

15.4.3 Configuring the R2 Profile AttributesConfigure or modify the basic information about the R2 profile so that the parameters in the R2profile meet the requirements of the subscribers.

ContextThe UA5000 provides default values for the R2 profile attributes. Perform the followingoperation to configure the attributes if the default values do not meet the requirement.

Procedure

Step 1 In the global config mode, run the r2 profile command to enter the R2 mode.

Step 2 Run the profile attribute command to configure the attributes of the R2 profile.

Step 3 Run the display r2 profile command to query the attributes of the R2 profile.

----End

ExampleTo modify the R2 profile with index 2 so that the name of the profile is Argentina and thesignaling type is 2, do as follows:

huawei(config)#r2 profile 2huawei(config-r2-2)#profile attribute name Argentina signalling-type 2huawei(config-r2-2)#display r2 profile--------------------------------------------------------------------------- R2 signaling profile---------------------------------------------------------------------------index: 2name: Argentinasignalling-type: 2---------------------------------------------------------------------------

15.4.4 Configuring the R2 Line Signaling AttributesConfiguring the R2 line signaling attributes means configuring the line signaling attributes inthe adaptation data of the specified R2 profile.

ContextThe UA5000 provides default values for the R2 line signaling attributes. Perform the followingoperation to configure the attributes if the default values do not meet your requirement.

Procedure


Step 2 In global config mode, run the line-signaling attribute command to configure the R2 linesignaling attributes.

Step 3 In the global config mode, run the display line-signaling attribute command to query the R2line signaling attributes.

----End



222


l type: L2Bl wait-seize-ack-time: 3500 msl wait-answer-time: 260sl wait-clear-forward-time: 1000 msl wait-protect-time: 1000 msTo modify the line signaling attributes of the R2 profile with index 2, do as follows:huawei(config)#r2 profile 2huawei(config-r2-2)#line-signaling attribute type 1 wait-seize-ack-time 3500 wait-answer-time 260 wait-clear-forward-time 1000 wait-protect-time 1000huawei(config-r2-2)#display line-signaling attribute --------------------------------------------------------- R2 line-signaling attribute --------------------------------------------------------- index: 2 type(0:L1B,1:L2B,2:L3B,3:PULSE): 1 wait-seize-ack-time(ms): 3500 wait-answer-time(s): 260 wait-clear-forward-time(ms): 1000 wait-protect-time(ms): 1000 ---------------------------------------------------------

15.4.5 Configuring the R2 Register Signaling AttributesConfiguring the R2 register signaling attributes means configuring the register signalingattributes in the adaptation data of the R2 profile.

ContextThe UA5000 provides default values for the R2 register signaling attributes. Perform thefollowing operation to configure the attributes if the default values do not meet the requirement.

ProcedureStep 1 In global config mode, run the r2 profile command to enter the R2 mode.

Step 2 Run the register-signaling attribute command to configure the attributes of the R2 registersignaling.

Step 3 Run the display register-signaling attribute command to query the attributes of the R2 registersignaling.

----End


l type: 0l signal-send-voltage: 20 dBml back-pulse-time: 150 msTo modify the line signaling attributes of the R2 profile with index 2, do as follows:huawei(config)#r2 profile 2huawei(config-r2-2)#register-signaling attribute type 0 signal-send-voltage 20



223

back-pulse-time 150huawei(config-r2-2)#display register-signaling attribute --------------------------------------------------------- R2 register-signaling attribute --------------------------------------------------------- index: 2 type(0:MFC,1:PULSE,2:DTMF,3:MFP,4:DPMFP):0 signal-send-voltage(dBm): 20 back-pulse-time(ms): 150 dtmf-send-time(ms): 68 dtmf-send-interval(ms): 68 no-cid-permit(yes/no): yes number-max-interval(s): 50 signal-keep-max-time(s): 15 receive-number-max-interval(s): 50 signal-stop-permit-time(s): 15 wait-caller-category-time(s): 50 wait-Bsignal-time(s): 50 number-send-mode(0:immediate,1:delay): 1 calling-number-max-length: 12 compelling-sequence-keepalive-time(ms): 40000 send-pulse-signal(yes/no): no ---------------------------------------------------------

15.5 Loading an R2 Signaling Configuration FileYou can integrate the R2 signaling conversion tables into a script file. Then, configure the R2signaling conversion table of the UA5000 by loading the script file.

ContextTo convert R2 signaling to adapt to the standards of different countries, you must configure themapping table between the physical signals and the logical signals. This mapping table is namedthe R2 signaling conversion table, which consists of the following four subtables:

l Line signaling report conversion tablel Line signaling delivery conversion tablel Line signaling delivery conversion tablel Register signaling delivery conversion table

Huawei produces a script file by collecting all man machine language (MML) commands usedfor configuring the R2 signaling conversion table according to the signaling standard of yourcountry. You can load the script file to complete the configuration of the R2 signaling conversiontable on site.

l You can select only one loading mode among Xmodem, TFTP, SFTP, and FTP.l During the loading, running information and other prompts are displayed, indicating the

loading progress, loading result, and failure cause in the case of a failure.

ProcedureStep 1 Run the load r2-signaling-file command to load the R2 signaling configuration file.

----End

ExampleTo load an R2 signaling configuration file through TFTP, do as follows:



224

huawei#load r2-signaling-file tftp 10.11.117.170 r2signalingtype.efs During the file load, the R2 signaling adaptation data will be modified and all the being services will be interrupted Please ensure the file is correct,and please save it after load complete Are you sure to load this file? (y/n)[n]:y Load(backup,duplicate,...) begins, please wait and notice the rate of progress Any operation such as reboot or switchover will cause failure and unpredictable result



225

16 Configuring the V5 Voice Service

About This Chapter

Configuring the V5 voice service includes the application of the V5 technology and the processfor configuring the V5 voice service on the UA5000.

16.1 Introduction to the V5 Voice ServiceThe V5 interface is designed for the access network (AN) development and is located betweenthe local exchange (LE) and the AN. The interface changes the analog connection between theexchange and the access device to a standard digital connection.

16.2 Configuration Example of the V5 Voice ServiceThis topic describes how to configure a V5 interface and the V5 voice subscriber data on theUA5000. In this way, the voice service is transmitted upstream to the exchange for processingso that the voice subscribers can call each other.

16.3 Configuring a PSTN SubscriberAfter configuring the v5 interface, configure the public switched telephone network (PSTN)subscriber data on the V5 interface so that the PSTN subscribers can call each other.

16.4 Configuring an ISDN SubscriberAfter configuring the V5 interface, configure the ISDN subscriber data on the V5 interface sothat the UA5000 can support the ISDN BRA and ISDN PRA access services.

16.5 Blocking a V5 Service PortYou can block a V5 service port by blocking the shelf number/slot number/port number, V5interface ID + L3 address, or V5 interface ID + EF address.

16.6 Configuring the Loopback for a V5 Service PortYou can configure the loopback for a V5 service port and locate the subscriber line faults ornetwork transmission faults based on the voice quality.

UA5000 Universal Access UnitConfiguration Guide-PVM CLI 16 Configuring the V5 Voice Service


226

16.1 Introduction to the V5 Voice ServiceThe V5 interface is designed for the access network (AN) development and is located betweenthe local exchange (LE) and the AN. The interface changes the analog connection between theexchange and the access device to a standard digital connection.

Service Description

When the PVMB or PVMD board functions as the narrowband control board, the UA5000supports the V5 interface and is compatible with the optical line terminal (OLT). The OLT is anarrowband access device. The UA5000 provides the V5 voice service by connecting to thePSTN switch through the V5 interface.


The V5 interface is a standard interface between the access network (AN) and the local exchange(LE). The V5 interface includes the V5.1 and V5.2 interfaces.

l A V5.1 interface manages only one 2048 kbit/s link, and it does not have the lineconcentration capability.

l When the V5.1 protocol is used for configuring the narrowband subscriber, a maximum of30 narrowband subscribers can be added. TS16 and the timeslots that are configured as C-channels are skipped when the V5.1 timeslots increase. When you add the PSTNsubscribers in batches, the system automatically searches for the PSTN ports within aspecified range and adds the PSTN subscribers one by one. The layer 3 addresses andtelephone numbers of the added PSTN subscribers increase by the set step value. Thedefault step is 1.

l A V5.2 interface manages 1-16 2048 kbit/s links, and it has the line concentration capability.l For configuring the narrowband subscribers, the link timeslot is allocated as follows:

– When the 5.1 protocol is used, one narrowband subscriber constantly occupies onetimeslot.

– When the 5.2 protocol is used, no link timeslot is occupied. The V5.2 timeslot isallocated dynamically after the subscriber picks up the phone.

The ring modes of the PSTN subscriber are controlled by the LE, whereas the ring tones areconfigured on the UA5000. Therefore, a ring mapping must be created between the ring modesand the ring tones. One mapping is applied to one V5 interface. If you do not create a ringmapping, the default ring tones are used.

If the C&C08 switch functions as the LE, you need not set the ring mapping, because the ringmodes set on the C&C08 switch are the same as the ring tones set on the UA5000.

Currently, the following three types of ring-stop modes are supported:

l a:b

– a: ring duration

– b: stop durationl a:b:c:d

– a: ring duration



227

– b: stop duration– c: ring duration– d: stop duration

l a:b:c:d:e:f– a: ring duration– b: stop duration– c: ring duration– d: stop duration– e: ring duration– f: stop duration

16.2 Configuration Example of the V5 Voice ServiceThis topic describes how to configure a V5 interface and the V5 voice subscriber data on theUA5000. In this way, the voice service is transmitted upstream to the exchange for processingso that the voice subscribers can call each other.

ContextThe V5 parameters must be the same on the AN and the LE.

NOTE

For the cascaded interfaces, the AN_V5 interface is the upper-level interface of the LE_V5. Therefore, theparameter upperv5id of the LE_V5 must be configured. The AN_V5 interface does not have an upper-level V5 interface, and it is not required to configure this parameter.

NetworkingFigure 16-1 shows the example network of the V5 voice service.

NOTE




228

Figure 16-1 Example network of the V5 voice service

V5 link1

LE

UA5000

PVMB

PVMB

0/13

A32

Phone BPhone A

V5 link2

Data Plan

Table 16-1 provides the data plan for configuring the V5 voice service.

Table 16-1 Data for configuring the V5 voice service

Data Type Item Data

V5 interface Interface ID 0

Protocol version V5.2

Interface type AN_V5

Interface variable 0

ID of the PSTN C channel 0

ID of the logical C channel 0/4/0: 00/5/0: It need not bespecified.

Number of the timeslotoccupied by the physical Cchannel

0/4/0: 160/5/0: 16

Protection group type 0/4/0: protection group Iactive0/5/0: protection group Istandby

Narrowband service board Slot of A32 board 0/13

Subscriber PSTN subscribers L3 address: 8, 9



229

Data Type Item Data

Telephone numbers:12340000-12340001

User-defined ring Ring duration: 0 ms

Ring Peer parameter 0

Cadence ring mode 0: normal ring

Configuration FlowchartFigure 16-2 shows the flowchart for configuring the V5 voice service.

Figure 16-2 Flowchart for configuring the V5 voice service

Start

(Optional) Set E1port CRC4

(Optional Set E1port impedance

Add a V5 interface

Set the V5 interfaceattributes

Add 2M V5 links

Configure logic Cchannels

Reset the V5interface

Query the status ofthe V5 interface

Add a slave shelf

Add an inter-shelflink

Confirm the boards

Load softwares tothe boards

Query the status ofthe boards

Add narrowbandservice boards

Configure subscriberdata

End



230

NOTE

The steps in dashed line frames are for adding a slave shelf. If there is no slave shelf on the UA5000, skip thesteps.

Procedure

Step 1 (Optional) Configure CRC4 for the E1 port.

NOTE

The configuration must be same as the configuration on the LE side. Otherwise, the CRC4 may fail.huawei(config)#interface pvm 0/4huawei(config-if-pvm-0/4)#crc4 0

Step 2 (Optional) Configure the impedance attributes of the E1 port.huawei(config-if-pvm-0/4)#quithuawei(config)#esl userhuawei(config-esl-user)#pstnport electric set 0/13/0 impedance 2 current 6huawei(config-esl-user)#quit

Step 3 Add a V5 interface.huawei(config)#interface v5 0 Are you sure to add V5 interface? (y/n)[n]:yhuawei(config-if-v5-0)#

Step 4 Configure the V5 interface attributes.huawei(config-if-v5-0)#if-v5 attribute an_v5 v52 0 0 -------------------------------------------------------------------------- IF ID IF type Superior IF ID IF Desc 0 AN_V5 -1 - Protocol Version Variable Code PSTN C-channel ID V5.2 0 0

Start link identification: Timed starting In restarting In re-provisioning In link restoration no no no no --------------------------------------------------------------------------

Step 5 Add links.huawei(config-if-v5-0)#link add 0/4/0 1huawei(config-if-v5-0)#link add 0/5/0 2

Step 6 Configure physical C channels.huawei(config-if-v5-0)#c-channel add 0/4/0 tsno 16 1:protc1_act 0huawei(config-if-v5-0)#c-channel add 0/5/0 tsno 16 2:protc1_std

Step 7 Reset the V5 interface.huawei(config-if-v5-0)#resetAre you sure to reset V5 interface?(y/n)[n]:yThis operation will take some time,please wait ......

Step 8 Configure the ringing mode.huawei(config-if-v5-0)#ringmode add 0 128

Step 9 Configure a user-defined ringing mode.



231

NOTE

You can change the 16 user-defined ringing modes to the required ringing modes, but you cannot add aringing mode.In the global config mode, run the user defined-ring modify command to change a user-defined ringingmode.

huawei(config-if-v5-0)#quithuawei(config)#user defined-ring modify 0 para1 0

Step 10 Add a A32 board and confirm it.huawei(config)#board add 0/13 a32 huawei(config)#board confirm 0/13

Step 11 Configure the subscriber data.huawei(config)#narrow userhuawei(config-narrow-user)#pstnuser add 0/13/0 0 8 telno 12340000huawei(config-narrow-user)#pstnuser add 0/13/1 0 9 telno 12340001

Step 12 Save the data.huawei(config-narrow-user)#quithuawei(config)#save

----End

Result1. Verify whether the V5 interface attributes are configured successfully.

huawei(config)#interface v5 0huawei(config-if-v5-0)#display if-v5 state -------------------------------------------------------------------------- V5 interface state: Interface normal V5 interface ID V5 interface type Current variable value 0 AN_V5 0 Primary link ID Secondary link ID V5 Interface link number 1 2 2 Starting link identification: Interface timed starting : no start in interface starting : no Start after re-provisioning: no Start after link restoration: no States of protocol data links under V5 protocol PSTN protocol data link state : Data link normal Control protocol data link state : Data link normal BCC protocol data link state : Data link normal Link control protocol data link state : Data link normal Protection protocol data link 1 state : Data link normal Protection protocol data link 2 state : Data link unusable Logic C-



232

channel: C-channel frame/slot/port/TS Protection group type 0 0 /4 /0 /16 GROUP1-ACT Bearer protocol: C-channel PSTN CTRL BCC PROTECT LINKCTRL ISDN_Ds ISDN_P ISDN_F 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 Standby physical C-channel: Serial No. frame/slot/port/TS Protection group type 0 0 /5 /0 /16 GROUP1-STD --------------------------------------------------------------------------

2. Verify whether the E1 link is normal.huawei(config-if-v5-0)#display link state -------------------------------------------------------------------------- ID. CRC4 Link FSM Local LID state -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1 yes Link fault Link ID not requested 2 no Link fault Link ID not requested --------------------------------------------------------------------------

16.3 Configuring a PSTN SubscriberAfter configuring the v5 interface, configure the public switched telephone network (PSTN)subscriber data on the V5 interface so that the PSTN subscribers can call each other.

PrerequisiteThe V5 interface must be configured properly. For details, see "16.2 Configuration Exampleof the V5 Voice Service."

Procedure

Step 1 Run the narrow user command to enter the narrow user mode.

Step 2 Run the pstnuser add command to add a PSTN subscriber or run the pstnuser batadd commandto add the PSTN subscribers in batches.

Step 3 Run the display user data command to query the PSTN subscriber data.

Step 4 Run the pstnport attribute set command to set the PSTN port attributes.

Step 5 Run the display pstnport attribute command to query the PSTN port attributes.

----End

Example

The following example describes how to configure a PSTN subscriber. Table 16-2 provides thedata plan for configuring a PSTN subscriber.



233

Table 16-2 Data plan for configuring a PSTN subscriber

Data Type Item Data

A32 board Shelf ID/slot ID/port ID 0/13/0

V5 interface V5 interface ID 0

PSTN subscriber L3 address 8

Telephone number 12340000

PSTN port Supports polarity reversal Support

huawei(config)#narrow userhuawei(config-narrow-user)#pstnuser add 0/13/0 0 8 telno 12340000huawei(config-narrow-user)#display user data 0/13/0 ------------------------------------------------------------------ Frame/Slot/Port V5ID L3_Addr V5.1 Ts Telephone Number ------------------------------------------------------------------ 0 / 13 / 0 0 8 - 12340000 ------------------------------------------------------------------ huawei(config-narrow-user)#pstnport attribute set 0/13/0 polarity-reverse supporthuawei(config-narrow-user)#display pstnport attribute 0/13/0 ------------------------------------------------------------------------- Frame/Slot/Port Gain(db) Dial-Mode Polarity-Reverse User-Type ------------------------------------------------------------------------- 0 / 10 / 0 High gain DTMF-Pulse-Both Supported DEL -------------------------------------------------------------------------

16.4 Configuring an ISDN SubscriberAfter configuring the V5 interface, configure the ISDN subscriber data on the V5 interface sothat the UA5000 can support the ISDN BRA and ISDN PRA access services.

Prerequisitel The V5 interface parameters must be configured properly. For details, see "16.2

Configuration Example of the V5 Voice Service."

l The ISDN port group number must be added. To add the ISDN port group number, run theisdn-channel add command.

Procedurel The procedure for configuring an ISDN BRA subscriber is as follows:

1. Run the narrow user command to enter the narrow user mode.

2. Run the brauser add command to add an ISDN BRA subscriber or run the brauserbatadd command to add the ISDN BRA subscribers in batches.

3. Run the display user data command to query the ISDN BRA subscriber data.

l The procedure for configuring an ISDN PRA subscriber is as follows:

1. Run the narrow user command to enter the narrow user mode.

2. Run the prauser add command to add an ISDN PRA subscriber.



234

3. Run the display user data command to query the ISDN PRA subscriber data.

----End

ExampleThe following example describes how to configure an ISDN BRA subscriber. Table 16-3provides the data plan configuring an ISDN BRA subscriber.

Table 16-3 Data plan for configuring an ISDN BRA subscriber

Data Type Item Data

DSL board Shelf ID/slot ID 0/15


ISDN BRA subscriber EF address 0

ISDN port group number 0

Telephone number 12345678

huawei(config)#narrow userhuawei(config-narrow-user)#brauser add 0/15/0 0 0 0 telno 12345678huawei(config-narrow-user)#display user data 0/15/0 ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- Frame/Slot/Port V5ID EF_Addr PortGrpNo R.Pwr V51Ts1/2 Telephone Number ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 0 / 15 / 0 0 0 0 No - 12345678 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------

The following example describes how to configure an ISDN PRA subscriber. Table 16-4provides the data plan for configuring an ISDN PRA subscriber.

Table 16-4 Data plan for configuring an ISDN PRA subscriber

Data Type Item Data

EDTB board Shelf ID/slot ID 0/5


ISDN PRA subscriber EF address 0

ISDN port group number 0

E1 port Shelf ID/slot ID/port ID 0/5/2

huawei(config)#narrow userhuawei(config-narrow-user)#prauser add 0/5/2 0 0 0huawei(config-narrow-user)#display user data 0/5/2 ------------------------------------------------------------------ Frame/Slot/Port V5ID EFAddr PortGrpNo ServiceType ------------------------------------------------------------------ 0 / 5 / 2 0 0 0 PRA ------------------------------------------------------------------



235

16.5 Blocking a V5 Service PortYou can block a V5 service port by blocking the shelf number/slot number/port number, V5interface ID + L3 address, or V5 interface ID + EF address.

Precaution

If any subscriber is already added to a V5 service port, performing such an operation mayinterrupt the ongoing call on that port.

Procedure

Step 1 Run the narrow user command to enter the Narrow user mode.

Step 2 Run the block command to block the V5 service port.

----End

Example

To block the V5 port with the v5id of 1 and the L3 address (namely, the available protocoladdress on the V5 port) of 11234, do as follows:

huawei(config)#narrow user

huawei(config-narrow-user)#block delay 1 l3 1234

Related OperationTo... Run the Command...

Unblock the V5 port undo block

Loop back the V5 port loop

16.6 Configuring the Loopback for a V5 Service PortYou can configure the loopback for a V5 service port and locate the subscriber line faults ornetwork transmission faults based on the voice quality.

PrerequisiteThe parameters related to the V5 interface must be configured. For details, see "16.2Configuration Example of the V5 Voice Service."

Contextl The local loopback can be performed on the V5 service port after the offhook. That is, the

subscribers of the port can hear only their own voice after they take the phone off the hook.The subscribers can check the line status based on the voice quality.



236

l The remote loopback can be performed on the V5 service port after the conversation starts.That is, the subscriber of the port cannot hear any voice, and the subscribers of the peerend hear their own voice. The subscriber of the peer end can check the network transmissionstatus based on the voice quality.

l The loopback tag is removed when the V5 service port is faulty, recovered, and reset.l During the loopback, the subscriber data cannot be changed or deleted.l A conversation does not affect the loopback tag of the V5 service port.

PrecautionThe loopback cannot be performed when the V5 service port is faulty or the timeslot is notoccupied.

Procedure

Step 1 Run the narrow user command to enter the narrow user mode.

Step 2 Run the loop command to perform the loopback on the V5 service port.

----End

ExampleTo perform the remote loopback on the V5 service port with the ID 1 and the 13 address (namely,the available protocol address on the V5 port) 1234, do as follows:

huawei(config)#narrow user

huawei(config-narrow-user)#loop remote 1 l3 1234

Related OperationTo... Run the Command...

Block the V5 port block



237

17 Configuring the SPC

About This Chapter

This topic describes the application of the SPC technology and provides examples forconfiguring the common SPC service and U port transparent transmission service.

17.1 Introduction to the SPCThe semi-permanent connection (SPC) is used to connect, release, check, and protect one ormore 64 KB communication channels between the ports of different boards or between differentports of a same board.

17.2 Configuration Example of the Common SPCThis topic describes how to set up a common SPC between port 0/13/0/0 and port 0/15/0/0 onthe UA5000 (in this example, the SPC type is private.) Thus, when outer-group subscriber Acalls intra-group subscriber B, subscriber A does not need the two-stage dialing or the assistanceof the operator.

17.3 Configuration Example of the U Interface Transparent TransmissionIn this example, the UA5000 is configured with two DSL boards. One DSL board is connectedto the DDN node machine through the U interface. The services on the U interface are transmittedtransparently to the terminal that is connected to the other DSL board through the SPC. Thus,the transmission distance of the DDN node machine can be extended.

UA5000 Universal Access UnitConfiguration Guide-PVM CLI 17 Configuring the SPC


238

17.1 Introduction to the SPCThe semi-permanent connection (SPC) is used to connect, release, check, and protect one ormore 64 KB communication channels between the ports of different boards or between differentports of a same board.

Service Description

The SPC occupies dedicated voice channels to meet the requirements of special and importantaccess users and ensure the quality of the service.

The UA5000 supports a common SPC between the narrowband service ports. The common SPCsinclude internal SPC (an-spc), private SPC (an-private), V5-SPC (v5-spc), and V5-pre SPC (v5-pre). U interface transparent transmission is a type of internal SPC.


Table 17-1 lists the mapping between the SPC application type and the SPC type.

Table 17-1 Mapping between the SPC application type and the SPC type

Service Type SPC Application Type SPC Type

Hotline telephone hotline private

SPC for connecting the subscriberon the LE side

normal V5-spc or V5-pre

Narrowband data service,including U interface transparenttransmission and V.35 connection

normal an-spc

Voice frequency telephone service normal an-spc

Z interface extension Z-extension private

PBX bi-directional interconnection PBX-bothway private

Transparent transmission for E&Mtrunk service

normal an-spc

Hotline telephone for the E&Mtrunk interface

EM-signal private

Table 17-2 lists the mapping between the SPC type and the port type.

Table 17-2 Mapping between the SPC type and the port type

SPC Type Port Type

an-spc PSTN, 2B+D, E1, V5TK, G.SHDSL, VFB



239

SPC Type Port Type

private PSTN, E1, V5TK, CDI

V5-spc PSTN, 2B+D

V5-pre PSTN

A port can be configured with both common access service and SPC service; however, a portcan be configured with only one service at a time.

To set up an SPC, pay attention to the following restrictions on the channel ID.

l If the start or the end port of the SPC is a PSTN port, the channel ID at the PSTN port is0.

l If the start or the end port of the SPC is a V5TK port, the channel ID at the V5TK portcannot be 0 or the ID of channel C.

l If the start or the end port of the SPC is an E1 port, the channel ID at the E1 port cannot be0.

17.2 Configuration Example of the Common SPCThis topic describes how to set up a common SPC between port 0/13/0/0 and port 0/15/0/0 onthe UA5000 (in this example, the SPC type is private.) Thus, when outer-group subscriber Acalls intra-group subscriber B, subscriber A does not need the two-stage dialing or the assistanceof the operator.

ContextSubscribers A and B must be configured on different ports of one board or on different ports ofdifferent boards.

NetworkingFigure 17-1 shows the example network of the common SPC.

Figure 17-1 Example network of the common SPC

Phone BPhone A

UA5000

0/13 0/15

PVM

B

PVM

B

A32

A32



240

Data PlanTable 17-3 provides the data plan for configuring an SPC between subscriber A and subscriberB.

Table 17-3 Data Plan for configuring an SPC

Item Data

Application type normal

SPC type private

Start port of the SPC 0/13/0/0

End port of the SPC 0/15/0/0

Total number of channels for the SPC 1

Configuration FlowchartFigure 17-2 shows the flowchart for configuring a common SPC.

Figure 17-2 Flowchart for configuring a common SPC

Start

Add boards

Confirm the boards

Configure an SPC

End

Procedure

Step 1 Add A32 boards.huawei(config)#board add 0/13 a32 huawei(config)#board add 0/15 a32

Step 2 Confirm the A32 boards.



241

huawei(config)#board confirm 0/13 huawei(config)#board confirm 0/15

Step 3 Configure an SPC between subscriber A and subscriber B.huawei(config)#spc add private start 0/13/0/0 end 0/15/0/0 1 normal


----End

ResultAfter the SPC between subscriber A and subscriber B is set up, subscriber B should hear thering tone when subscriber A picks up the phone.

17.3 Configuration Example of the U Interface TransparentTransmission

In this example, the UA5000 is configured with two DSL boards. One DSL board is connectedto the DDN node machine through the U interface. The services on the U interface are transmittedtransparently to the terminal that is connected to the other DSL board through the SPC. Thus,the transmission distance of the DDN node machine can be extended.

Contextl Only the PVMD supports U interface transparent transmission, whereas the PVMB does

not support U interface transparent transmission.l The port on the DSL board that is connected to the network must work in the MNT mode,

whereas the port on the DSL board that is connected to the subscriber must work in theMLT mode.

NetworkingFigure 17-3 shows the example network for configuring the U interface transparenttransmission.



242

Figure 17-3 Example network for configuring the U interface transparent transmission

UA5000

0/110/8

DDN node

U interface

U interface

Customer A

PVM

D

PVM

D

D

S

L

A

S

L

D

S

L

A

S

L

A

S

L

Data Plan

Table 17-4 provides the data plan for configuring the U interface transparent transmission.

Table 17-4 Data plan for configuring the U interface transparent transmission

Port or Device Item Data

DSL board connected to thenetwork

Shelf ID/slot ID 0/8

DSL board connected to thesubscriber

Shelf ID/slot ID 0/11

SPC Application type normal

SPC type an-spc

Start shelf ID/slot ID/portID/channel ID

0/8/0/0

End shelf ID/slot ID/port ID/channel ID

0/11/0/0

Total number of channels 2



243

Port or Device Item Data

Subtype of the start port MNT

Subtype of the end port MLT


Figure 17-4 shows the flowchart for configuring the U interface transparent transmission.

Figure 17-4 Flowchart for configuring the U interface transparent transmission

Start

Add boards

Confirm the boards

Configure an SPC

End

Procedure

Step 1 Add two DSL boards.huawei(config)#board add 0/8 dslhuawei(config)#board add 0/11 dsl

Step 2 Confirm the DSL boards.huawei(config)#board confirm 0/8huawei(config)#board confirm 0/11

Step 3 Configure an SPC.huawei(config)#spc add an-spc start 0/8/0/0 end 0/11/0/0 2 normal startportsubtype mnt endportsubtype mlt


----End



244

ResultThe DSL board helps to extend the transmission distance of the U interface of the DDN nodemachine. This ensures that the coverage of the services is extended.



245

18 Configuring the DDI Service

About This Chapter

Configuring the direct dialing in (DDI) service includes the application of the DDI technologyand the process for configuring the DDI service on the UA5000.

18.1 Introduction to the DDI ServiceIn the DDI service, the call can be connected to the extension directly without the two-stagedialing and the assistance of an operator.

18.2 Configuration Example of the DDI ServiceThis topic describes how to configure the DDI service by adding a CDI board to the UA5000and then configuring the DDI subscribers on the MG interface. The DDI subscriber to whicheach port corresponds is an intra-group subscriber. Thus, outer-group subscriber A can call intra-group subscriber B without the two-stage dialing.

UA5000 Universal Access UnitConfiguration Guide-PVM CLI 18 Configuring the DDI Service


246

18.1 Introduction to the DDI ServiceIn the DDI service, the call can be connected to the extension directly without the two-stagedialing and the assistance of an operator.

Service Description

You can connect the UA5000 to an enterprise PBX through an analog trunk interface providedby a CDI board, as shown in Figure 18-1. In this way, the UA5000 realizes the DDI service.An outer-group subscriber can dial the access code of the enterprise (PBX pilot number) + PBXextension number to call an intra-group subscriber through DDI. Hence, no two-stage dialingor operator assistance is involved in this process.

The UA5000 provides a channel for directly calling the PBX through the CDI board. TheUA5000 also provides an emergency channel. The UA5000 VoIP subscribers can call the PSTNsubscribers through the emergency channels provided by the CDI board in the case of networkfailure (such as physical line failure or disconnection from the MGC), as shown in Figure18-1.

Figure 18-1 DDI service application

Enterprise 2

MGC

Enterprise 1

UA5000

PBX

NMS

UA5000

Appserver


The UA5000 supports the DDI service only when it uses the H. 248 protocol.



247

18.2 Configuration Example of the DDI ServiceThis topic describes how to configure the DDI service by adding a CDI board to the UA5000and then configuring the DDI subscribers on the MG interface. The DDI subscriber to whicheach port corresponds is an intra-group subscriber. Thus, outer-group subscriber A can call intra-group subscriber B without the two-stage dialing.

PrerequisiteThe data on the MGC must be configured.

Precaution

You can set certain ports on the CDI board as DDI channels and other ports as emergencychannels. You cannot, however, set a port as a DDI channel and an emergency channel at thesame time.

Networking

The UA5000 provides voice services through the voice access ports on the ASL boards. Thevoice signals are processed by the PVMB board, and then transmitted to the upper layer network.Figure 18-2 shows the example network of the DDI service.

NOTE


Figure 18-2 Example network of the DDI service

UA5000

PBX

UA5000

MGC

Phone APhone B

A

S

L

P

VM

B

P

VM

B

C

D

I

A

S

L

P

VM

B

P

VM

B



248

Data PlanTable 18-1 provides the data plan for configuring the DDI service.

Table 18-1 Data plan for configuring the DDI service

Item Data Remarks

UA5000 10.10.10.2/24 Uplink FE port (fast Ethernetport)

Gateway of the UA5000 10.10.10.1/24 The default gateway forservice upstream

MGC 10.10.20.1/24 -

MGC port: 2944 -

MG MG ID: 0 -

Domain name: UA5000.com -

Code: text -

Protocol: H.248 -

Transfer: udp -

MG port: 2944 -


The parameter value must be thesame as the H.248 version on theMGC.

Contextl The terminal ID of the DDI user must be the same as the ID configured on the MGC.l If the MG interface does not support the terminal layer configuration, the terminal IDs of

the DDI users must be numbered within the MG interface.l If the MG interface supports the terminal layer configuration, you need not set a terminal

ID because the system generates a protocol address automatically.

Configuration FlowchartFigure 18-3 shows the flowchart for configuring the DDI service.



249

Figure 18-3 Flowchart for configuring the DDI service

Start

Add a CDI board

Configure the attributesof the CDI port

Configure the DDIsubscriber data

Save the data

End

Procedure

Step 1 Add a CDI board.huawei(config)#board add 0/11 cdihuawei(config)#board confirm 0/11

Step 2 Add and configure the MG interface data.

NOTE

For the procedure for configuring an MG interface, see "9 Configuring the MG Interface".huawei(config)#interface h248 0Are you sure to add MG interface?(y/n)[n]:yhuawei(config-if-h248-0)#if-h248 attribute mgip 10.10.10.2 mgport 2944 code text transfer udp domainName UA5000.com mgcip_1 10.10.20.1 mgcport_1 2944 mg-media-ip 10.10.10.4 start-negotiate-version 2huawei(config-if-h248-0)#reset coldstart Are you sure to reset MG interface?(y/n)[n]:yhuawei(config-if-h248-0)#Reset MG interface 0 success!

Step 3 (Optional) Query the status of the MG interface.huawei(config-if-h248-0)#display if-h248 attribute --------------------------------------------------------------------- MGID 0 MG Description - MG DomainName UA5000.com Protocol H248 H248version Negotiated Originally 2 Profile Negotiation Para disable Profile 1:Resv1("")

2833Encrypt - Codetype Text Transmode UDP HeartBeatTimer(s) 60 HeartBeatRetransTimes 3 HeartBeatRetransTimer(s) 60 MG signalling IP 10.10.10.2



250

MG signalling Port 2944 MG media IP 10.10.10.4 MIDType IP4_ADDR DeviceName -


Step 4 Quit the MG interface mode and enter the ESL user mode.huawei(config-if-h248-0)#quithuawei(config)#esl userhuawei(config-esl-user)#

Step 5 Add and configure the DDI subscriber data.huawei(config-esl-user)#mgddiuser add 0/11/0 0 151huawei(config-esl-user)#display port state 0/11/0 --------------------------------------------------------------------------F / S/ P Type State SvcState SvcType UserType MgID ProtocolID --------------------------------------------------------------------------0/11/0 CDI Idle StartService InstSvc MG 0 151 --------------------------------------------------------------------------huawei(config-esl-user)#quit

Step 6 (Optional) Configure the attributes of the DDI port.huawei(config)#cdihuawei(config-cdi)#port attribute set 0/11/0 dialmode PULSEhuawei(config-cdi)#quit


----End

ResultThe DDI service configuration of subscriber A and subscriber B is complete. Subscriber A shouldbe able to call subscriber B by dialing the access code (PBX pilot number) of the company +PBX extension number of subscriber B.



251

19 Configuring the SDL Service

About This Chapter

Configuring the SDL service includes the application of the SDL board and the process forconfiguring the SDL service through the SDL board on the UA5000.

19.1 Introduction to the SDL ServiceThe UA5000 provides different SDL services, including the N x 64 k (N ranges from 1 to 32)data service and E1 access service through the SDL/SDLE board.

19.2 Configuration Example of the Normal SDL ServiceThis topic describes how to configure the two routers connected to the two SDL boards throughthe SHDSL terminals so that the routers can communicate with each other.

UA5000 Universal Access UnitConfiguration Guide-PVM CLI 19 Configuring the SDL Service


252

19.1 Introduction to the SDL ServiceThe UA5000 provides different SDL services, including the N x 64 k (N ranges from 1 to 32)data service and E1 access service through the SDL/SDLE board.

Service DescriptionThe UA5000 provides the N x 64 k (N ranges from 1 to 32) data services and E1 services throughthe SDL/SDLE board. The service data is sent through SPCs, which are set up between G.SHDSLports on the SDL/SDLE board and other service ports.

The SDL/SDLE board supports two types of SPCs: intra-board SPCs and inter-board SPCs.

l An intra-board SPC is set up between G.SHDSL ports, E1 ports, or a G.SHDSL port andan E1 port on one SDL/SDLE board.

l An inter-board SPC is set up between a port on one SDL/SDLE board and a G.SHDSL porton the other SDL/SDLE board, or between a port on one SDL/SDLE board and an E1 porton the PVMB or PVMD board.

Service SpecificationsThe SDL/SDLE board can work in the normal mode or the transmission mode.l The SDL board provides four G.SHDSL ports and four E1 ports.l The SDLE board provides eight G.SHDSL ports and eight E1 ports.

The G.SHDSL ports provided by the SDL/SDLE board work in the FE1 or V.35 mode to extendthe transmission distance of the E1 or V.35 services.

19.2 Configuration Example of the Normal SDL ServiceThis topic describes how to configure the two routers connected to the two SDL boards throughthe SHDSL terminals so that the routers can communicate with each other.

NetworkingFigure 19-1 shows the example network of the SDL normal service.

NOTE




253

Figure 19-1 Example network of the SDL normal service

Router

SHDSL terminal

E1/V5

V.35/E1

PVMB

PVMB

SDL

SDL

Router

SHDSL terminal

0/8 0/9

LEDDN

Data PlanTable 19-1 provides the data plan for configuring the SDL normal service.

Table 19-1 Data plan for configuring the SDL normal service

Interface orDevice

Item Data Remarks

SDL board Shelf/Slot 0/8 and 0/9 -

Running mode normal Normal mode

Clock source system system clock

SHDSL port Clock mode E1 mode -

SPC Service type normal Normal application

Connection type an-spc Internal SPC

Start shelf number/slot number/portnumber/channelnumber

0/8/4/1 -

End shelf number/slot number/portnumber/channelnumber

0/9/4/1 -

Channel number 10 -



254

Context

When you configure the application of the SDL normal service, the running mode of the SDLboard must be normal.

The SPC on the SDL board has the following limitations based on the service mode.

l The intra-board SPC of the SDL board supports a maximum of 32 timeslots. The minimumtimeslot number is occupied first for both the start and the end timeslots of the SPC.

l The intra-board SPC from SDL to SDL supports a maximum of 30 timeslots. The minimumtimeslot number is occupied first for both the start and the end timeslots of the SPC.

l If the SDL board is configured with the inter-board SPC service, use the system clock.

l When the transport mode is configured for the SDL board, do not select the SHDSL portas the clock source.

l When you create the inter-board SPC from PVM/EDTB to SDL, the following situationsoccur:

– The SPC from E1 port to V.35 port supports a maximum of 30 timeslots. At the startof the SPC, timeslot 3 of the port is occupied first. At the end, timeslot 0 is occupiedfirst.

– The SPC from E1 port to FE1 port supports a maximum of 30 timeslots. At the start ofthe SPC, timeslot 1 of the port is occupied first. At the end, timeslot 1 is occupied first.


Figure 19-2 shows the flowchart for configuring the SDL service.

Figure 19-2 Flowchart for configuring the SDL service

Start

End

Add SDL boards

Confirm the SDL boards

Configure an SHDSL port

Configure the clocksource for the boards

Configure the runningmode of the boards

Set up an SPC



255

PrecautionWhen you are configuring the timeslot range for the SPC by running the spc addan-spccommand, note that the timeslot of the SPC must be within the range of the G.SHDSL port rate.For example, if the port rate is 10, the timeslot range of the SPC must be 0–9.

Procedure

Step 1 Add SDL boards.huawei(config)#board add 0/8 sdlhuawei(config)#board add 0/9 sdl

Step 2 Confirm the SDL boards.huawei(config)#board confirm 0/8huawei(config)#board confirm 0/9

Step 3 Configure the running mode of the boards.huawei(config)#interface sdl 0/8huawei(config-if-sdl-0/8)#runmode normal clock line 0

Step 4 Configure the clock source of the board.huawei(config-if-sdl-0/8)#clock source line 0huawei(config-if-sdl-0/8)#display clock config ------------------------------------------------ Board's clock source: FE1 line 0 clock ------------------------------------------------

Step 5 Configure an SHDSL port.l Query the configuration of the SHDSL port. If the running mode is the E1 mode, you need

not change it.huawei(config-if-sdl-0/8)#display port config -------------------------- Port Frame Username -------------------------- 0 PCM31 - 1 PCM31 - 2 PCM31 - 3 PCM31 - ---------------------------------- Port Workmode Active Username ---------------------------------- 4 E1 Allow - 5 E1 Allow - 6 E1 Allow - 7 E1 Allow - ----------------------------------

l Query the configuration of the SHDSL port. If the running mode is the V.35 mode, changeit to the E1 mode.huawei(config-if-sdl-0/8)#display port config -------------------------- Port Frame Username -------------------------- 0 PCM31 - 1 PCM31 - 2 PCM31 - 3 PCM31 - ---------------------------------- Port Workmode Active Username ---------------------------------- 4 V35 Allow user1



256

5 E1 Allow - 6 E1 Allow - 7 E1 Allow - ---------------------------------- huawei(config-if-sdl-0/8)#shdslport modify 4 runmode fe1

Step 6 Query the timeslot occupancy of the port (before creating the SPC, the timeslot is not occupied).huawei(config-if-sdl-0/8)#display timeslot ---------------------------------------------------------- | 0--7 | 8--15 | 16--23 | 24--31 | ---------------------------------------------------------- FE1 line 0 | 00000000 | 00000000 | 00000000 | 00000000 | FE1 line 1 | 00000000 | 00000000 | 00000000 | 00000000 | FE1 line 2 | 00000000 | 00000000 | 00000000 | 00000000 | FE1 line 3 | 00000000 | 00000000 | 00000000 | 00000000 | SHDSL line 0 | 00000000 | 00000000 | 00000000 | 00000000 | SHDSL line 1 | 00000000 | 00000000 | 00000000 | 00000000 | SHDSL line 2 | 00000000 | 00000000 | 00000000 | 00000000 | SHDSL line 3 | 00000000 | 00000000 | 00000000 | 00000000 | ---------------------------------------------------------- '0'-Not used; '1'-Used ----------------------------------------------------------

Step 7 Repeat Steps 3–6 to configure the SDL board on shelf 0/slot 9.

Step 8 Set up an SPC.huawei(config)#spc add an-spc start 0/8/4/1 end 0/9/4/1 10 normalhuawei(config)#interface sdl 0/8huawei(config-if-sdl-0/8)#display timeslot ---------------------------------------------------------- | 0--7 | 8--15 | 16--23 | 24--31 | ---------------------------------------------------------- FE1 line 0 | 00000000 | 00000000 | 00000000 | 00000000 | FE1 line 1 | 00000000 | 00000000 | 00000000 | 00000000 | FE1 line 2 | 00000000 | 00000000 | 00000000 | 00000000 | FE1 line 3 | 00000000 | 00000000 | 00000000 | 00000000 | SHDSL line 0 | 01111111 | 11100000 | 00000000 | 00000000 | SHDSL line 1 | 00000000 | 00000000 | 00000000 | 00000000 | SHDSL line 2 | 00000000 | 00000000 | 00000000 | 00000000 | SHDSL line 3 | 00000000 | 00000000 | 00000000 | 00000000 | ---------------------------------------------------------- '0'-Not used; '1'-Used ----------------------------------------------------------

----End

ResultThe routers connected to the two SDL boards should be able to communicate with each other.



257

20 Configuring the MTA Service

About This Chapter

Configuring the multifunctional terminal adapter (MTA) service includes the application of theMTA technology and the process for configuring the MTA service on the UA5000.

20.1 Introduction to the MTA ServiceThe UA5000 supports accessing the subscriber data service through the multifunctional terminaladapter (MTA).

20.2 Configuration Example of the MTA ServiceThis topic describes how to add the MTA on port 0/8/0 and port 0/11/0 on the UA5000 so thatsubscribers connected to port 0/8/0 and port 0/11/0 can exchange data.

UA5000 Universal Access UnitConfiguration Guide-PVM CLI 20 Configuring the MTA Service


258

20.1 Introduction to the MTA ServiceThe UA5000 supports accessing the subscriber data service through the multifunctional terminaladapter (MTA).

Service DescriptionThe UA5000 provides the following ports through the MTA:

l 64 kbit/s and 128 kbit/s rate synchronous portsl 2.4 kbit/s, 4.8 kbit/s, 9.6 kbit/s, and 19.2 kbit/s sub-rate synchronous or asynchronous ports

In this way, the UA5000 provides the data terminal subscribers with the physical communicationchannels between the data terminal subscribers and the DDN network or other data terminalsubscribers.

Service SpecificationsThe MTA is connected to the DSL board through the 2B1Q interface. On the subscriber side,the MTA provides one V.35/V.24 compatible port and two V.24 ports. The three ports can workonly in the DCE mode.

l V.35/V.24 compatible port (port 0): It is a DB25 socket, which directly provides the V.24port (or the DCE-DTE cross over cable can be used). The port supports the synchronousrate of 64 kbit/s, and the synchronous/asynchronous rates of 19.2 kbit/s, 9.6 kbit/s, 4.8 kbit/s, and 2.4 kbit/s. The port functions as a V.35 port through the V.35 transit cable, andsupports the rates of 128 kbit/s and 64 kbit/s.

l V.24 ports (ports 1 and 2) are RJ45 socket (8-pin RJ-45 socket). The ports function as theV.24 ports through the RJ45-DB25 transit cable. The ports support the synchronous rateof 64 kbit/s, and the synchronous/asynchronous rates of 19.2 kbit/s, 9.6 kbit/s, 4.8 kbit/s,and 2.4 kbit/s. The rate of 19.2 kbit/s is not recommended for port 2 (refer to the X.50protocol).

The data devices that are connected directly to the MTA must have the standard V.24/RS-232serial ports, or the V.35 serial ports. The devices include the following:

l Routerl PCl Front end processorl Other data terminal equipment (DTE)

20.2 Configuration Example of the MTA ServiceThis topic describes how to add the MTA on port 0/8/0 and port 0/11/0 on the UA5000 so thatsubscribers connected to port 0/8/0 and port 0/11/0 can exchange data.

PrerequisiteBit 2 of the DIP switch on the MTA must be set to ON so that port 0 on the MTA works in theV.24 mode.



259

Precautionl Before connecting a DTE, make sure that the port type, the DIP switches, and the cable are

correct. Otherwise, the ports on the UA5000 and the DTE may be damaged.

l The power of the MTA must map the MTA.

Networking

Figure 20-1 shows the example network of the MTA service.

Figure 20-1 Example network of the MTA service

UA5000

E1/V5 0/110/8

MTA MTA

LE

Computer A Computer B

P

VM

B

P

VM

B

D

S

L

A

S

L

D

S

L

A

S

L

Data Plan

Table 20-1 provides the data plan for configuring the MTA service.

Table 20-1 Data plan for configuring the MTA service

Data Type Item Data

DSL board Shelf ID/slot ID 0/8, 0/11

MTA port Shelf ID/slot ID/port ID 0/8/0, 0/11/0

DSL board Channel number 0

Rate of channel 0 19200 bit/s



260

Data Type Item Data

Asynchronous word length ofchannel 0

10

Synchronous or asynchronousselection of the channel

asyn

SPC Application type Common application

SPC type Internal SPC

Start shelf ID/slot ID/port ID/channel ID

0/8/0/0


0/11/0/0

Total number of channels 1

Configuration FlowchartFigure 20-2 shows the flowchart for configuring the MTA service.

Figure 20-2 Flowchart for configuring the MTA service

Add an MTA

Modify the attributesof the MTA

Query the settingsof the MTA channels

Set up an SPC

End

Start

ProcedureStep 1 Add an MTA.

huawei(config)#mta add 0/8/0huawei(config)#display mta---------------------------------------------------------------------------



261

Frame/Slot/Port status Channel 0 Channel 1 Channel 2 0 /8/0 Normal Syn 4.8K Unavail Unavail------------------------------------------------------------------------- Total: 1 MTA, 1 normal, 0 fault, 0 unknown ------------------------------------------------------------------

Step 2 Modify the attributes of the MTA.huawei(config)#mta modify 0/8/0 channelNo 0 asyn_len 10 mode asyn rate 19200

Step 3 Query the settings of the MTA channels.huawei(config)#display mta 0/8/0 ------------------------------------------------------------------ Frame/Slot/Port mmunication status protocol 0 /8 /0 Normal X.50 S bit loop Channel 0: Mode:Asyn Rate:19.2K Port type:DCE Clock type:Internal mode Signal phase: Data receive In-phase Data send In-phase Clock receive In-phase Clock send In-phase Data length:10 B channel: B1 Involve phase:Sequence phase Channel 1: Unavailable Channel 2: Unavailable

Step 4 Repeat steps 1 to 3 to configure the other MTA on port 0/11/0.

Step 5 Set up an SPC.huawei(config)#spc add an-spc start 0/8/0/0 end 0/11/0/0 1 normal

----End

ResultConnect the two MTAs to two computers, and set the baud rate of the HyperTerminal to 19200bit/s and do not set any flow control. The computers can send data to the MTAs and receive datafrom the MTAs through the serial ports.



262

21 Configuring the VFB Service

About This Chapter

Configuring the VFB service includes the application of the VFB technology and the processfor configuring the VFB service on the UA5000.

21.1 Introduction to the VFB ServiceThe UA5000 supports the audio telephone service through the VFB board.

21.2 Configuration Example of the VFB ServiceThis topic describes how to configure two VFB boards on the UA5000 to set up an SPC betweenport 0/8/0 and port 0/12/0. Thus, subscribers connected to port 0/8/0 and port 0/12/0 areconnected through a private line.

UA5000 Universal Access UnitConfiguration Guide-PVM CLI 21 Configuring the VFB Service


263

21.1 Introduction to the VFB ServiceThe UA5000 supports the audio telephone service through the VFB board.

Service DescriptionThe UA5000 transmits voice or data services over the voice frequency (VF) channel in a privatenetwork.

Service SpecificationsThe UA5000 provides point-to-point VF channels. You can connect a VF phone or modem toeach end of the channel to implement the private line interconnection of the voice or dataservices.

21.2 Configuration Example of the VFB ServiceThis topic describes how to configure two VFB boards on the UA5000 to set up an SPC betweenport 0/8/0 and port 0/12/0. Thus, subscribers connected to port 0/8/0 and port 0/12/0 areconnected through a private line.

NetworkingFigure 21-1 shows the example network of the VFB service.

NOTE


Figure 21-1 Example network of the VFB service

VFtelephone

VFtelephone

UA5000

0/8 0/12

V

F

B

P

VM

B

P

VM

B

V

F

B



264

Data PlanTable 21-1 provides the data plan for configuring the VFB service.

Table 21-1 Data plan for configuring the VFB service

Data Type Item Data Remarks

VFB board Shelf ID/slot ID/port ID 0/8/0, 0/12/0 -

VFB port Working mode 2-wire 2-wire

Rx gain -6 dB -

Tx gain +5 dB -

SPC Application type normal Commonapplication

SPC type an-spc Internal SPC


0/8/0/0 -


0/12/0/0 -

Total number ofchannels

1 -

Contextl When modifying the working mode of the VFB port, you must delete the SPC that is set

up on the port.l When modifying other attributes on the VFB port, you need not delete the SPC that is set

up on the port.

Configuration FlowchartFigure 21-2 shows the flowchart for configuring the VFB service.



265

Figure 21-2 Flowchart for configuring the VFB service

Start

Add VFB boards

Confirm the VFBboards

Configure the VFBport attributes

Set up an SPC

QoS qualified? Modify the VFBport attributes

End

Yes

No

ProcedureStep 1 Add two VFB boards.

huawei(config)#board add 0/8 VFB huawei(config)#board add 0/12 VFB

Step 2 Confirm the two VFB boards.huawei(config)#board confirm 0/8 huawei(config)#board confirm 0/12

Step 3 Configure the VFB port attributes.huawei(config)#vfbhuawei(config-vfb)#port attribute set 0/8/0 mode 2line receivegain 5 transmitgain 9 huawei(config-vfb)#display port attribute 0/8/0 ------------------------------------------ Port Mode Resistance Receive Transmit ------------------------------------------ 0 Two line 600 -6dB +5dB ------------------------------------------ huawei(config-vfb)#port attribute set 0/12/0 mode 2line receivegain 5 transmitgain 9 huawei(config-vfb)#display port attribute 0/12/0 ------------------------------------------ Port Mode Resistance Receive Transmit



266

------------------------------------------ 0 Two line 600 -6dB +5dB ------------------------------------------ huawei(config-vfb)#quit

Step 4 Set up an SPC.huawei(config)#spc add an-spc start 0/8/0/0 end 0/12/0/0 1 normal

Step 5 (Optional) Modify the VFB port attributes.After the SPC is set up, the subscribers that are connected to the two ports can call each other.

1. If the voice of the peer end is very low, increase the Rx gain of the local end or the Tx gainof the peer end.huawei(config)#vfbhuawei(config-vfb)#port attribute set 0/8/0 receivegain 6 huawei(config-vfb)#display port attribute 0/8/0 -------------------------------------------------------- Port Mode Resistance Receive Transmit Name -------------------------------------------------------- 0 Two line 600 -5dB +5dB - --------------------------------------------------------

2. If the voice of the peer end is very high and is distorted, decrease the Rx gain of the localend or the Tx gain of the peer end.huawei(config-vfb)#port attribute set 0/8/0 receivegain 4 huawei(config-vfb)#display port attribute 0/8/0 ------------------------------------------------------- Port Mode Resistance Receive Transmit Name -------------------------------------------------------- 0 Two line 600 -7dB +5dB ---------------------------------------------------------

----End

ResultSubscribers connected to the two VFB boards should be able to call each other.



267

22 Configuring the ATI Service

About This Chapter

Configuring the ATI service includes the application of the ATI and the process for configuringthe ATI service on the UA5000.

22.1 Introduction to the ATI ServiceThe UA5000 supports the transparent transmission of the E&M signalings and the 2-wire/4-wireVF signals through the ATI board.

22.2 Configuration Example of the 2-Wire/4-Wire VF and E&M Trunk Service TransparentTransmissionThis topic describes how to configure two ATI boards on the UA5000, configure the subscriberline mode of ATI ports 0/7/0 and 0/13/0 to 2wire, and set up an SPC between the two ports. TheSPC type is normal. Thus, the private line service of subscribers connected to port 0/7/0 and port0/13/0 is implemented.

22.3 Configuration Example of the Hotline Service on the E&M Trunk InterfaceThis topic describes how to configure two ATI boards on the UA5000, and set up an SPC betweenport 0/7/0 and port 0/13/0. The SPC type is the private line. Thus, subscribers connected to port0/7/0 and port 0/13/0 can communicate with each other after taking the phones off the hook.

UA5000 Universal Access UnitConfiguration Guide-PVM CLI 22 Configuring the ATI Service


268

22.1 Introduction to the ATI ServiceThe UA5000 supports the transparent transmission of the E&M signalings and the 2-wire/4-wireVF signals through the ATI board.

Service DescriptionThe signaling channel and voice channel of the E&M trunk interface are separate. Therefore,when the E&M trunk interface is supported, a port includes the signaling line (E line and M line)and the voice frequency (VF) line. Where,

l The signaling line can be configured to support the Bell IV-type or V-type interface throughDIP switch settings.

l The VF line can be configured to support the 4-wire or 2-wire interface through the DIPswitch settings.

Service SpecificationsThe ATI board provides six 2-wire/4-wire E&M trunk interfaces. Each interface of an ATI boardprovides the 2-wire/4-wire VF line or the 1E1M signaling line. When the E&M signaling lineis not used, the 2-wire/4-wire VF line can be used separately for transmitting VF signals.

22.2 Configuration Example of the 2-Wire/4-Wire VF andE&M Trunk Service Transparent Transmission

This topic describes how to configure two ATI boards on the UA5000, configure the subscriberline mode of ATI ports 0/7/0 and 0/13/0 to 2wire, and set up an SPC between the two ports. TheSPC type is normal. Thus, the private line service of subscribers connected to port 0/7/0 and port0/13/0 is implemented.

NetworkingFigure 22-1 shows the example network of the 2-wire/4-wire VF and E&M trunk servicetransparent transmission.

Figure 22-1 Example network of the 2-wire/4-wire VF and E&M trunk service transparenttransmission

UA5000

0/7 0/13

Modem BModem A

E&M interfaceE&M interface

A

T

I

P

VM

B

P

VM

B

A

T

I



269

Data PlanTable 22-1 provides the data plan for configuring the 2-wire/4-wire VF and E&M trunk servicetransparent transmission.

Table 22-1 Data plan for configuring the 2-wire/4-wire VF and E&M trunk service transparenttransmission


ATI board Shelf ID/slot ID of the board towhich modem A is connected

0/7 -

Shelf ID/slot ID of the board towhich modem B is connected

0/13 -

E&M interface Subscriber line mode 2-wire 2-wire

EM working mode 1E1M -

Rx gain -6 dB -

Tx gain -2.5 dB -

SPC Application type normal Commonapplication

SPC type an-spc Internal SPC


0/7/0/0 -


0/13/0/0 -

Total number of channels 1 -

Contextl Currently, the ATI board supports only the 1E1M mode.l After modifying the EM mode and the subscriber line mode, adjust the DIP switches on

the board.

Configuration FlowchartFigure 22-2 shows the flowchart for configuring the ATI service.



270

Figure 22-2 Flowchart for configuring the ATI service

Start

Add ATI boards

Confirm ATI boards

Configure the ATI portattributes

Set up an SPC

QoS qualified?

End

Modify the ATI portattributes

Yes

No

Procedure

Step 1 Add ATI boards.huawei(config)#board add 0/7 ati huawei(config)#board add 0/13 ati

Step 2 Confirm the ATI boards.huawei(config)#board confirm 0/7 huawei(config)#board confirm 0/13

Step 3 Configure the attributes of the ATI port to which subscriber A is connected.huawei(config)#atihuawei(config-ati)#port attribute set 0/7/0 recvgain 28 transgain 9 workmode 1E1Muserline 2Wire

Step 4 Configure the attributes of the ATI port to which subscriber B is connected.huawei(config-ati)#port attribute set 0/13/0 recvgain 28 transgain 9 workmode 1E1M userline 2Wire

Step 5 Set up an SPChuawei(config)#spc add an-spc start 0/7/0/0 end 0/13/0/0 1 normal

----End

ResultSubscribers of the two terminals that are connected to the two modems should be able to calleach other.



271

22.3 Configuration Example of the Hotline Service on theE&M Trunk Interface

This topic describes how to configure two ATI boards on the UA5000, and set up an SPC betweenport 0/7/0 and port 0/13/0. The SPC type is the private line. Thus, subscribers connected to port0/7/0 and port 0/13/0 can communicate with each other after taking the phones off the hook.

Networking

Figure 22-3 shows the example network of the hotline service on the E&M trunk interface.

NOTE


Figure 22-3 Example network of the hotline service on the E&M trunk interface

UA5000

0/130/7

Telephone A

PCM-MUX/PBX

Telephone B

P

VM

P

VM

A

T

I

A

T

IBB

Data Plan

Table 22-2 provides the data plan for configuring the hotline service on the E&M trunk service.

Table 22-2 Data plan for configuring the hotline service on the E&M trunk service


ATI board Shelf ID/slot ID/port ID 0/7, 0/13 -

E&M interface Subscriber line mode 4-wire 4-wire

Rx gain -10 dB -



272


Tx gain +5 dB -

E&M working mode 1E1M -

SPC Application type em-signal EM signallingapplication

SPC type private Private line

Start shelf ID/slot ID/port ID 0/7/0 -

End shelf ID/slot ID/port ID 0/13/0 -

Total number of channels 1 -

Configuration FlowchartFigure 22-4 shows the flowchart for configuring the ATI service.

Figure 22-4 Flowchart for configuring the ATI service

Start

Add ATI boards

Confirm ATI boards

Configure the ATI portattributes

Set up an SPC

QoS qualified?

End

Modify the ATI portattributes

Yes

No

Procedure

Step 1 Add ATI boards.



273

huawei(config)#board add 0/7 ati huawei(config)#board add 0/13 ati

Step 2 Confirm the ATI boards.huawei(config)#board confirm 0/7 huawei(config)#board confirm 0/13

Step 3 Configure the attributes of the ATI port to which subscriber A is connected.huawei(config)#atihuawei(config-ati)#port attribute set 0/7/0 recvgain 20 transgain 24 userline 4Wire workmode 1E1M

Step 4 Configure the attributes of the ATI port to which subscriber B is connected.huawei(config-ati)#port attribute set 0/13/0 recvgain 20 transgain 24 userline 4Wire workmode 1E1M

Step 5 Set up an SPChuawei(config)#spc add private start 0/7/0/0 end 0/13/0/0 1 em-signal

----End

Resultl After subscriber A takes the phone off the hook, subscriber B hears the ringing tone and

subscriber A hears the ring back tone.l After subscriber B takes the phone off the hook, subscriber A and subscriber B can talk

with each other over the phone.l After one subscriber disconnects the call, the other subscriber hears the busy tone.l When the service bearer channel between the two subscribers becomes faulty, the

subscriber who takes the phone off the hook hears the busy tone.



274

23 Configuring the CDI Service

About This Chapter

Configuring the CDI service includes the function application of the CDI board and the processfor configuring the CDI service through the CDI board on the UA5000.

23.1 Introduction to the CDI ServiceThe UA5000 supports the transparent transmission between the analog subscriber ports throughthe CDI board.

23.2 Configuration Example of the Z Interface Extension ServiceThis topic describes how to configure the CDI board and ASL board on the UA5000, and set upan SPC between the CDI board and the ASL board. The SPC type is Z-extension. Thus, thesubscriber connected to the ASL board can be connected to a port on the CDI board through theSPC.

23.3 Configuration Example of the PBX-Bothway ServiceThis topic describes how to configure the PBX-Bothway service to set up a private SPC betweenthe ports on two CDI boards. Thus, the bothway service of the PBX-1 and PBX-2 subscribersis implemented.

UA5000 Universal Access UnitConfiguration Guide-PVM CLI 23 Configuring the CDI Service


275

23.1 Introduction to the CDI ServiceThe UA5000 supports the transparent transmission between the analog subscriber ports throughthe CDI board.

Service Description

The CDI board implements the transparent extension of the POTS port (Z interface) of theconnected LE between the CDI port and the ASL port through the following ways:

l Digital/Analog conversion

l Transparent transmission

l Host signaling processing

Z interface is an analog phone interface. In the access network, Z interface extension service isapplicable to the following two scenarios:

l The V5 interface is not enabled for interconnection with the LE in the network. There is acertain market demand for the analog phone service.

l The analog phone of one LE is connected to another LE through the Z interface extensionwithout changing the charging mode. This can save the toll charge.

Service Specificationsl The CDI board is connected to the analog line. The CDI port functions as an analog phone.

l The CDI board supports the following services:

– Z interface extension

– PBX-bothway

– E1-direct dialing in (E1-DDI)

l The Rx gain of the CDI board ranges from -22.5 dB to -3 dB. The Tx gain ranges from -8.5dB to +13 dB. The adjustment step is 0.5 dB.

23.2 Configuration Example of the Z Interface ExtensionService

This topic describes how to configure the CDI board and ASL board on the UA5000, and set upan SPC between the CDI board and the ASL board. The SPC type is Z-extension. Thus, thesubscriber connected to the ASL board can be connected to a port on the CDI board through theSPC.

Networking

The CDI board is connected to subscriber B of the PBX through the Z interface. Subscriber Ais connected to a port on the CDI board through a private SPC. In this way, the Z interfaceextension function is realized. Figure 23-1 shows the example network of the Z interfaceextension.



276

Figure 23-1 Example network of the Z interface extension

UA5000

0/110/8

Phone B

Z interface

PBX

Phone CPhone A

LE

PVM

B

PVM

B

C

D

I

A

S

L

A

S

L

Data Plan

Table 23-1 provides the data plan for configuring the Z interface extension.

Table 23-1 Data plan for configuring the Z interface extension


CDI board Shelf ID/slot ID 0/8 -

ASL board Shelf ID/slot ID 0/11 -

CDI port Shelf ID/slot ID/portID

0/8/0 -

Rx gain -7 dB -

Tx gain -5 dB -

Dial-up mode DTMF Dual tone

Supports delayeddialing

no Not supported

Working mode DDI -

Ringing Normal -

SPC Application type Z-extension Z interface extension

SPC type private Only private line canbe supported



277



0/8/0/0 -


0/11/0/0 -


1 Only one B channelcan be occupied.

Context

The CDI port supports only the private SPC.


Figure 23-2 shows the flowchart for configuring the Z interface extension.

Figure 23-2 Flowchart for configuring the Z interface extension

Start

Add CDI boards

Confirm CDI boards


Set up an SPC

QoS qualified?

End

Modify the attributesof the CDI port

Yes

No

Procedure

Step 1 Add a CDI board and an ASL board.



278

huawei(config)#board add 0/8 cdi huawei(config)#board add 0/11 asl

Step 2 Confirm the CDI board and the ASL board.huawei(config)#board confirm 0/8 huawei(config)#board confirm 0/11

Step 3 Modify the attributes of the CDI port.huawei(config)#cdihuawei(config-cdi)#port attribute set 0/8/0 recvgain 31 transgain 7 dialmode DTMFdelaydial no workmode DDI ringmode 4huawei(config-cdi)#quit

Step 4 Set up an SPChuawei(config)#spc add private start 0/8/0/0 end 0/11/0/0 1 z-extension

----End

ResultWhen subscriber C dials the number of subscriber A, the phone of subscriber B should ring.That is, the phone of subscriber B functions as the phone of subscriber A.

23.3 Configuration Example of the PBX-Bothway ServiceThis topic describes how to configure the PBX-Bothway service to set up a private SPC betweenthe ports on two CDI boards. Thus, the bothway service of the PBX-1 and PBX-2 subscribersis implemented.

NetworkingOne CDI board (in slot 0/8) is connected to PBX-1 through a twisted pair (Z interface). Theother CDI board (in slot 0/11) is connected to PBX-2 through a twisted pair (Z interface). Figure23-3 shows the example network for configuring the PBX-bothway service.

NOTE


Figure 23-3 Example network for configuring the PBX-bothway service

UA5000

0/110/8

PBX-1

Z interface Z interface

PBX-2

P

VM

B

P

VM

B

C

D

I

A

S

L

A

S

L

A

S

L

C

D

I



279

Data PlanTable 23-2 provides the data plan for configuring the PBX-bothway service.

Table 23-2 Data plan for configuring the PBX-bothway service


CDI board Shelf ID/slot ID 0/8, 0/11 -

SPC Application type PBX-bothway PBX-bothwayconnection

SPC type private Private line type


0/8/0/0 -

End Shelf ID/slot ID/port ID/channel ID

0/11/0/0 -


1 Only one B channelis occupied.

Configuration FlowchartFigure 23-4 shows the flowchart for configuring the CDI service.

Figure 23-4 Flowchart for configuring the CDI service

Start

Add CDI boards

Confirm CDI boards


Set up an SPC

QoS qualified?

End

Modify the attributesof the CDI port

Yes

No



280

Procedure

Step 1 Add a CDI board.huawei(config)#board add 0/8 cdihuawei(config)#board add 0/11 cdi

Step 2 Confirm the CDI board.huawei(config)#board confirm 0/8huawei(config)#board confirm 0/11

Step 3 Set up an SPC.huawei(config)#spc add private start 0/8/0/0 end 0/11/0/0 1 PBX-bothway

Step 4 If the service quality cannot meet the requirement, you need to change port attributes.

----End

ResultA private SPC is set up between the ports on the two CDI boards. PBXs should be able to initiatecalls between each other. In this way, the PBX-bothway service of the PBX-1 and PBX-2subscribers is implemented. In addition, the service quality can meet the requirement.



281

24 Configuring the EPON UpstreamTransmission

About This Chapter

This topic describes the Ethernet passive optical network (EPON) technology and how toconfigure the EPON upstream transmission on the UA5000 MiniMSAN.

24.1 Introduction to the EPON Upstream TransmissionEPON can transmit the converged data, video, and voice over the optical fiber.

24.2 Configuration Example of the EPON Upstream TransmissionThis topic describes how to implement the EPON upstream transmission of the UA5000MiniMSAN by configuring the EP1A board on the UA5000 MiniMSAN. Thus, the UA5000MiniMSAN and OLT form an EPON.

24.3 Querying the Attributes of the Ports on the EP1A BoardThe EP1A provides one EPON uplink port and one FE/GE adaptive electrical port. By queryingthe attributes of the ports on the EP1A board, you can obtain the type, adaptive mode, rate,working mode, activation status, and current status of each port on the EP1A board.

24.4 Querying the Statistics of the Ports on the EP1A BoardBy querying the statistics of the ports on the EP1A board, you can obtain the transmitted frames,received frames, and error frames. Thus, this helps you to detect and locate the faults of the portson the EP1A board in time.

UA5000 Universal Access UnitConfiguration Guide-PVM CLI 24 Configuring the EPON Upstream Transmission


282

24.1 Introduction to the EPON Upstream TransmissionEPON can transmit the converged data, video, and voice over the optical fiber.

Service DescriptionPassive optical network (PON) is a point-to-multipoint (P2MP) network, consisting of the opticalline terminal (OLT), optical network unit (ONU), and passive optical splitter (POS).

EPON, a type of the PON technology, has the common features, such as the high bandwidth,wide coverage, flexible networking, and passive network nodes. EPON overcomes thedisadvantages of the Ethernet which lacks operations, administration, and maintenance (OAM)measures. EPON can improve the network bandwidth and performance, and save themaintenance cost.

The UA5000 MiniMSAN supports the EPON upstream transmission. The UA5000MiniMSAN that works as an ONU can use the wide coverage, flexible networking, and lowmaintenance cost provided by the EPON network. The UA5000 MiniMSAN works with theOLT to provide high-bandwidth access for subscribers. At the same time, it helps increase thedensity of subscribers at the OLT end.

Service SpecificationsThe UA5000 MiniMSAN provides the EPON upstream transmission through the EP1A board.The detailed specifications are as follows:

l Supports one EPON uplink port with the upstream and downstream rates 1.25 Gbit/s.l Supports the transmission distance of a maximum of 20 km.

24.2 Configuration Example of the EPON UpstreamTransmission

This topic describes how to implement the EPON upstream transmission of the UA5000MiniMSAN by configuring the EP1A board on the UA5000 MiniMSAN. Thus, the UA5000MiniMSAN and OLT form an EPON.

Prerequisitel The network devices and the lines must be in the normal state.l When the PVM board adopts the independent upstream transmission mode, the ETH1 port

on the PVM board and the FE port on the EP1A board must be connected through a networkcable.

NetworkingFigure 24-1 shows the example network of the EPON upstream transmission service.

Connect the EPON port on the EP1A board in slot 0/3 of the UA5000 MiniMSAN to the splitterthrough an optical fiber. Thus, the connection between the UA5000 MiniMSAN and OLT is setup.



283

Figure 24-1 Example network of the EPON upstream transmission service

A32

A32

IPM

PVM

EP1A

EPON

Router

OLT

Opticalspllitter

PBX

UA5000 MiniMSAN_BUA5000 MiniMSAN_A

EPON

EPON

PhoneISDN BRAPhone

ISDN BRAPhone

HABM shelf

0/3 0/7

Phone

Opticalspllitter

PhonePhone

NT1

Data Plan

Table 24-1 provides the data plan for configuring the EPON upstream transmission service.

NOTE

The following table provides only the data plan of the VoIP service of the EP1A board. For the data plansof services such as P2P ISDN BRA and P2MP ISDN BRA, see "12.2 Configuration Example of the P2PISDN BRA Service" and "12.3 Configuration Example of the P2MP ISDN BRA Service" respectively.

Table 24-1 Data plan for configuring the EPON upstream transmission service

Category Item Data

UA5000MiniMSAN_A

The EP1A board: provides the EPON port tointerconnect to the upper-layer OLT

Shelf ID/Slot ID: 0/3


code text

protocol H.248



284

Category Item Data

tranfer UDP




The parameter valuemust be the same as theH.248 version on theMGC.

IP address The signaling IP address of MG 0 of theUA5000

10.10.10.2/24

The media IP address of MG 0 of the UA5000 10.10.10.4/24

The default gateway of MG 0 of the UA5000 10.10.10.1/24


Telephone numberconfiguration

Phone1–Phone32 Shelf ID/Slot ID: 0/7Telephone number:12340001–12340032

terminal id 0–31. Terminals 0–31correspond withtelephone numbers12340001–12340032.

ToS strategy IP priority and ToS priority The default systemvalue

Voice enhancingfunction

The function of automatic gain adjustment ofthe PSTN port

Supported

The parameter value of automatic gainadjustment of the PSTN port

15 (-24 dbm0)

The function of the spectral noise suppression(SNS) of the PSTN port

Supported

The parameter value of the SNS of the PSTNport

20 (20 dB)

Contextl You need to add the EP1A board if the UA5000 MiniMSAN needs the EPON upstream

transmission. After the EP1A board is added successfully, the UA5000 MiniMSAN canimplement the EPON upstream transmission through the EPON uplink port on the EP1Aboard.



285

l When the UA5000 MiniMSAN implements the upstream transmission through the EP1Aboard, the UA5000 MiniMSAN supports only the IP services, such as VoIP, FoIP, MoIP,and ISDN.

l This document describes only the configuration on the UA5000 MiniMSAN. For theconfiguration on the OLT, see the related guide. For example, if the OLT is the MA5680Tof Huawei, see the MA5680T Configuration Guide.

l The configurations on the UA5000 MiniMSAN_B and UA5000 MiniMSAN_A are thesame. This topic considers the configuration on the UA5000 MiniMSAN_A as an example.


Figure 24-2 shows the flowchart for configuring the EPON upstream transmission service.

Figure 24-2 Flowchart for configuring the EPON upstream transmission service

Start

Add an EP1A board

Configure theservice

Confirm the EP1Aboard

End

Save the data

Procedure

Step 1 Add an EP1A board.

You can add the EP1A board offline on the CLI, and then insert the EP1A board. You can alsoinsert the EP1A board into the shelf, and then add the EP1A board on the CLI.

huawei(config)#board add 0/3 h601ep1a

Step 2 Confirm the EP1A board.huawei(config)#board confirm 0/3

After the EP1A board is added successfully, the UA5000 MiniMSAN can implement the EPONupstream transmission through the EPON uplink port on the EP1A board.

Step 3 Configure the service.



286

NOTE

l For the configuration of the ISDN service, see "12 Configuring the ISDN Service."

l For the configuration of the FoIP and MoIP services, see "13 Configuring the FoIP Service" and "14Configuring the MoIP Service."

The slot positions for the PVM and service boards on the UA5000 MiniMSAN are different from the slotpositions described in the topics for reference. Configure the UA5000 MiniMSAN according to theparameters that are actually used.

The following configuration procedure considers configuring the VoIP service as an example.

1. Set the IP address of the service network port.huawei(config)#interface ethhuawei(interface-eth)#ip modify 10.10.10.10 ip_address 10.10.10.2 gateway10.10.10.1 submask 255.255.255.0/When the device is configured with the IP address of the service network port, whereas the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway of the current service network port onthe device are inconsistent with the requirement of the actual data plan, run this command to modify the configuration.//If no IP address is added to the current IP address pool of the device, run the ip address command to add the media IP address and signaling IP address to the IP address pool./huawei(interface-eth)#ip address 10.10.10.2 255.255.255.0 10.10.10.1 huawei(interface-eth)#ip address 10.10.10.4 255.255.255.0 10.10.10.1 huawei(interface-eth)#display ip address Eth: IPAddress ..........: 10.10.10.2 SubMask.............: 255.255.255.0 GateWay.............: 10.10.10.1 MacIndex............: 0 MacAddress..........: 00-E0-FC-44-16-57 VlanID .............: --


2. Configure the QoS IP strategy.huawei(interface-eth)#quithuawei(config)#qos ip 10.10.10.2 strategy none

3. Configure the working mode of the PVM board to the independent networking mode.

In the independent networking mode, the PVM control board provides servicesindependently.

huawei(config)#working mode alone

4. Add an A32 service board and confirm the board.huawei(config)#board add 0/7 a32huawei(config)#board confirm 0/7huawei(config)#display board 0 ------------------------------------------------------------------------- SlotID BoardName Status Sub0 Sub1 Online/Offline ------------------------------------------------------------------------- 0 PWX2 Normal 1 2 H601PVMB Active_normal H602ETCA H602ETCM 3 H601EP1A Normal 4 5 6 7 A32 Normal



287

8 -------------------------------------------------------------------------

5. Configure the attributes of the MG interface.huawei(config)#interface h248 0 Are you sure to add MG interface? (y/n)[n]:y huawei(config-if-h248-0)#if-h248 attribute mgip 10.10.10.2 mgport 2944code text transfer udp domainName UA5000.com mgcip_1 10.10.20.1 mgcport_1 2944 mg-media-ip 10.10.10.4 start-negotiate-version 2huawei(config-if-h248-0)#display if-h248 attribute --------------------------------------------------------------------- MGID 0 MG Description - MG DomainName UA5000.com Protocol H248 H248version Negotiated Originally 2 Profile Negotiation Para disable Profile 0:NoProfile("")



6. Set the H.248 protocol parameter. (Enable the three-way handshake signal switch of the H.248 protocol stack.)huawei(config-if-h248-0)#h248stack tr responseackctrl truehuawei(config-if-h248-0)#display h248stack tr --------------------------------------------------------------------- three way handshake : true longtimer(units: ms) : 30000 provtimer(units: ms) : 8000 retransfailoption : max retransfer times maxretranstimes : 7 retransmode : auto maxretranstimerval(units: ms) : 4000 minretranstimerval(units: ms) : 1000 ---------------------------------------------------------------------

7. Reset the MG interface.huawei(config-if-h248-0)#reset coldstart Are you sure to reset MG interface?(y/n)[n]:yhuawei(config-if-h248-0)# Reset MG interface 0 success!

8. Query whether the MG interface is normal.huawei(config-if-h248-0)#quithuawei(config)#display if-h248 all -------------------------------------------------------------------------MGID TransMode State MgPort MGIP/DomainName MgcPort MGCIP/DomainName-------------------------------------------------------------------------0 UDP Normal 2944 10.10.10. 2 2944 10.10.20.1-------------------------------------------------------------------------

9. Configure subscriber telephone numbers.



288

huawei(config)#esl userhuawei(config-esl-user)#mgpstnuser batadd 0/7/0 0/7/31 0 terminalid 0telno 12340001huawei(config-esl-user)#display mgpstnuser 0/7 -------------------------------------------------------- Frame/Slot/Port MGID TelNo Priority TID -------------------------------------------------------- 0 / 7 / 0 0 12340001 Cat3 A0 0 / 7 / 1 0 12340002 Cat3 A1 0 / 7 / 2 0 12340003 Cat3 A2 0 / 7 / 3 0 12340004 Cat3 A3 0 / 7 / 4 0 12340005 Cat3 A4 0 / 7 / 5 0 12340006 Cat3 A5 0 / 7 / 6 0 12340007 Cat3 A6 0 / 7 / 7 0 12340008 Cat3 A7 0 / 7 / 8 0 12340009 Cat3 A8 0 / 7 / 9 0 12340010 Cat3 A9 0 / 7 / 10 0 12340011 Cat3 A10 0 / 7 / 11 0 12340012 Cat3 A11 0 / 7 / 12 0 12340013 Cat3 A12 0 / 7 / 13 0 12340014 Cat3 A13 0 / 7 / 14 0 12340015 Cat3 A14 0 / 7 / 15 0 12340016 Cat3 A15 0 / 7 / 16 0 12340017 Cat3 A16 0 / 7 / 17 0 12340018 Cat3 A17 0 / 7 / 18 0 12340019 Cat3 A18 0 / 7 / 19 0 12340020 Cat3 A19 0 / 7 / 20 0 12340021 Cat3 A20 0 / 7 / 21 0 12340022 Cat3 A21 0 / 7 / 22 0 12340023 Cat3 A22 0 / 7 / 23 0 12340024 Cat3 A23 0 / 7 / 24 0 12340025 Cat3 A24 0 / 7 / 25 0 12340026 Cat3 A25 0 / 7 / 26 0 12340027 Cat3 A26 0 / 7 / 27 0 12340028 Cat3 A27 0 / 7 / 28 0 12340029 Cat3 A28 0 / 7 / 29 0 12340030 Cat3 A29 0 / 7 / 30 0 12340031 Cat3 A30 0 / 7 / 31 0 12340032 Cat3 A31 -------------------------------------------------------- Command processing completed. 32 port(s) are configured MG PSTN user data

10. Enable the voice enhancing function.huawei(config-esl-user)#pstnport vqe batset 0/7/0 0/7/31 agc enable agc-Level 15 sns enable sns-Level 20 Command processing completed. 32 user data modified successfullyhuawei(config-esl-user)#display pstnport vqe 0/7 ------------------------------------------------------------------------- Frame/Slot/Port AGC enable AGC value (dbm0) SNS enable SNS value(db) ------------------------------------------------------------------------- 0 / 7 / 0 enable -24 enable 20 0 / 7 / 1 enable -24 enable 20 0 / 7 / 2 enable -24 enable 20 0 / 7 / 3 enable -24 enable 20 0 / 7 / 4 enable -24 enable 20 0 / 7 / 5 enable -24 enable 20 0 / 7 / 6 enable -24 enable 20 0 / 7 / 7 enable -24 enable 20 0 / 7 / 8 enable -24 enable 20 0 / 7 / 9 enable -24 enable 20 0 / 7 / 10 enable -24 enable 20 0 / 7 / 11 enable -24 enable 20 0 / 7 / 12 enable -24 enable 20 0 / 7 / 13 enable -24 enable 20 0 / 7 / 14 enable -24 enable 20 0 / 7 / 15 enable -24 enable 20 0 / 7 / 16 enable -24 enable 20 0 / 7 / 17 enable -24 enable 20 0 / 7 / 18 enable -24 enable 20 0 / 7 / 19 enable -24 enable 20



289

---- More ( Press 'Q' to break ) ----huawei(config-esl-user)#quit


----End

ResultAfter the configuration, the UA5000 MiniMSAN can implement the following functions:

l The UA5000 MiniMSAN and OLT can exchange data in the EPON mode.l The subscribers configured on the UA5000 MiniMSAN service boards can call each other.

24.3 Querying the Attributes of the Ports on the EP1A BoardThe EP1A provides one EPON uplink port and one FE/GE adaptive electrical port. By queryingthe attributes of the ports on the EP1A board, you can obtain the type, adaptive mode, rate,working mode, activation status, and current status of each port on the EP1A board.

ContextWhen you query the attributes of the ports on the EP1A board, the system displays "-" for thestatus of the item that the port does not support.

l The PON port does not support the port impedance, MDI, port rate, and port mode. Thesystem displays "-" for the status of these items.

l The GE/FE adaptive electrical port does not support the port impedance. The systemdisplays "-" for the status of this item.

PrecautionThe EP1A board supports two ports: the EPON uplink port and FE/GE adaptive electrical port.The EPON uplink port corresponds to the logical number 0, and the FE/GE adaptive electricalport corresponds to the logical number 1. When you query the attributes of the ports on the EP1Aboard and enter a logical number that is greater than 1, the system prompts an error.

Procedure

Step 1 Run the interface epon command to enter the EPON mode.

Step 2 Run the display port state command to query the attributes of the ports on the EP1A board.

----End

ExampleTo query the attributes of the ports on the EP1A board of the UA5000 MiniMSAN, do as follows:

huawei(config)#interface epon 0/3huawei(config-if-epon-0/3)#display port state all ----------------------------------------------------------------------- Port PortType Impedance MDI Speed(Mbps) Duplex Active Link -----------------------------------------------------------------------



290

0 EPON - - - - ACTIVE UP 1 GE ELC - AUTO 100 FULL ACTIVE UP -----------------------------------------------------------------------

24.4 Querying the Statistics of the Ports on the EP1A BoardBy querying the statistics of the ports on the EP1A board, you can obtain the transmitted frames,received frames, and error frames. Thus, this helps you to detect and locate the faults of the portson the EP1A board in time.

Context

The EP1A board supports two ports: the EPON uplink port and FE/GE adaptive electrical port.

If the result of the queried statistical item is 0x00, it indicates that the port does not receiveframes of this type, or the port does not carry any traffic currently.

Procedure

Step 1 Run the interface epon command to enter the EPON mode.

Step 2 Run the display port statistic command to query the statistics of the EPON port.

----End

Example

To query the statistics of the port on the EP1A board of the UA5000 MiniMSAN, do as follows:

huawei(config)#interface epon 0/3huawei(config-if-epon-0/3)#display port statistic all Number of transmitted frames of PON port =0x0cef7d90 Number of received frames of PON port =0x0b913fed Number of received FEC error frames of PON port =0x00 Number of received HEC error frames of PON port =0x00 Number of discard frames of PON port in send direction =0x00 Number of discard frames of UNI port in send direction =0x00 Number of transmitted frames of UNI port =0x039 Number of received frames of UNI port =0x01228f6d Number of received error frames of UNI port =0x00

Related Operation

Table 24-2 lists the related operation for querying the statistics about the port on the EP1Aboard.

Table 24-2 Related operation for querying the statistics about the port on the EP1A board


Clear the statistics of the ports on the EP1Aboard

reset port statistic



291

25 Configuring the GPON UpstreamTransmission

About This Chapter

This topic describes the gigabit-capable passive optical network (GPON) technology anddescribes how to configure the GPON upstream transmission on the UA5000 MiniMSAN.

25.1 Introduction to the GPON Upstream TransmissionGPON is a point-to-multipoint (P2MP) broadband optical transmission system. It can transmitdata of any type.

25.2 Configuration Example of the GPON Upstream TransmissionThis topic describes how to implement the GPON upstream transmission of the UA5000MiniMSAN by configuring the GP1A board on the UA5000 MiniMSAN. Thus, the UA5000MiniMSAN and OLT form a GPON.

25.3 Querying the Attributes of the Ports on the GP1A BoardThe GP1A board provides one GPON uplink port, one FE/GE auto-sensing electrical port, one100M electrical port, two 100M optical ports, and four E1 ports. By querying the attributes ofthe port on the GP1A board, you can learn the type, impedance, auto-sensing mode, rate, workingmode, activation status, and current status of each port on the GP1A board.

25.4 Querying the Statistics of the Port on the GP1A BoardBy querying the statistics of the port on the GP1A board, you can learn the information abouteach port on the board. This helps you to detect and locate the faults of the port on the GP1Aboard in time.

UA5000 Universal Access UnitConfiguration Guide-PVM CLI 25 Configuring the GPON Upstream Transmission


292

25.1 Introduction to the GPON Upstream TransmissionGPON is a point-to-multipoint (P2MP) broadband optical transmission system. It can transmitdata of any type.

Service DescriptionPassive optical network (PON) is a P2MP network, consisting of the optical line terminal (OLT),optical network unit (ONU), and passive optical splitter (POS).

GPON is defined in the ITU-T Recommendations G.984.x. It supports downstream rates of 1.2Gbit/s and 2.4 Gbit/s, and upstream rates of 155 Mbit/s, 622 Mbit/s, 1.2 Gbit/s, and 2.4 Gbit/s.

To meet the requirements of the users for the multiple networking modes, the UA5000MiniMSAN provides the GPON uplink port to form a GPON network with the OLT. TheUA5000 MiniMSAN that works as an ONU can use the wide coverage, flexible networking,and low maintenance cost provided by the GPON network. The UA5000 MiniMSAN workswith the OLT to provide high-bandwidth access for subscribers. At the same time, it helpsincrease the density of subscribers at the OLT end.

For details about the GPON upstream transmission, see "GPON Upstream Transmission" in"Feature Description".

Service SpecificationsThe UA5000 MiniMSAN provides the GPON upstream transmission through the GP1A board.The detailed specifications are as follows:

l The UA5000 MiniMSAN supports one GPON uplink port with a downstream rate of 2.488Gbit/s and an upstream rate of 1.244 Gbit/s.

l The UA5000 MiniMSAN supports eight transmission containers (T-CONTs) with 32 GEMports.

l The OLT manages and configures the services on the PON board of the UA5000MiniMSAN through the optical network termination management and control interface(OMCI). That is, the OLT manages the UA5000 MiniMSAN as an ONT. The OLT doesnot manage the existing services of the UA5000.

25.2 Configuration Example of the GPON UpstreamTransmission

This topic describes how to implement the GPON upstream transmission of the UA5000MiniMSAN by configuring the GP1A board on the UA5000 MiniMSAN. Thus, the UA5000MiniMSAN and OLT form a GPON.

Prerequisitel The network devices and the lines must be in the normal state.l When the PVM board adopts the independent upstream transmission mode, the ETH1 port

on the PVM board and the FE port on the GP1A board must be connected through a networkcable.



293

NetworkingFigure 25-1 shows the example network of the GPON upstream transmission service.

Use the optical fiber to connect the GPON port on the GP1A board in slot 0/3 of the UA5000MiniMSAN to the optical splitter to set up the connection with the OLT.

Figure 25-1 Example network of the GPON upstream transmission service

A32

A32

IPM

PVM

GP1A

GPON

OLT

OpticalSplitter

PBX

UA5000MiniMSAN_B

UA5000MiniMSAN_A

GPON

GPON

OpticalSplitter

PhoneISDN BRAPhone

ISDN BRAPhone

HABM Shelf

0/3 0/7

Phone

MGC

DDN

PhonePhone

NT1

Data PlanTable 25-1 provides the data plan for configuring the GPON upstream transmission service.

NOTE

The following table provides only the data plan of the VoIP service. For the data plans of other servicessuch as the P2P ISDN BRA and P2MP ISDN BRA, see "12.2 Configuration Example of the P2P ISDNBRA Service" and "12.3 Configuration Example of the P2MP ISDN BRA Service" respectively.

In the case of the HABM shelf, the GP1A board can be inserted in slot 3. In the case of other high-densityshelves, the GP1A board can be inserted in slot 6.



294

Table 25-1 Data plan for configuring the GPON upstream transmission service

Category Item Data

UA5000MiniMSAN_A

The GP1A board: provides the GPON port tointerconnect with the upper-layer OLT

Shelf ID/Slot ID: 0/3


code text

protocol H.248

tranfer UDP




The parameter valuemust be the same as theH.248 version on theMGC.

IP Address The signaling IP address of MG 0 of theUA5000

10.10.10.2/24

The media IP address of MG 0 of the UA5000 10.10.10.4/24

The default gateway of MG 0 of the UA5000 10.10.10.1/24


Telephone numberconfiguration

Phone1-Phone32 Shelf ID/Slot ID: 0/7Telephone number:12340001-12340032

terminal id 0-31. Terminals 0-31correspond withtelephone numbers12340001-12340032

ToS strategy IP priority and ToS priority The default systemvalue

Voice enhancingfunction

The function of automatic gain adjustment ofthe PSTN port

Supported

The value of automatic gain adjustment of thePSTN port

15 (-24 dbm0)

The SNS function of the PSTN port Supported

The SNS value of the PSTN port 20 (20 db)



295

Contextl You need to add the GP1A board if the UA5000 MiniMSAN needs the GPON upstream

transmission. After the GP1A board is added successfully, the UA5000 MiniMSAN canimplement the GPON upstream transmission through the GPON uplink port on the GP1Aboard.

l When the UA5000 MiniMSAN implements the upstream transmission through the GP1Aboard, it supports not only the IP services, such as VoIP, FoIP, MoIP, and ISDN, but alsothe POTS such as V5.

l This document describes only the configuration on the UA5000 MiniMSAN. For theconfiguration on the OLT, see the related guide. For example, if the OLT is the MA5680Tof Huawei, see the MA5680T Configuration Guide.

l The configurations on the UA5000 MiniMSAN_B and UA5000 MiniMSAN_A are thesame. This topic considers the configuration on the UA5000 MiniMSAN_A as an example.

l The ONT (that is, the UA5000 MiniMSAN) must register on the OLT before theconfiguration.

Configuration FlowchartFigure 25-2 shows the flowchart for configuring the GPON upstream transmission service.

Figure 25-2 Flowchart for configuring the GPON upstream transmission service

ProcedureStep 1 Add a GP1A board.

You can add the GP1A board offline on the CLI, and then insert the GP1A board. You can alsoinsert the GP1A board into the shelf, and then add the GP1A board on the CLI.



296

huawei(config)#board add 0/3 h601gp1a

Step 2 Confirm the GP1A board.huawei(config)#board confirm 0/3

After the GP1A board is added successfully, the UA5000 MiniMSAN can implement the GPONupstream transmission through the GPON uplink port on the GP1A board.

Step 3 Configure the service.

NOTE

l For the configuration of the ISDN service, see "12 Configuring the ISDN Service."

l For the configurations of the FoIP and MoIP services, see "13 Configuring the FoIP Service" and"14 Configuring the MoIP Service."

The slot positions for the PVM and service boards on the UA5000 MiniMSAN are different from the slotpositions described in the topics for reference. Configure the UA5000 MiniMSAN according to theparameters that are actually used.

The following configuration procedure considers configuring the VoIP service as an example.

1. Set the IP address of service network port.huawei(config)#interface ethhuawei(interface-eth)#ip modify 10.10.10.10 ip_address 10.10.10.2 gateway10.10.10.1 submask 255.255.255.0/When the device is configured with the IP address of the service network port, whereas the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway are inconsistent with the requirement of the actual data plan, run this command to modify the configuration.//If no IP address is added to the current IP address pool of the device, run the ip address command to add the media IP address and signaling IP address to the IP address pool./huawei(interface-eth)#ip address 10.10.10.2 255.255.255.0 10.10.10.1 huawei(interface-eth)#ip address 10.10.10.4 255.255.255.0 10.10.10.1 huawei(interface-eth)#display ip address Eth: IPAddress ..........: 10.10.10.2 SubMask.............: 255.255.255.0 GateWay.............: 10.10.10.1 MacIndex............: 0 MacAddress..........: 00-E0-FC-44-16-57 VlanID .............: --


2. Configure the QoS IP strategy.huawei(interface-eth)#quithuawei(config)#qos ip 10.10.10.2 strategy nonehuawei(config)#qos ip 10.10.10.2 strategy tos

3. Configure the working mode of the PVM board as alone.

In this independent networking mode, the PVM control board provides servicesindependently.

huawei(config)#working mode alone4. Add an A32 service board, and confirm the board.

huawei(config)#board add 0/7 a32huawei(config)#board confirm 0/7huawei(config)#display board 0 ------------------------------------------------------------------------- SlotID BoardName Status Sub0 Sub1 Online/Offline



297

------------------------------------------------------------------------- 0 PWX2 Normal 1 2 H601PVMB Active_normal H602ETCA H602ETCM 3 H601GP1A Normal 4 5 6 7 A32 Normal 8 -------------------------------------------------------------------------

5. Configure the attributes of the MG interface.huawei(config)#interface h248 0 Are you sure to add MG interface? (y/n)[n]:yhuawei(config-if-h248-0)#if-h248 attribute mgip 10.10.10.2 mgport 2944code text transfer udp domainName UA5000.com mgcip_1 10.10.20.1mgcport_1 2944 mg-media-ip 10.10.10.4 start-negotiate-version 2huawei(config-if-h248-0)#display if-h248 attribute --------------------------------------------------------------------- MGID 0 MG Description - MG DomainName UA5000.com Protocol H248 H248version Negotiated Originally 2 Profile Negotiation Para disable Profile 0:NoProfile("")



6. Set the H.248 protocol parameter. (Enable the three-way handshake signal switch of the H.248 protocol stack.)huawei(config-if-h248-0)#h248stack tr responseackctrl truehuawei(config-if-h248-0)#display h248stack tr --------------------------------------------------------------------- three way handshake : true longtimer(units: ms) : 30000 provtimer(units: ms) : 8000 retransfailoption : max retransfer times maxretranstimes : 7 retransmode : auto maxretranstimerval(units: ms) : 4000 minretranstimerval(units: ms) : 1000 ---------------------------------------------------------------------

7. Reset the MG interface.huawei(config-if-h248-0)#reset coldstart Are you sure to reset MG interface?(y/n)[n]:yhuawei(config-if-h248-0)# Reset MG interface 0 success!

8. Query whether the MG interface is normal.



298

huawei(config-if-h248-0)#quithuawei(config)#display if-h248 all -------------------------------------------------------------------------MGID TransMode State MgPort MGIP/DomainName MgcPort MGCIP/DomainName-------------------------------------------------------------------------0 UDP Normal 2944 10.10.10. 2 2944 10.10.20.1-------------------------------------------------------------------------

9. Configure the subscriber telephone numbers.huawei(config)#esl userhuawei(config-esl-user)#mgpstnuser batadd 0/7/0 0/7/31 0 terminalid 0telno 12340001huawei(config-esl-user)#display mgpstnuser 0/7 -------------------------------------------------------- Frame/Slot/Port MGID TelNo Priority TID -------------------------------------------------------- 0 / 7 / 0 0 12340001 Cat3 A0 0 / 7 / 1 0 12340002 Cat3 A1 0 / 7 / 2 0 12340003 Cat3 A2 0 / 7 / 3 0 12340004 Cat3 A3 0 / 7 / 4 0 12340005 Cat3 A4 0 / 7 / 5 0 12340006 Cat3 A5 0 / 7 / 6 0 12340007 Cat3 A6 0 / 7 / 7 0 12340008 Cat3 A7 0 / 7 / 8 0 12340009 Cat3 A8 0 / 7 / 9 0 12340010 Cat3 A9 0 / 7 / 10 0 12340011 Cat3 A10 0 / 7 / 11 0 12340012 Cat3 A11 0 / 7 / 12 0 12340013 Cat3 A12 0 / 7 / 13 0 12340014 Cat3 A13 0 / 7 / 14 0 12340015 Cat3 A14 0 / 7 / 15 0 12340016 Cat3 A15 0 / 7 / 16 0 12340017 Cat3 A16 0 / 7 / 17 0 12340018 Cat3 A17 0 / 7 / 18 0 12340019 Cat3 A18 0 / 7 / 19 0 12340020 Cat3 A19 0 / 7 / 20 0 12340021 Cat3 A20 0 / 7 / 21 0 12340022 Cat3 A21 0 / 7 / 22 0 12340023 Cat3 A22 0 / 7 / 23 0 12340024 Cat3 A23 0 / 7 / 24 0 12340025 Cat3 A24 0 / 7 / 25 0 12340026 Cat3 A25 0 / 7 / 26 0 12340027 Cat3 A26 0 / 7 / 27 0 12340028 Cat3 A27 0 / 7 / 28 0 12340029 Cat3 A28 0 / 7 / 29 0 12340030 Cat3 A29 0 / 7 / 30 0 12340031 Cat3 A30 0 / 7 / 31 0 12340032 Cat3 A31 -------------------------------------------------------- Command processing completed. 32 port(s) are configured MG PSTN user data

10. Enable the voice enhancing function.huawei(config-esl-user)#pstnport vqe batset 0/7/0 0/7/31 agc enable agc-Level 15 sns enable sns-Level 20 Command processing completed. 32 user data modified successfullyhuawei(config-esl-user)#display pstnport vqe 0/7 ------------------------------------------------------------------------- Frame/Slot/Port AGC enable AGC value (dbm0) SNS enable SNS value(db) ------------------------------------------------------------------------- 0 / 7 / 0 enable -24 enable 20 0 / 7 / 1 enable -24 enable 20 0 / 7 / 2 enable -24 enable 20 0 / 7 / 3 enable -24 enable 20 0 / 7 / 4 enable -24 enable 20 0 / 7 / 5 enable -24 enable 20 0 / 7 / 6 enable -24 enable 20 0 / 7 / 7 enable -24 enable 20 0 / 7 / 8 enable -24 enable 20 0 / 7 / 9 enable -24 enable 20 0 / 7 / 10 enable -24 enable 20



299

0 / 7 / 11 enable -24 enable 20 0 / 7 / 12 enable -24 enable 20 0 / 7 / 13 enable -24 enable 20 0 / 7 / 14 enable -24 enable 20 0 / 7 / 15 enable -24 enable 20 0 / 7 / 16 enable -24 enable 20 0 / 7 / 17 enable -24 enable 20 0 / 7 / 18 enable -24 enable 20 0 / 7 / 19 enable -24 enable 20---- More ( Press 'Q' to break ) ----huawei(config-esl-user)#quit


huawei(config)#save

----End

ResultAfter the configuration, the UA5000 MiniMSAN can perform the following functions:

l The UA5000 MiniMSAN and OLT can transmit data in the GPON mode.l The subscribers configured on the service boards of the UA5000 MiniMSAN can call each

other.

25.3 Querying the Attributes of the Ports on the GP1A BoardThe GP1A board provides one GPON uplink port, one FE/GE auto-sensing electrical port, one100M electrical port, two 100M optical ports, and four E1 ports. By querying the attributes ofthe port on the GP1A board, you can learn the type, impedance, auto-sensing mode, rate, workingmode, activation status, and current status of each port on the GP1A board.

ContextWhen you query the attributes of the port on the GP1A board, the system displays "-" for theitem that the port does not support.

l The PON port does not support the port impedance, MDI, port rate, and port mode. Thesystem displays "-" for these items.

l The 100M electrical port does not support the port impedance. The system displays "-"forthis item.

l The GE/FE auto-sensing electrical port and 100M optical port does not support the portimpedance and MDI. The system displays "-" for the two items.

l The E1 port does not support the MDI, port rate, and port mode. The system displays "-"for these items.

Table 25-2 lists the port types corresponding to the IDs of the ports on the GP1A board.

Table 25-2 Port types corresponding to IDs of the ports on the GP1A board

Port Description Port ID

PON port 0

GE/FE auto-sensing electrical port 1



300

Port Description Port ID

100M electrical port 2

100M optical port 3-4

E1 port 5-8

Precaution

The GP1A board supports nine ports. When you query the attributes of the port on the GP1Aboard, the system displays an error, if you enter a logical number greater than 8.

Procedure

Step 1 Run the interface gpon command to enter the GPON mode.

Step 2 Run the display port state command to query the attributes of the port on the GP1A board.

----End

Example

To query the port attributes of the GP1A board on the UA5000 MiniMSAN, do as follows:

huawei(config)#interface gpon 0/3huawei(config-if-gpon-0/3)#display port state all ----------------------------------------------------------------------- Port PortType Impedance MDI Speed(Mbps) Duplex Active Link ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 0 GPON - - - - ACTIVE UP 1 GE - - AUTO HALF ACTIVE UP 2 FE ELC - AUTO AUTO HALF ACTIVE UP 3 FE OPT - - 100 FULL ACTIVE UP 4 FE OPT - - 100 FULL ACTIVE UP 5 E1 75 - - - ACTIVE UP 6 E1 75 - - - ACTIVE UP 7 E1 75 - - - ACTIVE UP 8 E1 75 - - - ACTIVE UP -----------------------------------------------------------------------

25.4 Querying the Statistics of the Port on the GP1A BoardBy querying the statistics of the port on the GP1A board, you can learn the information abouteach port on the board. This helps you to detect and locate the faults of the port on the GP1Aboard in time.

Context

The GP1A board supports nine ports. They are one GPON uplink port, one FE/GE auto-sensingelectrical port, one 100M electrical port, two 100M optical ports, and four E1 ports.

If the result of the queried statistical item is 0x0, it indicates that the port does not receive framesof this type, or the port does not carry any traffic currently.



301

Procedure

Step 1 Run the interface gpon command to enter the GPON mode.

Step 2 Run the display port statistic command to query the statistics of the GPON port.

----End

ExampleTo query the statistics of the E1 port group on the GP1A board of the UA5000 MiniMSAN, doas follows:

huawei(config)#interface gpon 0/3huawei(config-if-gpon-0/3)#display port statistic e1port-group port5: Number of GEM frames of E1 port =0x0 Number of E1 channels from TGMAC =0x0 Number of E1 channels to TGMAC =0xb278 port6: Number of GEM frames of E1 port =0x0 Number of E1 channels from TGMAC =0x0 Number of E1 channels to TGMAC =0xdf7a port7: Number of GEM frames of E1 port =0x0 Number of E1 channels from TGMAC =0x0 Number of E1 channels to TGMAC =0x117d port8: Number of GEM frames of E1 port =0x0 Number of E1 channels from TGMAC =0x0 Number of E1 channels to TGMAC =0xab7f

To query the statistics of the Ethernet port group on the GP1A board of the UA5000MiniMSAN, do as follows:

huawei(config)#interface gpon 0/3huawei(config-if-gpon-0/3)#display port statistic ethport-group port0: Number of transmitted frames of PON port =0x0 Number of received frames of PON port =0x0 Number of discard frames of PON port in send direction =0x0 port1: Number of transmitted frames of UNI port =0x0 Number of received frames of UNI port =0x0 Number of discard frames of UNI port in send direction =0x0 port2: Number of transmitted frames of FE port =0x0 Number of received frames of FE port =0x0 Number of discard frames of FE port in send direction =0x0 port3: Number of transmitted frames of FE optics port =0x0 Number of received frames of FE optics port =0x0 Number of discard frames of FE optics port in send direction =0x0 port4: Number of transmitted frames of FE optics port =0x0 Number of received frames of FE optics port =0x0 Number of discard frames of FE optics port in send direction =0x0

Related OperationTable 25-3 lists the related operation for querying the statistics of the port on the GP1A board.



302

Table 25-3 Related operation for querying the statistics of the port on the GP1A board


Clear the statistics of the port on the GP1Aboard

reset port statistic



303

26 Configuring the Remote Subtending

About This Chapter

Configuring the remote subtending includes the description of the remote subtending networkingand the process for configuring the remote subtending through different boards on theUA5000.

26.1 Introduction to the Remote SubtendingThe remote subtending facilitates the flexible networking of the UA5000, and the expansion ofcapacity of the UA5000.

26.2 Configuration Example of the E1 SubtendingThis topic describes how to subtend a remote RSU to the UA5000 through the EDTB board.Thus, the two subtended devices are connected through an E1 cable to extend the servicetransmission distance and to expand the access capacity of the UA5000.

UA5000 Universal Access UnitConfiguration Guide-PVM CLI 26 Configuring the Remote Subtending


304

26.1 Introduction to the Remote SubtendingThe remote subtending facilitates the flexible networking of the UA5000, and the expansion ofcapacity of the UA5000.

Service Description

The UA5000 enables you to subtend the remote service shelves to the master shelf through theE1 ports on the PVMB or PVMD board, or through the E1 ports on the EDTB board, thus toexpand the capacity of the UA5000. The remote service shelf uses the RSU4 or RSU8 board asthe control board. The local office and the remote office are connected by the E1 cables overthe multi-service transport platform (MSTP) or the synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH).


The remote service shelves access the modem services and the voice services through the portsof the voice service boards. Table 26-1 shows the number of ports provided by the service boardsin the remote service shelves.

Table 26-1 Specification of the remote service shelf

Shelf Type Service Board Maximum Number ofPorts

RSU_HAFS_30(HABD) A32 1920

RSU_HABS_30(HABA) A32 1920

26.2 Configuration Example of the E1 SubtendingThis topic describes how to subtend a remote RSU to the UA5000 through the EDTB board.Thus, the two subtended devices are connected through an E1 cable to extend the servicetransmission distance and to expand the access capacity of the UA5000.

Prerequisitel The data on the MGC must be accurate.

l The E1 cable must be connected correctly.

l The MG interface must be configured properly. (For details about the procedure, see "9Configuring the MG Interface.")

l The RSU boards and the A32 boards must be added to the remote service shelf.

Context

The EDTB board can be installed in slots 6-17 of the HABA or HABD shelf, slots 12-17 of theHABC shelf, or slots 6-11 of the HABL shelf. A maximum of six EDTB boards can be installedin the adjacent slots of a shelf.



305

NetworkingFigure 26-1 shows the example network of the E1 subtending.

Figure 26-1 Example network of the E1 subtending

E1

E1

E1

E1

FE/GE

H.248

MGC

LAN Switch

E1

UA5000

SDH

PVMB

PVMB

A32

A32

EDTB

EDTB

RSU8

RSU8

A32

A32

A32

A32

MSTP

Phone 128Phone 1

Data PlanTable 26-2 provides the data plan for configuring the E1 subtending.



306

Table 26-2 Data plan for configuring the E1 subtending

Data Type Item Data

IP address IP address/subnet mask of UA5000MG 0

10.10.10.2/255.255.255.0

Default IP address/subnet mask ofUA5000 MG 0

10.10.10.1/255.255.255.0

IP address/subnet mask of the MGC 10.10.20.1/255.255.255.0

Parameters of theMG interface

MG ID 0

Code text

Protocol UDP

MG Port 2944

MGC Port 2944

Terminal layer configuration No, terminalid: 0-127

Telephone numbers Phone 1-phone 128 Shelf ID/slot ID/port ID:1/9/0-1/12/31Telephone number:12340001-12340128

EDTB boards Shelf ID/slot ID 0/6 and 0/7

Remote serviceshelf

Shelf ID 1

Shelf type RSU_HAFS_30(HABD)

RSU board Shelf ID/slot ID 1/4 and 1/5

Contextl The MG interface parameters must be the same as the MG interface parameters configured

on the MGC.l The EDTB board must work in the independent mode and the default value is independent.

Configuration FlowchartFigure 26-2 shows the flowchart for configuring the E1 subtending.



307

Figure 26-2 Flowchart for configuring the E1 subtending

Start

Add EDTB boards

Confirm the EDTB boards

Add remote service shelf

Add inter-shelf links

Add subscribers toslave service shelf

End

Procedure

Step 1 Add EDTB boards.huawei(config)#board batadd 0/6 0/7 h601EDTB

Step 2 Confirm the EDTB boards.huawei(config)#board confirm 0/6huawei(config)#board confirm 0/7

Step 3 Add the remote service shelves.huawei(config-if-edt-0/7)#quithuawei(config)#frame add 1FrameType: 0 : MAIN_HABM_30(HABA) 1 : MAIN_HAFM_30(HABD) 2 : MAIN_HAFM_6(HABL) 3 : MAIN_H602HABD(HABD) 4 : MAIN_H601HABC(HABC) 5 : MAIN_H601HABO(HABO) 6 : MAIN_H601HABM(HABM) 7 : SLAVE_HAFS_32(HABE) 8 : SLAVE_HABS_32(HABB) 9 : SLAVE_HABS_30(HABA) 10 : SLAVE_HAFS_30(HABD) 11 : SLAVE_H602HABD(HABD) 12 : SLAVE_H602HABE(HABE) 13 : RSU_HAFS_30(HABD) 14 : RSU_HABS_30(HABA) 15 : RSU_HAFS_12(HABC) 16 : RSU_HAFS_6(HABL) 17 : RSUG_ONU60A(HUBO) 18 : RSUG_ONU04A 19 : RSUG_ONU08A 20 : RSP_19(HCB) 21 : RSP_15(HDB) 22 : RSP_14(HIB) 23 : RSP_12(HFB)



308

24 : RSP_10(HGB) 25 : RSP_6A(HMB) 26 : RSP_6B(HLB) 27 : UAM_R (HUBM) 28 : UAS_R (HUBS) 29 : UAFM_R(HUBE) 30 : UAFS_R(HUBF) 31 : UAMB_R(HUBB) 32 : ONU60A_R(HUBO) 33 : ONUF01D100_R(HUBL) 34 : VRSP_12(HABA) 35 : VRSP_18(HABA) 36 : HWTA(HIB_1) 37 : HWTA(HIB_2) 38 : HWTA(HIB_3) Please select frame type (0 ~ 38):12Frame add successfully

Step 4 Add the inter-shelf links.huawei(config)#frame link start 0/6/0 end 1/4/0 huawei(config)#frame link start 0/6/1 end 1/4/1huawei(config)#frame link start 0/6/2 end 1/4/2huawei(config)#frame link start 0/6/3 end 1/4/3huawei(config)#frame link start 0/6/4 end 1/4/4huawei(config)#frame link start 0/6/5 end 1/4/5huawei(config)#frame link start 0/6/6 end 1/4/6huawei(config)#frame link start 0/6/7 end 1/4/7huawei(config)#frame link start 0/6/8 end 1/5/0huawei(config)#frame link start 0/6/9 end 1/5/1huawei(config)#frame link start 0/6/10 end 1/5/2huawei(config)#frame link start 0/6/11 end 1/5/3huawei(config)#frame link start 0/6/12 end 1/5/4huawei(config)#frame link start 0/6/13 end 1/5/5huawei(config)#frame link start 0/6/14 end 1/5/6huawei(config)#frame link start 0/6/15 end 1/5/7

Step 5 Query the inter-shelf links.huawei(config)#display frame link -------------------------------------------------------- Record UpBoardName Frame/Slot/Port DownBoardName Frame/Slot/Port -------------------------------------------------------- 1 H601EDTB 0 /6/0 RSU8 1 /4 /0 2 H601EDTB 0 /6/1 RSU8 1 /4 /1 3 H601EDTB 0 /6/2 RSU8 1 /4 /2 4 H601EDTB 0 /6/3 RSU8 1 /4 /3 5 H601EDTB 0 /6/4 RSU8 1 /4 /4 6 H601EDTB 0 /6/5 RSU8 1 /4 /5 7 H601EDTB 0 /6/6 RSU8 1 /4 /6 8 H601EDTB 0 /6/7 RSU8 1 /4 /7 9 H601EDTB 0 /6/8 RSU8 1 /5 /0 10 H601EDTB 0 /6/9 RSU8 1 /5 /1 11 H601EDTB 0 /6/10 RSU8 1 /5 /2 12 H601EDTB 0 /6/11 RSU8 1 /5 /3 13 H601EDTB 0 /6/12 RSU8 1 /5 /4 14 H601EDTB 0 /6/13 RSU8 1 /5 /5 15 H601EDTB 0 /6/14 RSU8 1 /5 /6 16 H601EDTB 0 /6/15 RSU8 1 /5 /7 --------------------------------------------------------

Step 6 Query the port status of the boards subtended between shelves.huawei(config)#display port state 0/6 -------------------------------------------------------------------------- Frame/Slot/Port PortType PortState ServiceType SvcState -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 0 / 6 / 0 E1 Normal RSU - 0 / 6 / 1 E1 Normal RSU - 0 / 6 / 2 E1 Normal RSU - 0 / 6 / 3 E1 Normal RSU - 0 / 6 / 4 E1 Normal RSU - 0 / 6 / 5 E1 Normal RSU - 0 / 6 / 6 E1 Normal RSU - 0 / 6 / 7 E1 Normal RSU - 0 / 6 / 8 E1 Normal RSU - 0 / 6 / 9 E1 Normal RSU - 0 / 6 / 10 E1 Normal RSU - 0 / 6 / 11 E1 Normal RSU -



309

0 / 6 / 12 E1 Normal RSU - 0 / 6 / 13 E1 Normal RSU - 0 / 6 / 14 E1 Normal RSU - 0 / 6 / 15 E1 Normal RSU - --------------------------------------------------------------------------huawei(config)#display port state 1/4 -------------------------------------------------------------------------- Frame/Slot/Port PortType PortState ServiceType SvcState -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1 / 4 / 0 E1 Normal RSU - 1 / 4 / 1 E1 Normal RSU - 1 / 4 / 2 E1 Normal RSU - 1 / 4 / 3 E1 Normal RSU - 1 / 4 / 4 E1 Normal RSU - 1 / 4 / 5 E1 Normal RSU - 1 / 4 / 6 E1 Normal RSU - 1 / 4 / 7 E1 Normal RSU - --------------------------------------------------------------------------huawei(config)#display port state 1/5 -------------------------------------------------------------------------- Frame/Slot/Port PortType PortState ServiceType SvcState -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1 / 5 / 0 E1 Normal RSU - 1 / 5 / 1 E1 Normal RSU - 1 / 5 / 2 E1 Normal RSU - 1 / 5 / 3 E1 Normal RSU - 1 / 5 / 4 E1 Normal RSU - 1 / 5 / 5 E1 Normal RSU - 1 / 5 / 6 E1 Normal RSU - 1 / 5 / 7 E1 Normal RSU - --------------------------------------------------------------------------

Step 7 Add and confirm service boards in the slave shelf.huawei(config)#board batadd 0/9 0/12 a32huawei(config)#board confirm 0/9huawei(config)#board confirm 0/10huawei(config)#board confirm 0/11huawei(config)#board confirm 0/12

Step 8 Add remote subscribers.huawei(config)#esl userhuawei(config-esl-user)#mgpstnuser batadd 1/9/0 1/12/31 0 terminalid 0 telno 12340001

----End

ResultAfter the E1 subtending is configured, subscribers with phone numbers 12340001–12340128should be able to call each other.



310

27 Configuring the QoS of the Voice Service

About This Chapter

Configuring the QoS of the voice service includes the application of the QoS technology andthe process for configuring the QoS test of the voice service on the UA5000.

27.1 Introduction to the Voice Service QoSThe quality of service (QoS) provides subscriber services with end-to-end quality assurance bya set of measurement indexes, such as service availability, throughput, time delay, jitter, andloss rate.

27.2 Configuration Example of the QoS Test TaskThis topic describes how to start a passive QoS test task on the UA5000 to monitor the actualservice.

UA5000 Universal Access UnitConfiguration Guide-PVM CLI 27 Configuring the QoS of the Voice Service


311

27.1 Introduction to the Voice Service QoSThe quality of service (QoS) provides subscriber services with end-to-end quality assurance bya set of measurement indexes, such as service availability, throughput, time delay, jitter, andloss rate.

Service Description

The UA5000 provides the function of the QoS test. The UA5000 can work with the EMS to testthe quality of the IP network, or start the QoS test by itself. The UA5000 can add an 802.1Q/802.1p or a type of service (ToS) label to the upstream packet. The upper layer device in the IPnetwork can take proper measures according to the label to ensure the QoS of the voice service.

l Passive QoS test: After receiving the test command from the EMS or the host, theUA5000 collects all QoS messages of appropriate sessions. The messages are reported tothe EMS through a test port at the scheduled time.

l The differences between the active and passive tests are as follows:

– In the active test, the call is set up automatically and the QoS information is recorded.

– In the passive test, the QoS information is recorded only when there are calls that meetthe requirements.

l In the QoS passive test, the UA5000 command line and the EMS are independent of eachother. The EMS can start the test task without running the UA5000 command line. TheUA5000 command line can, however, forcibly stop the test task started by the EMS.

Service Specificationsl The UA5000 supports the active and passive QoS tests.

l The UA5000 supports a maximum of 16 passive QoS tests concurrently.

27.2 Configuration Example of the QoS Test TaskThis topic describes how to start a passive QoS test task on the UA5000 to monitor the actualservice.

Prerequisite

Before a QoS test is started, the following parameters must be set:

l IP address of the peer device used in the test

l Start time of the test

l Interval for reporting the test result to the EMS

Data Plan

Table 27-1 provides the data plan for starting a QoS test at the local end.



312

Table 27-1 Data plan for starting a QoS test at the local end

Item Data

Loop delay 200 ms

Jitter 20 ms

Packet loss ratio 1%

IP address of the peer device 10.10.20.20

Index of the task 1

ContextTo start a QoS test task on the UA5000, run the qos-rtptest command. The test result is notreported to the EMS.

Procedure

Step 1 Set the QoS alarm threshold parameters.huawei(config)#qos threshold loopdelay 200 jitter 20 packetlost 1

Step 2 Start the QoS test task on the UA5000.huawei(config)#qos-rtptest 1 10.10.20.20

----End

ResultThe QoS test task for 10.10.20.20 is started. When the QoS parameters exceed the thresholds,the QoS alarms are generated. To verify the configuration of the QoS test task, do as follows:huawei(config)#display qos-rtptest all Task Index : 1 Task Execution Time (sec) : 0 Peer Address : 10.10.20.20 Duration (sec) :3600 Tick (sec) : 60 TaskMode : COMMAND InPkts : 0 OutPkts : 0 InOctets : 0 OutOctets : 0 InDropPkts : 0 MaxDropRate (percent) : 0, Port :-/-/- MinDropRate (percent) : 0, Port :-/-/- MaxJitter (millisec) : 0, Port :-/-/- MinJitter (millisec) : 0, Port :-/-/- MaxLoopDelay (millisec) : 0, Port :-/-/- MinLoopDelay (millisec) : 0, Port :-/-/-



313

28 Configuring the Security of the VoiceService

About This Chapter

Configuring the security of the voice service includes the registration process of the device andthe configuration process of the UA5000 device authentication.

28.1 Introduction to the Voice Service SecurityThis topic describes how the UA5000 as an MG requests registration on the MGC and theregistration process of the device when the H.248 or MGCP protocol is used.

28.2 Configuring the Device AuthenticationThis topic describes how to configure the authentication parameters of the MG interface on theUA5000 to implement the device authentication function when the H.248 or HGCP protocol isused.

UA5000 Universal Access UnitConfiguration Guide-PVM CLI 28 Configuring the Security of the Voice Service


314

28.1 Introduction to the Voice Service SecurityThis topic describes how the UA5000 as an MG requests registration on the MGC and theregistration process of the device when the H.248 or MGCP protocol is used.

28.1.1 Registration Process When the H.248 Protocol Is UsedThis topic describes the process that the UA5000 registers on the MGC as an MG and the MGCverifies the validity of the MG identity when the H.248 protocol is used.

Service Description

Figure 28-1 shows the process for registering the MG with the MGC when the H.248 protocolis used.

Figure 28-1 Process for registering the MG with the MGC (through the H.248 protocol)

MG MGC

(1) ServiceChange

(2) Reply

(3) Modify

(4) Reply

(5) Modify

(6) Reply

Start

Table 28-1 describes the registration process.

Table 28-1 Process for registering the MG with the MGC (through the H.248 protocol)

Number Description

(1) The MG sends a ServiceChange message to the MGC for registration. Inthe ServiceChange message, TerminationID is Root, Method is Restart,ServiceChangeReason is mandatory and the version is optional. Themessage contains the MG timestamp (determined by the time of the MG)and the MG ID. The values of the MG timestamp and the MG ID areencrypted through MD5 by the static cipher key, which is set by both theMG and the MGC.

(2) The MGC sends the Reply message to the MG.



315

Number Description

(3) The MGC sends the Modify message to the MG. The MGC produces a keyaccording to the MG timestamp, MG ID, and MGC ID. The MGC then sendsthe Modify message that contains the key to the MG. The KEY is encryptedthrough the MD5 by the static cipher key, which is set by both the MG andthe MGC.

(4) The MG sends the Reply message to the MGC.

(5) The MGC sends the Modify message, which contains the MGC timestampencrypted by the key.

(6) The MG receives the Modify message and obtains the MGC timestamp. TheMG sends the Reply message to the MGC. The message contains the MGID and the MGC timestamp encrypted by the key for authentication.

NOTE

After the registration is completed successfully, the MG sends the heartbeat detection messages for securityauthentication. When the heartbeat detection message fails in the security authentication, the MGC forcesthe MG to exit the service. The heartbeat detection messages are contained in the Modify message, and themessage sending interval is three minutes.

28.1.2 Registration Process When the MGCP Protocol Is UsedThis topic describes the process that the UA5000 registers on the MGC as an MG and the MGCverifies the validity of the MG identity when the MGCP protocol is used.

Service DescriptionIn the MGCP protocol, the MG can register with the MGC in either of the following ways:wildcard registration and single endpoint registration.

Wildcard registration

If there are a large number of subscribers under an MG interface, the registration process takesa long time and a large number of messages are generated. In this case, wildcard registration isrecommended. Figure 28-2 shows the wildcard registration process.



316

Figure 28-2 Wildcard registration process (through the MGCP protocol)

MG MGC

(1) RSIP

(2) ACK

(3) RQNT

(4) ACK

(5) RQNT

(6) ACK

(7) NTFY

(8) ACK

Start

Table 28-2 describes the wildcard registration process when the MGCP protocol is used.

Table 28-2 Wildcard registration process (through the MGCP protocol)

Number Description

(1) The MG sends a registration request message to the MGC.

(2) The MGC sends a reply message to the MGC.

(3) The MGC sends the random number and algorithm ID for generating theshared cipher key to the MG.

(4) The MG sends a reply message to the MGC.

(5) The MGC initiates the authentication of the MG.

(6) The MG sends a reply message to the MGC.

(7) The MG sends an authentication response message to the MGC.

(8) The MGC sends a reply message to the MG.

Single endpoint registration

To register a single MG, use the single endpoint registration process. Figure 28-3 shows thesingle endpoint registration process.



317

Figure 28-3 Single endpoint registration process (through the MGCP protocol)

MG MGC

(1) RSIP

(2) ACK

(3) RQNT

(4) ACK

Table 28-3 describes the single endpoint registration process when the MGCP protocol is used.

Table 28-3 Single endpoint registration process (through the MGCP prtocol)

Number Description

1 The MG sends a registration message to the MGC.

2 The MGC sends a reply message to the MG.

3 The MGC sends a RQNT message to the MG.

4 The MG sends a reply message to the MGC.

28.2 Configuring the Device AuthenticationThis topic describes how to configure the authentication parameters of the MG interface on theUA5000 to implement the device authentication function when the H.248 or HGCP protocol isused.

28.2.1 Configuring the Device Authentication (the H.248 Protocol)When the H.248 protocol is used, you can configure the UA5000 device authentication byconfiguring the registration mode of the MG interface, the MG interface to support the deviceauthentication, authentication initial key, and authentication gateway ID of the MG interface.

Prerequisitel The MG interface must be added successfully.l The encryption type, initial key, and DH authentication MG ID must be configured on the

MGC. The parameters configured on the UA5000 must be the same as the parametersconfigured on the MGC.

ContextWhen the MGC is the SoftX3000 of Huawei, the authentication MG ID must be a string withmore than eight digits, and the initial key must be a string with more than eight and less than 16digits.



318

Procedure


Step 2 Run the display mg-software parameter 4 command to query the registration mode used bythe MG interface.l To register all the subscribers under the MG interface, use the wildcard registration mode.l To register a single subscriber under the MG interface, use the single endpoint registration

mode.

Step 3 If the query result is different from the planned registration mode, run the mg-softwareparameter 4 command to set the registration mode of the MG interface. If the query result isthe same as the planned registration mode, proceed to Step 4.

Step 4 Run the mg-software parameter 6 0 command to set the MG interface to support the deviceauthentication.

Step 5 Run the auth command to set the authentication MG ID and initial key.

Step 6 Run the display auth command to query the device authentication parameters.

Step 7 Run the reset command to reset the MG interface.

----End

ExampleThe following example describes how to configure the authentication for the UA5000. Table28-4 provides the data plan for configuring the device authentication parameters.

Table 28-4 Data plan for configuring the device authentication parameters (through the H.248protocol)

Item Data Item Data

MG interface ID 0 Whether to use thewildcard forregistration

Yes

Authentication MGID

UA5000 Initial key 0123456789ABCDEF

huawei(config)#interface h248 0huawei(config-if-h248-0)#display mg-software parameter 4 ------------------------------------------------- Interface Id:0 para index:4 value:0 ------------------------------------------------- APPENDIX: ------------------------------------------------- Interface software parameter name: 4: Whether MG register to MGC with wildcard 0: Yes 1: No huawei(config-if-h248-0)#mg-software parameter 6 0 huawei(config-if-h248-0)#auth auth_mgid ua5000 initial_key 0123456789ABCDEFhuawei(config-if-h248-0)#display auth [AUTH_PARA config]



319

Initial Key : 0123456789ABCDEF Auth MGid : UA5000 Algorithm : MD5 huawei(config-if-h248-0)#reset coldstart Are you sure to reset MG interface?(y/n)[n]:yhuawei(config-if-h248-0)#Reset MG interface 0 success!

28.2.2 Configuring the Device Authentication (the MGCP Protocol)When the MGCP protocol is used, you can configure the UA5000 device authentication byconfiguring the registration mode of the MG interface, authentication initial key, andauthentication gateway ID of the MG interface.

Prerequisitel The MG interface must be added successfully.l The encryption type, initial key, and DH authentication MG ID must be configured on the

MGC. The parameters configured on the UA5000 must be the same as the parametersconfigured on the MGC.

Contextl When the MGC is the SoftX3000 of Huawei, the authentication MG ID must be a string

with more than eight digits, and the initial key must be a string with more than eight andless than 16 digits.

l In the case of single endpoint registration, the UA5000 supports only the passiveauthentication mode and does not support the active authentication mode.

Procedurel Active authentication mode

NOTE

When the UA5000 uses the MGCP protocol and the MGC need not authenticate the subscribers ofthe UA5000, select the passive authentication mode.

1. In the global config mode, run the interface mgcp command to enter the MG interfacemode.

2. Run the mg-software parameter 4 0 command to select the wildcard registrationmode.

3. Run the auth command to set the active authentication mode, and set theauthentication MG ID and initial key.

4. Run the display auth command to query the device authentication parameters.5. Run the reset command to reset the MG interface.

l Passive authentication mode1. In the global config mode, run the interface mgcp command to enter the MG interface

mode.2. To register all the subscribers under the MG interface, run the mg-software

parameter 4 0 command to select the wildcard registration mode. To register a singlesubscriber, proceed to Step 3.

3. Run the auth command to set the passive authentication mode, and set theauthentication key.



320

4. Run the display auth command to query the device authentication parameters.5. Run the reset command to reset the MG interface.

----End

ExampleThe following example describes how to configure the active authentication mode for theUA5000. Table 28-5 provides the data plan for configuring the active authentication mode.

Table 28-5 Data plan for configuring the active authentication mode (through the MGCPprotocol)

Item Data Item Data

MG interface ID 0 Whether to use thewildcard for registration

Yes

Authentication MGID

UA5000 Initial key 0123456789ABCDEF

huawei(config)#interface mgcp 0 huawei(config-if-mgcp-0)#mg-software parameter 4 0 huawei(config-if-mgcp-0)#auth mode2 auth_mgid UA5000 initial_key 0123456789ABCDEF

huawei(config-if-mgcp-0)#display auth active request authentication mode config: Initial Key : 123456789ABCDEF Auth MGid : UA5000 Algorithm : MD5 huawei(config-if-mgcp-0)#reset Are you sure to reset MG interface?(y/n)[n]:yhuawei(config-if-mgcp-0)# Reset MG interface 0 success!

The following example describes how to configure the passive authentication mode fortheUA5000. Table 28-6 provides the data plan for configuring the passive authentication mode.

Table 28-6 Data plan for configuring the passive authentication mode (through the MGCPprotocol)

Item Data Item Data

MG interface ID 0 Whether to use thewildcard forregistration

Yes

Initial key 0123456789ABCDEF - -

huawei(config)#interface mgcp 0 huawei(config-if-mgcp-0)#mg-software parameter 4 0 huawei(config-if-mgcp-0)#auth mode1 key 0123456789ABCDEFhuawei(config-if-mgcp-0)#display auth passive respond authentication mode config:



321

Auth Key : 123456789ABCDEF Algorithm : MD5 huawei(config-if-mgcp-0)#reset Are you sure to reset MG interface?(y/n)[n]:yhuawei(config-if-mgcp-0)# Reset MG interface 0 success!



322

29 Configuring the Reliability of the VoiceService

About This Chapter

UA5000 provides the assurance function of the reliable voice service. Configuring the reliabilityof the voice service includes the application of the technology of the voice service reliabilityand the process for configuring the voice service reliability of the UA5000.

29.1 Introduction to the Voice Service ReliabilityThe reliability of the UA5000 voice service is implemented through features such as dualhoming, standalone, emergency channel, and separation of the signaling stream and the mediastream.

29.2 Configuring the Dual HomingDual-homing is a disaster recovery mechanism to provide communication during emergencysituations when the softswitch device is down or an unexpected disaster occurs (such as fire inthe equipment room, disconnection of cables connected to the equipment room, and abnormalpower supply).

29.3 Configuring the Standalone ServiceConfigure the standalone service of the UA5000. When the UA5000 is disconnected from theMGC, the UA5000 processes the services of the internal subscribers on the same MG interfaceso that they can call each other without the support of the MGC.

29.4 Configuring an Emergency ChannelConfigure an emergency channel of the UA5000. When the UA5000 is disconnected from theMGC, the subscribers of the UA5000 can dial the external phone numbers that matches theemergency digitmap.

29.5 Configuring the Separation Between the Signaling Stream and the Media StreamThis topic describes how to configure the signaling IP address and the media IP address for theVAG to separate the signaling stream from the media stream.

UA5000 Universal Access UnitConfiguration Guide-PVM CLI 29 Configuring the Reliability of the Voice Service


323

29.1 Introduction to the Voice Service ReliabilityThe reliability of the UA5000 voice service is implemented through features such as dualhoming, standalone, emergency channel, and separation of the signaling stream and the mediastream.

Service Description

The details about the reliability of the UA5000 voice service are as follows:

l Dual homingIn dual homing, one UA5000 can register with two MGCs when the H.248 protocol is usedor one UA5000 can register with three MGCs when the MGCP protocol is used. When theprimary MGC is faulty and cannot communicate with the UA5000, the services areswitched to a secondary MGC.The dual homing of the UA5000 is carried out by the heartbeat detection. Figure 29-1shows the heartbeat detection and the switchover process.

Figure 29-1 Heartbeat detection and switchover process

UA5000 MGC1 MGC2

(1) Notify (it/ito)

(2) ServiceChange(Method=Failover, Reason=909)

(3) Reply

(4) ServiceChange(Method=Disconnected, Reason=909)

(5) Reply

Heatbeat lost

Registration on MGC2 succeedsRegistration on MGC2 fails

Table 29-1 describes the heartbeat detection and the switchover process.

Table 29-1 Description of the heartbeat detection and the switchover process

No. Description

(1) The UA5000 sends several consecutive heartbeat detection messages(Notify) and does not receive any response. This indicates that theprimary MGC (MGC1) is faulty.

(2) The UA5000 sends a registration request message ServiceChange(Method = Failover, Reason = 909) to the MGC2 according to thepreset order in the MGC list.



324

No. Description

(3) If the UA5000 receives a response Reply from the MGC2, it indicatesthat the registration on the MGC2 is successful and the process iscomplete. If the UA5000 does not receive a response from the MGC2after sending the several consecutive ServiceChange messages, itindicates that the registration on the MGC2 has failed.

(4) If there is another MGC in the secondary MGC list, the UA5000 repeatsstep 2 and step 3 for the next MGC. If there is no other secondary MGC,the UA5000 sends the registration message ServiceChange (Method =Disconnected, Reason = 909 (neighboring MGC fault)) to the originalprimary MGC (MGC 1) based on the avalanche mechanism forpreventing the reset after a random delay.

(5) If the UA5000 receives the response Reply from the MGC1, thecommunication between the UA5000 and the MGC1 is restored andthe process is complete. If the UA5000 does not receive a responseafter sending several consecutive ServiceChange requests to theMGC1, the registration on the MGC1 fails and the UA5000 proceedswith step 2.

l Internal call standalone

When the UA5000 is disconnected from the MGC, the subscribers on the same MGinterface can call each other. The MG interface is supported by the UA5000 instead of theMGC.

l Emergency channelWhen the UA5000 is disconnected from the MGC, the subscribers of the UA5000 can dialthe external phone numbers that are listed in the digitmap as emergency call phone numbers.For example, in the case of a fire, you can dial the fire emergency number, such as 911 inthe United States.

l Separation of the signaling stream and the media streamEach VAG can be configured with independent signaling IP address and media stream IPaddress, and can be configured in different VLANs. You can separate the control and thetransmission by separating the signaling stream from the media stream to enhance thereliability of the voice service. The H.248 protocol supports this feature and the MGCPprotocol does not support this feature.

29.2 Configuring the Dual HomingDual-homing is a disaster recovery mechanism to provide communication during emergencysituations when the softswitch device is down or an unexpected disaster occurs (such as fire inthe equipment room, disconnection of cables connected to the equipment room, and abnormalpower supply).

29.2.1 Configuring the Dual Homing (the H.248 Protocol)Configuring the dual homing means registering one UA5000 with two MGCs. When one MGCis faulty and cannot support the communication, the UA5000 automatically switches to the otherMGC.



325

Prerequisitel The MG interface must be added successfully.

l In the MG interface attributes, MGC1 and MGC2 must be configured.

l On the MGCs, the data for interconnecting to the UA5000 must be configured.

Procedure


Step 2 Run the mg-software parameter command to configure the MG interface to support dualhoming.

----End

Example

To configure the MG interface (with ID 0) on the UA5000 to support dual homing through theheartbeat detection, do as follows:

huawei(config)#interface h248 0 huawei(config-if-h248-0)#mg-software parameter 2 0

29.2.2 Configuring the Dual Homing (the MGCP Protocol)Configuring the dual homing means registering one UA5000 with two MGCs. When one MGCis faulty and cannot communicate with the MG, the UA5000 automatically switches to the otherMGC.


Procedure


Step 2 Run the mg-software parameter command to enable the function of the heartbeat message.

Step 3 Run the mg-software parameter command to configure the MG interface to support dualhoming.

----End

Example

To configure the MG interface (with ID 0) on the UA5000 to support dual homing throughheartbeat detection, do as follows:

huawei(config)#interface mgcp 0 huawei(config-if-mgcp-0)#mg-software parameter 3 1huawei(config-if-mgcp-0)#mg-software parameter 2 0



326

29.3 Configuring the Standalone ServiceConfigure the standalone service of the UA5000. When the UA5000 is disconnected from theMGC, the UA5000 processes the services of the internal subscribers on the same MG interfaceso that they can call each other without the support of the MGC.

Configuration Flowchartl Currently, the telephone numbers configured for the standalone service cannot be checked

for repetition. When configuring the telephone numbers for the standalone service, makesure that the telephone numbers are unique. Otherwise, the standalone service cannot beimplemented.

l The telephone numbers configured on the UA5000 must be the same as the telephonenumbers configured on the MGC.

l The UA5000 supports the standalone service only when it uses the H.248 protocol.

Figure 29-2 shows the flowchart for configuring the standalone service.

Figure 29-2 Flowchart for configuring the standalone service

Start

Configure service types instandalone

End

(Optional) Configurestandalone timers

Configure voice subscriberdata

Configure the digitmap forinternal calls

NOTE

For details about how to configure the voice subscriber data, see "10 Configuring the VoIP Service."



327

29.4 Configuring an Emergency ChannelConfigure an emergency channel of the UA5000. When the UA5000 is disconnected from theMGC, the subscribers of the UA5000 can dial the external phone numbers that matches theemergency digitmap.

Context

The UA5000 supports the emergency channel function only when it uses the H.248 protocol.

Service Description

Emergency call applies when the network to which the caller is connected fails. The caller isconfigured with ports for emergency calls on the CDI board, and the ports are connected to theports for outgoing calls. These ports serve as the agent for setting up external calls. As theresources on the ports are limited, only important and emergency numbers are configured in thedigitmap for emergency calls to ensure the connectivity of these calls.


Figure 29-3 shows the flowchart for configuring the emergency channels.

Figure 29-3 Flowchart for configuring the emergency channels

Start

(Optional) Configurestandalone timers

Configure digitmap foremergency calls

Configure voice subscriberdata

Add a CDI board

Configure attributesfor the CDI ports

Configure emergencychannels

End



328

Procedure

Step 1 Run the board add command to add the CDI board.

Step 2 Run the board confirm command to confirm the CDI board.

Step 3 Run the cdi command to enter the CDI mode.

Step 4 Run the port attribute set command to configure the attributes for the CDI ports.

Step 5 Run the quit command to exit the CDI mode.

Step 6 Run the esl user command to enter the ESL user mode.

Step 7 Run the mgddiuser add frameid/slotid/portid emergency command to configure the port asthe port for an emergency channel.

Step 8 Run the quit command to exit the ESL user mode.

Step 9 Run the interface h248 command to enter the MG interface mode.

Step 10 Run the digitmap set emergency command to set the digitmap for emergency calls.

----End

Example

The following example describes how to set port 0 on the CDI board at frame 0/slot 10 as theport of the emergency channel, and set the digitmap for emergency calls as 119|110|168xxxxx.

huawei(config)#board add 0/10 cdi huawei(config)#board confirm 0/10huawei(config)#cdihuawei(config-cdi)#port attribute set 0/10/0 workmode ddihuawei(config-cdi)#quithuawei(config)#esl userhuawei(config-esl-user)#mgddiuser add 0/10/0 emergencyhuawei(config-esl-user)#quithuawei(config)#interface h248 0huawei(config-h248-0)#digitmap set emergency 119|110|168xxxxx

29.5 Configuring the Separation Between the SignalingStream and the Media Stream

This topic describes how to configure the signaling IP address and the media IP address for theVAG to separate the signaling stream from the media stream.

Prerequisitel The system must be configured to support the H.248 protocol.

l The IP address to be used in the example must be configured in the IP address pool. Fordetails of adding the IP address, see the ip address command.



329

ContextThe signaling IP address and the media IP address of the VAG are two optional parameters inthe attributes of the MG interface. For information about the other parameters of the MG interfaceattributes, see "9.6 Configuring the Attributes of the MG Interface (the H.248 Protocol)."

Procedure

Step 1 In global config mode, run the interface h248 command to enter the MG interface mode.

Step 2 Run the if-h248 attribute command to configure the signaling IP address and the media IPaddress so that they are different from each other.

Step 3 Run the display if-h248 attribute command to query the configuration of the signaling IPaddress and the media IP address.

----End

ExampleTo configure the signaling IP address as 10.10.10.2 and the media IP address as 192.168.10.2for MG interface 0 of the UA5000, do as follows:

huawei(config)#interface h248 1huawei(config-if-h248-1)#if-h248 attribute mgip 10.10.10.2 mgport 2944 mgcip_1 10.10.10.4 mgcport_1 9800 code text transfer udp mg-media-ip 10.144.78.138huawei(config-if-h248-1)#display if-h248 attribute --------------------------------------------------------------------- MGID 1 MG Description - MG DomainName - Protocol H248 H248version Negotiated Originally 3 Profile Negotiation Para disable Profile 0:NoProfile("") 2833Encrypt - Codetype Text Transmode UDP HeartBeatTimer(s) 60 HeartBeatRetransTimes 3 HeartBeatRetransTimer(s) 60 MG signalling IP 10.10.10.2 MG signalling Port 2944 MG media IP 10.144.78.138 MIDType IP4_ADDR DeviceName - Active MGC MGC Port :9800 MGC IP:10.10.10.4 Active MGC MGC Domain Name:- Standby MGC MGC Port :- MGC IP:- Standby MGC MGC Domain Name:- ---------------------------------------------------------------------



330

30 Configuring the Link Detection

About This Chapter

The UA5000 provides the function of the layer 2 link detection. Configuring the link detectionincludes the application of the UA5000 link detection technology and the process for configuringthe link detection.

30.1 Introduction to the Link DetectionThe link detection that the UA5000 supports includes the ARP link detection, BFD linkdetection, and ETH_OAM link detection.

30.2 Configuration Example of the ARP Link DetectionThis topic describes how to configure the ARP link detection on the UA5000. When the ARPlink detection on the UA5000 is enabled, the UA5000 can monitor the link status. When the linkis faulty, the UA5000 switches the links to avoid the long-time service interruption (theinterruption lasts for several seconds).

30.3 Configuration Example of the BFD Link DetectionThis topic describes how to configure the BFD link detection on the UA5000. When the BFDlink detection on the UA5000 is enabled, the UA5000 can monitor the link status. When the linkis faulty, the UA5000 switches the links to avoid the long-time service interruption (theinterruption lasts for a few hundred milliseconds).

30.4 Configuration Example of the ETH_OAM Layer 2 Link DetectionThis topic describes how to configure the ETH_OAM link detection on the UA5000. When theETH_OAM link detection on the UA5000 is enabled, the UA5000 can monitor the link status.When the link is faulty, the UA5000 switches the links to avoid the long-time service interruption(the interruption lasts for a few hundred milliseconds).

UA5000 Universal Access UnitConfiguration Guide-PVM CLI 30 Configuring the Link Detection


331

30.1 Introduction to the Link DetectionThe link detection that the UA5000 supports includes the ARP link detection, BFD linkdetection, and ETH_OAM link detection.

Service Description

l An increasingly important feature of the network device is: The UA5000 is required toquickly detect the fault in the communication between the adjacent systems or in the end-to-end communication. When the device is faulty, the UA5000 can set up the alternativechannel or switch the service to other links in less time.

l The UA5000 can use the mechanism of active/standby switchover to ensure the servicestability. Functions of the link protection on the UA5000 include the following:– ARP link detection: After the ARP link detection is enabled, the UA5000 sends the

ARP packet to the gateway that matches the primary service IP address to detect thelink. After the UA5000 detects that the link is faulty, it performs the active/standbyswitchover between the two uplink network ports. In this case, the service is switchedto the standby link to ensure the normal transmission of the service.

– BFD link detection: BFD can detect the fault in any type of channel between systems.BFD focuses on quickly detecting the fault of the link, and ensures better QoS fortransmitting the voice, video, and VoD services. It provides subscribers with the servicesfeaturing high reliability and high applicability, such as VoIP services and other real-time services.

– ETH_OAM link detection: ETH_OAM performs the link detection and the linkswitchover protection as quickly as BFD.

Service SpecificationsService specifications of the ARP, BFD, and ETH_OAM link detections are as follows:

l ARP link detection: It supports the detection of a single link only. The control boards thatsupport this feature are PVMB, and PVMD.

l BFD link detection: It supports the detection of a single link and double links. The controlboard that supports this feature is PVMD.

l ETH_OAM link detection: It supports the detection of double links only. The control boardthat supports this feature is PVMD.

30.2 Configuration Example of the ARP Link DetectionThis topic describes how to configure the ARP link detection on the UA5000. When the ARPlink detection on the UA5000 is enabled, the UA5000 can monitor the link status. When the linkis faulty, the UA5000 switches the links to avoid the long-time service interruption (theinterruption lasts for several seconds).

Prerequisitel The networking of the UA5000 must support the ARP link detection. The networking

modes that support the ARP link detection are as follows:



332

– Independent uplink networking through the active service port with the configurationof two PVM control boardsThe UA5000 is configured with two PVM control boards. The UA5000 uses theindependent uplink mode and transmits the service packets upstream to the upper layerdevice through the active network port on the PVM control board.

– Uplink networking with the configuration of one PVM control boardThe UA5000 is configured with one PVM control board. The UA5000 transmits theservice packets upstream to the upper layer device through the network port on the PVMcontrol board.

NOTE

In the mode of the uplink networking with the configuration of one PVM control board, whenthe link is faulty, the UA5000 reports only the status of the link to you and does not perform theactive/standby switchover for the uplink network port.

The integrated networking of IPMB or PVM does not support the ARP link detection.

l The UA5000 uses PVMB, or PVMDas its control boards.

Networking

Figure 30-1 shows the example network for configuring the ARP link detection.

Use network cables to connect network ports of slot 0/4 and slot 0/5 of the UA5000 to the router.Set up an ARP link between slot 0/4 of the UA5000 and the router.

Figure 30-1 Example network for configuring the ARP link detection

phone1

UA5000

MGC

PVMB

PVMB

A32

Router

FE 0/11FE

phone32

0/4 0/5

ARP link



333

Data PlanTable 30-1 provides the data plan for configuring the ARP link detection.

Table 30-1 Data plan for configuring the ARP link detection

Type Item Data

Detection linkgroup

Name of the detection link group group1

Detection mode of the link group single-detectNOTE

The ARP link detection supportsonly the single-link detection.

Detection protocol of the link group arp-detect

ARP detection link Name of the ARP detection link Adetect

Configuration FlowchartFigure 30-2 shows the flowchart for configuring the ARP link detection.

Figure 30-2 Flowchart for configuring the ARP link detection

Start

Add a detection link group

Activate the detection link group

End

Add an ARP detection link

Query the status and theconfiguration of the detection link

CAUTIONAdd a detection link group before setting up an ARP detection link.



334

Procedure

Step 1 Add a detection link group.huawei(config)#interface ethhuawei(interface-eth)#detect-group add group1 mode single-detectprotocol arp-detect

Step 2 Add an ARP detection link.huawei(interface-eth)#arp-detect add Adetect detect-group group1

Step 3 Activate the detection link group.huawei(interface-eth)#detect-group enable group1

Step 4 Query the status and the configuration of the detection link.huawei(interface-eth)#display arp-detect state ----------------------------------------------------------------------- LinkName State F/S M/S GroupName ----------------------------------------------------------------------- Adetect Up 0/4 master group1 -----------------------------------------------------------------------huawei(interface-eth)#display arp-detect configuration ----------------------------------------------------------------------- LinkName Tx_interval(ms) Rx_interval(ms) Multiplier GroupName ----------------------------------------------------------------------- Adetect 2000 2000 3 group1 -----------------------------------------------------------------------

----End

Resultl Run the display arp-detect state command to query the status of the detection link.l Run the display arp-detect configuration command to query the configuration of the

detection link.l When the link is faulty, the UA5000 can detect the faulty link and can automatically perform

the switchover. This shortens the duration of the service interruption (the interruption lastsfor only several seconds) on the UA5000.

30.3 Configuration Example of the BFD Link DetectionThis topic describes how to configure the BFD link detection on the UA5000. When the BFDlink detection on the UA5000 is enabled, the UA5000 can monitor the link status. When the linkis faulty, the UA5000 switches the links to avoid the long-time service interruption (theinterruption lasts for a few hundred milliseconds).

Prerequisitel The networking of the UA5000 must support the BFD link detection. The networking

modes that support the BFD link detection are as follows:

– Independent uplink networking through the active service port with the configurationof two PVM control boardsThe UA5000 is configured with two PVM control boards. The UA5000 uses theindependent uplink mode and transmits the service packets upstream to the upper layerdevice through the active network port on the PVM control board. In this case, you canconfigure the BFD single-link detection or the BFD double-link detection.



335

– Uplink networking with the configuration of one PVM control board

The UA5000 is configured with one PVM control board. The UA5000 transmits theservice packets upstream to the upper layer device through the network port on the PVMcontrol board. In this case, you can configure the BFD single-link detection.

NOTE

In the mode of the uplink networking with the configuration of one PVM control board, whenthe link is faulty, the UA5000 reports only the status of the link to you and does not perform theactive/standby switchover for the uplink network port.

The integrated networking of IPMB or PVM does not support the BFD link detection.

l The UA5000 uses PVMD as its control board.

Networking

Figure 30-3 shows the example network for configuring the BFD link detection.

Connect network ports of slot 0/4 and slot 0/5 of the UA5000 to the router by using networkcables. Set up a BFD link between slot 0/4 of the UA5000 and the router and a link between slot0/5 and the router.

NOTE

The following network uses the detection of double BFD links as an example. The networking and theconfiguration for the detection of a single BFD link is similar to the networking and configuration for theARP detection. See "30.2 Configuration Example of the ARP Link Detection."

Figure 30-3 Example network for configuring the BFD link detection

phone1

UA5000

MGC

PVMD

PVMD

A32

Router

FE/GE

0/11

FE/GE

phone32

0/4 0/5

Link 1 Link 2

Router10.10.10.90 10.10.10.94

10.10.10.70 10.10.10.78



336

Data PlanTable 30-2 provides the data plan for configuring the BFD link detection.

Table 30-2 Data plan for configuring the BFD link detection

Type Item Data

Detection linkgroup


Detection mode of the link group double-detectNOTE

The BFD link detectionsupports the single-linkdetection or the double-link detection. Thefollowing uses thedouble-link detectionas an example.

Detection protocol of the link group bfd

BFD detection link Name of the BFD detection link Bdetect1Bdetect2

peerip 10.10.10.9410.10.10.90

localip 10.10.10.7810.10.10.70NOTE

When you configurethe BFD double-linkdetection, localip mustbe configured withdifferent IP addresses.

Configuration FlowchartFigure 30-4 shows the flowchart for configuring the BFD link detection.



337

Figure 30-4 Flowchart for configuring the BFD link detection

Start



End

Add a BFD detection link


Enable the uplink port ofthe standby control board

CAUTIONl Add a detection link group before setting up a BFD detection link.l Run the uplink tps on command to enable the uplink port of the standby control board before

setting up the detection for double BFD links. Otherwise, when the active link is faulty, theservices cannot be switched to the standby link.

l When you set up the detection for a single BFD link, you need not enable the port on thestandby control board.

Procedure

Step 1 Enable the uplink port of the standby control board.huawei(config)#uplink tps on

Step 2 Add a detection link group.huawei(config)#interface ethhuawei(interface-eth)#detect-group add group1 mode double-detectprotocol bfd

Step 3 Add a BFD detection link.huawei(interface-eth)#bfd add Bdetect1 detect-group group1 peerip 10.10.10.94interface 0/4 discriminator 2 localip 10.10.10.78 rx-interval 50 tx-interval 50 echo on multiplier 5



338

huawei(interface-eth)#bfd add Bdetect2 detect-group group1 peerip 10.10.10.90interface 0/5 discriminator 3 localip 10.10.10.70 rx-interval 50 tx-interval 50 echo on multiplier 5


Step 5 Query the status and the configuration of the detection link.huawei(interface-eth)#display bfd state ----------------------------------------------------------------------- LinkName State F/S M/S GroupName ----------------------------------------------------------------------- Bdetect1 Up 0/4 master group1 Bdetect2 Up 0/5 slave group1 -----------------------------------------------------------------------huawei(interface-eth)#display bfd configuration ----------------------------------------------------------------------- LinkName : Bdetect1 Peer IP : 10.10.10.94 Interface : 0/4 Descriminator : 2 Local IP : 10.10.10.78 RX-interval(ms) : 50 TX-interval(ms) : 50 AcRXinterval(ms): 300 AcTXinterval(ms): 300 Multiplier : 5 Echo : On GroupName : group1 ----------------------------------------------------------------------- LinkName : Bdetect2 Peer IP : 10.10.10.90 Interface : 0/5 Descriminator : 3 Local IP : 10.10.10.70 RX-interval(ms) : 50 TX-interval(ms) : 50 AcRXinterval(ms): 300 AcTXinterval(ms): 300 Multiplier : 5 Echo : On GroupName : group1 -----------------------------------------------------------------------

----End

Resultl Run the display bfd state command to query the status of the detection link.l Run the display bfd configuration command to query the configuration of the detection

link.l When the link is faulty, the UA5000 can detect the faulty link and can automatically perform

the switchover. This ensures that the service lasts for only a few hundred milliseconds.

30.4 Configuration Example of the ETH_OAM Layer 2 LinkDetection

This topic describes how to configure the ETH_OAM link detection on the UA5000. When theETH_OAM link detection on the UA5000 is enabled, the UA5000 can monitor the link status.When the link is faulty, the UA5000 switches the links to avoid the long-time service interruption(the interruption lasts for a few hundred milliseconds).



339

Prerequisitel The networking of the UA5000 must support the ETH_OAM layer 2 link detection. The

networking modes that support the ETH_OAM link detection are as follows:Independent uplink networking through the active service port with the configuration oftwo PVM control boards. The UA5000 is configured with two PVM control boards. TheUA5000 uses the independent uplink mode and transmits the service packets upstream tothe upper layer device through the active network port on the PVM control board.

NOTE

The integrated networking of IPMB or PVM does not support the ETH_OAM link detection.

l The UA5000 uses PVMD as its control board.

Networking

Figure 30-5 shows the example network for configuring the ETH_OAM layer 2 link detection.

Use network cables to connect network ports of slot 0/4 and slot 0/5 of the UA5000 to the router.Set up an ETH_OAM link between slot 0/4 of the UA5000 and the router, and an ETH_OAMlink between slot 0/5 and the router.

Figure 30-5 Example network for configuring the ETH_OAM layer 2 link detection

phone1

UA5000

MGC

PVMD

PVMD

A32

Router

FE/GE 0/11FE/GE

phone32

0/4 0/5

Link 1 Link 2

Router

Data Plan

Table 30-3 provides the data plan for configuring the ETH_OAM layer 2 link detection.



340

Table 30-3 Data plan for configuring the ETH_OAM layer 2 link detection

Type Item Data

Detection linkgroup


Detection mode of the link group double-detectNOTE

The ETH_OAM linkdetection supports onlythe double-linkdetection.

Detection protocol of the link group ethoam

ETH_OAMdetection link

Name of the ETH_OAM detection link Edetect1Edetect2

peerip 10.10.10.22010.10.10.210

localip 10.10.10.22110.10.10.221NOTE

When you configurethe ETH_OAM linkdetection, localip mustbe configured with thesame IP addresses.

Configuration FlowchartFigure 30-6 shows the flowchart for configuring the ETH_OAM link detection.



341

Figure 30-6 Flowchart for configuring the ETH_OAM link detection

Start



End

Add an ETH_OAM detection link


Enable the uplink port ofthe standby control board

CAUTIONl Add a detection link group before setting up an ETH_OAM detection link.l Run the uplink tps on command to enable the uplink port of the standby control board before

setting up the ETH_OAM detection link. Otherwise, when the active link is faulty, theservices cannot be switched to the standby link.

Procedure

Step 1 Enable the uplink port of the standby control board.huawei(config)#uplink tps on

Step 2 Add a detection link group.huawei(config)#interface ethhuawei(interface-eth)#detect-group add group1 mode double-detectprotocol ethoam

Step 3 Add an ETH_OAM detection link.huawei(interface-eth)#ethoam add Edetect1 detect-group group1peerip 10.10.10.220 interface 0/4 localip 10.10.10.221 rx-interval 30tx-interval 40 multiplier 4 mdlevel 1huawei(interface-eth)#ethoam add Edetect2 detect-group group1peerip 10.10.10.210 interface 0/5 localip 10.10.10.221 rx-interval 30tx-interval 40 multiplier 4 mdlevel 1



342


Step 5 Query the status and the configuration of the detection link.huawei(interface-eth)#display ethoam state ----------------------------------------------------------------------- LinkName State F/S M/S GroupName ----------------------------------------------------------------------- Edetect1 Up 0/4 master group1 Edetect2 Up 0/5 slave group1 -----------------------------------------------------------------------huawei(interface-eth)#display ethoam configuration ----------------------------------------------------------------------- LinkName : Edetect1 Peer IP : 10.10.10.220 Interface : 0/4 Local IP : 10.10.10.221 RX-interval(ms) : 30 TX-interval(ms) : 40 AcRXinterval(ms): 30 AcTXinterval(ms): 40 Multiplier : 4 MDLevel : 1 GroupName : group1 ----------------------------------------------------------------------- LinkName : Edetect2 Peer IP : 10.10.10.210 Interface : 0/5 Local IP : 10.10.10.211 RX-interval(ms) : 30 TX-interval(ms) : 40 AcRXinterval(ms): 30 AcTXinterval(ms): 40 Multiplier : 4 MDLevel : 1 GroupName : group1 ----------------------------------------------------------------------

----End

Resultl Run the display ethoam state command to query the status of the detection link.l Run the display ethoam configuration command to query the configuration of the

detection link.l When the link is faulty, the UA5000 can detect the faulty link and can automatically perform

the switchover. This ensures that the service interruption lasts for only a few hundredmilliseconds.



343

31 Configuring the EnvironmentMonitoring

About This Chapter

This topic provides an overview of the environment monitoring and describes how to configurethe environment monitoring on the UA5000.

31.1 Introduction to the Environment MonitoringDuring the environment monitoring, the environment monitoring serial port of the device isconnected to the communication serial port of the monitored device. Through the master-slavenode protocol or the access network protocol, the operator can directly monitor the environmentconditions of devices.

31.2 Configuration Example of the ESCThis topic describes how to set the analog and digital parameters of the ESC. In this example,configuring the ESCM whose serial port type is RS232 is considered as an example. Theconfiguration procedures of the H302ESC, H303ESC, H304ESC, and H801ESC are the sameas the configuration procedure of the ESCM.

31.3 Configuration Example of the Fan MonitoringThis topic describes how to configure the speed adjustment mode and the alarm switch of thefan. Thus, the fan speed of the UA5000 can be adjusted automatically, and the fan tray of theUA5000 can be monitored.

31.4 Configuration Example of the Power MonitoringThis topic considers the Power4875L as an example and describes how to configure itsenvironment monitoring parameters. The procedures for configuring the Power4875,Power4845, and Power4820 are the same as the procedure for configuring the Power4875L.

31.5 Configuration Example of the Universal Power MonitoringThis topic describes how to monitor the universal power through the ESC by using theconfiguration example of the PSM-A power monitoring through the H303ESC. (The PSM-A isone type of Emerson power and is displayed as PSMA on the CLI.)

31.6 Adding an EMUThis topic describes how to add an EMU. After connecting the EMU to the monitoring serialport correctly, you need to add the corresponding EMU to the host system of the UA5000.

31.7 Setting the ESC Analog Parameters

UA5000 Universal Access UnitConfiguration Guide-PVM CLI 31 Configuring the Environment Monitoring


344

This topic describes how to set the upper and lower alarm thresholds of the analog parameters,such as temperature, humidity, voltage, and current, or how to set the customized alarms of theanalog parameters.

31.8 Setting the ESC Digital ParametersThis topic describes how to set the alarm levels of digital parameters such as the door statussensor, or how to configure the customized alarms of the digital parameters.

31.9 Configuring the Fan Alarm ReportingThis topic describes how to configure the reporting of all the fan alarms to the control unit.

31.10 Setting the Fan Speed Adjustment ModeThis topic describes how to set the fan speed adjustment mode. If the fan is not in the automaticspeed adjustment mode, the flow of air is more when the temperature is low or normal.

31.11 Setting the Fan SpeedThis topic describes how to set the fan speed.

31.12 Setting the Power Supply ParametersThis topic describes how to set the parameters of the power shelf in the UA5000 to ensure thenormal running of the power shelf.



345

31.1 Introduction to the Environment MonitoringDuring the environment monitoring, the environment monitoring serial port of the device isconnected to the communication serial port of the monitored device. Through the master-slavenode protocol or the access network protocol, the operator can directly monitor the environmentconditions of devices.

Service Description

The environment parameters such as temperature, humidity, and power voltage can be monitoredto ensure that the UA5000 works stably in a suitable environment.

To perform the environment monitoring on a device, the environment monitoring functionalmodules, such as the H303ESC, H304ESC, or ESCM must be provided. In addition, somemonitored devices provide the built-in monitoring modules, such as the Power4845, Power4860,Power4875, and Power4875L. These functional modules that can implement the monitoring arereferred to as the environment monitor units (EMUs), regardless of whether they are built-in ornot.


The EMU supported by the UA5000 can be classified into the following four categories:

l Environment supervision circuit (ESC): Includes the H303ESC, H302ESC, H801ESC,H304ESC, and ESCM. Monitors the environment parameters such as ambient temperature,humidity, smoke, water, fire, voltage, and power through various sensors.

l FAN: Monitors the running status of the fan and adjusts the running speed of the fanaccording to the settings.

l DIS: Refers to the power distribution unit (PDU). Divides one or two DC inputs intomultiple outputs.

l Power: Includes the Power4820, Power4845, Power4875, Power4875L, and PSE158.Monitors the environment parameters such as temperature, humidity, voltage, and powersupply through various sensors.

According to the type of the adopted power supply mode (power distribution–DC, power–AC),the device is generally configured with power shelf EMU or PDU EMU.

When the UA5000 is connected to the corresponding EMU, bits 1 to 5 of DIP switch S1 on theESC of the PDU need to be switched on.

The five bits of the DIP switch define the address of the slave node for the PDU EMU tocommunicate with the host of the UA5000. When all the five bits are switched on, it indicatesthat the address of the slave node is 0. This is the number of the slave node of the EMU assignedby the UA5000.

NOTE

For the hardware connections of the environment monitoring board and the settings of the DIP switch, see"ESC board" in the UA5000 Hardware Description.

For the principles, configuration table, functions, and sensors of the environment monitoring, see"Environment Monitoring."



346

31.2 Configuration Example of the ESCThis topic describes how to set the analog and digital parameters of the ESC. In this example,configuring the ESCM whose serial port type is RS232 is considered as an example. Theconfiguration procedures of the H302ESC, H303ESC, H304ESC, and H801ESC are the sameas the configuration procedure of the ESCM.

Prerequisitel The ESCM and the shelf of the UA5000 must be connected through the RS232 serial port

cable according to the serial port type of the shelf.

l The settings of the ESCM DIP switch must be consistent with the slave node of the EMU.

NOTE

For the detailed settings of the DIP switch, see "ESC - Environment Monitoring."

l When you add the EMU to the device, you must comply with the following rules:

– The system supports only one type of EMU except the ESCM.

– If the ESCM is added to the system, you can add the other EMU.

Data Plan

In this example, the serial port type is RS232. Table 31-1 provides the data plan for configuringthe ESCM.

Table 31-1 Data plan for configuring the ESCM

Item Data Remarks

EMU Type: MiniESC The ESCM is displayed asMiniESC on the CLI.

Number: 0 -

Subnode: 30 When the RS232 serial portis selected for the ESCM, theslave node number must beset to 30.

Analog parameters Analog parameter ID: 0 Set the analog parameteraccording to the actualrequirement. The built-inanalog parameter is set tomonitor the ambienttemperature for the devicerunning.For the value of theparameter and the details, seethe esc analog command.



347

Item Data Remarks

Upper alarm threshold ofanalog parameter 0: 54

When the ambienttemperature of the devicereaches or exceeds 54°C, thehost reports an alarm.

Lower alarm threshold ofanalog parameter 0: 6

When the ambienttemperature of the device isequal to or lower than 6°C,the host reports an alarm.

Analog parameter ID: 2 The customized humiditymonitoring analog parameteris added to monitor thehumidity of the device.For the value of theparameter and the details, seethe esc analog command.

Upper alarm threshold ofanalog parameter 2: 75% RH

When the humidity of thedevice reaches or exceeds75% RH, the host reports analarm.

Lower alarm threshold ofanalog parameter 2: 5% RH

When the humidity of thedevice is equal to or lowerthan 5% RH, the host reportsan alarm.

Name of analog parameter 2:humidity

-

Alarm index ID of analogparameter 2: 2

The customized humidityalarm of the system is used.

Unit of analog parameter 2:% RH

-

Sensor type of analogparameter 2: voltage type

-

Digital parameters Digital parameter ID: 0 Set the digital parameteraccording to the actualrequirement. The monitoringdigital parameter of the MDFis configured to monitor theMDF status. When the MDFis faulty, the host reports analarm.

Valid level of digitalparameter 0: high level

When the high level is usedto represent the valid level,the host does not report analarm in case of high level.



348

Item Data Remarks

Digital parameter ID: 1 Set the digital parameteraccording to the actualrequirement. The monitoringdigital parameter of thecabinet door is set to monitorthe cabinet door status. Whenthe cabinet door is open, thehost reports an alarm.

Valid level of digitalparameter 1: low level

When the low level is used torepresent the valid level, thehost does not report an alarmin case of low level.

Contextl The differences between the analog parameter and digital parameter are as follows:

– An analog parameter is a continuous value, such as temperature, voltage, and current.When the analog parameter is used to monitor the interface, an analog parameter sensoris usually used, which provides test analog parameters in real time.

– A digital parameter is a discrete value that indicates a state. A digital sensor has onlytwo values: normal and faulty.

l When you set the slave node and communication baud rate, ensure that the followingconditions are met:– When the serial port for the ESCM is RS485, the settings of the slave node ID and the

DIP switch must be consistent. The communication baud rate must be set to 19200 bit/s.

– When the serial port for the ESCM is RS232, the slave node ID must be set to 30. Thecommunication baud rate must be set to 9600 bit/s.

Configuration FlowchartFigure 31-1 shows the flowchart for configuring the ESCM.



349

Figure 31-1 Flowchart for configuring the ESCM

Procedure

Step 1 Add an EMU.

Add the EMU with the EMU ID 0, the type ESCM (MiniESC on the CLI), the slave node 30,and the serial port type RS232.

huawei(config)#emu add 0 MiniESC 0 30 rs232 MiniESC

Step 2 Set the analog parameters.huawei(config)#interface emu 0huawei(config-if-MiniESC-0)#esc analog 0 alarm-upper-limit 54 alarm-lower-limit 6huawei(config-if-MiniESC-0)#esc analog 2 alarm-upper-limit 75 alarm-lower-limit 5 name humidity sensor-type 0:voltage analog-alarm 2 unit %RH

Step 3 Set the digital parameters.huawei(config-if-MiniESC-0)#esc digital 0 available-level high-levelhuawei(config-if-MiniESC-0)#esc digital 1 available-level low-level

Step 4 Query the ESC environment information.huawei(config-if-MiniESC-0)#display esc environment info EMU ID: 0 ESC environment state ---------------------------Analog Environment Info-------------------------- ID Name State Value AlmUpper AlmLower Unit 0 Temperature Normal 29.000 54 6 C 1 Input_-48V_0 Normal 48.046 70 35 volt 2 Humidity Normal 10.000 75 5 %RH 3 - Normal -128.000 127 -128 - ---------------------------Digital Environment Info--------------------------- ID Name State Value |ID Name State Value 0 Wiring Normal 1 |1 Door0 Alarm 1 2 - Normal 1 |3 - Normal 1



350

4 - Normal 1 |5 - Normal 1 6 - Normal 1 |7 - Normal 1 8 - Normal 1 |9 - Normal 1 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------

Step 5 Save the data.huawei(config-if-MiniESC-0)#quithuawei(config)#save

----End

ResultAfter the configuration, the ESCM works in the normal state and monitors the analog and digitalmonitoring parameters set on the UA5000. When a monitoring parameter exceeds the normalrange, the host reports an alarm.

31.3 Configuration Example of the Fan MonitoringThis topic describes how to configure the speed adjustment mode and the alarm switch of thefan. Thus, the fan speed of the UA5000 can be adjusted automatically, and the fan tray of theUA5000 can be monitored.

Prerequisite

The hardware DIP switch of the fan tray must be set so that it is consistent with the slave nodevalue of the EMU. The baud rate must be set to 19200 bit/s.

Data Plan

Table 31-2 provides the data plan for configuring the fan monitoring.

Table 31-2 Data plan for configuring the fan monitoring

Item Data Remarks

EMU Type: FAN -

Number: 1 -

Subnode: 6 This parameter corresponds to thehardware DIP switch of the fan tray,but cannot be the same as the slavenode of the ESC.

Serial port of environmentmonitoring communication: RS485

The serial port of environmentmonitoring communication of thefan tray must be set to RS485.

FANparameters

Fan speed adjustment mode:automatic

In this mode, the fan speed isadjusted according to thetemperature automatically. Bydefault, the fan speed adjustmentmode is automatic.



351

Item Data Remarks

Report the alarm that the fan trayfails to read the temperature sensor:permit

When the fan tray fails to read thetemperature sensor, the host reportsthe alarm automatically.

Report the alarm that the fan isblocked: permit

When the fan is blocked, the hostreports the alarm automatically.

Report the alarm that thetemperature is very high: permit

When the temperature of the fan trayis very high, the host reports thealarm automatically.

Report the alarm that the powersupply is faulty: permit

When the power supply of the fantray is faulty, the host reports thealarm automatically.


Figure 31-2 shows the flowchart for configuring the fan monitoring.

Figure 31-2 Flowchart for configuring the fan monitoring

Query the configurationparameters

Automatic

Manual

Set the fan speedadjustment mode

Set the fan speed

Set whether to report thealarm

Save the data

Add a fan tray

start

End



352

Procedure

Step 1 Add a fan tray.huawei(config)#emu add 1 fan 0 6 rs485

Step 2 Set whether to report the alarm.huawei(config-if-fan-1)#fan alarmset block permit Send command to environment monitor board ,please waiting for the ack...huawei(config-if-fan-1)# Execute command successfulhuawei(config-if-fan-1)#fan alarmset read_tem_fault permit Send command to environment monitor board ,please waiting for the ack...huawei(config-if-fan-1)# Execute command successfulhuawei(config-if-fan-1)#fan alarmset tem_high permit Send command to environment monitor board ,please waiting for the ack...huawei(config-if-fan-1)# Execute command successfulhuawei(config-if-fan-1)#fan alarmset fault permit Send command to environment monitor board ,please waiting for the ack...huawei(config-if-fan-1)# Execute command successful

Step 3 Query the configuration parameters.huawei(config-if-fan-1)#display fan system parameter EMU ID: 1 Fan configration parameter: ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- fan timing mode: auto timing ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- alarm_name alarm(permit/forbid) read temperature sensor fault permit fan block permit temperature high permit board fault permit ----------------------------------------------------------------------------

Step 4 Save the data.huawei(config-if-fan-1)#quit huawei(config)#save

----End

ResultAfter the configuration, the fan tray can work in the normal state, and can adjust the fan speedautomatically. At the same time, the host reports an alarm when the fan fails to read thetemperature sensor, the fan is blocked, the temperature is very high, or the power supply is faulty.

31.4 Configuration Example of the Power MonitoringThis topic considers the Power4875L as an example and describes how to configure itsenvironment monitoring parameters. The procedures for configuring the Power4875,Power4845, and Power4820 are the same as the procedure for configuring the Power4875L.

Prerequisitel The ESC board and host must be connected through the environment monitoring cable.l The settings of the ESC DIP switch must be consistent with the slave node of the EMU.l When you add the EMU to the device, you must comply with the following rules:



353

– The system supports only one type of EMU except the ESCM.– If the ESCM is added to the system, you can add the other EMU.

Data PlanThis example describes how to configure only the upper and lower alarm thresholds of ambienttemperature and upper and lower measurement thresholds of ambient temperature of thePower4875L. Other parameters are set by default. For more information about the configurationsof the Power4875L parameters, see "31.12 Setting the Power Supply Parameters." Table31-3 provides the data plan for configuring the Power4875L.

Table 31-3 Data plan for configuring the Power4875L

Item Data Remarks

EMU Type: Power4875L -

Number: 2 -

Shelf ID: 0 -

Subnode: 15 This parameter correspondsto the hardware DIP switchesof the ESC, but cannot be thesame as the slave node of theFAN.

Name: test -

Parameter configuration Upper alarm threshold ofambient temperature: 55 °C

Other analog parameters areset by default.

Lower alarm threshold ofambient temperature: 5°C

Upper measurementthreshold of ambienttemperature: 100°C

Lower measurementthreshold of ambienttemperature: 0°C

Configuration FlowchartFigure 31-3 shows the flowchart for configuring the Power4875L.



354

Figure 31-3 Flowchart for configuring the Power4875L

Procedure

Step 1 Add an EMU.huawei(config)#emu add 2 power4875L 0 15 rs232 test

Step 2 Set the environment monitoring parameters of the power.huawei(config)#interface emu 2huawei(config-if-power4875L-2)#power environment temperature 55 5 100 0 This command is invalid unless in the contition of install the sensor, wouldyou continue? (y/n)[n]:y Send command to environment monitor board ,please waiting for the ack...huawei(config-if-power4875L-2)# Execute command successful

Step 3 Query the environment monitoring parameters of the power.huawei(config-if-power4875L-2)#display power environment parameter EMU ID: 2 power environment configration parameter ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- AnalogID Name AlmUpper AlmLower TestHigh TestLow Unit type 0 Temperature 55 5 100 0 C Current 1 Humidity 80 10 100 0 %R.H. Current ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- DigitalID Name Available Level|DigitalID Name Available Level 0 - 1 | 1 - 1 2 - 1 | 3 - 1 4 - 1 | 5 - 1 6 - 1 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------




355

huawei(config-if-power4875L-2)#quithuawei(config)#save

----End

ResultAfter the configuration, the Power4875L can work in the normal state. At the same time, whenthe ambient temperature exceeds the configured upper or lower alarm threshold of ambienttemperature, the host reports an alarm.

31.5 Configuration Example of the Universal PowerMonitoring

This topic describes how to monitor the universal power through the ESC by using theconfiguration example of the PSM-A power monitoring through the H303ESC. (The PSM-A isone type of Emerson power and is displayed as PSMA on the CLI.)

PrerequisiteThe settings of the H303ESC DIP switch must be consistent with the slave node of the EMU.

Data PlanTable 31-4 provides the data plan for configuring the universal power monitoring.

Table 31-4 Data plan for configuring the universal power monitoring

Item Data Remarks

EMU Type: H303ESC -

Number: 0 -

Subnode: 30 The subnode of theH303ESC is always 30.

Universal power Type: PSM-A (displayed asPSMA on the CLI)

-

Protocol file name:power.pwr

Use the name of the actualloaded protocol file.

ContextThe UA5000 mainly uses the following types of the universal power:

l Zhujiang powerl Emerson powerl Beijing dynamic powerl Eltek power



356

l Delta-cimic powerl Zhongheng power


Figure 31-4 shows the flowchart for configuring the universal power monitoring.

Figure 31-4 Flowchart for configuring the universal power monitoring

Start

Load the protocol file ofthe universal power

Configure the type of theuniversal power

Query the ESCenvironment information

Save the data

Add an EMU

End

Procedure

Step 1 Add an EMU.

Add the EMU with the EMU ID 0, the type H303ESC, the slave node 20, and the serial porttype RS232.

huawei(config)#emu add 0 H303ESC 0 30 rs232 H303ESC

Step 2 Load the protocol file of the universal power.Obtain the protocol file of the universal power through the TFTP server. Then, run the followingcommand on the CLI with using the IP address of the actual server.huawei(config)#load universal-power-protocol tftp 10.144.78.132 power.pwr

Step 3 Configure the type of the universal power.huawei(config)#interface emu 0huawei(config-if-H303ESC-0)#esc power powertype 1

Step 4 Query the ESC environment information.huawei(config-if-H303ESC-0)#display esc power run infohuawei(config-if-H303ESC-0)#display esc power state



357

Step 5 Save the data.huawei(config-if-H303ESC-0)#quithuawei(config)#save

----End

ResultAfter the configuration, the H303ESC works in the normal state, and monitors the universalpower used by the UA5000. When the monitored parameter exceeds the normal range, the hostreports an alarm.

31.6 Adding an EMUThis topic describes how to add an EMU. After connecting the EMU to the monitoring serialport correctly, you need to add the corresponding EMU to the host system of the UA5000.

ContextThe EMU supported by the UA5000 can be classified into the following four categories:

l Environment supervision circuit (ESC): Includes the H302ESC, H303ESC, H304ESC,H801ESC, and ESCM. Monitors the environment parameters such as temperature,humidity, smoke, water, fire, voltage, and power through various sensors.

l FAN: Monitors the running status of the fan and adjusts the running speed of the fanaccording to the settings.

l DIS: Refers to the power distribution unit (PDU). Divides one or two DC inputs intomultiple outputs.

l Power: Includes the Power4820, Power4845, Power4875, Power4875L, and PSE158.Monitors the environment parameters such as temperature, humidity, voltage, and powersupply through various sensors.

The serial ports of the preceding EMUs are as follows:

l The serial port type of the H302ESC, H303ESC, H304ESC, Power4820, Power4875,Power4845, and Power4875L is RS232.

l The serial port types of the ESCM are RS485 and RS232. Select one serial port type duringthe configuration according to the type of the monitored shelf.

Procedure

Step 1 Run the emu add command to add an EMU.

Step 2 Run the display emu command to query the status of the EMU.

----End

ExampleTo add an EMU with the EMU ID 0, the type ESCM (MiniESC on the CLI), the slave node 30,and the serial port type RS232, do as follows:

huawei(config)#emu add 0 MiniESC 0 30 rs232 MiniESChuawei(config)#display emu 0



358

EMU ID: 0 ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- EMU name : MiniESC EMU type : MiniESC EMU state : Fault Frame ID : 0 Subnode : 30 COM Port : RS232 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------

NOTE

If the status of the EMU is displayed as Fault, check the following points:

l Check whether the physical connection is correct.

l Check whether the EMU type, shelf ID, subnode ID, and communication serial port are configuredcorrectly.

Related Operation

Table 31-5 lists the related operations for adding an EMU.

Table 31-5 Related operations for adding an EMU


Delete an EMU emu del If the EMU in the shelf needs to bereplaced, you need to delete theconfigured EMU, and then add anEMU.

Change the EMUname

emu modify The EMU ID must be unique, whereasthe EMU name can be duplicate.

31.7 Setting the ESC Analog ParametersThis topic describes how to set the upper and lower alarm thresholds of the analog parameters,such as temperature, humidity, voltage, and current, or how to set the customized alarms of theanalog parameters.

PrerequisiteThe EMU must be added and work in the normal state.

Procedure

Step 1 Run the interface emu command to enter the corresponding environment monitoring mode.

Step 2 Run the esc analog command to set the ESC analog parameters.

Step 3 Run the display esc environment info command to query the ESC system analog parameters.

----End



359

Example

The ESCM (MiniESC on the CLI) is used in the following example. To set the upper temperaturethreshold to 55°C, and lower temperature threshold to 5°C, do as follows:

Enter the ESCM config mode.

huawei(config)#interface emu 0

Set the ESCM analog parameters as follows: set the analog parameter ID to 0, the uppertemperature threshold to 55°C, and the lower temperature threshold to 5°C

huawei(config-if-MiniESC-0)#esc analog 0 alarm-upper-limit 55 alarm-lower-limit 5

Query the ESCM system analog parameters.

huawei(config-if-MiniESC-0)#display esc environment info EMU ID: 0 ESC environment state ---------------------------Analog Environment Info-------------------------- ID Name State Value AlmUpper AlmLower Unit 0 Temperature Normal 29.000 55 5 C 1 Input_-48V_0 Normal 48.046 70 35 volt 2 Humidity Normal 10.000 75 5 %RH 3 - Normal -128.000 127 -128 - ---------------------------Digital Environment Info--------------------------- ID Name State Value |ID Name State Value 0 Wiring Normal 1 |1 Door0 Alarm 1 2 - Normal 1 |3 - Normal 1 4 - Normal 1 |5 - Normal 1 6 - Normal 1 |7 - Normal 1 8 - Normal 1 |9 - Normal 1 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------

Related Operation

Table 31-6 lists the related operations for setting the ESC analog parameters.

Table 31-6 Related operations for setting the ESC analog parameters


Query the alarm information display esc alarm Only valid for the H302ESC,H303ESC, H304ESC, andH801ESC

Query the ESC systemconfiguration parameters

display esc systemparameter

Only valid for the H302ESC,H303ESC, H304ESC, andH801ESC

Query the ESC power supplyinformation

display esc power Only valid for the H302ESC,H303ESC, H304ESC, andH801ESC

Query the customized alarminformation of the analogparameters

display outside_analogprivate-alarm

Only valid for the H302ESC,H303ESC, H304ESC,H801ESC, Power4875,Power4875L, DIS, andPSE158



360

31.8 Setting the ESC Digital ParametersThis topic describes how to set the alarm levels of digital parameters such as the door statussensor, or how to configure the customized alarms of the digital parameters.

PrerequisiteThe EMU must be added and work in the normal state.

Procedure

Step 1 Run the interface emu command to enter the environment monitoring mode.

Step 2 Run the esc digital command to set the ESC digital parameters.

Step 3 Run the display esc environment info command to query the ESC system digital parameters.

----End

Example

The ESCM (MiniESC on the CLI) is used in the following example. To set the alarm of the doorstatus sensor to high level, do as follows:

Enter the ESCM config mode.

huawei(config)#interface emu 0

Set the ESCM digital parameters.

huawei(config-if-MiniESC-0)#esc digital 0 available-level high-level

Query the settings of the digital parameters.

huawei(config-if-MiniESC-0)#display esc environment info EMU ID: 0 ESC environment state ---------------------------Analog Environment Info-------------------------- ID Name State Value AlmUpper AlmLower Unit 0 Temperature Normal 29.000 55 5 C 1 Input_-48V_0 Normal 48.046 70 35 volt 2 Humidity Normal 10.000 75 0 %RH 3 - Normal -128.000 127 -128 - ---------------------------Digital Environment Info--------------------------- ID Name State Value |ID Name State Value 0 Wiring Normal 1 |1 Door0 Alarm 1 2 - Normal 1 |3 - Normal 1 4 - Normal 1 |5 - Normal 1 6 - Normal 1 |7 - Normal 1 8 - Normal 1 |9 - Normal 1 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------

Related Operation

Table 31-7 lists the related operations for setting the ESC digital parameters.



361

Table 31-7 Related operations for setting the ESC digital parameters


Query the alarm information display esc alarm Only valid for the H302ESC,H303ESC, H304ESC, andH801ESC

Query the ESC systemconfiguration parameters

display esc systemparameter

Only valid for the H302ESC,H303ESC, H304ESC, andH801ESC

Query the ESC power supplyinformation

display esc power Only valid for the H302ESC,H303ESC, H304ESC, andH801ESC

Query the customized alarminformation of the digitalparameters

display outside-digitalprivate-alarm

Only valid for the H302ESC,H303ESC, H304ESC,H801ESC, Power4875,Power4875L, DIS, andPSE158

31.9 Configuring the Fan Alarm ReportingThis topic describes how to configure the reporting of all the fan alarms to the control unit.

PrerequisiteThe EMU of the fan tray must be in the position and work in the normal state.

Procedure

Step 1 Run the interface emu command to enter the FAN environment monitoring mode.

Step 2 Run the fan alarmset command to configure the fan alarm reporting.

Step 3 Run the display fan system parameter command to query the fan alarm information.

----End

ExampleTo forbid the reporting of the fan block alarm, do as follows:

huawei(config)#interface emu 1huawei(config-if-fan-1)#fan alarmset block forbid Send command to environment monitor board ,please waiting for the ack...huawei(config-if-fan-1)# Execute command successfulhuawei(config-if-fan-1)#display fan system parameter EMU ID: 1 Fan configration parameter: ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- fan timing mode: auto timing ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- alarm_name alarm(permit/forbid)



362

read temperature sensor fault permit fan block forbid temperature high permit board fault permit ----------------------------------------------------------------------------

Related OperationTable 31-8 lists the related operations for configuring the fan alarm reporting.

Table 31-8 Related operations for configuring the fan alarm reporting


Query the runninginformation of a fan tray

display fan environmentinfo

FAN environmentmonitoring mode

Query the alarm informationof a fan tray

display fan alarm FAN environmentmonitoring mode

31.10 Setting the Fan Speed Adjustment ModeThis topic describes how to set the fan speed adjustment mode. If the fan is not in the automaticspeed adjustment mode, the flow of air is more when the temperature is low or normal.

PrerequisiteThe EMU of the fan tray must be in the position and work in the normal state.

ContextThe fan tray of the UA5000 supports the following fan speed adjustment modes:

l Automaticl Manual

By default, the mode is manual with the fan speed level 5. It is recommended that you changethe mode to automatic.

Procedure


Step 2 Run the fan speed command to set the fan speed adjustment mode.

Step 3 Run the display fan system parameter command to query the set parameters.

----End

ExampleTo set the fan speed adjustment mode to automatic, do as follows:

huawei(config)#interface emu 1huawei(config-if-fan-1)#fan speed mode automatic



363

Send command to environment monitor board ,please waiting for the ack...huawei(config-if-fan-1)# Execute command successfulhuawei(config-if-fan-1)#display fan system parameter EMU ID: 1 Fan configration parameter: ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- fan timing mode: auto timing ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- alarm_name alarm(permit/forbid) read temperature sensor fault permit fan block forbid temperature high permit board fault permit ----------------------------------------------------------------------------

Related OperationTable 31-9 lists the related operations for setting the fan speed adjustment mode.

Table 31-9 Related operations for setting the fan speed adjustment mode


Set the fan speed fan speed adjust You can set the fan speed inthe manual fan speedadjustment mode.

Configure the reporting of allthe fan alarms to the controlunit

fan alarmset -

Query the alarm informationof a fan tray

display fan alarm -

31.11 Setting the Fan SpeedThis topic describes how to set the fan speed.

Prerequisitel The EMU of the fan tray must be in the position and work in the normal state.l The fan speed adjustment mode must be set to manual.

ContextThe fan speed levels are 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5. Level 0 indicates the lowest fan speed and level 5indicates the highest fan speed.

l The rated fan speed can meet the heat dissipation requirement of the system in the permittedhighest ambient temperature.

l When the fan runs at a low speed, the damage to the fan is reduced and its life is prolonged.l When the system is abnormal or one fan is faulty, the normal fans can switch to the high

speed to increase the air flow so that the heat is dissipated.



364

l Reduction of the fan speed reduces the dust absorption and prevents the air filter from beingblocked.

l You can set the fan speed in the manual fan speed adjustment mode.

Procedure


Step 2 Run the fan speed command to set the fan speed.

Step 3 Run the display fan system parameter command to query the set parameters.

----End

ExampleTo set the fan speed to 3, do as follows:

huawei(config)#interface emu 1huawei(config-if-fan-1)#fan speed adjust 3 Send command to environment monitor board ,please waiting for the ack...huawei(config-if-fan-1)# Execute command successfulhuawei(config-if-fan-1)#display fan system parameter

EMU ID: 1 Fan configration parameter: ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- fan timing mode: manual timing fan speed level: 3 ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- alarm_name alarm(permit/forbid) read temperature sensor fault permit fan block forbid temperature high permit board fault permit ----------------------------------------------------------------------------

Related OperationTable 31-10 lists the related operations for setting the fan speed.

Table 31-10 Related operations for setting the fan speed


Set the fan speed adjustment mode fan speed mode

Set the reporting of all the fan alarminformation to the control unit

fan alarmset

Query the alarm information of a fan tray display fan alarm

31.12 Setting the Power Supply ParametersThis topic describes how to set the parameters of the power shelf in the UA5000 to ensure thenormal running of the power shelf.



365

ContextTable 31-11 lists the configuration commands of the power shelf.

Table 31-11 Configuration commands of the power shelf

Function Command Remarks

The configuration commands supported by the Power4875, Power4875L, Power4845, andPower4820 are as follows:

Set the battery parameters power battery Set the charging current-limiting coefficient, timedeven charging duration,number, and capacity of thebattery sets.

Set the battery chargingparameters

power charge Set the battery chargingparameters, including thecharging mode and chargingvoltage.

Set the environmentparameters of the powersupply

power environment Set the upper and lower alarmthresholds, and upper andlower measurementthresholds of the temperatureor humidity of the powersupply monitoring. Thus, analarm is generated when thepower supply works in theenvironment that does notmeet the preset criteria, toensure the normal running ofthe device.

Set the number of the powermodules

power module-num The Power4845 supports amaximum of three rectifiermodules.

Set the parameters of thepower module

power module-parameter Set the on and off states of thePower4845. The default stateis on. That is, the powermodule is in the workingstate.



366


Set the power-offparameters of the powersupply

power off Set the power-off thresholdsof the load and battery set.l The power-off types of

the power supply are theload power off and thebattery set power off.

l When the mains supply iscut off, the battery setsupplies the power to theshelf.

l When the voltage of thebattery set is lower thanthe power-off threshold ofthe load, the system cutsoff the power supply tothe load.

l When the voltage of thebattery set is lower thanthe power-off threshold ofthe battery set, the systemcuts off the power supplyto the battery set.

Set the standby digitalparameters of the powersupply

power outside_digital Set the valid level, name, andcustomized alarm of theextended digital parametersto monitor the digitalparameters of the device inreal time.

Set the power distributionparameters of the powersupply

power supply-parameter Set the alarm thresholds ofAC over-voltage, AC under-voltage, DC over-voltage,and DC under-voltage. Thus,when the AC voltage or DCvoltage is abnormal, therectifier module can poweroff automatically to protectthe system.

The configuration commands only supported by the Power4875L, Power4845, andPower4820 are as follows:

Set the battery testparameters

power battery-test Set the auto-test periodparameter of the battery andthe end voltage of the batterydischarging to implement theauto-discharging test of thebattery.



367


Set the high-temperaturepower-off parameters of thepower supply

power temperature-off Set the high-temperaturepower-off parameter for theload or battery. Thus, the loador battery powers offautomatically in the highworking temperature for self-protection.

The configuration commands only supported by the Power4875 and Power4875L are asfollows:

Set the standby analogparameters of the powersupply

power outside_analog Set the upper and lower alarmthresholds, upper and lowermeasurement thresholds,sensor type, unit, name, andcustomized alarm of theanalog parameters.

The configuration commands only supported by the Power4875L are as follows:

Set the installation time ofthe battery of thePower4875L system

power batteryinstall Set the installation time of thebattery of the Power4875Lsystem. Thus, the battery canbe replaced in time when thebattery life expires.

Set certain parameters of thePower4875L system

power default When you need to initializecertain parameters of thePower4875L system, run thiscommand.

When you set the parameters, ensure that the following conditions are met:

l DC over-voltage voltage > battery even charging voltage > battery float charging voltage> DC under-voltage voltage > load power-off voltage > battery power-off voltage

l DC over-voltage > (float charging voltage + 2 V)l Float charging voltage > (DC under-voltage + 2 V)

NOTE

Run the following commands to set the preceding parameters:l Run the power charge command to set the even charging voltage and float charging voltage of the

battery.l Run the power battery parameter command to set the DC over-voltage and under-voltage.l Run the power temperature-off command to set the load power-off voltage of the battery and the

power-off voltage of the battery set.

ProcedureStep 1 Run the commands listed in Table 31-11 to configure the EMU of the power shelf.

----End



368

ExampleTo set the charging current-limiting coefficient to 0.2, timed even charging duration to 60 days,number of battery sets to 1, and capacity of battery set 0 to 130 AH, do as follows:

huawei(config)#interface emu 3huawei(config-if-power4875L-0)#power battery parameter 1 0.2 60 130 Send command to environment monitor board ,please waiting for the ack...huawei(config-if-power4875L-0)# Execute command successful

Related OperationTable 31-12 lists the related operations for configuring the EMU of the power shelf.

Table 31-12 Related operations for configuring the EMU of the power shelf


The configuration commands supported by the Power4875, Power4875L, Power4845, andPower4820 are as follows:

Query the alarm information ofthe power supply

display power alarm

Query the environmentinformation of the power supply

display power environment info

Query the environmentconfiguration parameters of thepower supply

display power environment parameter

Query the running information ofthe power supply

display power run info

Query the system configurationparameters of the power supply

display power system parameter

The configuration commands only supported by the Power4845 and Power4875L are asfollows:

Query the battery test parameters display power battery-test info

The configuration commands only supported by the Power4875L are as follows:

Query the installation time of thePower4875L battery

display power batteryinstalltime

Query the current use status of thePower4875L battery

display power battery-test-times

Query the current running time ofthe Power4875L

display power current-time

Query the system information ofthe Power4875L

display power info



369


Query the related information ofthe Power4875L

display power module-time



370

32 Configuring the Integrated Data andVoice Networking

About This Chapter

This topic describes the related operation for configuring the integrated data and voicenetworking of the UA5000.

32.1 NetworkingThe UA5000 accesses the data and voice service through the CSRI and ETDB boards. It transmitsthe IP service upstream to the IP network through the IPM board, and transmits the traditionalvoice service to the PSTN network through the PVM board.

32.2 PrerequisitesBefore configuring the integrated data and voice networking, ensure that the UA5000 meets theconfiguration prerequisites.

32.3 Data Plan (IPM)Before the configuration, it is recommended that you implement the service data plan for therequired broadband services such as the ADSL access service and the SHDSL access service.When configuring the service, configure according to the planned data.

32.4 Data Plan (PVM)Before the configuration, it is recommended that you implement the service data plan for therequired voice services such as the ISDN service. When configuring the service, configureaccording to the planned data.

32.5 Configuration Procedure (IPM)Log in to the IPM through the serial port or the Telnet mode to configure the broadband servicesof the UA5000 according to the planned broadband service data.

32.6 Configuration Procedure (PVM)Log in to the PVM through the serial port or the Telnet mode to configure the narrowbandservices of the UA5000 according to the planned voice service data.

32.7 Verification

UA5000 Universal Access UnitConfiguration Guide-PVM CLI 32 Configuring the Integrated Data and Voice Networking


371

After the broadband service is configured successfully, the subscribers should be able to accessthe Internet through their PCs. After the voice service is configured successfully, the subscribersshould be able to call each other.



372

32.1 NetworkingThe UA5000 accesses the data and voice service through the CSRI and ETDB boards. It transmitsthe IP service upstream to the IP network through the IPM board, and transmits the traditionalvoice service to the PSTN network through the PVM board.

Figure 32-1 shows the integrated data and voice networking of the UA5000.

Figure 32-1 Integrated data and voice networking of the UA5000

NT1

ISDNPhone

ISDNPhone

phone

BRAS

TVPC

STB

Splitter

MGC

DHCP Server

NMS

IPTVServer

OSS

phone phone

PBX

V5

Router

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17IP

MB

IP

MB

PV

MB

PV

MB

CSR

ED

TB

ED

TB

DS

LD

TS

SB

PW

XB

PW

XB

ED

TB

SD

LB

SD

LBI

CSR

I

32.2 PrerequisitesBefore configuring the integrated data and voice networking, ensure that the UA5000 meets theconfiguration prerequisites.



373

The prerequisites for configuring the integrated data and voice networking of the UA5000 areas follows:

l The hardware commissioning must be complete, and the system must be ready for serviceconfiguration.

l The modem must be connected and must be in the normal state.

l The upper layer devices, including the BRAS, DHCP sever, multicast sever, MGC, andNMS workstation must work in the normal state.

32.3 Data Plan (IPM)Before the configuration, it is recommended that you implement the service data plan for therequired broadband services such as the ADSL access service and the SHDSL access service.When configuring the service, configure according to the planned data.

Table 32-1 provides the data plan for configuring the integrated data and voice networking ofthe UA5000.

Table 32-1 Data plan for configuring the integrated data and voice networking

Item Data Remarks

Upstream port Port number: 0/2/0; Rate: 100 Mbit/s; Flowcontrol switch state: enabled

If the upstream port is aGE port, use the defaultconfiguration.

Inband NMS NM VLAN ID: 31; type: standard The inband NMSmanages the PVMboard through thepacket transmission ofthe IPM board.

IP address of the L3 interface: 10.5.24.3

IP address of the next hop router: 10.5.24.2

IP address of the NMS host: 10.140.5.79

l Community name: public, with theread-only right.

l Community name: private, with theread-write right.

l Enable the standard SNMP trapmessage.

-

ADSL service Subscriber access port number: 0/7/0–0/7/31

-

VPI: 8; VCI: 35

VLAN ID: 32-63; type: Mux

Traffic profile: Upstream bandwidth 512kbit/s, downstream bandwidth 1 Mbit/s

Upstream port: 0/2/0

Traffic entry priority: 1



374

Item Data Remarks

SHDSL service Subscriber access port number: 0/8/0–0/8/15

-

VPI: 8; VCI: 35

VLAN ID: 64-79; type: Mux

Traffic profile: 1 Mbit/s


Multicast service VLAN ID: 104; type: Smart The multicast serviceuses the DHCP mode toobtain the IP address.The priority of themulticast traffic entry ishigher than the priorityof the Internet accesssubscriber.

Subscriber access port number: 0/7/0–0/7/31

VPI: 0; VCI: 35


IP address of the L3 interface: 10.2.2.1

IP addresses of the DHCP server: 10.2.2.2,10.2.2.3

IP address of the multicast program:224.1.1.1

Right profile name: profile0

Program name: program1

Traffic entry priority: 5

Internet access mode xDSL service: VPI 8, VCI 35, PPPoEmode, set the modem to the bridge mode.

The xDSL services usethe PC dialing method.If the modem dialingmethod is required, setthe modem to thebridged PPPoE mode.

Multicast service: VPI 0, VCI 35, IPoEmode, set the modem to the bridge mode.

32.4 Data Plan (PVM)Before the configuration, it is recommended that you implement the service data plan for therequired voice services such as the ISDN service. When configuring the service, configureaccording to the planned data.

Table 32-2 provides the data plan for configuring the integrated data and voice networking ofthe UA5000.



375

Table 32-2 Data plan for configuring the integrated data and voice networking

Item Data

MG interface mgid: 0

code: text

Protocol: H.248

MG port: 2944; MGC: 2944

Whether the termination ID on the MG interface supports thelayering configuration: Yes

System parameter Overseas version flag: Britain

IP address Signaling IP address of MG interface 0 of the UA5000:10.140.24.10/24

Media IP address of MG interface 0 of the UA5000:10.140.24.10/24

Default gateway of MG interface 0 of the UA5000:10.140.24.1/24

IP address of the MGC: 10.140.25.10/24

(Optional)Type ofservice (ToS) strategy

IP priority and ToS priority: Default values

ISDN BRA service IUAlink parameters

IUA link set number: 1

IUA link number: 15

Local port number: 1401

Peer port number: 1400

ISDN PRA service IUAlink parameters

IUA link set number: 2

IUA link number: 1

Local port number: 1402

Peer port number: 1404

32.5 Configuration Procedure (IPM)Log in to the IPM through the serial port or the Telnet mode to configure the broadband servicesof the UA5000 according to the planned broadband service data.

Procedure

Step 1 Query the host software version.huawei(config)#display language



376

NOTE

If the queried host version does not match the planned host version, see the upgrade guide to update thehost software to the planned version.

Step 2 Query and confirm the board.huawei(config)#display board 0huawei(config)#board confirm 0

Step 3 Set the upstream port of the UA5000.huawei(config)#interface ipm 0/2huawei(config-if-ipm-0/2)#speed 0 100huawei(config-if-ipm-0/2)#flow-control 0huawei(config-if-ipm-0/2)#quit

Step 4 Configure a log host.huawei(config)#loghost add 10.188.56.40 syslog-1huawei(config)#loghost activate ip 10.188.56.40huawei(config)#loghost add 10.188.57.40 syslog-2huawei(config)#loghost activate ip 10.188.57.40

Step 5 Add a standard VLAN, and assign FE ports 6 and 7 and IP upstream port 0 to the VLAN.huawei(config)#vlan 1001 standardhuawei(config)#port vlan 1001 0/2 0huawei(config)#port vlan 1001 0/2 6huawei(config)#port vlan 1001 0/2 7

Step 6 Configure the inband NMS.huawei(config)#vlan 31 standardhuawei(config)#port vlan 31 0/2 0huawei(config)#interface vlanif 31huawei(conffig-if-vlanif31)#ip address 10.5.24.3 255.255.255.0huawei(conffig-if-vlanif31)#quithuawei(config)#ip route-static 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 10.5.24.2huawei(config)#snmp-agent community read publichuawei(config)#snmp-agent community write privatehuawei(config)#snmp-agent trap enable standardhuawei(config)#snmp-agent target-host trap address 10.140.5.79 securityname privatehuawei(config)#snmp-agent trap source vlanif 31

Step 7 Configure the ADSL service.huawei(config)#vlan 32 to 63 muxhuawei(config)#port vlan 32 to 63 0/2 0huawei(config)#display traffic table from-index 0huawei(config)#traffic table index 7 ip car 10240 priority 1 priority-policy tag-In-Packagehuawei(config)#service-port vlan 32 adsl 0/7/0 vpi 8 vci 35 rx-cttr 7 tx-cttr 7huawei(config)#service-port vlan 33 adsl 0/7/1 vpi 8 vci 35 rx-cttr 7 tx-cttr 7huawei(config)#service-port vlan 34 adsl 0/7/2 vpi 8 vci 35 rx-cttr 7 tx-cttr 7huawei(config)#service-port vlan 35 adsl 0/7/3 vpi 8 vci 35 rx-cttr 7 tx-cttr 7huawei(config)#service-port vlan 36 adsl 0/7/4 vpi 8 vci 35 rx-cttr 7 tx-cttr 7huawei(config)#service-port vlan 37 adsl 0/7/5 vpi 8 vci 35 rx-cttr 7 tx-cttr 7huawei(config)#service-port vlan 38 adsl 0/7/6 vpi 8 vci 35 rx-cttr 7 tx-cttr 7huawei(config)#service-port vlan 39 adsl 0/7/7 vpi 8 vci 35 rx-cttr 7 tx-cttr 7huawei(config)#service-port vlan 40 adsl 0/7/8 vpi 8 vci 35 rx-cttr 7 tx-cttr 7huawei(config)#service-port vlan 41 adsl 0/7/9 vpi 8 vci 35 rx-cttr 7 tx-cttr 7huawei(config)#service-port vlan 42 adsl 0/7/10 vpi 8 vci 35 rx-cttr 7 tx-cttr 7huawei(config)#service-port vlan 43 adsl 0/7/11 vpi 8 vci 35 rx-cttr 7 tx-cttr 7huawei(config)#service-port vlan 44 adsl 0/7/12 vpi 8 vci 35 rx-cttr 7 tx-cttr 7huawei(config)#service-port vlan 45 adsl 0/7/13 vpi 8 vci 35 rx-cttr 7 tx-cttr 7huawei(config)#service-port vlan 46 adsl 0/7/14 vpi 8 vci 35 rx-cttr 7 tx-cttr 7huawei(config)#service-port vlan 47 adsl 0/7/15 vpi 8 vci 35 rx-cttr 7 tx-cttr 7huawei(config)#service-port vlan 48 adsl 0/7/16 vpi 8 vci 35 rx-cttr 7 tx-cttr 7huawei(config)#service-port vlan 49 adsl 0/7/17 vpi 8 vci 35 rx-cttr 7 tx-cttr 7huawei(config)#service-port vlan 50 adsl 0/7/18 vpi 8 vci 35 rx-cttr 7 tx-cttr 7huawei(config)#service-port vlan 51 adsl 0/7/19 vpi 8 vci 35 rx-cttr 7 tx-cttr 7



377

huawei(config)#service-port vlan 52 adsl 0/7/20 vpi 8 vci 35 rx-cttr 7 tx-cttr 7huawei(config)#service-port vlan 53 adsl 0/7/21 vpi 8 vci 35 rx-cttr 7 tx-cttr 7huawei(config)#service-port vlan 54 adsl 0/7/22 vpi 8 vci 35 rx-cttr 7 tx-cttr 7huawei(config)#service-port vlan 55 adsl 0/7/23 vpi 8 vci 35 rx-cttr 7 tx-cttr 7huawei(config)#service-port vlan 56 adsl 0/7/24 vpi 8 vci 35 rx-cttr 7 tx-cttr 7huawei(config)#service-port vlan 57 adsl 0/7/25 vpi 8 vci 35 rx-cttr 7 tx-cttr 7huawei(config)#service-port vlan 58 adsl 0/7/26 vpi 8 vci 35 rx-cttr 7 tx-cttr 7huawei(config)#service-port vlan 59 adsl 0/7/27 vpi 8 vci 35 rx-cttr 7 tx-cttr 7huawei(config)#service-port vlan 60 adsl 0/7/28 vpi 8 vci 35 rx-cttr 7 tx-cttr 7huawei(config)#service-port vlan 61 adsl 0/7/29 vpi 8 vci 35 rx-cttr 7 tx-cttr 7huawei(config)#service-port vlan 62 adsl 0/7/30 vpi 8 vci 35 rx-cttr 7 tx-cttr 7huawei(config)#service-port vlan 63 adsl 0/7/31 vpi 8 vci 35 rx-cttr 7 tx-cttr 7huawei(config)#adsl line-profile add 3 Command: adsl line-profile add 3 Start adding profile Press 'Q' to quit the current configuration and new configuration will be neglected > Do you want to name the profile (y/n) [n]: > Please choose default value type 0-adsl 1-adsl2+ (0~1) [0]: > Will you set basic configuration for modem? (y/n)[n]: > Please select channel mode 0-interleaved 1-fast (0~1) [0]: > Will you set interleaved delay? (y/n)[n]: > Please select form of transmit rate adaptation in downstream: > 0-fixed 1-adaptAtStartup 2-adaptAtRuntime (0~2) [1]:1 > Will you set SNR margin for modem? (y/n)[n]:y > Target SNR margin in downstream(0~15 dB) [6]: > Minimum SNR margin in downstream (0~6 dB) [0]: > Maximum SNR margin in downstream (6~31 dB) [31]: > Target SNR margin in upstream (0~15 dB) [6]: > Minimum SNR margin in upstream (0~6 dB) [0]: > Maximum SNR margin in upstream (6~31 dB) [31]: > Will you set parameters for rate? (y/n)[n]:y > Minimum transmit rate in downstream (32~8160 Kbps) [32]: > Maximum transmit rate in downstream (32~8160 Kbps) [6144]:1024 > Minimum transmit rate in upstream (32~896 Kbps) [32]: > Maximum transmit rate in upstream (32~896 Kbps) [640]:512 Add profile 3 successfully huawei(config)#interface adsl 0/7huawei(config-if-adsl-0/7)#alarm-config all 1huawei(config-if-adsl-0/7)#deactivate allhuawei(config-if-adsl-0/7)#activate all profile-index 3

Step 8 Configure the SHDSL service.huawei(config)#vlan 64 to 79 muxhuawei(config)#port vlan 64 to 79 0/2 0huawei(config)#display traffic table from-index 0huawei(config)#service-port vlan 64 shdsl 0/8/0 vpi 8 vci 35 rx-cttr 6 tx-cttr 6huawei(config)#service-port vlan 65 shdsl 0/8/1 vpi 8 vci 35 rx-cttr 6 tx-cttr 6huawei(config)#service-port vlan 66 shdsl 0/8/2 vpi 8 vci 35 rx-cttr 6 tx-cttr 6huawei(config)#service-port vlan 67 shdsl 0/8/3 vpi 8 vci 35 rx-cttr 6 tx-cttr 6huawei(config)#service-port vlan 68 shdsl 0/8/4 vpi 8 vci 35 rx-cttr 6 tx-cttr 6huawei(config)#service-port vlan 69 shdsl 0/8/5 vpi 8 vci 35 rx-cttr 6 tx-cttr 6huawei(config)#service-port vlan 70 shdsl 0/8/6 vpi 8 vci 35 rx-cttr 6 tx-cttr 6huawei(config)#service-port vlan 71 shdsl 0/8/7 vpi 8 vci 35 rx-cttr 6 tx-cttr 6huawei(config)#service-port vlan 72 shdsl 0/8/8 vpi 8 vci 35 rx-cttr 6 tx-cttr 6 huawei(config)#service-port vlan 73 shdsl 0/8/9 vpi 8 vci 35 rx-cttr 6 tx-cttr 6 huawei(config)#service-port vlan 74 shdsl 0/8/10 vpi 8 vci 35 rx-cttr 6 tx-cttr 6 huawei(config)#service-port vlan 75 shdsl 0/8/11 vpi 8 vci 35 rx-cttr 6 tx-cttr 6 huawei(config)#service-port vlan 76 shdsl 0/8/12 vpi 8 vci 35 rx-cttr 6 tx-cttr 6 huawei(config)#service-port vlan 77 shdsl 0/8/13 vpi 8 vci 35 rx-cttr 6 tx-cttr 6



378

huawei(config)#service-port vlan 78 shdsl 0/8/14 vpi 8 vci 35 rx-cttr 6 tx-cttr 6 huawei(config)#service-port vlan 79 shdsl 0/8/15 vpi 8 vci 35 rx-cttr 6 tx-cttr 6 huawei(config)#shdsl line-profile add 2Command: shdsl line-profile add Start adding profile 2 During inputting,press 'Q' to quit,then settings at this time will be ignored > G.SHDSL interface mode of line (1--two wire;2--four wire)[1]: > Do you use the default data to create a line profile?(y/n)[y]:n > G.SHDSL minimum line rate (Value must be multiple of 64,except 2312kbps,192~2304,2312 kbps)[2048]:1024 > G.SHDSL maximum line rate (Value must be multiple of 64,except 2312kbps,1024~2304,2312 kbps)[2048]:1024 > Power Spectral Density mode (1--symmetric;2--asymmetric)[1]: > Transmission mode (1--G.991.2 Annex A;2--G.991.2 Annex B; 3--support Annex A&B)[3]: > Remote enable (1--enabled;2--disabled)[1]: > Probe enable (1--disabled;2--enabled)[1]: > Do you config the target SNR margin?(y/n)[n]: Add profile 2 successfully huawei(config)#interface sdl 0/7huawei(config-if-sdl-0/7)#alarm-config all 1huawei(config-if-sdl-0/7)#deactivate allhuawei(config-if-sdl-0/7)#activate all 2

Step 9 Configure the multicast service.huawei(config)#vlan 104 smarthuawei(config)#port vlan 104 0/2 0huawei(config)#traffic table index 8 ip car 10240 priority 5 priority-policy tag-In-Packagehuawei(config)#service-port vlan 104 adsl 0/7/0 vpi 0 vci 35 rx-cttr 8 tx-cttr 8huawei(config)#service-port vlan 104 adsl 0/7/1 vpi 0 vci 35 rx-cttr 8 tx-cttr 8huawei(config)#service-port vlan 104 adsl 0/7/2 vpi 0 vci 35 rx-cttr 8 tx-cttr 8huawei(config)#service-port vlan 104 adsl 0/7/3 vpi 0 vci 35 rx-cttr 8 tx-cttr 8huawei(config)#service-port vlan 104 adsl 0/7/4 vpi 0 vci 35 rx-cttr 8 tx-cttr 8huawei(config)#service-port vlan 104 adsl 0/7/5 vpi 0 vci 35 rx-cttr 8 tx-cttr 8huawei(config)#service-port vlan 104 adsl 0/7/6 vpi 0 vci 35 rx-cttr 8 tx-cttr 8huawei(config)#service-port vlan 104 adsl 0/7/7 vpi 0 vci 35 rx-cttr 8 tx-cttr 8huawei(config)#service-port vlan 104 adsl 0/7/8 vpi 0 vci 35 rx-cttr 8 tx-cttr 8huawei(config)#service-port vlan 104 adsl 0/7/9 vpi 0 vci 35 rx-cttr 8 tx-cttr 8huawei(config)#service-port vlan 104 adsl 0/7/10 vpi 0 vci 35 rx-cttr 8 tx-cttr 8huawei(config)#service-port vlan 104 adsl 0/7/11 vpi 0 vci 35 rx-cttr 8 tx-cttr 8huawei(config)#service-port vlan 104 adsl 0/7/12 vpi 0 vci 35 rx-cttr 8 tx-cttr 8huawei(config)#service-port vlan 104 adsl 0/7/13 vpi 0 vci 35 rx-cttr 8 tx-cttr 8huawei(config)#service-port vlan 104 adsl 0/7/14 vpi 0 vci 35 rx-cttr 8 tx-cttr 8huawei(config)#service-port vlan 104 adsl 0/7/15 vpi 0 vci 35 rx-cttr 8 tx-cttr 8huawei(config)#service-port vlan 104 adsl 0/7/16 vpi 0 vci 35 rx-cttr 8 tx-cttr 8huawei(config)#service-port vlan 104 adsl 0/7/17 vpi 0 vci 35 rx-cttr 8 tx-cttr 8huawei(config)#service-port vlan 104 adsl 0/7/18 vpi 0 vci 35 rx-cttr 8 tx-cttr 8huawei(config)#service-port vlan 104 adsl 0/7/19 vpi 0 vci 35 rx-cttr 8 tx-cttr 8huawei(config)#service-port vlan 104 adsl 0/7/20 vpi 0 vci 35 rx-cttr 8 tx-cttr 8huawei(config)#service-port vlan 104 adsl 0/7/21 vpi 0 vci 35 rx-cttr 8 tx-cttr 8huawei(config)#service-port vlan 104 adsl 0/7/22 vpi 0 vci 35 rx-cttr 8 tx-cttr 8huawei(config)#service-port vlan 104 adsl 0/7/23 vpi 0 vci 35 rx-cttr 8 tx-cttr 8huawei(config)#service-port vlan 104 adsl 0/7/24 vpi 0 vci 35 rx-cttr 8 tx-cttr 8huawei(config)#service-port vlan 104 adsl 0/7/25 vpi 0 vci 35 rx-cttr 8 tx-cttr 8huawei(config)#service-port vlan 104 adsl 0/7/26 vpi 0 vci 35 rx-cttr 8 tx-cttr 8huawei(config)#service-port vlan 104 adsl 0/7/27 vpi 0 vci 35 rx-cttr 8 tx-cttr 8



379

huawei(config)#service-port vlan 104 adsl 0/7/28 vpi 0 vci 35 rx-cttr 8 tx-cttr 8huawei(config)#service-port vlan 104 adsl 0/7/29 vpi 0 vci 35 rx-cttr 8 tx-cttr 8huawei(config)#service-port vlan 104 adsl 0/7/30 vpi 0 vci 35 rx-cttr 8 tx-cttr 8huawei(config)#service-port vlan 104 adsl 0/7/31 vpi 0 vci 35 rx-cttr 8 tx-cttr 8huawei(config)#dhcp mode layer-3 option-60huawei(config)#dhcp-server 2 ip 10.2.2.2 10.2.2.3huawei(config)#dhcp domain video //Refer to the actual DHCP option 60 threshold.huawei(config-dhcp-domain-video)#dhcp-server 2huawei(config)#interface vlanif 104huawei(config-if-vlanif104)#ip address 10.2.2.1 24huawei(config-if-vlanif104)#dhcp domain video gateway 10.2.2.1huawei(config)#interface ipm 0/2huawei(config-if-ipm-0/2)#native-vlan 0 vlan 104 huawei(config-if-ipm-0/2)#quit huawei(config)#btvhuawei(config-btv)#igmp uplink-port 0/2/0 huawei(config-btv)#igmp video-port vpi 0 vci 35huawei(config-btv)#igmp program add name program1 ip 224.1.1.1 vlan 104 bind 0/2/0huawei(config-btv)#igmp profile profile0 program-name program1 watchhuawei(config-btv)#igmp user add slot 0/7 authhuawei(config-btv)#igmp user bind-profile slot 0/7 profile-name profile0

Step 10 Configure the Internet access mode (configure the modem).

l PPPoE mode

– Set the modem to the bridge mode.

– Set the VPI/VCI of the WAN port on the modem to 8/35.

– Install the PPPoE dialup software on the computer terminal, and set the user name andpassword.

l IPoE mode

– Set the modem to the bridge mode.

– Set the VPI/VCI of the WAN port on the modem to 0/35.

----End

32.6 Configuration Procedure (PVM)Log in to the PVM through the serial port or the Telnet mode to configure the narrowbandservices of the UA5000 according to the planned voice service data.

Procedure

Step 1 Configure the system networking mode to the integrated access networking.huawei(config)#working mode integrated

Step 2 Query the host software version.huawei(config)#display language

NOTE

If the version does not match, see the version upgrading guide to update the host software to a properversion.

Step 3 Set the IP address of service network port.huawei(config)#interface eth huawei(interface-eth)#ip address 10.140.24.10 255.255.255.0 10.140.24.1 vlan_tag 1001 huawei(interface-eth)#display ip address



380

Step 4 Configure the QoS IP strategy.huawei(config)#qos ip 10.140.24.10 strategy tos

Step 5 Configure the overseas version flag.huawei(config)#system parameters 1 8huawei(config)#display system parameters 1

Step 6 Configure the VoIP voice service.huawei(config)#board add 0/6 a32huawei(config)#board confirm 0/6huawei(config)#display board 0huawei(config)#interface h248 0 Are you sure to add MG interface? (y/n)[n]:y huawei(config-if-h248-0)#if-h248 attribute mgip 10.140.24.10 mgport 2944 code text transfer udp domainName UA5000.com mgcip_1 10.140.25.10 mgcport_1 2944 mg-media-ip 10.140.24.10 start-nego tiate-versi 2huawei(config-if-h248-0)#display if-h248 attribute huawei(config-if-h248-0)#display mg-software parameter 0huawei(config-if-h248-0)#reset Are you sure to reset MG interface?(y/n)[n]:y huawei(config-if-h248-0)#quithuawei(config)#display if-h248 all huawei(config)#esl userhuawei(config-esl-user)#mgpstnuser batadd 0/6/0 0/6/31 0 telno 12340001huawei(config-esl-user)#display mgpstnuser 0/6huawei(config-esl-user)#quithuawei(config)#save

Step 7 Configure the ISDN BRA service.huawei(config)#board add 0/12 h601dsldhuawei(config)#board confirm 0/12huawei(config)#display board 0huawei(config)#sigtranhuawei(config-sigtran)#iua-linkset add 1 0 pendingtime 4huawei(config-sigtran)#iua-link add 15 1 1401 10.140.24.10 1400 10.140.25.10huawei(config-sigtran)#display iua-link attributehuawei(config-sigtran)#display iua-link statehuawei(config-sigtran)#quithuawei(config)#esl userhuawei(config-esl-user)#mgbrauser batadd 0/12/0 0/12/1 1 15 huawei(config-esl-user)#display port state 0/12 huawei(config-esl-user)#display mgbrauser 0/12huawei(config-esl-user)#quithuawei(config)#save

Step 8 Configure the ISDN PRA service.huawei(config)#board add 0/15 h601edtbhuawei(config)#board confirm 0/15 huawei(config)#display board 0 huawei(config)#interface edt 0/15huawei(config-if-edt-0/13)#runmode indephuawei(config-if-edt-0/13)#quithuawei(config)#sigtranhuawei(config-sigtran)#iua-linkset add 2 0 pendingtime 4huawei(config-sigtran)#iua-link add 1 2 1402 10.140.24.10 1404 10.140.25.10huawei(config-sigtran)#display iua-link attributehuawei(config-sigtran)#display iua-link statehuawei(config-sigtran)#quithuawei(config)#esl userhuawei(config-esl-user)#mgprauser add 0/15/0 2 10huawei(config-esl-user)#display port state 0/15/0huawei(config-esl-user)#display mgprauser 0/15huawei(config-esl-user)#quithuawei(config)#save

----End



381

32.7 VerificationAfter the broadband service is configured successfully, the subscribers should be able to accessthe Internet through their PCs. After the voice service is configured successfully, the subscribersshould be able to call each other.



382

A Acronyms and Abbreviations

A

ADSL asymmetric digital subscriber line

AG access gateway

B

BE best effort

BRA basic rate access

BRI basic rate interface

C

CCS common channel signaling

CCITT International Telegraph and Telephone ConsultativeCommittee

CLI command line interface

D

DNS domain name server

DSL digital subscriber line board

DSCP differentiated service codepoint

DSP digital signal processor

DTMF dual-tone multifrequency

E

UA5000 Universal Access UnitConfiguration Guide-PVM CLI A Acronyms and Abbreviations


383

EPON Ethernet passive optical network

F

FE fast Ethernet

FoIP fax over IP

FSK frequency shift keying

FTP File Transfer Protocol

G

GE gigabit Ethernet

GPON Gigabit-capable Passive Optical Network

H

HW highway

I

IP Internet Protocol

ISDN integrated services digital network

IUA ISDN Q.921-User Adaptation Layer

M

MAC media access control

MDU multi dwelling unit

MG media gateway

MGC media gateway controller

MGCP Media Gateway Control Protocol

MoIP modem over IP

N

NGN next generation network

NM network management

NMS network management system



384

NT1 network termination 1

O

OAM operations, administration and maintenance

OLT optical line terminal

ONU optical network unit

P optical network unit

PBX private branch exchange

PCM pulse code modulation

POS passive optical splitter

POTS plain old telephone service

PRA primary rate access

PRI primary rate interface

PSTN public switched telephone network

PVM packet voice module

Q

QoS quality of service

R

RTP Real-time Transfer Protocol

S

SCTP Stream Control Transmission Protocol

SIGTRAN signaling transport

SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol

T

TCP Transmission Control Protocol

TFTP Trivial File Transfer Protocol



385

U

UDP User Datagram Protocol

V

VAG virtual access gateway

VLAN virtual local area network

VoIP voice over IP

VQE voice quality enhancements



386

Documents

UA5000 Configuration Guide-PVM CLI(V100R017_08)